CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT

PROJECT MANUAL

Campus Expansion,
Louisiana Delta Community College,
Winnsboro, LA

FP&C PROJECT NO.: 19-647-21-01, F.19002366

SITE CODE: S28475 STATE BUILDING ID: 8-21-032

STATE OF LOUISIANA
JEFF LANDRY - GOVENOR

DIVISION OF ADMINISTRATION
TAYLOR BARRAS - COMMISIONER OF
ADMINISTRATION

OFFICE OF FACILITY PLANNING AND CONTROL

ROGER E. HUSSER, JR - DIRECTOR

ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NO.: 21-033

Date: MARCH 2024

 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT
PROJECT MANUAL

19-647-21-01, F.19002366
Campus Expansion, Louisiana Delta Community College, Winnsboro, LA

Winnsboro, Louisiana

ARCHITECT’S PROJECT #21-003

March 2024

TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 0 – PROCUREMENT & CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

SECTION – 01 PROJECT TITLE PAGE

02 TABLE OF CONTENTS
03 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
04 BID FORM
05 BID BOND
06 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
07 GENERAL CONDTIONS OF THE CONTRACT
08 OWNER - CONTRACTOR CONTRACT
09 ATTESTATION AFFIDAVIT
10 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
11 CHANGE ORDER
12 RECOMMENDATIONS OF ACCEPTANCE
13 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY FORM
14 AGENDA FOR ROOFING CONFERENCE
15 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
16 PRE-CLOSE OUT CONFERENCE
17 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
18 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ASSESSMENT
19 002513 PREBID MEETING
20 002600 PROCUREMENT SUBSTITUTION

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 011000 SUMMARY

012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
013000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT & COORDINATION

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1
 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013233 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014200 REFERENCES
015000 TEMPORARY FACILITES AND CONTROLS
016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
017300 EXECUTION
017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
& DISPOSAL
017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURE
017823 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE DATA
017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

DIVISION 2 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

SECTION 024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE

SECTION 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

DIVISION 4 - MASONRY

SECTION NOT USED

DIVISION 5 – METALS

SECTION 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS & COMPOSITES

SECTION 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY

064116 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL
CABINETS
066400 PLASTIC PANELING (FRP)

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

SECTION 070150.61 ELASTROMETRIC SILICONE ROOF COATING FOR

RESTORING AGED METAL ROOFING SYSTEMS
078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078446 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
079200 JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS

TABLE OF CONTENTS 2
SECTION 081000a METAL BI-FOLD DOOR
081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS (LAMINATED PLASTIC)
084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND
STOREFRONTS
087100 DOOR HARDWARE
087100A DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
088000 GLAZING

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES

SECTION 090561.13 MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL

092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092900 GYPSUM BOARD
093000 TILING
095100 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
096500 RESILIENT FLOORING
096500A MOISTURE BARRIER
096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
099000 PAINTING AND COATING
099600 HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

SECTION 101416 PLAQUES

101423 PANEL SIGNAGE
102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102213 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
102226 OPERABLE PARTITIONS
102600 RESILIENT PLASTIC CORNER GUARDS
102800 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
104413 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

SECTION NOT USED

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS

SECTION 122413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

123553.19 WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK
123623.13 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS
123661 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS 3
SECTION NOT USED

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

SECTION NOT USED

DIVISION 21 – FIRE PROTECTION

SECTION 211300 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

SECTION 220523 VALVES

220700 PIPE INSULATION
221100 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221119 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
221300 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
223436 ELECTRIC DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
224200 PLUMBING FIXTURES
224500 EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING

SECTION 230000 GENERAL PROVISIONS

230500 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
230713 DUCT INSULATION
231123 NATURAL GAS PIPING
232300 REFRIGERANT PIPING
233113 METAL DUCTS
233300 DUCT ACCESSORIES
233713 DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES
234320 AIR PURIFICATION SYSTEM
238130 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME AIR CONDITIONING –
HEAT RECOVERY
238138 SPLIT SYSTEM OUTSIDE AIR UNITS (HEAT PUMP)

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

SECTION 260000 GENERAL PROVISIONS

260500 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
260526 GROUNDING & BONDING
260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
 260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
262200 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS
262416 PANELBOARD
262726 WIRING DEVICES
262816 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
265119 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING
265619 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS

SECTION 271500 DATA AND PHONE WIRING

274116 INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 28 – TECHNOLOGY

SECTION 283111 FIRE ALARM

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

SECTION 310513 SOILS FOR EARTHWORK

310519.13 GEOTEXTILES FOR EARTHWORK
312213 ROUGH GRADING
312323 FILL
312500 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

SECTION 321123 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES

321313 CONCRETE PAVING
321623 SIDEWALKS
321723 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
321726 TACTILE WARNING SURFACING
329219 SEEDING
329223 SODDING

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

SECTION 334200 STORMWATER CONVEYANCE

TABLE OF CONTENTS 5
 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

Sealed bids will be received for the State of Louisiana by the Division of Administration and shall be directed to the Office of Facility
Planning and Control, 1201 North Third Street, Claiborne Office Building, Suite 7-160, Baton Rouge, Louisiana, 70802 or P.O. Box
94095, Baton Rouge, Louisiana, 70804-9095. The deadline for receipt of bids is 2:00 PM on Thursday, July 25, 2024, at which time
bids will be opened and read aloud in a public meeting in the Claiborne Office Building, Conference Room 1-145.

ANY PERSON REQUIRING SPECIAL ACCOMMODATIONS SHALL NOTIFY FACILITY PLANNING AND CONTROL OF
THE TYPE(S) OF ACCOMMODATION REQUIRED NOT LESS THAN SEVEN (7) DAYS BEFORE THE BID OPENING.

FOR: Campus Expansion

Louisiana Delta Community College
Winnsboro, Louisiana
PROJECT NUMBER: 19-647-21-01, F.19002366

Complete Bidding Documents for this project are available in electronic form. They may be obtained without charge and without
deposit from www.AEPlans.com. Printed copies are not available from the Designer but arrangements can be made to obtain them
through most reprographic firms. Plan holders are responsible for their own reproduction costs.

Questions about this procedure shall be directed to the Designer at:

Timothy M. Brandon Architect, APC

103 Cypress Street
West Monroe, LA 71291
Telephone: 318-340-1550
E-mail: Kade Brandon ([email protected])

All bids shall be accompanied by bid security in an amount of five percent (5.0%) of the sum of the base bid and all alternates. The
form of this security shall be as stated in the Instructions to Bidders included in the Bid Documents for this project.

The successful Bidder shall be required to furnish a Performance and Payment Bond written as described in the Instructions to Bidders
included in the Bid Documents for this project.

A PRE-BID CONFERENCE WILL BE HELD

at 1:00 PM on Thursday, July 11, 2024 at
Louisiana Delta Community College, Room 101, 2889 Highway 15, Winnsboro, LA 71295.

Bids shall be accepted from Contractors who are licensed under LA. R.S. 37:2150-2192 for the classification of Building
Construction. Bidder is required to comply with provisions and requirements of LA R.S. 38:2212(B)(5). No bid may be withdrawn
for a period of forty-five (45) days after receipt of bids, except under the provisions of LA. R.S. 38:2214.

The Owner reserves the right to reject any and all bids for just cause. In accordance with La. R.S. 38:2212(B)(1), the provisions and
requirements of this Section and those stated in the bidding documents shall not be waived by any entity.

When this project is financed either partially or entirely with State Bonds or financed in whole or in part by federal or other funds
which are not readily available at the time bids are received, the award of this Contract is contingent upon the granting of lines of
credit, or the sale of bonds by the Bond Commission or the availability of federal or other funds. The State shall incur no obligation to
the Contractor until the Contract Between Owner and Contractor is fully executed.

Facility Planning and Control is a participant in the Small Entrepreneurship (SE) Program (the Hudson Initiative) and the Veteran-
Owned and Service-Connected Disabled Veteran-Owned (LaVet) Small Entrepreneurships Program. Bidders are encouraged to
consider participation. Information is available from the Office of Facility Planning and Control or on its website at
https://www.doa.la.gov/doa/fpc/.

STATE OF LOUISIANA
DIVISION OF ADMINISTRATION
FACILITY PLANNING AND CONTROL
ROGER E. HUSSER, JR., DIRECTOR
 LOUISIANA UNIFORM PUBLIC WORK BID FORM
TO: State of Louisiana BID FOR: Campus Expansion, Louisiana Delta
Office of Facility Planning and Control Community College, Winnsboro, LA
1201 Nth 3rd Street Claiborne Office Bld’g. FP&C PROJECT NO.: 19-647-21-01, F.19002366
Suite 7-160 Baton Rouge, Louisiana 70802 Site Code: S28475 State Building ID: 8-21-032
P.O Box 94095 Baton Rouge, Louisiana 70804- Architect Project Number: 21-033
9095

The undersigned bidder hereby declares and represents that she/he: a) has carefully examined and understands the Bidding
Documents, b) has not received, relied on, or based his bid on any verbal instructions contrary to the Bidding Documents or any
addenda, c) has personally inspected and is familiar with the project site, and hereby proposes to provide all labor, materials, tools,
appliances and facilities as required to perform, in a workmanlike manner, all work and services for the construction and completion
of the referenced project, all in strict accordance with the Bidding Documents prepared by: TBA Studio and dated: 4/15/24
(Owner to provide name of entity preparing bidding documents.)

Bidders must acknowledge all addenda. The Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following ADDENDA: (Enter the number the
Designer has assigned to each of the addenda that the Bidder is acknowledging) __________________________________________ .

TOTAL BASE BID: For all work required by the Bidding Documents (including any and all unit prices designated “Base Bid”
* but not alternates) the sum of:
Dollars ($ )

ALTERNATES: For any and all work required by the Bidding Documents for Alternates including any and all unit prices
designated as alternates in the unit price description.

Alternate No. 1 (ADD Additional SIM Med Lab Space, Exam Room, offices, Surg Room, Storage, Electrical Shop and Ag Arts Lab) for the lump sum of:
Dollars ($ )

Alternate No. 2 (ADD Additional Office spaces with restrooms, kitchenette, boardroom and computer lab) for the lump sum of:
Dollars ($ )

Alternate No. 3 (ADD Moveable partition in multipurpose room) for the lump sum of:
Dollars ($ )

NAME OF BIDDER:
ADDRESS OF BIDDER:

LOUISIANA CONTRACTOR’S LICENSE NUMBER:

NAME OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER:
TITLE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER:

SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER **:

DATE: _______________________

THE FOLLOWING ITEMS ARE TO BE INCLUDED WITH THE SUBMISSION OF THIS LOUISIANA
UNIFORM PUBLIC WORK BID FORM:

* The Unit Price Form shall be used if the contract includes unit prices. Otherwise it is not required and need not be included
with the form. The number of unit prices that may be included is not limited and additional sheets may be included if needed.

** A CORPORATE RESOLUTION OR WRITTEN EVIDENCE of the authority of the person signing the bid for the public
work as prescribed by LA R.S. 38:2212(B)(5).
BID SECURITY in the form of a bid bond, certified check or cashier’s check as prescribed by LA R.S. 38:2218(A) attached to and
made a part of this bid
 BID BOND

Date:
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:

That of , as
Principal, and , as Surety, are held
and firmly bound unto the LCTCS Facilities Corporation (Obligee), in the full and just sum of five (5%)
percent of the total amount of this proposal, including all alternates, lawful money of the United States, for
payment of which sum, well and truly be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators,
successors and assigns, jointly and severally firmly by these presents.

Surety represents that it is listed on the current U. S. Department of the Treasury Financial
Management Service list of approved bonding companies as approved for an amount equal to or greater that
the amount for which it obligates itself in this instrument or that it is a Louisiana domiciled insurance
company with at least an A - rating in the latest printing of the A. M. Best's Key Rating Guide. If surety
qualifies by virtue of its Best's listing, the Bond amount may not exceed ten percent of policyholders' surplus
as shown in the latest A. M. Best's Key Rating Guide.

Surety further represents that it is licensed to do business in the State of Louisiana and that this Bond
is signed by surety's agent or attorney-in-fact. This Bid Bond is accompanied by appropriate power of
attorney.

THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that, whereas said Principal is herewith
submitting its proposal to the Obligee on a Contract for:

____________ Campus Expansion, Louisiana Delta Community College, Winnsboro, LA_______________

NOW, THEREFORE, if the said Contract be awarded to the Principal and the Principal shall, within
such time as may be specified, enter into the Contract in writing and give a good and sufficient bond to secure
the performance of the terms and conditions of the Contract with surety acceptable to the Obligee, then this
obligation shall be void; otherwise this obligation shall become due and payable.

PRINCIPAL (BIDDER) SURETY

BY: BY:
AUTHORIZED OFFICER-OWNER-PARTNER AGENT OR ATTORNEY-IN-FACT(SEAL)
 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
These Supplementary Conditions modify, change, delete from or add to the General Conditions
of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, 2017 Edition. Where any Article of the General
Conditions is modified or any Section, Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause thereof is modified or deleted
by these supplements, the unaltered provisions of that Section, Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or
Clause shall remain in effect.

Articles, Sections, Paragraphs, Subparagraphs or Clauses modified or deleted have the same
numerical designation as those occurring in the General Conditions.

ARTICLE 1

GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS

1.1.1. The Contract Documents

In Section 1.1.1 delete the third sentence, and add the following sentence:
The Contract Documents shall include the Bid Documents as listed in the Instructions to
Bidders and any modifications made thereto by addenda.

1.1.8 Initial Decision Maker

Delete all after the words, “shall not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor”.

1.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER

INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE [REFER TO La R.S. 38:2317]

1.5.1 Delete the first sentence of the paragraph.

1.5.1 In the third sentence: delete the remainder after the word “publication”.

1.7 DIGITAL DATA USE AND TRANSMISSION

In the first sentence after the words, “in digital form” delete “. The parties will use AIA
Document E203 2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit”.

1.8 BUILDING INFORMATION MODELS USE AND RELIANCE

Delete Section 1.8.

ARTICLE 2

OWNER

2.2 EVIDENCE OF THE OWNER’S FINANCIAL ARRANGEMENTS

Delete Section 2.2.

July 2021 SC 1
2.3 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER

2.3.1 In the first sentence, delete: all before “the Owner shall secure…”

Delete Section 2.3.2 and substitute the following:

2.3.2 The term Architect, when used in the Contract Documents, shall mean the prime
Designer (Architect, Engineer, or Landscape Architect), or his authorized representative,
lawfully licensed to practice architecture, engineering, or landscape architecture in the
State of Louisiana, identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the
Contract Documents as if singular in number.

2.3.3 Delete the words: “to whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and”.

ARTICLE 3

CONTRACTOR

3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS

3.4.2 Delete Section 3.4.2.

Delete Section 3.4.3 and substitute with the following:

3.4.3 Contractor and its employees, officers, agents, representatives, and Subcontractors shall
conduct themselves in an appropriate and professional manner, in accordance with the
Owner’s requirements, at all times while working on the Project. Any such individual
who behaves in an inappropriate manner or who engages in the use of inappropriate
language or conduct while on Owner’s property, as determined by the Owner, shall be
removed from the Project at the Owner’s request. Such individual shall not be permitted
to return without the written permission of the Owner. The Owner shall not be
responsible or liable to Contractor or any Subcontractor for any additional costs,
expenses, losses, claims or damages incurred by Contractor or its Subcontractor as a
result of the removal of an individual from the Owner’s property pursuant to this Section.
The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly
skilled in tasks assigned to them.

3.5 WARRANTY

3.5.2 Replace reference to “Section 9.8.4” with “Section 9.8.6”.

3.7 PERMITS, FEES, NOTICES, AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS (La R.S. 40:1724[A])

3.7.1 Delete Section 3.7.1.

3.7.2 In Section 3.7.2, replace the word “public” with the word “State”.

Delete Section 3.7.5 and substitute the following:

July 2021 SC 2
 3.7.5 If, during the course of the Work, the Contractor discovers human remains, unmarked
burial or archaeological sites, burial artifacts, or wetlands, which are not indicated in the
Contract Documents, the Contractor shall follow all procedures mandated by State and
Federal law, including but not limited to La R.S. 8:671 et seq., the Office of Coastal
Protection and Restoration, and Sections 401 & 404 of the Federal Clean Water Act.
Request for adjustment of the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence
of such remains or features shall be submitted in writing to the Owner pursuant to the
Contract Documents.

3.8 ALLOWANCES

Delete Sections 3.8.1, 3.8.2, and 3.8.3 in their entirety and add the following new
Section 3.8.1:

3.8.1 Allowances shall not be made on any of the Work.

3.9 SUPERINTENDENT

3.9.1 Add the following to the end of the paragraph:

Important communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other communications shall be
similarly confirmed on written request in each case.

3.10 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION AND SUBMITTAL SCHEDULES

3.10.1 Add the following: For projects with a contract sum greater than $1,000,000.00, the
Contractor shall include with the schedule, for the Owner’s and Architect’s information,
a network analysis to identify those tasks which are on the critical path, i.e., where any
delay in the completion of these tasks will lengthen the project timescale, unless action
is taken. A revised schedule shall be submitted with each Application and Certificate for
Payment. No payment shall be made until this schedule is received.

3.10.3 In the first sentence, delete the word “general”.

After the first sentence, add the following:

If the Work is not on schedule, as determined by the Architect, and the Contractor fails
to take action to bring the Work on schedule, then the Contractor shall be deemed in
default under this Contract and the progress of the Work shall be deemed unsatisfactory.
Such default may be considered grounds for termination by the Owner for cause in
accordance with Section 14.2.

Add the following Sections:

3.10.4 Add the following: Submittal by the contractor of a schedule or other documentation
showing a completion date for his Work prior to the completion date stated in the
contract shall not impose any obligation or responsibility on the Owner or Architect for
the earlier completion date.

3.10.5 In the event the Owner employs a commissioning consultant, the Contractor shall
cooperate fully in the commissioning process and shall require all subcontractors and

July 2021 SC 3
 others under his control to cooperate. The purpose of such services shall be to ensure that
all systems perform correctly and interactively according to the provisions of the Contract
Documents.

3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE

Add the following: This requirement is of the essence of the contract. The Architect shall
determine the value of these documents and this amount shall not be approved for payment to the
Contractor until all of the listed documents are delivered to the Architect in good order,
completely marked with field changes and otherwise complete in all aspects.

ARTICLE 4

ARCHITECT

4.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT

4.2.1 In the first sentence, delete the phrase: “the date the Architect issues the final
Certificate for Payment” and replace with the phrase “final payment is due, and with the
Owner’s concurrence, from time to time during the one year period for correction of
Work described in Section 12.2.”

4.2.2 In the first sentence, after the phrase: “become generally familiar with”; insert the
following: “and to keep the Owner informed about”.

In the first sentence, after the phrase “portion of the Work completed”, insert the
following: “to endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the
Work,”

4.2.4 In the first sentence, delete all after “The Owner and Contractor”, and add the following
“may communicate directly with each other, when deemed necessary by the Owner, and
the Owner will notify the Architect of any decision.”

4.2.10 Add the following sentence to the end of Section 4.2.10: There shall be no restriction on
the Owner having a Representative.

4.2.11 Add the following sentence to the end of Section 4.2.11:

If no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretation required of the
Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Section 4.2, then delay shall not be
recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish such interpretation until 15
days after written request is made for them.

4.2.14 Insert the following sentence between the second and third sentences of Section 4.2.14:

If no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretation required of the
Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Section 4.2, then delay shall not be
recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish such interpretation until 15
days after written request is made for them.

July 2021 SC 4
 ARTICLE 5

SUBCONTRACTORS

5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE

WORK

Delete Section 5.2.1, and substitute the following:

5.2.1 Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall furnish at the
Pre-Construction Conference, to the Owner and the Architect, in writing, the names of
the persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment
fabricated to a special design) proposed for each of the principal portions of the Work.
No Contractor payments shall be made until this information is received.

Delete Section 5.2.2, and substitute the following:

5.2.2 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for selection and performance of all
subcontractors. The Contractor shall not be entitled to claims for additional time and/or
an increase in the contract sum due to a problem with performance or nonperformance of
a subcontractor.

Delete Sections 5.2.3 and 5.2.4 and substitute the following:

5.2.3 The Contractor shall notify the Architect and the Owner when a subcontractor is to be
changed and substituted with another subcontractor.

5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS

Delete Sections 5.4, 5.4.1, 5.4.2 and 5.4.3

ARTICLE 7

CHANGES IN THE WORK

7.1 GENERAL

Add the following Sections:

7.1.4 As part of the pre-construction conference submittals, the Contractor shall submit the
following prior to the Contractor’s initial request for payment:

7.1.4.1 Fixed job site overhead cost itemized with documentation to support daily rates.

7.1.4.2 Bond Premium Rate with supporting information from the General Contractor’s
carrier.

July 2021 SC 5
 7.1.4.3 Labor Burden by trade for both Subcontractors and General Contractor. The
Labor Burden shall be supported by the Worker’s Compensation and Employer’s
Liability Insurance Policy Information Page. Provide for all trades.

7.1.4.4 Internal Rate Charges for all significant company owned equipment.

7.1.5 If the General Contractor fails to submit the aforementioned documentation as part of the
pre-construction submittals, then pay applications shall not be processed until such time
as the Owner receives this information.

7.2 CHANGE ORDERS

Delete Section 7.2.1, and substitute the following Sections:

7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the
Owner, the Architect, and the Contractor issued after execution of the Contract,
authorizing a change in the Work and/or an adjustment in the Contract Sum and/or the
Contract Time. The Contract Sum and the Contract Time may be changed only by
Change Order. A Change Order signed by the Contractor indicates his agreement
therewith, including the adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. Any
reservation of rights, stipulation, or other modification made on the change order by the
contractor shall have no effect.

7.2.2 “Cost of the Work” for the purpose of Change Orders shall be the eligible costs required
to be incurred in performance of the Work and paid by the Contractor and Subcontractors
which eligible costs shall be limited to:

7.2.2.1 Actual wages paid directly to labor personnel, with a labor burden markup
exclusively limited to applicable payroll taxes, worker’s compensation insurance,
unemployment compensation, and social security taxes for those labor personnel
performing the Work. Wages shall be the basic hourly labor rate paid an
employee exclusive of fringe benefits or other employee costs. The labor burden
percentage for the “Cost of the Work” is limited to categories listed herein.
Employer-provided health insurance, fringe benefits, employee training (whether
a requirement of employment or not), vacation pay, etc., are examples of
ineligible labor burden costs which shall not be included, as these costs are
already compensated by the Overhead and Profit markup.

Supervision shall not be included as a line item in the “Cost of the Work”, except
when the change results in a documented delay in the critical path, as described
in Section 7.2.7.

7.2.2.2 Cost of all materials and supplies necessary and required to perform the Work,
identifying each item and its individual cost, including taxes. Incidental
consumables are not eligible costs and shall not be included.

7.2.2.3 Cost of each necessary piece of machinery and equipment required to perform
the Work, identifying each item and its individual cost, including taxes.
Incidental small tools of a specific trade (i.e., shovels, saws, hammers, air
compressors, etc.,) and general use vehicles, such as pickup trucks even for

July 2021 SC 6
 moving items around the site, fuel for these general use vehicles, travel, lodging,
and/or meals are not eligible and shall not be included.

7.2.2.4 Eligible Insurance costs shall be limited to documented increases in “Builder’s

Risk” insurance premium / costs only. Commercial General Liability,
Automobile Liability, and all other required insurances, where referenced in the
Contract shall be considered part of normal overhead. These costs are already
compensated by the Overhead and Profit markup.

7.2.2.5 Cost for the General Contractor Performance and Payment Bond premium, where
the documented cost of the premiums have been increased due to the Change
Order.

7.2.3 Overhead and Profit - The Contractor and Subcontractor shall be due home office fixed
overhead and profits on the Cost of the Work, but shall not exceed a total of 16% of the
direct cost of any portion of Work.

The credit to the Owner resulting from a change in the Work shall be the sum of those
items above, including overhead and profit. Where a change results in both credits to the
Owner and extras to the Contractor for related items, overhead and profit shall be
computed for credits to the Owner and extras to the Contractor. The Owner shall receive
full credit for the computed overhead and profit on credit change order items.

7.2.4 The cost to the Owner resulting from a change in the Work shall be the sum of: Cost of
the Work (as defined at Section 7.2.2) and Overhead and Profit (as defined at Section
7.2.3), and shall be computed as follows:

7.2.4.1 When all of the Work is General Contractor Work; 8% markup on the Cost of the
Work.

7.2.4.2 When the Work is all Subcontract Work; 8% markup on the Cost of the Work for
Subcontractor’s Overhead and Profit, plus 8% markup on the Cost of the Work,
not including the Subcontractor’s Overhead and Profit markup, for General
Contractor’s Overhead and Profit.

7.2.4.3 When the Work is a combination of General Contractor Work and Subcontract
Work; that portion of the direct cost that is General Contract Work shall be
computed per Section 7.2.4.1 and that portion of the direct cost that is
Subcontract Work shall be computed per Section 7.2.4.2.

Premiums for the General Contractor’s bond may be included, but after the
markup is added to the Cost of the Work.
Premiums for the Subcontractor’s Bond shall not be included.

7.2.4.4 Subcontract cost shall consist of the items in Section 7.2.2 above plus Overhead
and Profit as defined in Section 7.2.3.

7.2.5 Before a Change Order is prepared, the Contractor shall prepare and deliver to the
Architect the following information concerning the Cost of the Work, not subject to
waiver, within a reasonable time after being notified to prepare said Change Order:

July 2021 SC 7
 A detailed, itemized list of labor, material and equipment costs for the General
Contractor’s Work including quantities and unit costs for each item of labor, material
and equipment.

An itemized list of labor, material and equipment costs for each Subcontractor’s and/or
Sub-Subcontractor’s Work including quantities and unit costs for each item of labor,
material and equipment.

7.2.6 After a Change Order has been approved, no future requests for extensions of time or
additional cost shall be considered for that Change Order.

7.2.7 Extended fixed job-site costs are indirect costs that are necessary to support the work in
the field. Examples of fixed job-site costs are field office rental, salaries of field office
staff, field office utilities, and telephone.

Extended fixed job-site costs or equitable adjustment may be included in a Change Order
due to a delay in the critical path, with the exception of weather related delays. In the
event of a delay in the critical path, the Contractor shall submit all changes or
adjustments to the Contract Time within twenty-one (21) days of the event giving rise to
the delay. The Contractor shall submit documentation and justification for the
adjustment by performing a critical path analysis of its most recent schedule in use prior
to the change, which shows an extension in critical path activities.

The Contractor shall notify the Architect in writing that the Contractor is making a claim
for extended fixed job-site overhead as required by Section 15.1.2. The Contractor shall
provide proof that the Contractor is unable to mitigate financial damages through
Alternate Work within this Contract or replacement work. “Replacement Work” is that
work which the Contractor is obligated to perform under any construction contract
separate from this Contract. Reasonable proof shall be required by the Architect that the
delays affected the Completion Date.

7.2.8 “Cost of the Work” whether General Contractor cost or Subcontractor cost shall not
apply to the following:

7.2.8.1 Salaries or other compensation of the Contractor’s personnel at the Contractor’s

principal office and branch offices.

7.2.8.2 Any part of the Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on the
Contractor’s capital employed for the Work.

7.2.8.3 Overhead and general expenses of any kind or the cost of any item not
specifically and expressly included above in Cost of the Work.

7.2.8.4 Cost of supervision refer to section 7.2.2.1, with exception as provided in Section
7.2.7.

7.2.9 When applicable as provided by the Contract, the cost to Owner for Change Orders
shall be determined by quantities and unit prices. The quantity of any item shall be as

July 2021 SC 8
 submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Architect. Unit prices shall cover cost
of Material, Labor, Equipment, Overhead and Profit.

7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES

7.3.3 In the first sentence after “following methods” insert: “, but not to exceed a specified
amount”.

7.3.4 From .1 of the list, delete all after “Costs of labor, including” and substitute the following
“social security, old age and employment insurance, applicable payroll taxes, and
workers’ compensation insurance;”

Delete the following from .4 of the list: “permit fees,”

Delete Section 7.3.9 and substitute the following:

7.3.9 Pending final determination of the total costs of a Construction Change Directive to the
Owner, amounts not in dispute for such changes in the Work shall be included in
Applications for Payment accompanied by a Change Order indicating the parties’
agreement with part or all of such costs.

ARTICLE 8

TIME

8.1 DEFINITIONS

Add the following:

8.1.5 The Contract Time shall not be changed by the submission of a schedule that shows an
early completion date unless specifically authorized by change order.

8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION

Add to Section 8.2.1 the following:

Completion of the Work must be within the Time for Completion stated in the Agreement,
subject to such extensions as may be granted under Section 8.3. The Contractor agrees to
commence Work not later than fourteen (14) days after the transmittal date of Written Notice
to Proceed from the Owner and to substantially complete the project within the time stated in the
Contract. The Owner will suffer financial loss if the project is not substantially complete in the
time set forth in the Contract Documents. The Contractor and the Contractor’s Surety shall be
liable for and shall pay to the Owner the sum stated in the Contract Documents as fixed, agreed
and liquidated damages for each consecutive calendar day (Saturdays, Sundays and holidays
included) of delay until the Work is substantially complete. The Owner shall be entitled to the
sum stated in the Contract Documents. Such Liquidated Damages shall be withheld by the
Owner from the amounts due the Contractor for progress payments.

Delete Section 8.2.2.

July 2021 SC 9
8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME

8.3.1 In the first sentence after the words “Owner pending” delete the words “mediation and
binding dispute resolution” and add the word “litigation”, and delete the last word
“determine” and add the following: “recommend, subject to Owner’s approval of
Change Order. If the claim is not made within the limits of Article 15, all rights for
future claims for that month are waived.”

ARTICLE 9

PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

9.1 CONTRACT SUM

Delete Section 9.1.2.

Delete Section 9.2 and substitute the following:

9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

At the Pre-Construction Conference, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner and the
Architect a Schedule of Values prepared as follows:

9.2.1 The attached Schedule of Values Format shall be used. If applicable, the cost of Work
for each section listed under each division, shall be given. The cost for each section shall
include Labor, Materials, Overhead and Profit.

9.2.2 The Total of all items shall equal the Total Contract Sum. This schedule, when approved
by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for the Contractor’s Applications for Payment
and it may be used for determining the cost of the Work in deductive change orders,
when a specific item of Work listed on the Schedule of Values is to be removed. Once
the Schedule of Values is submitted at the Pre-Construction Conference, the schedule
shall not be modified without approval from the Owner and Architect.

9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

Delete Sections 9.3.1, 9.3.1.1, and 9.3.1.2 and substitute the following:

9.3.1 Monthly, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a Facility Planning and Control –
Application and Certification for Payment form, supported by any additional data
substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment as the Owner or the Architect may
require. Application for Payment shall be submitted on or about the first of each month
for the value of labor and materials incorporated into the Work and of materials, suitably
stored, at the site as of the twenty-fifth day of the preceding month, less normal retainage
as follows, per La R.S. 38:2248:

9.3.1.1 Projects with Contract price up to $500,000.00 – 10% of the Contract price.

9.3.1.2 Projects with Contract price of $500,000.00, or more – 5% of the Contract price.

July 2021 SC 10
 9.3.1.3 No payment shall be made until the revised schedule required by Section 3.10.1
is received.

9.3.1.4 The normal retainage shall not be due the Contractor until after substantial
completion and expiration of the forty-five day lien period and submission to the
Architect of a clear lien certificate, consent of surety, and invoice for retainage.

Delete Section 9.3.2 and substitute the following:

9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on
account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for
subsequent incorporation in the Work. Payments for materials or equipment stored on
the site shall be conditioned upon submission by the Contractor of bills of sale or such
other procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner’s title to such
materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner’s interest, including applicable
insurance.

9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION

Section 9.5.1.7: Delete the word “repeated”.

Delete Section 9.5.4.

9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS

Delete Section 9.6.1 and substitute the following:

9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment
within twenty days except for projects funded fully or in part by a Federal reimbursement
program. For such projects the Owner will make payment in a timely manner consistent
with reimbursement.

9.6.2 Delete the phrase: “no later than seven days” from the first sentence.

After the end of the second sentence, add the following:

La R.S. 9:2784 (A) and (C) require a Contractor or Subcontractor to make payment due
to each Subcontractor and supplier within fourteen (14) consecutive days of the receipt of
payment from the Owner. If not paid, a penalty in the amount of ½ of 1% per day is due,
up to a maximum of 15% from the expiration date until paid. The contractor or
subcontractor, whichever is applicable, is solely responsible for payment of a penalty.

9.6.4 Delete the first two sentences of Section 9.6.4 and add the following to the end of
the Section:

Pursuant to La. R.S. 38:2242 and La. R.S. 38:2242.2, when the Owner receives any claim
of nonpayment arising out of the Contract, the Owner shall deduct 125% of such claim
from the Contract Sum. The Contractor, or any interested party, may deposit security, in
accordance with La. R.S. 38:2242.2, guaranteeing payment of the claim with the recorder

July 2021 SC 11
 of mortgages of the parish where the Work has been done. When the Owner receives
original proof of such guarantee from the recorder of mortgages, the claim deduction will
be added back to the Contract Sum.

Delete Section 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT.

Delete Section 9.8 and substitute the following:

9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work is
sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can
occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. The Architect shall determine if the
project is substantially complete in accordance with this Section.

9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work is Substantially Complete, the Contractor
shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed
or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter
the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.

9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s list, the Architect shall make an inspection to determine
whether the Work is substantially complete. A prerequisite to the Work being considered
as substantially complete is the Owner’s receipt of the executed Roofing Contractor’s and
Roofing Manufacturer’s guarantees, where roofing Work is part of the Contract. Prior to
inspection by the Architect, the Contractor shall notify the Architect that the project is
ready for inspection by the State Fire Marshal’s office. If the Architect’s inspection
discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor’s list, which is not
sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can
occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before the Work can
be considered as Substantially Complete, complete or correct such item upon notification
by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another
inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion.

9.8.4 When the Architect determines that the project is Substantially Complete, he shall
prepare a punch list of exceptions and the dollar value related thereto. The monetary
value assigned to this list will be the sum of the cost estimate for each particular item of
Work the Architect develops based on the mobilization, labor, material and equipment
costs of correcting the item and shall be retained from the monies owed the contractor,
above and beyond the standard lien retainage. The cost of these items shall be prepared
in the same format as the schedule of values. At the end of the forty-five day lien period
payment shall be approved for all punch list items completed up to that time. After that
payment, none of the remaining funds shall be due the contractor until all punch list items
are completed and are accepted by the Architect. If the dollar value of the punch list
exceeds the amount of funds, less the retainage amount, in the remaining balance of the
Contract, then the Project shall not be considered as substantially complete. If funds
remaining are less than that required to complete the Work, the Contractor shall pay the
difference.

July 2021 SC 12
 9.8.5 When the preparation of the punch list is complete the Architect shall prepare a
Recommendation of Acceptance incorporating the punch list and submit it to the Owner.
Upon approval of the Recommendation of Acceptance, the Owner may issue a Notice of
Acceptance of Building Contract which shall establish the Date of Substantial
Completion. The Contractor shall record the Notice of Acceptance with the Clerk of
Court in the Parish in which the Work has been performed. If the Notice of Acceptance
has not been recorded seven (7) days after issuance, the Owner may record the
Acceptance at the Contractor’s expense. All additive change orders must be processed
before issuance of the Recommendation of Acceptance. The Owner shall not be
responsible for payment for any Work associated with change orders that is not
incorporated into the contract at the time of the Recommendation of Acceptance.

9.8.6 Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of
Acceptance of the Work unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the Owner and
Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the Owner and Contractor, security,
maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work not covered by the punch list and
insurance shall become the Owner’s responsibility on the Date of Substantial
Completion.

9.8.7 If all punch list items have not been completed by the end of the forty-five (45) day lien
period, through no fault of the Architect or Owner, the Owner may hold the Contractor
in default. If the Owner finds the Contractor is in default, the Surety shall be notified. If
within forty-five (45) days after notification, the Surety has not completed the punch list,
through no fault of the Architect or Owner, the Owner may, at his option, contract to
have the balance of the Work completed and pay for such Work with the unpaid funds
remaining in the Contract sum. Finding the Contractor in default shall constitute a reason
for disqualification of the Contractor from bidding on future state contracts. If the surety
fails to complete the punch list within the stipulated time period, the Owner may not
accept bonds submitted, in the future, by the surety.

9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE

Delete Section 9.9.1 and substitute the following:

9.9.1 Partial Occupancy is that stage in the progress of the Work when a designated portion of
the Work is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so the
Owner can occupy or utilize the designated portion of the Work for its intended use. The
Owner may occupy or use any substantially completed portion of the Work so designated
by separate agreement with the Contractor and authorized by public authorities having
jurisdiction over the Work. Such occupancy or use may commence provided the Owner
and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for
payments, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and
insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work
and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the
Contractor considers the designated portion substantially complete the Contractor shall
prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the
Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld.

9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT

July 2021 SC 13
 Delete Section 9.10.4 and replace with the following:

9.10.4 The making of final payment shall not constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner for the
following:

9.10.4.1 Claims, security interests, or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and
unsettled;

9.10.4.2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents
irrespective of when such failure is discovered;

9.10.4.3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents; or

9.10.4.4 audits performed by the Owner, after final payment.

ARTICLE 10

PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

10.2.2 In the first sentence, between the words: “bearing on” and “safety”, add the words: “the
health and,”

10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

10.3.1 In the second sentence after (PCB) add: “or lead”.

10.3.2 After the first sentence, delete all remaining sentences.

Add at the end: “The Contract time shall be extended appropriately.”

Delete Section 10.4 and substitute the following:

10.4 EMERGENCIES
In an emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall notify
the Owner and Architect immediately of the emergency, simultaneously acting at his
discretion to prevent damage, injury or loss. Any additional compensation or extension
of time claimed by the Contractor on account of emergency Work shall be determined as
provided in Article 15 and Article 7.

ARTICLE 11

INSURANCE AND BONDS

AIA A101 – 2017 Exhibit A is not a part of these documents. Delete all of Sections 11.1, 11.2, 11.3,
11.4, and 11.5, and substitute the following:

July 2021 SC 14
 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR
NEW CONSTRUCTION, ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS

11.1 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE

The Contractor shall purchase and maintain without interruption for the duration of the contract
insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damages to property which may arise from or
in connection with the performance of the Work hereunder by the Contractor, its agents,
representatives, employees or subcontractors. The duration of the contract shall be from the
inception of the contract until the date of final payment.

11.2 MINIMUM SCOPE AND LIMITS OF INSURANCE

11.2.1 Worker’s Compensation

Worker’s Compensation insurance shall be in compliance with the Worker’s Compensa-

tion law of the Contractor’s headquarters. Employers Liability is included with a
minimum limit of $1,000,000 per accident/per disease/per employee. If Work is to be
performed over water and involves maritime exposure, applicable LHWCA, Jones Act or
other maritime law coverage shall be included. A.M. Best’s insurance company rating
requirement may be waived for Worker’s compensation coverage only.

11.2.2 Commercial General Liability

Commercial General Liability insurance, including Personal and Advertising Injury

Liability and Products and Completed Operations Liability, shall have a minimum limit
per occurrence based on the project value. The Insurance Services Office (ISO)
Commercial General Liability occurrence coverage form CG 00 01 (current form
approved for use in Louisiana), or equivalent, is to be used in the policy. Claims-made
form is unacceptable.

The aggregate loss limit must apply to each project. ISO form CG 25 03 (current form
approved for use in Louisiana), or equivalent, shall also be submitted. The State project
number, including part number, and project name shall be included on this endorsement.

COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (CSL) PER OCCURRENCE

Projects over
Type of Projects $1,000,000 up to Projects over
Construction up to $1,000,000 _$10,000,000__ $10,000,000

New Buildings:
Each Occurrence
Minimum Limit $1,000,000 $2,000,000 $4,000,000

Per Project Aggregate $2,000,000 $4,000,000 $8,000,000

Renovations: The building(s) value for the Project is $7,528,979.00_.

Each Occurrence
Minimum Limit $1,000,000** $2,000,000** $4,000,000**

July 2021 SC 15
 Per Project Aggregate 2 times per 2 times per 2 times per
occur limit** occur limit** occur limit**

**While the minimum Combined Single Limit of $1,000,000 is required for any
renovation, the limit is calculated by taking 10% of the building value and rounding it to
the nearest $1,000,000 to get the insurance limit. Example: Renovation on a
$33,000,000 building would have a calculated $3,000,000 combined single limit of
coverage (33,000,000 times .10 = 3,300,000 and then rounding down to $3,000,000). If
the calculated limit is less than the minimum limit listed in the above chart, then the
amount needed is the minimum listed in the chart. Maximum per occurrence limit
required is $10,000,000 regardless of building value. The per project aggregate limit is
then calculated as twice the per occurrence limit.

11.2.3 Automobile Liability

Automobile Liability Insurance shall have a minimum combined single limit per
occurrence of $1,000,000. ISO form number CA 00 01 (current form approved for use in
Louisiana), or equivalent, is to be used in the policy. This insurance shall include third-
party bodily injury and property damage liability for owned, hired and non-owned
automobiles.

11.2.4 Excess Umbrella

Excess Umbrella Insurance may be used to meet the minimum requirements for General
Liability and Automobile Liability only.

11.2.5 Builder’s Risk

11.2.5.1 Builder’s Risk Insurance shall be in an amount equal to the amount of the
construction contract including any amendments and shall be upon the entire
Work included in the contract. The policy shall provide coverage equivalent to
the ISO form number CP 10 20, Broad Form Causes of Loss (extended, if
necessary, to include the perils of wind, earthquake, collapse,
vandalism/malicious mischief, and theft, including theft of materials whether or
not attached to any structure). The policy must include architects’ and
engineers’ fees necessary to provide plans, specifications and supervision of
Work for the repair and/or replacement of property damage caused by a
covered peril, not to exceed 10% of the cost of the repair and/or replacement.

11.2.5.2 Flood coverage shall be provided by the Contractor on the first floor and below
for all projects, except as otherwise noted. The builder’s risk insurance policy,
sub-limit for flood coverage shall not be less than ten percent (10%) of the total
contract cost per occurrence. If flood is purchased as a separate policy, the
limit shall be ten percent (10%) of the total contract cost per occurrence (with a
max of $500,000 if NFIP). Coverage for roofing projects shall not require
flood coverage.

11.2.5.3 A Specialty Contractor may provide an installation floater in lieu of a Builder’s

Risk policy, with the similar coverage as the Builder’s Risk policy, upon the

July 2021 SC 16
 system to be installed in an amount equal to the amount of the contract
including any amendments. Flood coverage is not required.

11.2.5.4 The policy must include coverage for the Owner, Contractor and any
subcontractors as their interests may appear.

11.2.6 Pollution Liability (required when asbestos or other hazardous material abatement is
included in the contract)

Pollution Liability insurance, including gradual release as well as sudden and accidental,
shall have a minimum limit of not less than $1,000,000 per claim. A claims-made form
will be acceptable. A policy period inception date of no later than the first day of
anticipated Work under this contract and an expiration date of no earlier than 30 days
after anticipated completion of all Work under the contract shall be provided. There shall
be an extended reporting period of at least 24 months, with full reinstatement of limits,
from the expiration date of the policy if the policy is not renewed. The policy shall not
be cancelled for any reason, except non-payment of premium.

11.2.7 Deductibles and Self-Insured Retentions

Any deductibles or self-insured retentions must be declared to and accepted by the

Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for all deductibles and self-insured
retentions.

11.3 OTHER INSURANCE PROVISIONS

11.3.1 The policies are to contain, or be endorsed to contain, the following provisions:

11.3.1.1 Worker’s Compensation and Employers Liability Coverage

11.3.1.1.1 To the fullest allowed by law, the insurer shall agree to waive all
rights of subrogation against the Owner, its officers, agents,
employees and volunteers for losses arising from Work performed
by the Contractor for the Owner.

11.3.1.2 Commercial General Liability Coverage

11.3.1.2.1 The Owner, its officers, agents, employees and volunteers are to be
added as additional insureds as respects liability arising out of
activities performed by or on behalf of the Contractor; products and
completed operations of the Contractor, premises owned, occupied
or used by the Contractor. ISO Form CG 20 10 (for ongoing work)
AND CG 20 37 (for completed work) (current forms approved for
use in Louisiana), or equivalent, are to be used.

11.3.1.2.2 The Contractor’s insurance shall be primary as respects the Owner,

its officers, agents, employees and volunteers for any and all losses
that occur under the contract. The coverage shall contain no special
limitations on the scope of protection afforded to the Owner, its
officers, officials, employees or volunteers. Any insurance or self-

July 2021 SC 17
 insurance maintained by the Owner shall be excess and non-
contributory of the Contractor’s insurance.

11.3.1.3 Builder’s Risk

The policy must include an endorsement providing the following:

In the event of a disagreement regarding a loss covered by this policy, which

may also be covered by a State of Louisiana self-insurance or commercial
property policy through the Office of Risk Management (ORM), Contractor and
its insurer agree to follow the following procedure to establish coverage and/or
the amount of loss:

Any party to a loss may make written demand for an appraisal of the matter in
disagreement. Within 20 days of receipt of written demand, the Contractor’s
insurer and either ORM or its commercial insurance company shall each select a
competent and impartial appraiser and notify the other of the appraiser selected.
The two appraisers shall select a competent and impartial umpire. The
appraisers shall then identify the policy or policies under which the loss is
insured and, if necessary, state separately the value of the property and the
amount of the loss that must be borne by each policy. If the two appraisers fail
to agree, they shall submit their differences to the umpire. A written decision by
any two shall determine the policy or policies and the amount of the loss. Each
insurance company agrees that the decision of the appraisers and the umpire if
involved shall be binding and final and that neither party will resort to litigation.
Each of the two parties shall pay its chosen appraiser and bear the cost of the
umpire equally.

11.3.1.4 All Coverages

11.3.1.4.1 All policies must be endorsed to require 30 days written notice of

cancellation to the Agency. Ten-day written notice of cancellation is
acceptable for non-payment of premium. Notifications shall comply
with the standard cancellation provisions in the Contractor’s policy.
In addition, Contractor is required to notify Agency of policy
cancellations or reductions in limits.

11.3.1.4.2 Neither the acceptance of the completed Work nor the payment
thereof shall release the Contractor from the obligations of the
insurance requirements or indemnification agreement.

11.3.1.4.3 The insurance companies issuing the policies shall have no recourse
against the Owner for payment of premiums or for assessments
under any form of the policies.

11.3.1.4.4 Any failure of the Contractor to comply with reporting provisions of

the policy shall not affect coverage provided to the Owner, its
officers, agents, employees and volunteers.

11.3.2 Acceptability of Insurers

July 2021 SC 18
 All required insurance shall be provided by a company or companies lawfully authorized
to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located. Insurance shall be
placed with insurers with an A.M. Best’s rating of A-: VI or higher. This rating
requirement may be waived for Worker’s compensation coverage only.

If at any time an insurer issuing any such policy does not meet the minimum A.M. Best
rating, the Contractor shall obtain a policy with an insurer that meets the A.M. Best
rating and shall submit another certificate of insurance within 30 days.

11.3.3 Verification of Coverage

Contractor shall furnish the Owner with Certificates of Insurance reflecting proof of
required coverage. The Certificates for each insurance policy are to be signed by a
person authorized by that insurer to bind coverage on its behalf. The Certificates are to
be received and approved by the Owner before Work commences and upon any contract
renewal or insurance policy renewal thereafter. The Certificate Holder must be listed as
follows:

State of Louisiana
Name of Owner
Owner Address
City, State, Zip
Attn: Project # _19-647-21-01_

The Owner reserves the right to request complete certified copies of all required
insurance policies at any time.

Upon failure of the Contractor to furnish, deliver and maintain required insurance, this
contract, at the election of the Agency, may be suspended, discontinued, or terminated.
Failure of the Contractor to purchase and/or maintain any required insurance shall not
relieve the Contractor from any liability or indemnification under the contract.

If the Contractor does not meet the insurance requirements at policy renewal, at the
option of the Owner, payment to the Contractor may be withheld until the requirements
have been met, OR the Owner may pay the renewal premium and withhold such payment
from any monies due the Contractor, OR the contract may be suspended or terminated for
cause.

11.3.4 Subcontractors

Contractor shall include all subcontractors as insureds under its policies OR shall be
responsible for verifying and maintaining the certificates provided by each subcontractor.
Subcontractors shall be subject to all of the requirements stated herein. The Owner
reserves the right to request copies of subcontractor’s certificates at any time.

If Contractor does not verify subcontractors’ insurance as described above, Owner has
the right to withhold payments to the Contractor until the requirements have been met.

11.3.5 Worker’s Compensation Indemnity

July 2021 SC 19
 In the event Contractor is not required to provide or elects not to provide Worker’s
compensation coverage, the parties hereby agree the Contractor, its Owners, agents and
employees shall have no cause of action against, and shall not assert a claim against, the
State of Louisiana, its departments, agencies, agents and employees as an employer,
whether pursuant to the Louisiana Worker’s Compensation Act or otherwise, under any
circumstance. The parties also hereby agree that the State of Louisiana, its departments,
agencies, agents and employees shall in no circumstance be, or considered as, the
employer or statutory employer of Contractor, its Owners, agents and employees. The
parties further agree that Contractor is a wholly independent Contractor and is
exclusively responsible for its employees, Owners, and agents. Contractor hereby agrees
to protect, defend, indemnify and hold the State of Louisiana, its departments, agencies,
agents and employees harmless from any such assertion or claim that may arise from the
performance of this contract.

11.3.6 Indemnification/Hold Harmless Agreement

Contractor agrees to protect, defend, indemnify, save, and hold harmless, the State of
Louisiana, all State Departments, Agencies, Boards and Commissions, its officers,
agents, servants, employees and volunteers, from and against any and all claims,
damages, expenses and liability arising out of injury or death to any person or the
damage, loss or destruction of any property which may occur, or in any way grow out of,
any act or omission of Contractor, its agents, servants and employees, or any and all
costs, expenses and/or attorney fees incurred by Contractor as a result of any claims,
demands, suits or causes of action, except those claims, demands, suits or causes of
action arising out of the negligence of the State of Louisiana, all State Departments,
Agencies, Boards, Commissions, its officers, agents, servants, employees and volunteers.

Contractor agrees to investigate, handle, respond to, provide defense for and defend any
such claims, demands, suits or causes of action at its sole expense and agrees to bear all
other costs and expenses related thereto, even if the claims, demands, suits, or causes of
action are groundless, false or fraudulent. The State of Louisiana may, but is not required
to, consult with the Contractor in the defense of claims, but this shall not affect the
Contractor’s responsibility for the handling and expenses of all claims.

11.4 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND

11.4.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering
faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as
stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on
the date of execution of the Contract.

11.4.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds
covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly
furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished.

11.4.3 Recordation of Contract and Bond [La R.S. 38:2241 thru 38:2241.1]

July 2021 SC 20
 The Owner shall record within thirty (30) days the Contract Between Owner and
Contractor and Performance and Payment Bond with the Clerk of Court in the Parish in
which the Work is to be performed.

ARTICLE 12

UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK

12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK

12.2.1 Before Substantial Completion

At the end of the paragraph, add the following sentences:

“If the Contractor fails to correct Work identified as defective within a thirty (30) day
period, through no fault of the Designer, the Owner may hold the Contractor in default.
If the Owner finds the Contractor in default, the Surety shall be notified. If within thirty
(30) days after notification, the Surety has not corrected the nonconforming Work,
through no fault of the Architect or Owner, the Owner may contract to have
nonconforming Work corrected and hold the Surety and Contractor responsible for the
cost, including architectural fees and other indirect costs. If the Surety fails to correct the
Work within the stipulated time period and fails to meet its obligation to pay the costs,
the Owner may elect not to accept bonds submitted in the future by the Surety. Finding
the Contractor in default shall constitute a reason for disqualification of the Contractor
from bidding on future state contracts.

12.2.2 After Substantial Completion

12.2.2.1 At the end of the paragraph delete the last sentence and add the following
sentences:
“If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work, or Work covered by
warranties, within a thirty (30) day period, through no fault of the Architect or
Owner, the Owner may hold the Contractor in default. If the Owner finds the
Contractor is in default, the Surety shall be notified. If within thirty (30) days
after notification, the Surety has not corrected the non-conforming or warranty
Work, through no fault of the Architect or Owner, the Owner may contract to
have the nonconforming or warranty Work corrected and hold the Surety
responsible for the cost including architects fees and other indirect costs.
Corrections by the Owner shall be in accordance with Section 2.4. If the Surety
fails to correct the nonconforming or warranty Work within the stipulated time
period and fails to meet its obligation to pay the costs, the Owner may not
accept bonds submitted, in the future, by the Surety.”

ARTICLE 13

MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

13.1 GOVERNING LAW

Delete all after the word “located”.

July 2021 SC 21
13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS

13.2.1 In the second sentence, delete “Except as … 13.2.2”

Delete Section 13.2.2.

13.3 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES

Add the following Section 13.3.3:

13.3.3 The Nineteenth Judicial Court in and for the Parish of East Baton Rouge, State of
Louisiana shall have sole jurisdiction and venue in any action brought under this
contract.

13.4 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

In Section 13.4.1, delete the second sentence and substitute the following:

The Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with the
Testing Laboratory provided by the Owner, and the Owner shall bear all related costs of tests,
inspections and approvals.

Delete the last two sentences of Section 13.4.1.

13.5 INTEREST

Delete Section 13.5.

ARTICLE 14

TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT

14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR

Delete Section 14.1.1.4.

In Section 14.1.3, after the word “profit,” delete the words “on Work not executed” and substitute
the following: “for Work completed prior to stoppage”.

14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE

Add the following Section:

14.2.1.5 failure to complete the punch list within the lien period as provided in 9.8.7.

14.2.3 Add the following sentence:

July 2021 SC 22
 “Termination by the Owner shall not suspend assessment of liquidated damages against
the Surety.”

Add the following Section:

14.2.5 If an agreed sum of liquidated damages has been established, termination by the Owner
under this Article shall not relieve the Contractor and/or Surety of his obligations under
the liquidated damages provisions and the Contractor and/or Surety shall be liable to the
Owner for per diem liquidated damages.

14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE

In Section 14.4.3, delete all after “incurred by reason of the termination,” and add “along with
reasonable profit on the Work not executed.”

ARTICLE 15

CLAIMS AND DISPUTES

15.1 CLAIMS

Delete Section 15.1.2, Time Limit on Claims, (See La R.S. 38:2189, and 38:2189.1).

15.1.3.1 Add the following to the end of the paragraph:

“A Reservation of Rights and similar stipulations shall not be recognized under this
contract as having any effect. A party must make a claim as defined herein within the
time limits provided.”
15.1.4.2 In the first sentence of the Section, delete “Initial Decision Maker’s” and replace with
“Architect’s”. In the second sentence of the Section, delete “the decision of the Initial
Decision Maker” and replace with: “his/her decision”.

Delete Section 15.1.6.2 and substitute the following:

15.1.6.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a claim for additional time, the
Contractor shall document that weather conditions had an adverse effect on the
scheduled construction. An increase in the contract time due to weather shall not be
cause for an increase in the contract sum. At the end of each month, the Contractor
shall make one Claim for any adverse weather days occurring within the month. The
Claim must be accompanied by sufficient documentation evidencing the adverse days
and the impact on construction. Failure to make such Claim within twenty-one (21)
days from the last day of the month shall prohibit any future claims for adverse days
for that month. No additional adverse weather days shall be granted after the original
or extended contract completion date, except those adverse weather days associated
with a National Weather Service named storm or federally declared weather related
disaster directly affecting the project site.

Add the following Section:

July 2021 SC 23
 15.1.6.3 The following are considered reasonably anticipated days of adverse weather on a
monthly basis:

January 11 days July 6 days

February 10 days August 5 days
March 8 days September 4 days
April 7 days October 3 days
May 5 days November 5 days
June 6 days December 8 days

The Contractor shall ask for total adverse weather days. The Contractor’s request shall
be considered only for days over the allowable number of days stated above.

Note: Contract is on a calendar day basis.

15.2 INITIAL DECISION

15.2.1 In the second sentence, delete the word “will” and replace with: “shall always”.

In the second sentence, delete the phrase: “, unless otherwise indicated in the
Agreement.”

In the third sentence, delete the word “mediation” and replace with: “litigation”.

At the end of the third sentence, add: “arising prior to the date final payment is due”.

Delete the fourth sentence.

15.2.5 In the middle of the first sentence, delete all after the phrase: “rejecting the Claim”.

In the second sentence, delete the phrase: “and the Architect, if the Architect is not
serving as the Initial Decision Maker,”.

In the third sentence, delete all after: “binding on the parties” and add the following:
“except that the Owner may reject the decision or suggest a compromise or both”.

Delete Section 15.2.6.

Delete Section 15.2.6.1.

15.3 MEDIATION

Delete Section 15.3.

15.4 ARBITRATION

Delete Section 15.4.

July 2021 SC 24
Campus Expansion, Louisiana Delta Community
College, Winnsboro, LA

State of Louisiana
Office of Facility Planning and Control
1201 Nth 3rd street Claiborne Office Bld’g.
Suite 7-160 Baton Rouge, Louisiana 70802
P.O. Box 94095 Baton Rouge, Louisiana 70804-9095

TBA Studio Architecture APC

103 Cypress Street,
West Monroe, LA 71291
 FOR INFORMATION ONLY
This document will be prepared by Facility Planning & Control in the form appropriate for the project.

STATE OF LOUISIANA
PARISH OF «PARISH_OF_PROJECT»

CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR

AND PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND

This agreement entered into this day of , 2024,

by «Contractor» hereinafter called the "Contractor", whose business address is «Contractor_Address»,
«Contractor_City», «Contractor_State» «Contractor_Zip», and the State of Louisiana Division of Administration,
herein represented by the contracting officer executing this contract, hereinafter called the "Owner".

Witnesseth that the Contractor and the Owner, in consideration of premises and the mutual covenants;
consideration and agreement herein contained, agree as follows:

Statement of Work: The contractor shall furnish all labor and materials and perform all of the work required to
build, construct and complete in a thorough and workmanlike manner:

«Project_Reference_1»
«Project_Reference_2»
«Project_Reference_3»
«Project_City», Louisiana
Project No.: «ProjectNo», «Part_No»«WBS»;
«Supplement_Project_No», Part «Supplement_Part_No»
(«Supplement_WBS»)(Supplement)
State ID No.: «StateID» Site Code: «SiteCode»

in strict accordance with Contract Documents prepared by:

«Designer»
«Designer_Address»
«Designer_City», «Designer_State» «Designer_Zip»

It is recognized by the parties herein that said Contract Documents including by way of example and not of
limitation, the Drawings and Specifications dated «Drawings_and_Specs_Date», Addenda number(s) «Addenda_No», the
Instruction to Bidders, Bid Form, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, any Addenda thereto, impose duties and
obligations upon the parties herein, and said parties thereby agree that they shall be bound by said duties and obligations.
For these purposes, all of the provisions contained in the aforementioned Construction Documents are incorporated herein
by reference with the same force and effect as though said Construction Documents were herein set out in full.

Time for Completion: The work shall be commenced on a date to be specified in a written order of the Owner and
shall be completed within «Time_Completion_Days» («Time_Completion_Days») consecutive calendar days from and
after the said date.

Liquidated Damages: Contractor shall be assessed Liquidated Damages in the amount of

«Liquidated_Damages_Cost_Per_Day» per day for each consecutive calendar day which work is not complete beginning
with the first day beyond the completion time.

Compensation to be paid to the Contractor: The Owner will pay and the Contractor will accept in full consideration
for the performance of the contract the sum of «Contract_Amount_Words» and No/100 Dollars
(«Contract_Amount_Numeral») which sum represents the «Base_Bid_Only_or_Plus_Alternates»

Taxes: Contractor hereby agrees that the responsibility for payment of taxes from the funds thus received under
this Contract and/or legislative appropriation shall be contractor's obligation and identified under Federal tax identification
number .

Performance and Payment Bond: To these presents personally came and intervened , herein acting for
, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of
, and duly authorized to transact business in the State of Louisiana, as surety, who declared that
having taken cognizance of this contract and of the Construction Documents mentioned herein, he hereby in his capacity as
its Attorney in Fact obligates his said company, as Surety for the said Contractor, unto the said Owner, up to the sum of
«Contract_Amount_Words» and No/100 Dollars («Contract_Amount_Numeral»). By issuance of this bond, the surety
acknowledges they are in compliance with R.S. 38:2219.

The condition of this performance and payment bond shall be that should the Contractor herein not perform the
contract in accordance with the terms and conditions hereof, or should said Contractor not fully indemnify and save harmless
the Owner, from all cost and damages which he may suffer by said Contractor's non-performance or should said Contractor
not pay all persons who have and fulfill obligations to perform labor and/or furnish materials in the prosecution of the work
provided for herein, including by way of example workmen, laborers, mechanics, and furnishers of materials, machinery,
equipment and fixtures, then said Surety agrees and is bound to so perform the contract and make said payment(s).

Provided, that any alterations which may be made in the terms of the contract or in the work to be done under it,
or the giving by the Owner of any extensions of time for the performance of the contract, or any other forbearance on the
part of either the Owner or the Contractor to the other shall not in any way release the Contractor or the Surety from their
liability hereunder, notice to the Surety of any such alterations, extensions or other forbearance being hereby waived.

July 2021 C1
 Contractor acknowledges and agrees to comply with the provisions of La. R.S. 38:2212.10 and federal law
pertaining to E-Verify in the performance of services under this Contract.

It is hereby agreed that the Legislative Auditor of the State of Louisiana and/or the Office of the Governor, Division
of Administration auditors shall have the option of auditing all accounts of contractor which relate to this contract.

The continuation of this contract is contingent upon the appropriation of funds to fulfill the requirements of the
contract by the legislature. If the legislature fails to appropriate sufficient monies to provide for the continuation of the
contract, or if such appropriation is reduced by the veto of the Governor or by any means provided in the appropriations act
to prevent the total appropriation for the year from exceeding revenues for that year, or for any other lawful purpose, and
the effect of such reduction is to provide insufficient monies for the continuation of the contract, the contract shall terminate
on the date of the beginning of the first fiscal year for which funds are not appropriated.

The contractor agrees to abide by the requirements of the following as applicable: Title VI of the Civil Rights Act
of 1964 and Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, as amended by the Equal Employment Opportunity Act of 1972,
Federal Executive Order 11246 as amended, the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended, the Vietnam Era Veteran's
Readjustment Assistance Act of 1974, Title IX of the Education Amendments of 1972, the Age Discrimination Act of 1975,
the Fair Housing Act of 1968 as amended, and contractor agrees to abide by the requirements of the Americans with
Disabilities Act of 1990.

Contractor agrees not to discriminate in its employment practices, and will render services under this contract
without regard to race, color, religion, sex, sexual orientation, national origin, veteran status, political affiliation, disability,
or age in any matter relating to employment. Any act of discrimination committed by Contractor, or failure to comply with
these statutory obligations when applicable shall be grounds for termination of this contract.

In accordance with R.S. 39:1602.1, effective May 22, 2018, for any contract for $100,000 or more and for any
contractor with five or more employees, Contractor, or any Subcontractor, shall certify it is not engaging in a boycott of
Israel, and shall, for the duration of this contract, refrain from a boycott of Israel. The State reserves the right to terminate
this contract if the Contractor, or any Subcontractor, engages in a boycott of Israel during the term of the contract.

Contractor has a continuing obligation to disclose any suspensions or debarment by any government entity,
including but not limited to General Services Administration (GSA). Failure to disclosed may constitute grounds for
suspension and/or termination of the Contract and debarment from future Contracts.

Contractor, and each tier of Subcontractors, shall certify that it is not on the List of Parties Excluded from Federal
Procurement or Nonprocurement Programs promulgated in accordance with E.O.s 12549 and 12689, "Debarment and
Suspension," as set forth at 24 CFR part 24.

In Witness whereof, the parties hereto on the day and year first above written have executed this agreement in six
(6) counterparts, each of which shall, without proof or accountancy for the other counterparts, be deemed an original
thereof.

THUS DONE AND SIGNED at Baton Rouge, Louisiana, on the day, month, and year first written above.

WITNESSES:

STATE OF LOUISIANA
DIVISION OF ADMINISTRATION

BY:
FP&C Witness #1 Sign Here JASON D. SOOTER
FP&C DIRECTOR

FP&C Witness #2 Sign Here

BY:
Contractor Witness #1 Sign Here «CONTRACTOR»

Contractor Witness #2 Sign Here

SURETY:

BY:
Surety Witness #1 Sign Here ATTORNEY IN FACT

Surety Witness #2 Sign Here

ADDRESS

TELEPHONE NUMBER

July 2021 C2
STATE OF LOUISIANA
PARISH OF «PARISH_OF_CONTRACTOR»

PROJECT NO.:«ProjectNo», «Part_No»«WBS»;

«Supplement_Project_No», Part
«Supplement_Part_No» («Supplement_WBS»)(Supplement)
NAME: «Project_Reference_1»
«Project_Reference_2»
«Project_Reference_3»
LOCATION: «Project_City»

NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT

Before me, the undersigned authority, duly commissioned and qualified within and for the
State and Parish aforesaid, personally came and appeared
representing «Contractor» who, being by me first duly sworn deposed and said that he has read this
affidavit and does hereby agree under oath to comply with all provisions herein as follows:

PART I.

Section 2224 of Part II of Chapter 10 of Title 38 of the Louisiana Revised Statutes, as

amended.

(1) That affiant employed no person, corporation, firm, association, or other organization,
either directly or indirectly, to secure the public contract under which he received payment, other than
persons regularly employed by the affiant whose services in connection with the construction, alteration or
demolition of the public building or project or in securing the public contract were in the regular course of
their duties for affiant; and

(2) That no part of the Contract price received by affiant was paid or will be paid to any
person, corporation, firm, association, or other organization for soliciting the Contract, other than the
payment of their normal compensation to persons regularly employed by the affiant whose services in
connection with the construction, alteration or demolition of the public building or project were in the
regular course of their duties for affiant.

PART II.

Section 2190 of Part I of Chapter 10 of Title 38 of the Louisiana Revised Statutes, as

amended.

That affiant, if an architect or engineer, or representative thereof, does not own a substantial
financial interest, either directly or indirectly, in any corporation, firm, partnership, or other organization
which supplies materials for the construction of a public work when the architect or engineer has performed
architectural or engineering services, either directly or indirectly, in connection with the public work for
which the materials are being supplied.

For the purposes of this Section, a "substantial financial interest" shall exclude any interest
in stock being traded on the American Stock Exchange or the New York Stock Exchange.

That affiant, if subject to the provisions of this section, does hereby agree to be subject to
the penalties involved for the violation of this section.

AFFIANT

SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED BEFORE ME THIS DAY OF , 2024.

NOTARY

July 2021 C3
 Campus Expansion, FP&C: 19-647-21-01
Louisiana Delta Community College, F. 19002366
Winnsboro, LA
__________________________ ____________________________
Name of Project Project No.

STATE OF _____Louisiana____________

PARISH OF ____Franklin_____________

ATTESTATIONS AFFIDAVIT
Before me, the undersigned notary public, duly commissioned and qualified in and for the parish and state
aforesaid, personally came and appeared Affiant, who after being duly sworn, attested as follows:

LA. R.S. 38:2227 PAST CRIMINAL CONVICTIONS OF BIDDERS

A. No sole proprietor or individual partner, incorporator, director, manager, officer, organizer, or member who has a
minimum of a ten percent (10%) ownership in the bidding entity named below has been convicted of, or has
entered a plea of guilty or nolo contendere to any of the following state crimes or equivalent federal crimes:

(a) Public bribery (R.S. 14:118) (c) Extortion (R.S. 14:66)

(b) Corrupt influencing (R.S. 14:120) (d) Money laundering (R.S. 14:230)

B. Within the past five years from the project bid date, no sole proprietor or individual partner, incorporator, director,
manager, officer, organizer, or member who has a minimum of a ten percent (10%) ownership in the bidding
entity named below has been convicted of, or has entered a plea of guilty or nolo contendere to any of the
following state crimes or equivalent federal crimes, during the solicitation or execution of a contract or bid
awarded pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 10 of Title 38 of the Louisiana Revised Statutes:

(a) Theft (R.S. 14:67) (f) Bank fraud (R.S. 14:71.1)

(b) Identity Theft (R.S. 14:67.16) (g) Forgery (R.S. 14:72)
(c) Theft of a business record (h) Contractors; misapplication of
(R.S.14:67.20) payments (R.S. 14:202)
(d) False accounting (R.S. 14:70) (i) Malfeasance in office (R.S. 14:134)
(e) Issuing worthless checks
(R.S. 14:71)

LA. R.S. 38:2212.10 Verification of Employees

A. At the time of bidding, Appearer is registered and participates in a status verification system to verify that all new
hires in the state of Louisiana are legal citizens of the United States or are legal aliens.

B. If awarded the contract, Appearer shall continue, during the term of the contract, to utilize a status verification
system to verify the legal status of all new employees in the state of Louisiana.

C. If awarded the contract, Appearer shall require all subcontractors to submit to it a sworn affidavit verifying
compliance with Paragraphs (A) and (B) of this Subsection.

July 2021 Page 1 of 2

 Campus Expansion, FP&C: 19-647-21-01
Louisiana Delta Community College, F. 19002366
Winnsboro, LA
___________________________ ____________________________
Name of Project Project No.

LA. R.S. 23:1726(B) Certification Regarding Unpaid Workers Compensation Insurance

A. R.S. 23:1726 prohibits any entity against whom an assessment under Part X of Chapter 11 of Title 23 of the
Louisiana Revised Statutes of 1950 (Alternative Collection Procedures & Assessments) is in effect, and whose
right to appeal that assessment is exhausted, from submitting a bid or proposal for or obtaining any contract
pursuant to Chapter 10 of Title 38 of the Louisiana Revised Statutes of 1950 and Chapters 16 and 17 of Title 39
of the Louisiana Revised Statutes of 1950.

B. By signing this bid /proposal, Affiant certifies that no such assessment is in effect against the bidding / proposing
entity.

____________________________________ ________________________________________________
NAME OF BIDDER NAME OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER

____________________________________ _________________________________________________
DATE TITLE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER

__________________________________________________________
SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED
SIGNATORY OF BIDDER/AFFIANT

Sworn to and subscribed before me by Affiant on the _____ day of _____________ , 20___ .

_________________________________
Notary Public

July 2021 Page 2 of 2

 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

The Contractor is to use the following format. The total Contract Cost is to be itemized in each
Subsection listed (as applicable)

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Quantity Cost

01 00 00 General Requirements
01 32 50 Record Drawings, Shop Drawings, Product
Data, Samples and other submittals.
TOTAL
DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 30 00 Subsurface Investigation
02 41 00 Demolition
TOTAL
DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

03 01 00 Maintenance of Concrete
03 11 00 Concrete Forming
03 15 00 Concrete Accessories
03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing
03 30 00 Cast-in-place Concrete
03 40 00 Precast Concrete
03 50 00 Cast Decks & Underlayment TOTAL

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY

04 01 00 Maintenance of Masonry
04 05 13 Masonry Mortaring
04 05 19 Masonry Anchorage & Reinforcing
04 05 23 Masonry Accessories
04 20 00 Unit Masonry TOTAL

DIVISION 05 – METALS

05 05 23 Metal Fastenings
05 10 00 Structural Metal Framing
05 20 00 Metal Joists
05 30 00 Metal Decking
05 50 00 Metal Fabrications
05 58 00 Formed Metal Fabrications TOTAL

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, &

COMPOSITES

06 05 23 Fastening and Adhesives

06 10 00 Rough Carpentry
06 13 00 Heavy Timber
06 17 00 Shop-fabricated Structural Wood
06 20 00 Finish Carpentry SUB-TOTAL

July 2021 V-1

DISISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, &
COMPOSITES (CONTINUES)

06 40 00 Architectural Woodwork
06 60 00 Plastic Fabrications
06 80 00 Composite Fabrications
TOTAL
DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE
PROTECTION

07 10 00 Dampproofing and Waterproofing

07 18 00 Traffic Coatings
07 19 00 Water Repellents
07 21 00 Thermal Insulation
07 24 00 Exterior Insulation & Finish Systems
07 25 00 Weather Barriers
07 31 00 Shingles and Shakes
07 32 00 Roof Tiles
07 40 00 Roofing and Siding Panels
07 50 00 Membrane Roofing
07 60 00 Flashing and Sheet Metal
07 61 00 Sheet Metal Roofing
07 70 00 Roof & Wall Specialties and Accessories
07 80 00 Fire and Smoke Protection
07 90 00 Joint Protection
07 95 00 Expansion Control
TOTAL
DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS

08 11 00 Metal Doors and Frames

08 14 00 Wood Doors
08 15 00 Plastic Doors
08 30 00 Specialty Doors and Frames
08 41 00 Entrances and Storefronts
08 44 00 Curtain Wall and Glazed Assemblies
08 51 00 Metal Windows
08 52 00 Wood Windows
08 53 00 Plastic Windows
08 56 00 Special Function Windows
08 60 00 Roof Windows and Skylights
08 70 00 Hardware
08 80 00 Glazing
08 90 00 Louvers and Vents

TOTAL
DIVISION 09 – FINISHES

09 22 00 Supports for Plaster and Gypsum Board

09 23 00 Gypsum Plastering
09 24 00 Portland Cement Plastering
09 29 00 Gypsum Board
09 30 00 Tiling
SUB-TOTAL

July 2021 V-2

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES (CONTINUED)

09 50 00 Acoustical Ceilings
09 54 00 Specialty Ceilings
Quantity
09 61 00 Flooring Treatment
09 62 00 Specialty Flooring
09 63 00 Masonry Flooring
09 64 00 Wood Flooring
09 65 00 Resilient Flooring
09 66 00 Terrazzo Flooring
09 68 00 Carpeting
09 69 00 Access Flooring
09 97 00 Wall Finishes
09 91 00 Painting
09 97 00 Special Coatings
TOTAL
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

10 11 00 Visual Display Surfaces

10 14 00 Signage
10 21 00 Compartments and Cubicles
10 22 00 Partitions
10 26 00 Wall and Door Protection
10 28 00 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories
10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties
10 51 00 Lockers
10 56 00 Storage Assemblies
10 82 00 Grilles and Screens TOTAL

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

11 15 00 Security, Detention, and Banking Equipment

11 19 00 Detention Equipment
11 23 00 Commercial Laundry and
Dry Cleaning Equipment
11 26 00 Unit Kitchens
11 27 00 Photographic Processing Equipment
11 40 00 Foodservice Equipment
11 51 00 Library Equipment
11 52 00 Audio-Visual Equipment
11 53 00 Laboratory Equipment
11 61 00 Theater and Stage Equipment
11 65 00 Athletic and Recreational Equipment
11 70 00 Healthcare Equipment
TOTAL
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS

12 20 00 Window Treatments
12 30 00 Casework
12 40 00 Furnishings and Accessories
12 50 00 Furniture
TOTAL

July 2021 V-3

DIVISION 13 –SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13 10 00 Special Facility Components

13 34 00 Fabricated Engineered Structures
13 49 00 Radiation Protection
TOTAL

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

14 20 00 Elevators
14 30 00 Escalators and Moving Walks
14 40 00 Lifts
14 80 00 Scaffolding
TOTAL
DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION

21 10 00 Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems

Piping
21 20 00 Fire-Extinguishing Systems
21 30 00 Fire Pumps

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING TOTAL

22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation
22 11 00 Facility Water Distribution
22 13 00 Facility Sanitary Sewerage
22 14 00 Facility Storm Drainage
22 30 00 Plumbing Equipment
22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures
TOTAL
DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, & AIR-
CONDITIONING

23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, & Balancing for HVAC

23 07 00 HVAC Insulation
23 09 00 Instrumentation & Control for HVAC
23 13 00 Facility Fuel-Storage Tanks
23 20 00 HVAC Piping and Pumps
23 30 00 HVAC Air Distribution
23 40 00 HVAC Air Cleaning Devices
23 50 00 Central Heating Equipment
23 60 00 Central Cooling Equipment
23 70 00 Central HVAC Equipment
TOTAL

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

26 09 00 Instrumentation & Control for

Electrical Systems
26 10 00 Medium-Voltage Electrical Distribution
26 20 00 Low-Voltage Electrical Transmission
26 27 00 Low-Voltage Distribution Equipment
26 30 00 Facility Electrical Power Generating
& Storage Equipment
26 40 00 Electrical and Cathodic Protection
26 50 00 Lighting
TOTAL
July 2021 V-4
DIVIASION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS

27 10 00 Structured Cabling
27 20 00 Data Communications
27 30 00 Voice Communications
27 40 00 Audio-Video Communications
27 50 00 Distributed Communications &
Monitoring Systems
TOTAL
DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND
SECURITY

28 10 00 Electronic Access Control &

Intrusion Detection
28 20 00 Electronic Surveillance
28 30 00 Electronic Detection and Alarm
28 40 00 Electronic Monitoring and Control
TOTAL

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

31 10 00 Site Clearing
31 20 00 Earth Moving
31 31 00 Soil Treatment
31 32 00 Soil Stabilization
31 40 00 Shoring and Underpinning
31 50 00 Excavation Support and Protection
31 60 00 Special Foundations and Load-
Bearing Elements
TOTAL

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 10 00 Bases, Ballasts, and Paving

32 30 00 Site Improvements
32 90 00 Planting
TOTAL
DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

33 10 00 Water Utilities
33 30 00 Sanitary Sewerage Utilities
33 40 00 Storm Drainage Utilities
33 50 00 Fuel Distribution Utilities
33 60 00 Hydronic & Steam Energy Utilities
33 70 00 Electrical Utilities
33 80 00 Communications Utilities
TOTAL
DIVISION 34 – TRANSPORTATION

34 00 00 Transportation
TOTAL
DIVISION 35 – WATERWAY AND MARINE
CONSTRUCTIONS

35 00 00 Waterway and Marine construction

TOTAL

July 2021 V-5

DIVISION 40-43 – PROCESS EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 44 – POLLUTION CONTROL

EQUIPMENT

44 40 00 Water Treatment Equipment

44 41 00 Packaged Water Treatment Plants
44 50 00 Solid Waste Control
TOTAL
DIVISION 45 – INDUSTRY SPECIFIC
MANUFACTURING
EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 48 – ELECTRICAL POWER

GENERATION

48 10 00 Electrical Power Generation Equipment

48 70 00 Electrical Power Generation Testing
TOTAL

July 2021 V-6

 Facility Planning & Control
CHANGE ORDER
PROJECT NAME: CHANGE ORDER No.
PROJECT NUMBER: WBS No. CONTRACT DATE:
CONTRACTOR: CFMS / SRM No(s).
SITE CODE: STATE ID: NOTICE TO PROCEED DATE:

You are directed to make the following change(s) in this contract. Attach SUMMARY, BREAKDOWN and/or UNIT PRICE BREAKDOWN forms
as required and give a brief description of the change(s) below.

The Original Contract Sum

Total Changes by Previous Change Order(s)
Current Contract Sum
Contract Sum will be (increased) (decreased) (unchanged) by this Change Order
New Contract Sum

The Original Contract Completion Date and Contract Time. Date: DAYS
Total Time extended by Previous Change Order(s) DAYS
Contract Time will be (increased) (decreased) (unchanged) by this Change Order DAYS
New Contract Completion Date & Revised Contract Time Date: DAYS

Added Building Area (Sq. Ft.)

NOTE : No additional increase in time or money will be considered for a Change Order item after it has been executed.

RECOMMENDED ACCEPTED APPROVED

Designer's Name: Contractor's Name: Project Manager:

Address: Address: Facility Planning & Control

Email Address: Email Address:

By: By: By:

Date: Date: Date:

FACILITY PLANNING AND CONTROL USE ONLY

Classification Amount Classification Amount
Omission (Type "O")* Miscellaneous (Type "M")

Error (Type "E")* Owner Requested (Type "R")

Senior Manager/Assistant Director approval:

COMMENTS:

July 2021 CO-1

 Construction Contract Change Order
SUMMARY
State of Louisiana Item No.
Facility Planning & Control RFI No. (or COR, CPR, etc.)
State Project No. Date:
WBS No.
Project Name:

Contractor Name:

Description of Work:

General Contractor Direct Costs - Breakdown No.

(See attached breakdown)
Total General Contractor Cost %
(General Contract Direct Cost plus OH&P) (Max: 8%)

Subcontractor Cost Breakdowns A B C

(See attached.)
Breakdown Total OH&P Total
Subcontractor Name No. Direct Cost (Max 8%) A+(A X B)
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
Subcontractor Direct Costs Total $ -
(Sum column A)

Subcontractor Direct Costs + Subcontractor OH&P

(Sum column C)

General Contractor OH&P on Subcontractor Direct Cost at %

(Sum column A times General Contractor OH&P rate. ) (Max: 8%)

Total Subcontractor Costs

(Subcontractor Direct Costs + OH&P + General Contractor OH&P)
Change Order Subtotal
(Sum of Total General Contractor Costs and Total Subcontractor Costs)

Performance and Payment Bond at %

(Change Order Subtotal times Performance and Payment Bond rate)

Amount will be increased decreased unchanged by

(Sum of Change Order Subtotal and Performance and Payment Bond)

Days will be increased decreased unchanged by

(Attach supporting data such as meteorological reports)

July 2021 CO-2

 Construction Contract Change Order
BREAKDOWN
State of Louisiana Breakdown No.
Facility Planning & Control Item No.
State Project No. RFI No. (or COR, CPR, etc.)
WBS No. Date:
Project Name:

Contractor/Subcontractor Name:

Direct Cost of Work :

A. Labor Check here if explained on the Comment Sheet Hourly Wage Rate Hours Total Cost
1 o
2 o
3 o
4 o
5 o
6 o
7 o
Add Labor Burden @ %

LABOR TOTAL

B. Material Unit Price Unit Units Total Cost

1 o
2 o
3 o
4 o
5 o
6 o
7 o
(Copies of invoices may be required.) Add Tax @ %

MATERIAL TOTAL

C. Equipment Unit Rate Unit Units Total Cost

1 o
2 o
3 o
4 o
5 o
6 o
7 o
(Copies of invoices may be required.) Add Tax @ %

EQUIPMENT TOTAL

TOTAL DIRECT COST FOR THIS BREAKDOWN:

(Sum A, B & C)
July 2021 CO-3
 Construction Contract Change Order
BREAKDOWN COMMENT SHEET
State of Louisiana Breakdown No.
Facility Planning & Control Item No.
State Project No. RFI No. (or COR, CPR, etc.)
WBS No. Date:
Project Name:

Contractor/Subcontractor Name:

A. Labor
No. (From BREAKDOWN Sheet)

B. Material

C. Equipment

July 2021 CO-4

 Construction Contract Change Order
UNIT PRICE BREAKDOWN
State of Louisiana Breakdown No.
Facility Planning & Control Item No.
State Project No. RFI No. (or COR, CPR, etc.)
WBS No. Date:
Project Name:

Contractor/Subcontractor Name:

Unit Price Tabulation

(Unit prices must be included in the bid or clearly defined in a standard, industry recognized pricing reference.
The pricing reference shall be identified herein.)

Unit Price Description Reference* Unit Price Units

* Reference Legend:

Unit Price Total:

(Sum Total column)

July 2021
Total

CO-5
 State of Louisiana
Division of Administration
Facility Planning and Control
Instructions for Change Order Back Up Forms

The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, 2017 Edition, and the
Supplementary Conditions provide for changes in the contract in the form of change orders. The costs of such
changes must be carefully, clearly and accurately documented. Facility Planning & Control has prepared a set of
forms to be used to provide this documentation in a consistent format that is in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
Change orders will typically contain one or more items of work. Each item of work will typically include work by
the general contractor and/or one or more subcontractors. The documentation begins with a breakdown of the
work of the contractor and each subcontractor. This is prepared using the form entitled "BREAKDOWN." One
form for the General Contractor and one for each subcontractor. Each breakdown will be summarized on the form
entitled "SUMMARY." Each item of work will, in turn, be summarized on the change order itself. This should be
on the face of the change order.
The forms are available as a Microsoft Excel worksheet for ease of preparation, with formulas established for
mark-ups and other basic mathematical operations.
These forms are to be used as provided. Any alteration to the forms may cause the change order to be rejected.

GENERAL: (Refer to Article 7 of the Supplementary and General Conditions)

Forms - There are five forms to be used for all Facility Planning and Control change orders: CHANGE
ORDER form, SUMMARY, BREAKDOWN, BREAKDOWN COMMENT SHEET and UNIT PRICE
BREAKDOWN. The CHANGE ORDER form is the highest level and is the official, signed document. A
CHANGE ORDER form may include one or more items of work, each of which is backed up by a
SUMMARY. Each SUMMARY will be backed up with one or more BREAKDOWNs. Any unusual rates,
unit costs or quantities may be explained on the COMMENT SHEET. It's simple. The BREAKDOWN form
must be used for the general contractor and any subcontractor, at any level, that is to get OH&P. Use as many
as needed.
Unit Pricing - Labor, material and equipment breakdown is the standard method of pricing change orders for
Facility Planning and Control. However, unit pricing may be considered in some circumstances if the unit
prices are clearly established such as by unit prices that were included in the bid. These prices may also be
derived from a construction industry standard reference such as R.S. Means. If unit prices were included in
the bid they are acceptable for pricing change order work and, in fact, must be used for any work that is
included in the change order for which they were established . The UNIT PRICE BREAKDOWN is
provided for this purpose.

CHANGE ORDER:
Project identification information: Complete as required. The Site Code, State ID and CFMS / SRM
No(s). (contract numbers) can be obtained from the FP&C Project Manager.
Description: This will include a list of each attached SUMMARY that makes up this change order and a
brief statement of the work included in each.
New Contract Sum: Calculate the new contract amount using the original contract amount, previous change
orders and the new change order. Select the appropriate word for increase, decrease or unchanged, and delete
the terms that don't apply.

July 2021 CO - 6
 New Contract Completion Date and Revised Time: Calculate the new contract time using the original
Contract Completion Date and Contract Time, previous changes in time and the change in time by this change
order. Select the appropriate word for increase, decrease or unchanged and delete the terms that don't apply.
Show days in the main column and the date in the blank indicated.

Added Building Area: Show any building area added by this change order. If none, enter "None."
RECOMMENDED: Show the Designer's name and address, sign on the line indicated as "By:" and date on
the indicated line.
ACCEPTED: Show the Contractor's name and address, sign on the line indicated as "By:" and date on the
indicated line.
APPROVED: For approval by FP&C.

SUMMARY: (Refer to Article 7 of the Supplementary and General Conditions)

Item No.: Show the Item number as it will appear on the CHANGE ORDER Form. Note: This may be one
of several items included in one CHANGE ORDER form.
RFI No.: Show the number of the request for information. This may be known by another name such as
COR (Change Order Request,) CPR (Change Proposal Request,) etc.
Project No., WBS No., Date, Project Name. Complete as appropriate.
Contractor: Name of General Contractor.
Description of Work: Give a brief description of the work included in this Item.
General Contractor Direct Costs: Show the total General Contractor Cost from the BREAKDOWN and
show the Breakdown No. in the space provided.
General Contractor Total Cost: Show the total General Contractor Cost plus the General Contractor's
overhead and profit. The overhead and profit shall not exceed 8% of the Direct Cost.
Subcontractor Cost Breakdowns: List each subcontractor, Breakdown No. and Total Direct Cost (in
column "A") from the attached BREAKDOWN sheets. Show the subcontractor's overhead and profit
percentage in column "B" and show the calculated total of the direct cost plus the percentage of the direct cost
in column "C." If the electronic version of the form is being used, column "C" will be automatically
calculated. The overhead and profit shall not exceed 8% of the Total Direct Cost.
Subcontractor Direct Costs Total: Sum of column "A." This will be used to calculate the General
Contractor's overhead and profit on the subcontractors' work. If the electronic version is being used, this will
be an automatic calculation.
Subcontractor Direct Costs + Subcontractor OH&P: Sum of column "C." This represents the total
amount that subcontractors will be paid. Automatic calculation.
General Contractor OH&P on Subcontractor Direct Cost at ___%. The contractors overhead and profit
on the subcontractors' direct cost (without subcontractor OH&P.) Enter the percentage of the contractor's
OH&P on the subcontractors' work (not to exceed 8%) and show the calculated total of the subcontractors'
direct cost plus the percentage of the direct cost in the space. Automatic calculation.
Total Subcontractor Costs: Total of the last two spaces.
Change Order Subtotal: Total of change order except bond.
Performance and Payment Bond at ____%: Enter bond percentage (from amount provided by the
contractor at the Pre-Construction Conference) and calculate the amount for the bond.
Amount will be (increased) (decreased) (unchanged) by: Add bond and calculate total change order
amount. Indicate "increase," "decrease" or "unchanged", and delete the terms that don't apply.

July 2021 CO - 6
 Days will be (increased) (decreased) (unchanged) by: Show the number of days to be added or deleted
from the contract, if any, due to changes in scope, adverse weather, unusual delays or other factors, only if it
is proven the critical path is affected. Note that a change in scope does not necessarily indicate a change in
time. Indicate "increased," "decreased" or "unchanged", and delete the terms that don't apply.

BREAKDOWN:
Item No. Show the Item number as it will appear on the CHANGE ORDER Form and the SUMMARY.
Note: This may be one of several items included in one CHANGE ORDER form.
RFI No.: Show the number of the request for information. This may be known by another name such as
COR (Change Order Request,) CPR (Change Proposal Request,) etc.
Project No., WBS No., Date, Project Name. Complete as appropriate.
Contractor: Name of General Contractor or Subcontractor.
Direct Cost of Work:
Check here if explained on the Comment Sheet: If rates, unit costs or quantities may appear unreasonable
compared to standard costs or quantities the reasons may be explained on the attached comment sheet and the
box checked to indicate that there is an explanation.
A. Labor: Include the “wages paid” hourly direct labor and/or foreman necessary to perform the required
change. “Wages paid” is the amount actually paid the employee, not the fully burdened charge rate used in
the bid, etc. Supervisory personnel in district or home office shall not be included. Do not include the
project superintendent, except as permitted by Section 7.2 of Supplementary Conditions. Supervisory
personnel on the job-site, but with broad supervisory responsibility shall not be included as Direct Labor,
except as permitted by Section 7.2 of Supplementary Conditions. Typically there will be only one
superintendent on the job and his/her time shall not be included, except as permitted by Section 7.2 of
Supplementary Conditions. Typically all other employees are eligible for inclusion. List by job title each
person employed on the work, his/her hourly rate, the number hours work and the extended Total Cost. Do
not list crews unless the rates for them are readily available in standard cost estimating references such as R.
S. Means. Add the labor burden that was provided at the Pre-Construction conference and in compliance with
the Contract Documents, and total the amounts in LABOR TOTAL.
B. Material: Include the acquisition cost of all materials directly required to perform the required change.
List each material used in the work, the price per unit, name of the unit, the number of units used and the
extended Total Cost. Add the tax rate and tax and total the amounts in MATERIAL TOTAL.
C. Equipment: Include the rental cost of equipment items necessary to perform the change. For company-
owned equipment items, include documentation of internal rental rates submitted at the pre-construction
conference. Charges for small tools, and craft specific tools are not allowed. List each piece of equipment
used in the work, the rate by units of time (hour, day, week, etc.,) number of units of time the piece was in
service on the work and the extended total cost. Add the tax rate, calculate the tax and total the amounts in
EQUIPMENT TOTAL.
TOTAL DIRECT COST FOR THIS BREAKDOWN: Total of A. Labor, B. Material and C. Equipment.
This is the amount that will be carried forward to the SUMMARY Sheet. This amount does NOT include
Overhead and Profit. This will be added on the SUMMARY Sheet.

COMMENTS SHEET:
The COMMENTS SHEET uses the same heading as the SUMMARY and BREAKDOWN.
The COMMENTS SHEET includes three sections, one each for A. Labor, B. Materials and C. Equipment.
These correspond to the sections in the BREAKDOWN. Each comment should be entered in the section to
which it corresponds on the BREAKDOWN and numbered to correspond to the appropriate line. Comments
are to used only to explain unusual rates, costs or quantities.

July 2021 CO - 6
UNIT PRICE BREAKDOWN:
The UNIT PRICE BREAKDOWN uses the same heading as the BREAKDOWN.
The UNIT PRICE BREAKDOWN is similar to the BREAKDOWN.
Unit Price Tabulation: Each unit price is listed along with its corresponding price and the number of units
used in the work. The price and number of units are multiplied to provide the total cost of each unit price
item. The pricing reference, such as the bid form for the project or a construction industry standard reference,
must be cited for each unit price. This may be more fully described in "Reference Legend,"

Unit Price Total: Sum the unit prices to obtain the total cost for unit prices.

July 2021 CO - 6
CHANGE ORDER
Construction Contract Change Order

CHANGE ORDER
__________________________

Diagram of a typical __________________________

__________________________
__________________________

change order
__________________________
__________________________

__________________________________________________________
------------- -------------
___________________________________________________________

structure.

Construction Contract Change Order Construction Contract Change Order

SUMMARY SUMMARY
___________________________ ___________________________

___________________________ ___________________________

________________________ ________________________
________________________ ________________________
________________________ ________________________
________________________ ________________________

___________________________ ___________________________
___________________________ ___________________________

Construction Contract Change Order Construction Contract Change Order Construction Contract Change Order Construction Contract Change Order Construction Contract Change Order Construction Contract Change Order Construction Contract Change Order

BREAKDOWN BREAKDOWN BREAKDOWN BREAKDOWN BREAKDOWN BREAKDOWN BREAKDOWN

___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________

___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________

________________________ ________________________ ________________________ ________________________ ________________________ ________________________ ________________________
________________________ ________________________ ________________________ ________________________ ________________________ ________________________ ________________________
________________________ ________________________ ________________________ ________________________ ________________________ ________________________ ________________________
________________________ ________________________ ________________________ ________________________ ________________________ ________________________ ________________________
___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________
___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________

___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________

_______________________ _______________________ _______________________ _______________________ _______________________ _______________________ _______________________

Construction Contract Change Order Construction Contract Change Order

BREAKDOWN BREAKDOWN
COMMENT SHEET COMMENT SHEET
__________________________ __________________________

__________________________ __________________________

__________________________ __________________________
__________________________ __________________________
__________________________ __________________________
__________________________ __________________________

July 2021 CO-7

 ❖ NOT FOR RECORDATION PURPOSES ❖

Facility Planning & Control

RECOMMENDATION OF ACCEPTANCE
TO: FACILITY PLANNING AND CONTROL FROM: TBA STUDIO
P.O. Box 94095 103 Cypress Street,
Baton Rouge, LA 70804-9095 West Monroe, LA, 71291
DATE: __________________
PROJECT NAME: ____________________________________________________________________________
PROJECT NUMBER: _____________________________________ WBS No. _________________________
SITE CODE: ____________ STATE ID: _____________ CFMS/SRM #: ___________________________
CONTRACTOR: ______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________

ORIGINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT: $ ____________________________________

FINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT: $ ____________________________________
FINAL BUILDING AREA (SQ. FEET):___________________________________________________
I certify that, to the best of my knowledge and belief, this project is substantially complete in accordance with the Plans
and Specifications to the point where it can be used for the purpose which was intended. It is recommended that it be
accepted.

DATE OF ACCEPTANCE:______________________________________________________________
CONTRACT DATE OF COMPLETION:___________________________________________________
NUMBER OF DAYS (OVERRUN) (UNDERRUN) (As of Acceptance Date)_______________________
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES PER DAY STIPULATED IN CONTRACT $____________________
VALUE OF PUNCH LIST $ (Attach punch list)
Was part of project occupied prior to Acceptance?
PORTION OCCUPIED: (Attach Partial Occupancy Forms)
ROOF GUAR-MANUF: START DATE: END DATE:
ROOFER: START DATE: END DATE:

Signed:___________________________________
DESIGNER
FOR USE OF PROJECT MANAGER:

Signed:___________________________________
PROJECT MANAGER

c: User Agency

❖ NOT FOR RECORDATION PURPOSES ❖

July 2021 RA-1
 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
with
Americans with Disabilities Act and Architectural Barriers Act
Accessibility Guidelines

TO: FACILITY PLANNING AND CONTROL

P.O. Box 94095
Baton Rouge, LA 70804-9095

FROM: _____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
Design Firm Name and Address

PROJECT NAME: ________________________________

________________________________
PROJECT No.: ________________________________
WBS No.: _____________
SITE CODE: _____________ STATE ID: _________

DATE OF ACCEPTANCE: _____________

I, ___________________________________________ certify that, to the best of my knowledge

and belief, this project has been constructed in compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act
and Architectural Barriers Act Accessibility Guidelines as reviewed by the fire marshal.

_________________________________________________________ Date: ______________

Designer Signature

July 2021 RA-2

 State of Louisiana
DIVISION OF ADMINISTRATION
Facility Planning and Control

CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
with
Louisiana Building Code for State Owned Buildings

TO: STATE OF LOUISIANA

DIVISION OF ADMINISTRATION
OFFICE OF FACILITY PLANNING AND CONTROL
P.O. Box 94095
Baton Rouge, LA 70804-9095

FROM: _____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
(Design Firm or Owner/User Name and Address)

PROJECT NAME: _______________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________
PROJECT No.: _______________________________________________________________
WBS No.: _________________

DATE OF ACCEPTANCE: _____________

I, ___________________________________________ certify that, to the best of my knowledge and belief, this

project has been constructed in compliance with the construction documents determined to be satisfactory by the State
of Louisiana, Division of Administration, Office of Facility Planning and Control.

____________________________________________________________ Date: ______________

(Signature of Designer or Owner/User)

July 2021 RA-3

 ❖ NOT FOR RECORDATION PURPOSES ❖

Facility Planning & Control

PARTIAL OCCUPANCY

PROJECT NAME: Campus Expansion, Louisiana Delta Community College, Winnsboro, LA

PROJECT LOCATION:

PROJECT / PART NUMBER: CFMS / SRM No.

WBS NUMBER:

CONTRACTOR:

USER AGENCY:

The below described portion of subject project is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, complete to a point where the
User desires to use in according with the Contract Documents.

DATE OCCUPIED: ______________________ .

WARRANTY items covered by Occupancy:

____________________________________________
Designer Date

____________________________________________
Contractor Date

____________________________________________
Facility Planning and Control Date

Punch List: Attached ❑

None ❑

c: User Agency, ORM

❖ NOT FOR RECORDATION PURPOSES ❖

Dec 2023 PO-1

 Facility Planning & Control
4. RECOMMENDED AGENDA FOR ROOFING CONFERENCES
Project Name:

Project Number: WBS No. :

Conference Location: Date:

Type of Conference: Preliminary Pre-Application

Architect:

Roofing Contractor:

General Contractor:

CONFERENCES ATTENDEES:

NAME ORGANIZATION TELEPHONE & FAX

July 2021 21
 AGENDA FOR PRELIMINARY ROOFING CONFERENCE

PURPOSE: Establish a direct line of

communication, iron out initial questions regarding 8. Roof Deck:
the project and to review project submittal
requirements. Type and Thickness:

TIMING: The meeting should be held shortly after

award of the Contract and at least six weeks prior to Slope: Location and Type of Drains:
the anticipated start of roofing.

1. A complete set of Contract Documents (plans

and specifications) to be available for review. Tentative Schedule for Erection:

2. All meeting minutes to be furnished to all

parties. Establish project record keeping
procedures. Nailers, curbs and sheet metal must be
completed prior to roofing application. Review FM
3. Review tentative progress schedule for roofing. or UL requirements
Set approximate date.
9. Anticipated material storage areas and
4. Review roofing system and insulation equipment set-up locations touched upon. Review
requirements. requirements.

5. Weather considerations as they may apply to the 10. Specific submittals from the Roofing Contrac-
project roofing installation. tor:

6. Temporary roofing guidelines for the project. a. Material approval list

Who and when, will final decision be made, if b. Shop drawings (if any)
necessary. c. Product material brochures and samples
d. Manufacturer's Guarantee review for
7. Inspection and Testing Requirements: compliance with specifications

Name of Inspection Firm: 11. Specific project detail discussion. (Include

Name of inspector: perimeter wall construction and rooftop mechanical
Phone: equipment details.)
________________________________
a. On-Site Inspection - Discuss 12. Other:
project requirements.
b. Laboratory Tests
13. Review above items briefly and establish date
for tentative Pre-Application Conference.

July 2021 22
 AGENDA FOR ROOFING PRE-APPLICATION CONFERENCE

PURPOSE: 6. Review roof system, including insulation above

To verify readiness of the project structure deck. Discuss the required application of each to
To review assignments of Preliminary the other components.
Conference
To scan last minute details, changes or a. Bitumens, felts, use of EVT, all typical
corrections application methods and any special techniques
To review anticipated schedule of progress required for specified system.
b. Mechanical or adhesive attachments.
TIMING: Within one week of roofing application c. Vapor Retarders
d. Flashings
ATTENDANCE: List attendees e. Saddles and/or crickets
f. Venting
(The roofing job superintendent or foreman and the g. Sheet metal
project roofing inspector should attend this
meeting.) 7. Phase Construction Guidelines for project.
Factors affecting guidelines include local practices,
1. Copies of approved submittals should be climate and weather considerations. Tie-offs at
available for review. Are any material changes days end.
required due to availability problems or other?
Reminder that formal approvals are still required. 8. Temporary roofing final decisions.

2. Review minutes of Preliminary Conference. 9. Housekeeping, material handling and finished

work protection requirements.
3. Discuss revised Roofing Application Schedule.
10. Inspection and testing requirements - who,
4. Equipment set-up and on-site material storage. frequency, type method of testing, point of
application temperature readings, reporting, etc.
5. Deck Readiness:
a. Any required roof deck certifications must 11. Project changes in plans, specifications or
be in order procedures to be followed - discuss and establish
b. Rooftop inspection by those in attendance who can approve and how documented.
c. Drain hookups complete
d. Curbs, nailers, roof deck penetrations, 12. Warranties, guarantees, manufacturer bonds or
perimeter edges and mechanical equipment - maintenance agreements (terms, types, who issues,
should all be set and complete when) for roofing and sheet metal material.

NOTES

July 2021 23
 AGENDA FOR ROOFING FINAL INSPECTION AND WRAP-UP

PURPOSE: To assure 100% completion of project 4. Summary of project records. Organize for final
requirements. file. Wrap up any loose ends. Checklist for final
documents should include:
TIMING: Just before the Roofing Contractor
concludes his work at the site. a. Warranties, guarantees, manufacturer
bonds, or maintenance agreements
1. Attendance should include those in attendance b. Inspection forms, reports, certificate of
at the Pre-Application Conference. final completion
c. Laboratory final reports (if any required)
2. Complete rooftop walk over and review:
5. Recommendation for routine maintenance
a. Perimeter edges program to owner.
b. Walls
c. Curbs and other equipment 6. Discuss responsibility for roof system
d. Drains protection until project completed. Responsibility
e. Rooftop penetrations for coordination usually rests with General
f. Site cleanup Contractor. Any damage or additional work to be
g. Sheet metal conducted by original Roofing Contractor in order
to keep original guarantee valid.
3. Final Punch List establishment of items to be
completed. Copies to all parties. 7. Final acceptance by the owner will not be made
without submittal and approval of fully executed
guarantees for each type of roof installed, which
shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the
Roofing Material Manufacturer's Guarantee, Roof
Completion Information Form and Contractor’s
Guarantee on FPC-R1, FPC-R2 or FPC-R3.

NOTES

July 2021 24
 ROOF COMPLETION INFORMATION

Facility Name ____________________________________________ Building Name _______________________________

Site I.D.. _______________ Building I.D. _________________Project No. _______________________WBS No. _________
Roof Section _________________________ Replacement _______________________________________

Roof Type: Surfacing Type: Bitumen Type: Drainage Type:

1. BUR 1. Gravel 1. Hot Asphalt 1. Over the Edge
2. SBS Mod. Bit. 2. Smooth Uncoated 2. Torched Asphalt 2. Roof Drains
3. APP Mod. Bit. 3. Modified Asphalt 3. Cold Process 3. Perimeter Gutter
4. PVC/CPV 4. Ceramic Granules 4. Pitch 4. Internal Gutter
5. PUF 5. Silicone 5. Modified 5. _________________
6. Metal 6. Acrylic 6. None
7. Shingle 7. Urethane 7. ______________ Total Penetrations:
8. Tile 8. Aluminum _____________________
9. _____________ 9. ________________
Slope: Deck Type: Insulation: No. of Piles:
1. None 1. Structural Concrete 1. Polyurethane Foam ___________________
2. 1/8 in./ft. 2. Gypsum 2. Fiberglass Insulation Thickness:
3. 1/4 in./ft. 3. Metal 3. Perlite ___________________
4. 1/2 in/ft. 4. Lt. Wt. Concrete 4. Tapered Perlite Roof Area (sq. ft.)
5. _____________ 5. Cement Fiber 5. Polystyrene ___________________
6. Wood 6. Wood Fiber
7. ________________
Roofing Contractor: Warranty Beginning Date:
_____________________________________________________________________ _________________________
Address: Warranty Ending Date:
_____________________________________________________________________ _________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Roofing Contractor’s Telephone: _________________________________________

Roofing Manufacturer: Roof Warranty Number:

_____________________________________________________________________ _________________________
Address: Beginning Date:
_____________________________________________________________________ _________________________
_____________________________________________________________________ Ending Date:
_____________________________________________________________________ _________________________
Roofing Manufacturer’s Telephone: _____________________________________

July 2021 25
 Facility Planning & Control
15. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE AGENDA
As a minimum, the following items are to be covered in the pre-construction conference. The Designer may,
at his discretion, add additional items which he feels are important to this particular project.

Control. Establish ground rules for the

1. Contractor shall furnish the following prior contractor and his personnel while working on
to his first payment:
their premises. If representatives of Facility
a. Cost breakdown (Schedule of Values), shall be Planning & Control or the using agency find
in standard Construction Specifications any discrepancies, they believe to be contrary
Institute format. to the Contract Documents, they shall notify
b. List Sub-contractors and major suppliers the designer. If it is thought that discrepancy
c. Information listed in Paragraph 7.1 of the needs immediate attention, the individual
Supplementary Conditions. discovering the discrepancy and the
d. Construction Schedule as defined in 3.10.2 of contractor's representative should call the
General Conditions and Supplementary designer for immediate resolution.
Conditions. d. Contractor - Work shall be according to the
No payments to the contractor shall be made Contract Documents, not necessarily standard
until this information is provided. practice. Emergency action to protect life or
property shall be taken immediately by the
2. Roles of Individuals: superintendent on the site. Less urgent action
shall be resolved by telephone among the
a. Designer – shall be solely responsible for the appropriate parties. Fire Marshal approved
direction of the project. The Designer shall documents shall be accessible at all times at the
keep minutes of all meetings, including project site, in accordance with Fire Marshal
construction progress meetings, and distribute requirements. Approved documents from all
within 7 days. All instructions to contractor other applicable regulatory agencies shall also
shall come from the designer. All decisions and be accessible at all times at the project site.
directions shall be in writing. Verbal
instructions shall be immediately confirmed in 3. Change Orders:
writing. The Designer and his principal
consultants shall visit the project regularly All requests for a change in time and/or money
according to the requirements of the Louisiana shall be submitted to the designer, with proper back
Capital Improvement Projects Procedure up data, for his review. The designer shall submit
Manual for Design and Construction. the Change Order to Facility Planning and Control
The Designer shall NOT assume the role of his with his recommendation of action required. The
principal consultants in site visits. Copies of Change Order shall be approved by FP&C prior to
Designer Site Visit Reports are to be sent to any additional work being performed.
Facility Planning and Control and the User
Agency on a weekly basis. a. Change Orders cannot be approved without the
b. Facility Planning and Control - Designer to proper breakdown as required by the
receive instructions only from Facility Supplementary Conditions, Section 7.2. The
Planning and Control. Program or design same requirements apply to time extension
changes shall be approved by Facility Planning requests.
and Control prior to any work being performed b. Facility Planning and Control needs only the
by the Designer. original and one (1) copy of backup.
c. User Agency - Address all requests for c. Change Orders should be rounded to the
changes through Facility Planning and nearest whole dollar amount.
d. User paid change orders are not allowed.

June 2022 82
e. User requested change orders are to be required prior to final payment to the
avoided. contractor.

4. Invoice Procedure: 5. Prior Approval:

a. Invoices may be submitted in electronic Only items as specified or prior approved in

format. accordance with the Contract Documents will be
incorporated into the project. Approval of shop
1) Contractor shall submit one Certificate for drawings does not relieve Contractor of complying
Payment directly to the Designer. Facility with the Prior Approval clause.
Planning and Control – Application and
Certification for Payment forms shall be 6. Testing Lab:
used for submittal. Certificate for payment
need not be notarized. a. The Owner will engage and pay for the testing
2) After review, the Designer shall process laboratory if required. If the Contractor
the Certificate as promptly as possible, in obtains the services of a testing laboratory, he
any case within seven (7) days. If a will be responsible for all costs for that
Certificate is held for any reason, written laboratory
notice stating the reason for delay should b. Designer should furnish Testing Lab with
be given the owner and the contractor. If written notice of types and frequency of
a Certificate is changed for any reason, required tests. Set up procedure for Testing
changes will be made to all copies. Lab notification.
3) Distribution of copies shall be as follows: c. No off site testing unless called for in the
a) Designer forwards one Certificate for Contract Documents.
Payment directly to Facility Planning and d. Facility Planning and Control will pay a
Control with a transmittal letter/memo. minimum of standby time. Contractor may be
b) Designer forwards copy of transmittal billed if not well controlled.
letter and one (1) copy of Certificate to e. Testing Lab invoices shall be submitted by
Contractor. One (1) copy retained for hardcopy or in electronic format through the
Designer records. One (1) copy sent to Designer, who in turn acknowledges their
User Agency. recognition of services submitted.

b. During construction, designer’s invoices shall 7. Project Sign

be sent directly to Facility Planning & Control.
When a project sign is specified, select location.
c. If federal funds are involved, compliance with
additional regulations is required including but 8. Meetings:
not limited to:
Davis Bacon Act - Wage rate & payroll Establish a time and place for the Monthly
records. Meeting. Designer shall notify FP&C prior to and
Drug Free Workplace Act provide minutes of all meetings to all participants
Civil Rights EOP poster with name of within 7 days.
EOP person shown.
9. Roofing:
d. Stored Materials must be on site for payment
to be made. Payment will not be made for Pre-roofing Conference - establish a direct line
materials stored in a bonded warehouse or of communication, iron out initial questions
elsewhere. regarding the project and to review project
submittal requirements. This conference should be
e. An Original 45 Day Clear Lien and an Original held shortly after award of the roofing contract and
Consent of Surety (AIA Form G707) is a minimum of six (6) weeks prior to the anticipated
start of roofing. Attendance by general contractor,

June 2022 83
roofing subcontractor and manufacturer’s jurisdiction in any action brought under
representative is required. A letter from the this contract.
manufacturer stating the roofer is an approved 10) Manufacturer’s specification to be used in
applicator and sample warranties shall be support of designer’s specification.
submitted at the Pre-roofing Conference, if not Manufacturer’s requirements are a
before. minimum, use designer’s specification if it
exceeds.
a. General Guidelines for Low Sloped Roofs 11) Track weather days including predicted
1) Details in compliance with NRCA and rain percentage. Submit to designer
Roof Manufacturer monthly with pay estimate.
2) Concrete Decks are to be primed. Pre-application Conference to verify readi-
3) Nailable Decks; Red Rosin sheet is ness of the project structure, review assignments of
required on wood decks. Preliminary Conference, scan last minute details,
4) Fastening per manufacturer’s require- changes or corrections and to review the
ments to comply with I-90 FM rating. anticipated schedule of progress. This conference
5) Asphalt should be held within one (1) week of roofing
a) Type IV asphalt shall be used for all application. Attendance by general contractor,
modified bitumen mop-down systems roofing subcontractor and superintendent or
b) Temperature at the point of foreman and manufacturer’s representative is
application shall be the EVT temperature required.
plus or minus 25 degrees. Representatives of the designer and FP&C
6) Insulation shall be visiting the site to make sure the roof is
a) All wet insulation is to be rejected and being installed per the manufacturers’ require-
removed from the site. ments and the Contract Documents. If found not in
b) All insulation joints shall be compliance, tests and corrective measures may be
staggered, including daily tie-ins. required to prove the roof is acceptable. Tests
7) Metal include Blow-Off Testing, etc.
a) Color Selection Moisture Survey - When installation is complete,
b) Gravel guard - use minimal raised lip FP&C will arrange to have a moisture survey
for areas where drainage is over the edge. performed. Deficiencies will be noted, either on
8) Drainage: Most guarantees prohibit the roof with paint or on roof plan drawing or
water remaining on the roof more than 48 both. After these deficiencies are corrected, this
hours. office will arrange to have these areas resurveyed.
9) Roofing guarantees If these deficiencies are found not to be corrected
a) No dollar limit. Guarantee system and additional survey time is required, then the
from the deck up, naming all products cost of this time will be assessed against the
within the system. contractor at a rate of $50.00 per hour through a
b) No language about "no pay, no credit change order.
guarantee". Designer: Please fill out "Roof Completion
c) Warranty start date to be on or very Information" form and submit it with the
near date of Acceptance of Building Recommendation of Acceptance. If the roofed
Contract. The roofing warranty required section is new, a scaled drawing is also needed.
for his project must meet the requirements Preferably, this drawing would be on AutoCAD in
of FP&C. It is important that the roofing compliance with the layers specified in our
manufacturer and applicator are aware of "Instructions to Designers."
this. An incomplete or incorrect warranty
will delay acceptance. 10. General Correspondence:
d) Supplementary Conditions Section
13.3.3, the Nineteenth Judicial Court in a. Project Number must be on all
and for the Parish of East Baton Rouge, correspondence.
State of Louisiana shall have sole

June 2022 84
b. Contractor shall copy Facility Planning and
Control on any correspondence if: i. Safety and First Aid. This is the contractor’s
1) It involves a controversial issue. responsibility.
2) It relates to information requests to the
Designer that had not been furnished in a j. Procedure for keeping Record Documents.
timely manner. Contractor to record as-built information that
varies from the contract documents, on (1) one
11. Miscellaneous Items to be Discussed as set of prints, to be furnished to the Designer at
Necessary: completion of the job. As-builts are prepared
by Designer, inclusive of Supplemental
a. Shop drawings, samples, hardware, and color Drawings, the Contractor, based on the as-built
schedules. Shop drawings submitted to the work and the required adjustments to the
user by the designer are for record purposes contract documents and the change orders, and
only, not for approval. Approval is the sole shall be submitted timely to Facility Planning
responsibility of the designer. and Control. Plans shall be marked "AS-
COLOR SELECTION: If the User does not BUILT". As-built drawings submitted to
approve color selections in a timely manner, FP&C shall consist of (2) two full size paper
the Designer, in consultation with FP&C, shall sets of Record Drawings (As-Built) prepared
make the selections, which will be final. by the Designer. Also required are (2) two
disks or flash drives of As-built drawings in
b. Establish the location and type of temporary AutoCAD (.dwg) and .pdf format, including
facilities and utilities. Establish how payment electronic copies of the bid specifications and
for temporary utilities will be made and how addenda. Acceptable As-builts are required
costs will be tracked? prior to the Designer’s final payment.

c. Outages/Interruptions of Services. Contractor k. Use of any Asbestos Containing materials is

is to request, in writing, all outages/inter- prohibited.
ruptions to the User. The amount of advance
notice is to be determined by the user. l. Pictures or videos of existing conditions may be
Coordination of outages or interruptions is the made.
responsibility of the contractor
m. Near the end of the project the FP&C Project
d. Contractor use/access to pertinent buildings Manager will review the work to determine
and facilities. compliance with FP&C’s ADA Non-
Comprehensive Field Checklist. Any
e. Location of staging area and/or fencing. accessibility problems identified in this review
shall be corrected before the project can be
f. Site and stored material security is the considered complete.
contractor’s responsibility.
12. Pre-Close Out Conference
g. Use of site, parking of vehicles, decals and/or
permits for parking When the project reaches 75 to 80%
completion the Designer will schedule a
h. The User shall have first refusal of salvaged meeting with the Contractor, FP&C and the
materials. Where are they to be delivered? The User to review the requirements and
contractor is responsible for the disposition of procedures for the Final Inspection and
all other materials in accordance with laws and Acceptance.
regulations.

June 2022 85
 Facility Planning & Control
16. PRE-CLOSEOUT CONFERENCE AGENDA

As a minimum, the following items are to be covered in the pre-Closeout conference. The Designer may, at
his/her discretion, add additional items which he/she feels are important to this particular project.

As the subject project nears completion, you should be reminded of several requirements pertaining to
acceptance of Facility Planning & Control projects, including:

A. Notify the local Fire Marshal's Office of the complete", the designer will complete and
date and time of the Punch List Inspection. submit to FP&C, the Recommendation of
This must be done at least 7 days prior to the Acceptance. FP&C will send the "NOTICE
scheduled date. To issue an occupancy permit OF ACCEPTANCE OF BUILDING
the Fire Marshal will require several CONTRACT" to the contractor. This is the
certifications, including: form to be filed in the courthouse. The 45-
1. Designer submitted Certificate of day lien period will not start until this
Completion (Fire Marshal form) document is filed. See Item (E).
2. Sprinkler certification
3. Fire Alarm certification E. No project shall be accepted until both the
4. Fire Extinguishers inspected and tagged Manufacturer's Roofing Warranty and the
by licensed contractor (unless invoice Contractor's Roofing Warranty are submitted
shows they are less than one year old.) and found to be in compliance with the
5. Elevator certification requirements of the Contract Documents. In
6. Boiler Inspection addition, please complete our Roof Comple-
7. All hot water heaters of 50 or more gallon tion Information form for each roof section (or
capacity must be inspected (usually have the roofer complete it.) A copy of the
handled by the User) blank form can be obtained from Facility
Planning and Control.
B. All equipment should be operating and
instructions on usage given immediately to the Review the roofing manufacturer's
User Agency. Withhold Punch List monies for guarantee to make sure it complies with the
this requirement. requirements of the Contract Documents.
1. Elevators are to be inspected by a FP&C's standard requirements (for Built-
representative of the Office of Risk up Roofing) include, but are not limited to
Management. the following:

C. Note that the 5 or 10% Retainage is only for 1. No dollar limit, leak tight warranty for at
liens. A separate amount must be withheld for least 10 years.
Punch List work. If the value of the Punch List 2. System warranty. All components of the
equals more than the funds remaining in the roofing system from the deck up are
project, Acceptance must be delayed until the warranted, excluding edge metal and
punch list value is reduced to the amount of coping. The inclusion in the warranty
remaining funds. The Designer shall provide coverage of the edge metal or coping is
the values for each item on the punch list in desirable.
accordance with R.S. 38:2248(B). 3. If the warranty has a statement such as,
"The manufacturer will not honor the
D. On deeming the project to be "substantially warranty until the roofing contractor, the
July 2021 86
 supplier and the manufacturer have been H. Facility Planning & Control requires
paid in full...,” FP&C requires either the certification by the designer that the punch
statement be removed from the warranty listed work has been completed prior to any
or a letter from the manufacturer saying payment of money withheld for the Punch List.
they have been paid and the warranty is in If the Punch List is not completed within 45
effect. days after Acceptance, the contractor may be
4. Includes membranes, base sheet and placed in default. Contractor must be paid for
insulation down to the structural deck. all punch list work completed by the end of the
5. If stated, windstorm must be at least 45 day lien period at the end of the 45 day lien
Beaufort Number 11. period.
6. If the roof manufacturer's guarantee states
that it is governed by the laws of another I. As-builts, prepared in accordance with the
state, it is unacceptable. General Instructions to Designers, must be
7. The Supplementary Conditions calls for submitted and approved prior to the Designer
any legal action to be in the Nineteenth receiving Final Payment. Contractor to record
Judicial Court in and for the Parish of East as-built information that varies from the
Baton Rouge, State of Louisiana. contract documents, on (1) one set of prints, to
be furnished to the Designer at completion of
F. The User Agency should provide a letter of the job.
concurrence prior to Acceptance.
J. The Designer shall bring to the attention of the
G. Facility Planning & Control shall not approve Contractor all deficiencies as soon as they are
payment of the 5% or 10% retainage without: discovered and shall NOT wait until the punch
1. An invoice approved by the designer, list is prepared.
2. Original Consent of Surety to Final
Payment (AIA Form G707), K. Near the end of the project the FP&C Project
3. Original Clear Lien Certificate showing Manager will review the project to determine
that 45 days have elapsed since the Notice compliance with FP&C’s ADA Non-
of Acceptance was filed with the Clerk of Comprehensive Field Checklist. Any
Court. Note that, in obtaining the clear lien accessibility problems identified in this review
certificate, the contractor should ensure shall be corrected before the project can be
that the full forty-five (45) days have considered complete.
passed and that the forty-fifth day is not a
legal holiday as legal holidays can extend
the lien period. Clear lien certificates
obtained on the forty-fifth day are not
acceptable.

NOTES:

July 2021 87
 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
COMPLETION TIME:
The Bidder shall agree to fully complete the contract within ( 210 ) consecutive calendar days, subject
to such extensions as may be granted under Paragraph 8.3, in the General Conditions and the Supplementary
Conditions, and acknowledges that this construction time will start on or before the date specified in the written
“Notice to Proceed” from the Owner.

LIQUIDATED DAMAGES:
The Bidder shall agree to pay as Liquidated Damages the amount of ( One Thousand Two Hundred )
Dollars ($1,200.00 ) for each consecutive calendar day for which the work is not complete, beginning with the
first day beyond the contract completion date stated on the “Notice to Proceed” or as amended by change order.

ARTICLE 1 1.4 A bid is a complete and properly signed proposal

to do the work or designated portion thereof for the
DEFINITIONS sums stipulated therein supported by data called for
by the Bid Documents.
1.1 The Bid Documents include the following:
1.5 Base bid is the sum stated in the bid for which the
Advertisement for Bids Bidder offers to perform the work described as the
Instructions to Bidders base, to which work may be added, or deleted for
Bid Form sums stated in alternate bids.
Bid Bond
General Conditions of the Contract for 1.6 An alternate bid (or alternate) is an amount stated
Construction, in the bid to be added to the amount of the base bid if
AIA Document A201, 2017 Edition the corresponding change in project scope or
Supplementary Conditions materials or methods of construction described in the
Contract Between Owner and Contractor Bid Documents is accepted.
and Performance and Payment Bond
Affidavit 1.7 A Bidder is one who submits a bid for a prime
User Agency Documents (if applicable) Contract with the Owner for the work described in
Change Order Form the Bid Documents.
Partial Occupancy Form
Recommendation of Acceptance 1.8 A Sub-bidder is one who submits a bid to a
Asbestos Abatement (if applicable) Bidder for materials and/or labor for a portion of the
Other Documents (if applicable) work.
Specifications & Drawings
Addenda issued during the bid period and 1.9 Where the word "Architect" is used in any of the
acknowledged in the Bid Form documents, it shall refer to the Prime Designer of the
project, regardless of discipline.
1.2 All definitions set forth in the General Conditions
of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document ARTICLE 2
A201 and the Supplementary Conditions are
applicable to the Bid Documents. PRE-BID CONFERENCE

1.3 Addenda are written and/or graphic instruments 2.1 A Pre-Bid Conference shall be held at least 10
issued by the Architect prior to the opening of bids, days before the date for receipt for bids. The
which modify or interpret the Bid Documents by Architect shall coordinate the setting of the date, time
additions, deletions, clarifications, corrections and and place for the Pre-Bid Conference with the User
prior approvals. Agency and shall notify in writing the Owner and all
who have received sets of the Bid Documents to
June 2024 IB -1
attend. The purpose of the Pre-Bid Conference is to 42:1113). Any Bidder submitting a bid in violation
familiarize Bidders with the requirements of the of this clause shall be disqualified and any contract
Project and the intent of the Bid Documents, and to entered into in violation of this clause shall be null
receive comments and information from interested and void.
Bidders. If the Pre-Bid Conference is stated in the
Advertisement for Bids to be a Mandatory Pre-Bid 3.2 The Bidder must be fully qualified under any
Conference, bids shall be accepted only from those State or local licensing law for Contractors in effect
bidders who attend the Pre-Bid Conference. at the time and at the location of the work before
Contractors who are not in attendance for the entire submitting his bid. In the State of Louisiana, Revised
Pre-Bid Conference will be considered to have not Statutes 37:2150, et seq. will be considered, if
attended. applicable.

2.2 Any revision of the Bid Documents made as a The Contractor shall be responsible for determining
result of the Pre-Bid Conference shall not be valid that all of his Sub-bidders or prospective
unless included in an addendum. Subcontractors are duly licensed in accordance with
law.
ARTICLE 3
ARTICLE 4
BIDDER'S REPRESENTATION
BID DOCUMENTS
3.1 Each Bidder by making his bid represents that:
4.1 Copies
3.1.1 He has read and understands the Bid
Documents and his bid is made in accordance 4.1.1 Bid Documents may be obtained from the
therewith. Architect for a deposit as stated in the Advertisement
for Bids. The deposit will be refunded as stated in the
3.1.2 He has visited the site and has familiarized Advertisement for Bids. No deposits will be
himself with the local conditions under which the refunded on Bid Documents returned later than ten
work is to be performed. days after receipt of bids.

3.1.3 His bid is based solely upon the materials, 4.1.1.2 As an alternative method of distribution, the
systems and equipment described in the Bid Designer may provide the Bid Documents in
Documents as advertised and as modified by electronic format. They may be obtained without
addenda. charge and without deposit as stated in the
Advertisement for Bids.
3.1.4 His bid is not based on any verbal
instructions contrary to the Bid Documents and 4.1.1.2.1 If electronic distribution is available,
addenda. printed copies will not be available from the
Designer, but arrangements can be made to obtain
3.1.5 He is familiar with Code of Governmental them through most reprographic firms and/or plan
Ethics requirement that prohibits public servants rooms.
and/or their immediate family members from bidding
on or entering into contracts; he is aware that the 4.1.1.2.2 If electronic distribution is available, the
Designer and its principal owners are considered reproduction cost on the first paper plan set acquired
Public Servants under the Code of Governmental by bona fide prime bidders will be fully refunded by
Ethics for the limited purposes and scope of the the Designer upon delivery of the documents to the
Design Contract with the State on this Project (see Designer in good condition no later than ten days
Ethics Board Advisory Opinion, No. 2009-378 and after receipt of bids.
2010-128); and neither he nor any principal of the
Bidder with a controlling interest therein has an 4.1.1.2.3 If electronic distribution is available, all
immediate family relationship with the Designer or other plan holders are responsible for their own
any principal within the Designer’s firm (see La. R.S. reproduction costs.

June 2024 IB -2
 shall be included. It shall be the responsibility of the
4.1.2 Complete sets of Bid Documents shall be proposer to include in his proposal all changes
used in preparing bids; neither the Owner nor the required of the Bid Documents if the proposed
Architect assume any responsibility for errors or product is used. Prior approval, if given, is
misinterpretations resulting from the use of contingent upon supplier being responsible for any
incomplete sets of Bid Documents. costs which may be necessary to modify the space or
facilities needed to accommodate the materials and
4.1.3 The Owner or Architect in making copies of equipment approved.
the Bid Documents available on the above terms, do
so only for the purpose of obtaining bids on the work 4.3.3 If the Architect approves any proposed
and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. substitution, such approval shall be set forth in an
addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals
4.2 Interpretation or Correction of Bid Documents made in any other manner.

4.2.1 Bidders shall promptly notify the Architect 4.4 Addenda

of any ambiguity, inconsistency or error which they
may discover upon examination of the Bid 4.4.1 Addenda will be transmitted to all who are
Documents or of the site and local conditions. known by the Architect to have received a complete
set of Bid Documents.
4.2.2 Bidders requiring clarification or
interpretation of the Bid Documents shall make a 4.4.2 Copies of addenda will be made available for
written request to the Architect, to reach him at least inspection wherever Bid Documents are on file for
seven days prior to the date for receipt of bids. that purpose.

4.2.3 Any interpretation, correction or change of 4.4.3 Except as described herein, addenda shall
the Bid Documents will be made by addendum. not be issued within a period of seventy-two (72)
Interpretations, corrections or changes of the Bid hours prior to the advertised time for the opening of
Documents made in any other manner will not be bids, excluding Saturdays, Sundays, and any other
binding and Bidders shall not rely upon such legal holidays. If the necessity arises of issuing an
interpretations, corrections and changes. addendum modifying plans and specifications within
the seventy-two (72) hour period prior to the
4.3 Substitutions advertised time for the opening of bids, then the
opening of bids shall be extended at least seven but
4.3.1 The materials, products and equipment no more than twenty-one (21) working days, without
described in the Bid Documents establish a standard the requirement of re-advertising. Facility Planning
of required function, dimension, appearance and shall be consulted prior to issuance of such an
quality to be met by any proposed substitution. No addendum and shall approve such issuance. The
substitutions shall be allowed after bids are received. revised time and date for the opening of bids shall be
stated in the addendum.
4.3.2 No substitution will be considered unless
written request for approval has been submitted by 4.4.4 Each Bidder shall ascertain from the
the Proposer and has been received by the Architect Architect prior to submitting his bid that he has
at least fourteen (14) working days prior to the received all addenda issued, and he shall
opening of bids. (La. R.S. 38:2295(C)) Each such acknowledge their receipt on the Bid Form.
request shall include the name of the material or
equipment for which it is to be substituted and a 4.4.5 The Owner shall have the right to extend the
complete description of the proposed substitute bid date by up to (30) thirty days without the
including model numbers, drawings, cuts, requirement of re-advertising. Any such extension
performance and test data and any other information shall be made by addendum issued by the Architect.
necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth
any changes in other materials, equipment or work ARTICLE 5
that incorporation of the substitute would require

June 2024 IB -3
 BID PROCEDURE amount of five percent (5.0%) of the base bid and all
alternates.
5.1 Form and Style of Bids The bid security shall be in the form of a certified
check or cashier's check drawn on a bank insured by
5.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on the Louisiana the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, or a Bid
Uniform Public Work Bid Form provided by the Bond written by a surety company licensed to do
Architect for this project. business in Louisiana and signed by the surety's agent
or attorney-in-fact. The Bid Bond shall be written on
5.1.2 The Bidder shall ensure that all applicable the Facility Planning and Control Bid Bond Form,
blanks on the bid form are completely and accurately and the surety for the bond must meet the
filled in. qualifications stated thereon. The Bid Bond shall
include the legal name of the bidder be in favor of the
5.1.3 Bid sums shall be expressed in both words State of Louisiana, Division of Administration,
and figures, and in case of discrepancy between the Office of Facility Planning and Control, and shall be
two, the written words shall govern. accompanied by appropriate power of attorney. The
Bid Bond must be signed by both the bidder/principal
5.1.4 Any interlineation, alteration or erasure must and the surety in the space provided on the Facility
be initialed by the signer of the bid or his authorized Planning and Control Bid Bond Form. Failure by the
representative. bidder/principal or the surety to sign the bid bond
shall result in the rejection of the bid.
5.1.5 Bidders are cautioned to complete all Bid security furnished by the Contractor shall
alternates should such be required in the Bid Form. guarantee that the Contractor will, if awarded the
Failure to submit alternate prices will render the bid work according to the terms of his proposal, enter into
non responsive and shall cause its rejection. the Contract and furnish Performance and Payment
Bonds as required by these Bid Documents, within
5.1.6 Bidders are cautioned to complete all unit fifteen (15) days after written notice that the
prices should such be required in the Bid Form. Unit instrument is ready for his signature.
prices represent a price proposal to do a specified Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such
quantity and quality of work. Unit prices are Contract or fail to furnish such bonds, the amount of
incorporated into the base bid or alternates, as the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as
indicated on the Unit Price Form, but are not the sole liquidated damages, not as penalty.
components thereof.
5.2.2 The Owner will have the right to retain the
5.1.7 Bidder shall make no additional stipulations bid security of Bidders until either (a) the Contract
on the Bid Form nor qualify his bid in any other has been executed and bonds have been furnished, or
manner. (b) the specified time has elapsed so that bids may be
withdrawn, or (c) all bids have been rejected.
5.1.8 Written evidence of the authority of the
person signing the bid for the public work shall be 5.3 Submission of Bids
submitted in accordance with La. R.S. 38:2212
(B)(5). 5.3.1 The Bid shall be sealed in an opaque
envelope. The bid envelope shall be identified on the
5.1.9 On any bid in excess of fifty thousand dollars outside with the name of the project, and the name,
($50,000.00), the Contractor shall certify that he is address, and license number of the Bidder.
licensed under La. R.S. 37: 2150-2173 and show his The envelope shall not contain multiple bid forms,
license number on the bid above his signature or his and will be received until the time specified and at the
duly authorized representative. place specified in the Advertisement for Bids. It shall
be the specific responsibility of the Bidder to deliver
5.2 Bid Security his sealed bid to Facility Planning and Control
Department at the appointed place and prior to the
5.2.1 No bid shall be considered or accepted announced time for the opening of bids. Late
unless the bid is accompanied by bid security in an delivery of a bid for any reason, including late

June 2024 IB -4
delivery by United States Mail, or express delivery, errors is furnished to the public entity within forty-
shall disqualify the bid. eight hours of the bid opening excluding Saturdays,
Sundays, and legal holidays".
If the bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope
shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with 5.4.2 Prior to the time and date designated for
the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof. Such receipt of bids, bids submitted early may be modified
bids shall be sent by Registered or Certified Mail, or withdrawn only by notice to the party receiving
Return Receipt Requested, addressed to: bids at the place and prior to the time designated for
Facility Planning and Control, receipt of bids.
P. 0. Box 94095
Baton Rouge, Louisiana, 70804-9095. 5.4.3 Withdrawn bids may be resubmitted up to
Bids sent by express delivery shall be delivered to: the time designated for the receipt of bids provided
Facility Planning and Control that they are then fully in conformance with these
Suite 7-160 Instructions to Bidders.
Claiborne Office Building
1201 North Third Street 5.4.4 Bid Security shall be in an amount sufficient
Baton Rouge, Louisiana 70802 for the bid as modified or resubmitted.

5.3.2 Bids shall be deposited at the designated 5.5 Prohibition of Discriminatory Boycotts of Israel
location prior to the time on the date for receipt of
bids indicated in the Advertisement for Bids, or any By submitting a bid, the bidder certifies and agrees
extension thereof made by addendum. Bids received that the following information is correct:
after the time and date for receipt of bids will be
returned unopened. In preparing its bid, the bidder has considered all
proposals submitted from qualified, potential
5.3.3 Bidder shall assume full responsibility for subcontractors and suppliers, and has not, in the
timely delivery at location designated for receipt of solicitation, selection, or commercial treatment of
bids. any subcontractor or supplier, refused to transact or
terminated business activities, or taken other actions
5.3.4 Oral, telephonic or telegraphic bids are intended to limit commercial relations, with a person
invalid and shall not receive consideration. Owner or entity that is engaging in commercial transactions
shall not consider notations written on outside of bid in Israel or Israel-controlled territories, with the
envelope which have the effect of amending the bid. specific intent to accomplish a boycott or divestment
Written modifications enclosed in the bid envelope, of Israel. The bidder has also not retaliated against
and signed or initialed by the Contractor or his any person or other entity for reporting such refusal,
representative, shall be accepted. termination, or commercially limiting actions. The
state reserves the right to reject any bid if this
5.4 Modification or Withdrawal of Bid certification is subsequently determined to be false
and to terminate any contract awarded based on such
5.4.1 A bid may not be modified, withdrawn or a false response.
canceled by the Bidder during the time stipulated in
the Advertisement for Bids, for the period following ARTICLE 6
the time and bid date designated for the receipt of
bids, and Bidder so agrees in submitting his bid, CONSIDERATION OF BIDS
except in accordance with R.S. 38:2214 which states,
in part, "Bids containing patently obvious, 6.1 Opening of Bids
unintentional, and substantial mechanical, clerical, or
mathematical errors, or errors of unintentional 6.1.1 The properly identified Bids received on
omission of a substantial quantity of work, labor, time will be opened publicly and will be read aloud,
material, or services made directly in the compilation and a tabulation abstract of the amounts of the base
of the bid, may be withdrawn by the contractor if bids and alternates, if any, will be made available to
clear and convincing sworn, written evidence of such Bidders.

June 2024 IB -5
 7.1.2 The General Contractor shall be responsible
6.2 Rejection of Bids for actions or inactions of Subcontractors and/or
material suppliers.
6.2.1 The Owner shall have the right to reject any The General Contractor is totally responsible for
or all bids and in particular to reject a bid not any lost time or extra expense incurred due to a
accompanied by any required bid security or data Subcontractor's or Material Supplier's failure to
required by the Bid Documents or a bid in any way perform. Failure to perform includes, but is not
incomplete or irregular. limited to, a Subcontractor's financial failure,
abandonment of the project, failure to make prompt
6.3 Acceptance of Bid delivery, or failure to do work up to standard. Under
no circumstances shall the Owner mitigate the
6.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner, if he accepts any General Contractor's losses or reimburse the General
alternates, to accept them in the order in which they Contractor for losses caused by these events.
are listed in the Bid Form. Determination of the Low
Bidder shall be on the basis of the sum of the base bid 7.1.3 The lowest responsive and responsible
and the alternates accepted. However, the Owner bidder shall submit to the Architect and the Owner
shall reserve the right to accept alternates in any order within ten days after the bid opening a letter/letters
which does not affect determination of the Low from the manufacturer stating that the manufacturer
Bidder. will issue the roof system guarantee complying with
ARTICLE 7 the requirements of Facility Planning and Control
based on the specified roof system and include the
POST-BID INFORMATION name of the applicator acceptable to the manufacturer
at the highest level of certification for installing the
7.1 Submissions specified roof system. This manufacturer shall be
one that has received prior approval or is named in
7.1.1 At the Pre-Construction Conference, the the specifications.
Contractor shall submit the following information to
the Architect. In accordance with La. R.S. 38:2227 [references La
R.S. 38:2212(A)(3)(c)(ii), which has since been
7.1.1.1 A designation of the work to be performed renumbered as La R.S. 38:2212(B)(3)], La. R.S.
by the Contractor with his own forces. 38:2212.10 and La. R.S. 23:1726(B) the apparent
low bidder on this project shall submit the
7.1.1.2 A breakdown of the Contract cost completed Attestations Affidavit (Past Criminal
attributable to each item listed in the Schedule of Convictions of Bidders, Verification of Employees
Values Form (attached). No payments will be made and Certification Regarding Unpaid Workers
to the Contractor until this is received. Compensation Insurance) form found within this
bid package to Facility Planning and Control within
7.1.1.3 The proprietary names and the suppliers of 10 days after the opening of bids.
principal items or systems of material and equipment
proposed for the work.
ARTICLE 8
7.1.1.4 A list of names and business domiciles of all
Subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers or other PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND
persons or organizations (including those who are to
furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special 8.1 Bond Required
design) proposed for the principal portions of the
work. It is the preference of the Owner that, to the 8.1.1 The Contractor shall furnish and pay for a
greatest extent possible or practical, the Contractor Performance and Payment Bond written by a
utilize Louisiana Subcontractors, manufacturers, company licensed to do business in Louisiana, which
suppliers and labor. shall be signed by the surety's agent or
attorney-in-fact, in an amount equal to 100% of the
Contract amount. Surety must be listed currently on

June 2024 IB -6
the U. S. Department of Treasury Financial
Management Service List (Treasury List) as 8.2.3 The Bidder shall require the
approved for an amount equal to or greater than the Attorney-in-Fact who executes the required bond on
contract amount, or must be an insurance company behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and
domiciled in Louisiana or owned by Louisiana current copy of his power of Attorney.
residents. If surety is qualified other than by listing
on the Treasury list, the contract amount may not ARTICLE 9
exceed fifteen percent of policyholders' surplus as
shown by surety's most recent financial statements FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER
filed with the Louisiana Department of Insurance and AND CONTRACTOR
may not exceed the amount of $500,000. However,
a Louisiana domiciled insurance company with at 9.1 Form to be Used
least an A- rating in the latest printing of the A. M.
Best's Key Rating Guide shall not be subject to the 9.1.1 Form of the Contract to be used shall be
$500,000 limitation, provided that the contract furnished by Facility Planning and Control, an
amount does not exceed ten percent of policyholders' example of which is bound in the Bid Documents.
surplus as shown in the latest A. M. Best's Key Rating
Guide nor fifteen percent of policyholders' surplus as 9.2 Award
shown by surety's most recent financial statements
filed with the Louisiana Department of Insurance. 9.2.1 After award of the Contract, the successful
The Bond shall be signed by the surety's agent or Bidder, if a corporation, shall furnish to the Owner
attorney-in-fact. The Bond shall be in favor of the the most current copy of a Disclosure of Ownership
State of Louisiana, Office of Facility Planning and Affidavit on file with the Secretary of State.
Control.
9.2.2 In accordance with Louisiana Law, when the
8.2 Time of Delivery and Form of Bond Contract is awarded, the successful Bidder shall, at
the time of the signing of the Contract, execute the
8.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bond to Non-Collusion Affidavit included in the Contract
the Owner simultaneous with the execution of the Documents
Contract.
9.2.3 When this project is financed either partially
8.2.2 Bond shall be in the form furnished by or entirely with State Bonds, the award of this
Facility Planning and Control, entitled CONTRACT Contract is contingent upon the sale of bonds by the
BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR AND State Bond Commission. The State shall incur no
PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND, a copy obligation to the Contractor until the Contract
of which is included in the Bid Documents. Between Owner and Contractor is duly executed.

June 2024 IB -7
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

DOCUMENT 002513 - PREBID MEETINGS

1.1 PREBID MEETING

A. Construction Manager will conduct a Prebid meeting as indicated below:

1. Location: Delta Community College – Winnsboro, Louisiana.

B. Attendance:

1. Prime Bidders: Attendance at Prebid meeting is not mandatory but recommended.

2. Subcontractors: Attendance at Prebid meeting is recommended.

C. Bidder Questions: Submit written questions to be addressed at Prebid meeting minimum of two
business days prior to meeting.

D. Agenda: Prebid meeting agenda may include review of topics that may affect proper
preparation and submittal of bids, including the following:

1. Procurement and Contracting Requirements:

a. Advertisement for Bids.

b. Instructions to Bidders.
c. Bidder Qualifications.
d. Bonding.
e. Insurance.
f. Bid Security.
g. Bid Form and Attachments.
h. Bid Submittal Requirements.
i. Bid Submittal Checklist.
j. Notice of Award.

2. Communication during Bidding Period:

a. Obtaining documents.
b. Access to Project Web site.
c. Bidder's Requests for Information.
d. Bidder's Substitution Request/Prior Approval Request.
e. Addenda.

3. Contracting Requirements:

a. Agreement.
b. The General Conditions.
c. The Supplementary Conditions.
d. Other User Agency requirements.

PREBID MEETINGS 002513 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

4. Construction Documents:

a. Scopes of Work.
b. Temporary Facilities.
c. Use of Site.
d. Work Restrictions.
e. Alternates, Allowances, and Unit Prices.
f. Substitutions following award.

5. Separate Contracts:

a. Work by User Agency.

b. Work of Other Contracts.

6. Schedule:

a. Project Schedule.
b. Contract Time.
c. Liquidated Damages.
d. Other Bidder Questions.

7. Site/facility visit or walkthrough.

8. Post-Meeting Addendum.

E. Modifications to the Procurement and Contracting Documents are issued by written Addendum
only.

END OF DOCUMENT 002513

PREBID MEETINGS 002513 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

DOCUMENT 002600 - PROCUREMENT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

1.1 DEFINITIONS

A. Procurement Substitution Requests: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment,

and methods of construction from those indicated in the Procurement and Contracting
Documents, submitted prior to receipt of bids.

B. Substitution Requests: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of
construction from those indicated in the Contract Documents, submitted following Contract
award. See Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for conditions under which Substitution
requests will be considered following Contract award.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed

substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform
compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.3 PROCUREMENT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Procurement Substitutions, General: By submitting a bid, the Bidder represents that its bid is
based on materials and equipment described in the Procurement and Contracting Documents,
including Addenda. Bidders are encouraged to request approval of qualifying substitute
materials and equipment when the Specifications Sections list materials and equipment by
product or manufacturer name.

B. Procurement Substitution Requests will be received and considered by Owner when the
following conditions are satisfied, as determined by Architect; otherwise, requests will be
returned without action:

1. Extensive revisions to the Contract Documents are not required.

2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of the Contract Documents,
including the level of quality of the Work represented by the requirements therein.
3. The request is fully documented and properly submitted.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Procurement Substitution Request: Submit to Architect. Procurement Substitution Request

must be made in writing in compliance with the following requirements:

1. Requests for substitution of materials and equipment will be considered if received no

later than 7 business days prior to date of bid opening.
2. Submittal Format: Submit 1 copy of each written Procurement Substitution Request,
using CSI Substitution Request Form 1.5C.

PROCUREMENT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 002600 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

a. Procurement Substitution Request may be submitted via email in PDF format or

mailed. Faxed requests will not be accepted.

1) Contact: Kade Brandon

2) Email: [email protected]
3) Mailing Address: TBA Studio, 103 Cypress Street, West Monroe, LA
71291

B. Architect's Action:

1. Architect may request additional information or documentation necessary for evaluation

of the Procurement Substitution Request. Architect will notify all bidders of acceptance
of the proposed substitute by means of an Addendum to the Procurement and Contracting
Documents.

C. Architect's approval of a substitute during bidding does not relieve Contractor of the
responsibility to submit required shop drawings and to comply with all other requirements of
the Contract Documents.

END OF DOCUMENT 002600

PROCUREMENT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 002600 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information.
2. Work covered by Contract Documents.
3. Phased construction.
4. Work under separate contracts.
5. Access to site.
6. Coordination with occupants.
7. Work restrictions.
8. Specification and drawing conventions.
9. Miscellaneous provisions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures
governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: LDCC Winnsboro Campus Expansion

1. Project Location: Winnsboro, Louisiana.

B. Owner: Louisiana Community and Technical College System.

C. Architect: TBA Studio, 103 Cypress Street, West Monroe, Louisiana 71291.

D. Project Web Site: A project Web site administered by Architect will be used for purposes of
managing communication and documents during the construction stage.

1. See Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." for requirements for using
Project Web site.

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:
1. This project consists of a new classroom addition of approximately 29,000 sq ft
consisting of classrooms, faculty offices, welding and automotive shops, restrooms,
administration offices, conference room, reception area and staff lounge. The project also

SUMMARY 011000 - 1
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

includes the renovation of the existing approximately 19.000 sq.ft. classroom building
consisting of classrooms, faculty offices, shops and labs.

B. Type of Contract.

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.4 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during
construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform
work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. Owner will require limited/restricted
access during planned events. Schedule to be provided to Contractor.

1.5 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of
entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.

C. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site
is not permitted.

1.6 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The
words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied
where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated
otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work

of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are
described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to
identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in
the individual Specifications Sections.

SUMMARY 011000 - 2
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part

of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.
3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing
Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000

SUMMARY 011000 - 3
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable

product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from

those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A.

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be

provided, if applicable.
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other
parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section.
Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific
features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work
specified.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,
from ICC-ES.
j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays
in delivery.
k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible
with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.
m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated
results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor through Construction Manager of acceptance or rejection
of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of
additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or

Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed

substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform
compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for
change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related
submittals.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

b. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.

c. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
d. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
e. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
f. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
g. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received
within 45 days after the Notice of Award.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied:

a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy

conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities
Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include
compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of
other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.
b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents.
c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 012500

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.

1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue through Construction Manager supplemental instructions authorizing minor
changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Construction Manager will issue a detailed description of

proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract
Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and
Specifications.

1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Construction Manager are not instructions
either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 15 days, when not otherwise specified, after
receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the
Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data
to substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting
an extension of the Contract Time.

B. Contractor-Initiated Work Change Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require

modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a
change to Construction Manager.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
Contract Time.
6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed
change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS

A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 012100 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for
preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of
allowances.

1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Construction Manager will issue a
Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.

1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction/Work Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction/Work Change

Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction/Work Change Directive instructs Contractor
to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction/Work Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the

Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum
or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction/Work Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to
substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 012600

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process
Applications for Payment.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 012100 "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing the handling and
processing of allowances.
2. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for
handling changes to the Contract.
3. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements
governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule.

1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's

construction schedule.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms
and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.

b. Submittal schedule.
c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction
schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect through Construction Manager at earliest

possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of
initial Applications for Payment.
3. Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring
separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each
phase of payment.

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for
the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location.

b. Name of Architect.
c. Architect's project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.

PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703.

3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project
Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts
in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated
and stored, but not yet installed.
6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance.
Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by
measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine
quantities.
8. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values
or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result
in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial

Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement
between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application
for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form
for Applications for Payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Construction Manager will return
incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule.
Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last
day of construction period covered by application.

PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

E. Transmittal: Submit four signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment
to Construction Manager by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include
waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.

F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's
lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and
related to the Work covered by the payment.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
deduction for retainage, on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full
waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.

G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of values.
3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).
4. Schedule of unit prices.
5. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).
6. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
7. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
8. Copies of building permits.
9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for
performance of the Work.
10. Initial progress report.
11. Report of preconstruction conference.
12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.

H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of
Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion
for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

I. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final
Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted
and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.

PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof
that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4. AIA Document G706-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
5. AIA Document G706A-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
6. AIA Document G707-1994, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
7. Evidence that claims have been settled.
8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of
date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed
responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 012900

PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 4

 LDCC Winnsboro Campus
TBA Studio
Expansion
March 2

SECTION 013000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. General administrative requirements.

B. Electronic document submittal service.

C. Preconstruction meeting.

D. Site mobilization meeting.

E. Progress meetings.

F. Construction progress schedule.

G. Contractor's daily reports.

H. Progress photographs.

I. Coordination drawings.

J. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout.

K. Number of copies of submittals.

L. Requests for Interpretation (RFI) procedures.

M. Submittal procedures.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 013216 - Construction Progress Schedule: Form, content, and administration of

schedules.

B. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: General product requirements.

C. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements.

D. Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents; operation and maintenance
data; warranties and bonds.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AIA G716 - Request for Information 2004.

Administrative
013000 - 1
Requirements055000-1
 LDCC Winnsboro Campus
TBA Studio 2-22-22
Expansion
B. AIA G810 - Transmittal Letter 2001.

C. CSI/CSC Form 12.1A - Submittal Transmittal Current Edition.

D. CSI/CSC Form 13.2A - Request for Information Current Edition.

METAL FABRICATIONS
1.04 GENERAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements of Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements for
coordination of execution of administrative tasks with timing of construction activities.

B. Make the following types of submittals to Architect:

1. Requests for Interpretation (RFI).
2. Requests for substitution.
3. Shop drawings, product data, and samples.
4. Test and inspection reports.
5. Design data.
6. Manufacturer's instructions and field reports.
7. Applications for payment and change order requests.
8. Progress schedules.
9. Coordination drawings.
10. Correction Punch List and Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.
11. Closeout submittals.

1.05 PROJECT COORDINATOR

A. Project Coordinator: Construction Manager.

B. Cooperate with the Project Coordinator in allocation of mobilization areas of site; for field
offices and sheds, for heavy machinery access, traffic, and parking facilities.

C. During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Project Coordinator.

D. Comply with Project Coordinator's procedures for intra-project communications; submittals,

reports and records, schedules, coordination drawings, and recommendations; and resolution of
ambiguities and conflicts.

E. Comply with instructions of the Project Coordinator for use of temporary utilities and
construction facilities. Responsibility for providing temporary utilities and construction
facilities is identified in Section 011000 - Summary.

F. Coordinate field engineering and layout work under instructions of the Project Coordinator.

G. Make the following types of submittals to Architect through the Project Coordinator:
1. Requests for Interpretation.
2. Requests for substitution.
3. Shop drawings, product data, and samples.
4. Test and inspection reports.
Administrative
METAL FABRICATIONS 013000 - 2
Requirements055000-1
 LDCC Winnsboro Campus
TBA Studio 2-22-22
Expansion
5. Manufacturer's instructions and field reports.
6. Applications for payment and change order requests.
7. Progress schedules.
8. Coordination drawings.
9. Correction Punch List and Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.
10. Closeout submittals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL SERVICE

A. All documents transmitted for purposes of administration of the contract are to be in electronic
(PDF, MS Word, or MS Excel) format, as appropriate to the document, and transmitted via an
Internet-based submittal service that receives, logs and stores documents, provides electronic
stamping and signatures, and notifies addressees via email.
1. Besides submittals for review, information, and closeout, this procedure applies to
Requests for Interpretation (RFIs), progress documentation, contract modification
documents (e.g. supplementary instructions, change proposals, change orders),
applications for payment, field reports and meeting minutes, Contractor's correction
punchlist, and any other document any participant wishes to make part of the project
record.
2. Contractor and Architect are required to use this service.
3. It is Contractor's responsibility to submit documents in allowable format.
4. Subcontractors, suppliers, and Architect's consultants will be permitted to use the service
at no extra charge.
5. Users of the service need an email address, internet access, and PDF review software that
includes ability to mark up and apply electronic stamps (such as Adobe Acrobat,
www.adobe.com, or Bluebeam PDF Revu, www.bluebeam.com), unless such software
capability is provided by the service provider.
6. Paper document transmittals will not be reviewed; emailed electronic documents will not
be reviewed.
7. All other specified submittal and document transmission procedures apply, except that
electronic document requirements do not apply to samples or color selection charts. B.
Submittal Service: The selected service is:

C. Training: One, one-hour, web-based training session will be arranged for all participants, with
representatives of Architect and Contractor participating; further training is the responsibility of
the user of the service.

D. Project Closeout: Architect will determine when to terminate the service for the project and is
responsible for obtaining archive copies of files for Owner.

3.02 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. Schedule meeting after Notice of Award.

Administrative
METAL FABRICATIONS 013000 - 3
Requirements055000-1
 LDCC Winnsboro Campus
TBA Studio 2-22-22
Expansion
B. Project Coordinator will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award.

C. Attendance Required:
1. Owner.
2. Architect.
3. Contractor.

D. Agenda:
1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement.
2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates.
3. Distribution of Contract Documents.
4. Submission of list of subcontractors, list of products, schedule of values, and progress
schedule.
5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract, Contractor, Owner, and
Architect.
6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for
payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures.
7. Scheduling.
8. Scheduling activities of a Geotechnical Engineer.

E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two
copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.03 SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING

A. Project Coordinator will schedule meeting at the Project site prior to Contractor occupancy.

B. Attendance Required:
1. Contractor.
2. Owner.
3. Architect.
4. Contractor's superintendent.
5. Major subcontractors.

C. Agenda:
1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor.
2. Owner's requirements.
3. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner.
4. Temporary utilities provided by Owner.
5. Survey and building layout.
6. Security and housekeeping procedures.
7. Schedules.
8. Application for payment procedures.
9. Procedures for testing.
10. Procedures for maintaining record documents.
11. Requirements for start-up of equipment.
12. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period.
Administrative
METAL FABRICATIONS 013000 - 4
Requirements055000-1
 LDCC Winnsboro Campus
TBA Studio 2-22-22
Expansion
D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two
copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Attendance Required:
1. Contractor.
2. Owner.
3. Architect.
4. Contractor's superintendent.
5. Major subcontractors.

B. Agenda:
1. Review minutes of previous meetings.
2. Review of work progress.
3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.
4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress.
5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.
6. Maintenance of progress schedule.
7. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
8. Planned progress during succeeding work period.
9. Maintenance of quality and work standards.
10. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.
11. Other business relating to work.

C. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two
copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.05 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

A. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days.

B. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete
schedule for review.
1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed
schedule.

C. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule.

D. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.

3.06 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS

A. Include only factual information. Do not include personal remarks or opinions regarding
operations and/or personnel.

B. In addition to transmitting electronically a copy to Owner and Architect, submit two printed
copies at weekly intervals.
Administrative
METAL FABRICATIONS 013000 - 5
Requirements055000-1
 LDCC Winnsboro Campus
TBA Studio 2-22-22
Expansion
1. Submit in format acceptable to Architect.

C. Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at
Project site and project progress:
1. Date.
2. High and low temperatures, and general weather conditions.
3. List of subcontractors at Project site.
4. Major equipment at Project site.
5. Material deliveries.
6. Safety, environmental, or industrial relations incidents.
7. Meetings and significant decisions.
8. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. Include comparison between scheduled work
activities (in Contractor's most recently updated and published schedule) and actual
activities. Explain differences, if any. Note days or periods when no work was in progress
and explain the reasons why.
9. Testing and/or inspections performed.
10. Signature of Contractor's authorized representative.
3.07 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Submit new photographs at least once a month, within 3 days after being taken.

B. Photography Type: Digital; electronic files.

C. Provide photographs of site and construction throughout progress of work produced by an

experienced photographer, acceptable to Architect.

D. In addition to periodic, recurring views, take photographs of each of the following events:
1. Completion of site clearing.
2. Excavations in progress.
3. Foundations in progress and upon completion.
4. Structural framing in progress and upon completion.
5. Enclosure of building, upon completion.
6. Final completion, minimum of ten (10) photos.

E. Take photographs as evidence of existing project conditions as follows:

1. Interior views: [____].
2. Exterior views: [____].

F. Views:
1. Provide non-aerial photographs from four cardinal views at each specified time, until date
of Substantial Completion.
2. Consult with Architect for instructions on views required.
3. Provide factual presentation.
4. Provide correct exposure and focus, high resolution and sharpness, maximum depth of
field, and minimum distortion.

G. Digital Photographs: 24 bit color, minimum resolution of 1024 by 768, in JPG format; provide
files unaltered by photo editing software.
Administrative
METAL FABRICATIONS 013000 - 6
Requirements055000-1
 LDCC Winnsboro Campus
TBA Studio 2-22-22
Expansion
1. Delivery Medium: Via email.
2. File Naming: Include project identification, date and time of view, and view
identification.
3. PDF File: Assemble all photos into printable pages in PDF format, with 2 to 3 photos per
page, each photo labeled with file name; one PDF file per submittal.

H. Photographer Quality Prints: Full color; three prints of each view.

1. Glossy; smooth texture; white tint; single weight; high contrast.
2. Size: 8 by 10 inch (200 by 250 mm); mounted for binder and tabs.
3. Identify each print on back. Identify name of Project, contract number, phase, orientation
of view, date and time of view, name and address of photographer, and photographer's
numbered identification of exposure.

3.08 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Provide information required by Project Coordinator for preparation of coordination drawings.

B. Review drawings prior to submission to Architect.

3.09 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI)

A. Definition: A request seeking one of the following:

1. A resolution to an issue which has arisen due to field conditions and affects design intent.

B. Whenever possible, request clarifications at the next appropriate project progress meeting, with
response entered into meeting minutes, rendering unnecessary the issuance of a formal RFI.

C. Preparation: Prepare an RFI immediately upon discovery of a need for interpretation of Contract
Documents. Failure to submit a RFI in a timely manner is not a legitimate cause for claiming
additional costs or delays in execution of the work.
1. Prepare a separate RFI for each specific item.
2. Prepare in a format and with content acceptable to Architect.
a. Use AIA G716 - Request for Information .
b. Use CSI/CSC Form 13.2A - Request for Interpretation.
3. Prepare using an electronic version of the form appended to this section.
4. Prepare using software provided by the Electronic Document Submittal Service.
5. Combine RFI and its attachments into a single electronic file. PDF format is preferred.

D. Reason for the RFI: Prior to initiation of an RFI, carefully study all Contract Documents to
confirm that information sufficient for their interpretation is definitely not included.
1. Include in each request Contractor's signature attesting to good faith effort to determine
from Contract Documents information requiring interpretation.

E. Content: Include identifiers necessary for tracking the status of each RFI, and information
necessary to provide an actionable response.
1. Official Project name and number, and any additional required identifiers established in
Contract Documents.
2. Owner's, Architect's, and Contractor's names.
3. Discrete and consecutive RFI number, and descriptive subject/title.
Administrative
METAL FABRICATIONS 013000 - 7
Requirements055000-1
 LDCC Winnsboro Campus
TBA Studio 2-22-22
Expansion
4. Issue date, and requested reply date.
5. Reference to particular Contract Document(s) requiring additional
information/interpretation. Identify pertinent drawing and detail number and/or
specification section number, title, and paragraph(s).
6. Annotations: Field dimensions and/or description of conditions which have engendered
the request.
7. Contractor's suggested resolution: A written and/or a graphic solution, to scale, is required
in cases where clarification of coordination issues is involved, for example; routing,
clearances, and/or specific locations of work shown diagrammatically in Contract
Documents. If applicable, state the likely impact of the suggested resolution on Contract
Time or the Contract Sum.

F. Attachments: Include sketches, coordination drawings, descriptions, photos, submittals, and

other information necessary to substantiate the reason for the request.

G. RFI Log: Prepare and maintain a tabular log of RFIs for the duration of the project.
1. Indicate current status of every RFI. Update log promptly and on a regular basis.
2. Note dates of when each request is made, and when a response is received.
3. Highlight items requiring priority or expedited response.
4. Highlight items for which a timely response has not been received to date.
5. Identify and include improper or frivolous RFIs.
H. Review Time: Architect will respond and return RFIs to Contractor within seven calendar days
of receipt. For the purpose of establishing the start of the mandated response period, RFIs
received after 12:00 noon will be considered as having been received on the following regular
working day.
1. Response period may be shortened or lengthened for specific items, subject to mutual
agreement, and recorded in a timely manner in progress meeting minutes.

I. Responses: Content of answered RFIs will not constitute in any manner a directive or
authorization to perform extra work or delay the project. If in Contractor's belief it is likely to
lead to a change to Contract Sum or Contract Time, promptly issue a notice to this effect, and
follow up with an appropriate Change Order request to Owner.
1. Response may include a request for additional information, in which case the original RFI
will be deemed as having been answered, and an amended one is to be issued forthwith.
Identify the amended RFI with an R suffix to the original number.
2. Upon receipt of a response, promptly review and distribute it to all affected parties, and
update the RFI Log.
3. Notify Architect within seven calendar days if an additional or corrected response is
required by submitting an amended version of the original RFI, identified as specified
above.

3.10 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

3.11 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:
1. Product data.
Administrative
METAL FABRICATIONS 013000 - 8
Requirements055000-1
 LDCC Winnsboro Campus
TBA Studio 2-22-22
Expansion
2. Shop drawings.
3. Samples for selection.
4. Samples for verification.

B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for compliance with
information given and the design concept expressed in Contract Documents. C. Samples
will be reviewed for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.

D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 017800 - Closeout
Submittals.

3.12 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information:
1. Design data.
2. Certificates.
3. Test reports.
4. Inspection reports.
5. Manufacturer's instructions.
6. Manufacturer's field reports.
7. Other types indicated.

B. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner.

3.13 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Submit Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.

B. Submit Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.

C. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout in
compliance with requirements of Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals:
1. Project record documents.
2. Operation and maintenance data.
3. Warranties.
4. Bonds.
5. Other types as indicated.

D. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion.

3.14 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS

A. Electronic Documents: Submit one electronic copy in PDF format; an electronically-marked up

file will be returned. Create PDFs at native size and right-side up; illegible files will be rejected.

B. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be
retained by Architect.
1. After review, produce duplicates.
Administrative
METAL FABRICATIONS 013000 - 9
Requirements055000-1
 LDCC Winnsboro Campus
TBA Studio 2-22-22
Expansion
2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated.

3.15 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Requirements:
1. Use a separate transmittal for each item.
2. Transmit using approved form.
a. Use Contractor's form, subject to prior approval by Architect.
3. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification
of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction work, and coordination of
information is in accordance with the requirements of the work and Contract Documents.
a. Submittals from sources other than the Contractor, or without Contractor's stamp
will not be acknowledged, reviewed, or returned.
4. Deliver each submittal on date noted in submittal schedule, unless an earlier date has been
agreed to by all affected parties, and is of the benefit to the project. a. Deliver
submittals to Architect at business address or via email.
5. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items.
a. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from
the Contractor.
b. For sequential reviews involving Architect's consultants, Owner, or another
affected party, allow an additional 7 days.
6. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps.
7. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.
8. Distribute reviewed submittals. Instruct parties to promptly report inability to comply
with requirements.
9. Incomplete submittals will not be reviewed, unless they are partial submittals for distinct
portion(s) of the work, and have received prior approval for their use.

B. Product Data Procedures:

1. Submit only information required by individual specification sections.
2. Collect required information into a single submittal.
3. Do not submit (Material) Safety Data Sheets for materials or products.

C. Shop Drawing Procedures:

1. Prepare accurate, drawn-to-scale, original shop drawing documentation by interpreting
Contract Documents and coordinating related work.
2. Generic, non-project-specific information submitted as shop drawings do not meet the
requirements for shop drawings.

D. Samples Procedures:
1. Transmit related items together as single package.
2. Identify each item to allow review for applicability in relation to shop drawings showing
installation locations.

3.16 SUBMITTAL REVIEW

Administrative
METAL FABRICATIONS 013000 - 10
Requirements055000-1
 LDCC Winnsboro Campus
TBA Studio 2-22-22
Expansion
A. Submittals for Review: Architect will review each submittal, and approve, or take other
appropriate action.

B. Submittals for Information: Architect will acknowledge receipt and review. See below for
actions to be taken.

C. Architect's actions will be reflected by marking each returned submittal using virtual stamp on
electronic submittals.

D. Architect's and consultants' actions on items submitted for review:

1. Authorizing purchasing, fabrication, delivery, and installation:
a. "Approved", or language with same legal meaning.
b. "Approved as Noted, Resubmission not required", or language with same legal
meaning.
1) At Contractor's option, submit corrected item, with review notations
acknowledged and incorporated.
c. "Approved as Noted, Resubmit for Record", or language with same legal meaning.
2. Not Authorizing fabrication, delivery, and installation:

E. Architect's and consultants' actions on items submitted for information:

1. Items for which no action was taken:
a. "Received" - to notify the Contractor that the submittal has been received for
record only.
2. Items for which action was taken:
a. "Reviewed" - no further action is required from Contractor.

END OF SECTION

Administrative
METAL FABRICATIONS 013000 - 11
Requirements055000-1
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project

including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Coordination drawings.
2. Requests for Information (RFIs).
3. Project Web site.
4. Project meetings.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and
field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Construction Manager, Architect or Contractor seeking information
required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying

products.
2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

1.4 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the

Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and

accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees
at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative

procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of
the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Preparation of the schedule of values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in

individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where
limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate
integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to

indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed
data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,

structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
b. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that
appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance
requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed
resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations
will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and
mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations
of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical
and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to
accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings.
3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans
and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical
equipment.
4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.
5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of
embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door
floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and
similar items.
6. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being
coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's
responsibility.

1.6 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of

the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit, via Project Website, an RFI in
the form specified.

1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by

Contractor with no response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or
interpretation and the following:

1. Project name.
2. Project number.
3. Date.
4. Name of Contractor.
5. Name of Architect.
6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
7. RFI subject.
8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time
or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
12. Contractor's signature.
13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items
needing interpretation.

C. Architect’s Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond.
Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received, by Contractor,
after 1:00 p.m., will be considered as received the following working day.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals.

b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to
Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or
the Contract Sum, notify the architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the
RFI response.

D. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log weekly. Include the following:

1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Architect and Construction Manager.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Construction Manager's response was received.

E. On receipt of architect’s action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response
to affected parties. Review response and notify architect within seven days if Contractor
disagrees with response.

1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and
Proposal Request, as appropriate.
2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as
appropriate.

1.7 PROJECT WEB SITE

A. Use Architect's Project Web site for purposes of hosting and managing project communication
and documentation until Final Completion. Project Web site shall be Procore and shall be
administered by architect:

1. Project directory.
2. Project correspondence.
3. Meeting minutes.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

4. Contract modifications forms and logs.

5. RFI forms and logs.
6. Task and issue management.
7. Photo documentation.
8. Schedule and calendar management.
9. Submittals forms and logs.
10. Payment application forms.
11. Drawing and specification document hosting, viewing, and updating.
12. Online document collaboration.
13. Reminder and tracking functions.
14. Archiving functions.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining Procore software and all licenses, necessary for
Contractor’s use associated with this project.

C. All correspondence, not required to be delivered in hardcopy format, shall be transmitted via
Procore. Such correspondence transmitted by any other means shall be considered null and
void, including submittals, excepting those requiring hard copies for transmittal to Authority(s)
having jurisdiction.

1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Contractor will schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless
otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Contractor will schedule and conduct a preconstruction

conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no
later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, Contractor and its

superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend
the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and
authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the
following:

a. Tentative construction schedule.

b. Phasing.
c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
f. Procedures for RFIs.
g. Procedures for testing and inspecting.
h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

i. Distribution of the Contract Documents.

j. Submittal procedures.
k. Preparation of record documents.
l. Use of the premises and existing building.
m. Work restrictions.
n. Working hours.
o. Owner's occupancy requirements.
p. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
q. Procedures for moisture and mold control.
r. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.
s. Construction waste management and recycling.
t. Parking availability.
u. Office, work, and storage areas.
v. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
w. First aid.
x. Security.
y. Progress cleaning.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting
minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each

construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or

affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect
of scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents.
b. Options.
c. Related RFIs.
d. Related Change Orders.
e. Purchases.
f. Deliveries.
g. Submittals.
h. Review of mockups.
i. Possible conflicts.
j. Compatibility problems.
k. Time schedules.
l. Weather limitations.
m. Manufacturer's written instructions.
n. Warranty requirements.
o. Compatibility of materials.
p. Acceptability of substrates.
q. Temporary facilities and controls.
r. Space and access limitations.
s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

t. Testing and inspecting requirements.

u. Installation procedures.
v. Coordination with other work.
w. Required performance results.
x. Protection of adjacent work.
y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including

required corrective measures and actions.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties
requiring information.
5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the
Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Progress Meetings: Contractor will conduct progress meetings at monthly intervals.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,

subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.

Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,
in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction
behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to
do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off-site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Progress cleaning.
10) Quality and work standards.
11) Status of correction of deficient items.
12) Field observations.
13) Status of RFIs.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

14) Status of proposal requests.

15) Pending changes.
16) Status of Change Orders.
17) Pending claims and disputes.
18) Documentation of information for payment requests.

c. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress

meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue
revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 013100

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 8

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of
construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Construction schedule updating reports.
3. Daily construction reports.
4. Site condition reports.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,
and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
time and resources.

1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned
early start and finish times.
2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction
project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations
determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.

C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network
schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

D. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a
jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet
schedule milestones and Contract completion date.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file.

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule
for entire construction period.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to
comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated)
and date on label.

C. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format
for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, original duration,
remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total
float in calendar days.

1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date,
or actual start date if known.
2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in
ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.
3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.

D. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.

E. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

F. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule,
progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities
involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of
Substantial Completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an
early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main
element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless

specifically allowed by Architect.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

2. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in

Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times
in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.
3. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing.
4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's and Construction Manager's
administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
5. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of
punch list items and final completion.

C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.

1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.

2. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Coordination with existing construction.

b. Limitations of continued occupancies.
c. Uninterruptible services.
d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
e. Use of premises restrictions.
f. Provisions for future construction.
g. Seasonal variations.
h. Environmental control.

3. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the
Work.

D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but
not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.

E. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or
commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:

1. Unresolved issues.
2. Unanswered Requests for Information.
3. Rejected or unreturned submittals.
4. Notations on returned submittals.
5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.

F. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days
behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by
which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule.

G. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has
been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)

A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type,

Contractor's construction schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line.

1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an
estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.

2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)

A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.

B. Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for the Notice to
Proceed. Outline significant construction activities for the first 90 days of construction. Include
skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on
indicated activities.

C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a time-scaled CPM network
analysis diagram for the Work.

1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be

accepted for use no later than 60 days after date established for the Notice of Award.

a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall
not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion
dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule.

2. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting
progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.
3. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking
days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract
Time.

D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work.
Using the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical
paths.

1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship
of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the
following activities:

a. Preparation and processing of submittals.

b. Mobilization and demobilization.
c. Purchase of materials.
d. Delivery.
e. Fabrication.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

f. Utility interruptions.
g. Installation.
h. Testing.
i. Punch list and final completion.
j. Activities occurring following final completion.

2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim
completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract
milestone dates.
3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled
network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary
to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.
4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate
paths with most float near the edges.

a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical
path.

E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its
submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect
of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.

F. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating
straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing
the following:

1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.

2. Description of activity.
3. Main events of activity.
4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.
5. Early and late start dates.
6. Early and late finish dates.
7. Activity duration in workdays.
8. Total float or slack time.
9. Average size of workforce.
10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values).

G. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports
showing the following:

1. Identification of activities that have changed.

2. Changes in early and late start dates.
3. Changes in early and late finish dates.
4. Changes in activity durations in workdays.
5. Changes in the critical path.
6. Changes in total float or slack time.
7. Changes in the Contract Time.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

2.4 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following
information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site.

2. List of separate contractors at Project site.
3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
4. Equipment at Project site.
5. Material deliveries.
6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or
snow.
7. Accidents.
8. Meetings and significant decisions.
9. Unusual events.
10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
11. Meter readings and similar recordings.
12. Emergency procedures.
13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
14. Change Orders received and implemented.
15. Construction/Work Change Directives received and implemented.
16. Services connected and disconnected.
17. Equipment or system tests and startups.
18. Partial completions and occupancies.
19. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and
the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for
Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with
recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect

actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly
scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
such meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Construction Manager.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.

2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the
same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned
portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.

END OF SECTION 013200

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Preconstruction photographs.
2. Periodic construction photographs.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation as

Project Record Documents at Project closeout.

1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked
for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of construction.
Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation.

B. Digital Photographs: Submit unaltered, original, full-size, color image files in JPG format.

1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels.

2. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file
metadata tag:

a. Name of Project.
b. Name and contact information for photographer.
c. Date photograph was taken.
d. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and
elevation or story of construction.

C. Construction Photographs: Submit Digital Photographs of each photographic view within seven
days of taking photographs.

1. Identification: With each photograph, provide the following information:

a. Name of Project.
b. Name of Contractor.
c. Date photograph was taken if not date stamped by camera.
d. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and
elevation or story of construction.
e. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan.

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1.3 USAGE RIGHTS

A. When photographer holds a copyright, obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from
photographer to Owner and TBA Studio for unlimited reproduction of photographic
documentation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA

A. General: All photographs shall be Digital Images.

B. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, with minimum size of 8 megapixels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Photographer: Engage a qualified photographer to take construction photographs.

B. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to
clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.

1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each
photographic location.

C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera,
without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.

1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image.
2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project
site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those
submitted to Construction Manager.

D. Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of excavation, commencement of

demolition and starting construction, take photographs of Project site and surrounding
properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage
points, as necessary to document all existing conditions that may be affected by the work.

1. Flag excavation areas and construction limits before taking construction photographs.
2. Take a minimum of 10 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to work area
before starting the Work.

E. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take a minimum of 15 photographs monthly, coinciding

with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to
show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

F. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take 20 color photographs after date of

Substantial Completion for submission as Project Record Documents.

END OF SECTION 013233

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural
requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and

reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and
maintenance manuals.
3. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
4. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of
demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require
Construction Manager's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not
require Construction Manager's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not
complying with requirements.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates

required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing,
fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making
corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Construction Manager and additional time for
handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Architect's Digital Data Files: The Architect bares no responsibility to provide Electronic
copies of digital data files of the Contract Drawings.

1. Any Digital Data Files provided by Architect shall be subject to the following:

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital

data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.
b. Contractor and anyone in his employ shall not use Architects Digital Data Files for
any other purpose, than that for which the files were expressly provided.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other

submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.

a. Architect and Construction Manager reserve the right to withhold action on a

submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are
received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on Construction Manager's receipt of submittal. No extension
of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in
advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time
if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Construction Manager will advise
Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner
as initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.

D. Paper Submittals: Paper submittals are not acceptable.

E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as
follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal
requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling
navigation to each item.

2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record

Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Construction Manager.

3. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record

Architect’s review and approval markings and action taken by Construction Manager.
4. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed
by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01).
Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
LNHS-061000.01.A).

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

5. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval
markings and action taken by Construction Manager.
6. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software-generated form from
electronic project management software, containing the following information:

a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
g. Category and type of submittal.
h. Submittal purpose and description.
i. Specification Section number and title.
j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each
of multiple items.
k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
m. Related physical samples submitted directly.
n. Indication of full or partial submittal.
o. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.
p. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
q. Other necessary identification.
r. Remarks.

F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

G. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.

2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Construction
Manager's action stamp.

I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,

fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final
action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Construction Manager's action
stamp.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Timelines of Submission:

1. Color selections will not be made for materials/products on an individual basis. Colors
will only be selected, after all submittals, requiring color selections, have been submitted.
Contractor shall be responsible ensuring all submittals subject to color selections are
submitted in a timely fashion. Failure to submit said submittals in a timely fashion shall
be the responsibility of the contractor and shall not constitute a necessity to allow
additional construction days.

B. General Submittal Procedure Requirements:

1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Project Web site specifically
established for Project.

a. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return annotated file. Annotate and
retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

2. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of

entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.

a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically-submitted

certificates and certifications where indicated.
b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications
where indicated.

C. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data
are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.

b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Standard color charts.
d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
e. Testing by recognized testing agency.
f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
g. Notation of coordination requirements.
h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.

b. Printed performance curves.
c. Operational range diagrams.
d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop
Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

6. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

D. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless
submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the

following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products.
b. Schedules.
c. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.
3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

E. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together
in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample.

b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
c. Sample source.
d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.

3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic
submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and
identification information for record.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-
control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time
of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
property, are the property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts and or physical
samples, as applicable, consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of
colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Selection of colors will not begin, until all color charts/physical samples for all
materials, requiring color selection, have been submitted. Failure of the Contractor
to submit all color charts/physical samples shall not constitute grounds for a delay
in the project or an extension of project time, regardless of product lead-times.

b. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color,
pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return
submittal with options selected.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing
and inspection.

a. Final verification of colors and materials shall not begin, until samples of all
products, requiring color verification, have been submitted. Failure of the
Contractor to submit all samples shall not constitute grounds for a delay in the
project or an extension of project time, regardless of product lead-times.

b. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Construction Manager will

retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned.

1) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in

material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of
paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

F. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary

indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the
following information in tabular form:

1. Submit product schedule in the following format:

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

a. PDF electronic file.

G. Coordination Drawings Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100

"Project Management and Coordination."

H. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200

"Construction Progress Documentation."

I. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in
Section 012900 "Payment Procedures.

J. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with
requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

K. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements

specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

L. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and
Maintenance Data."

M. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience
of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact
information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

N. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure
Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and
personnel certified.

O. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

P. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying

that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.

Q. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

R. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

S. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.

T. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or

on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

U. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.

V. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements."

W. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

X. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.

Y. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests
performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location,
for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Z. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with
other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections
and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Construction Manager.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700
"Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 8

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

3.2 CONSTRUCTION MANAGER'S ACTION

A. General: Construction Manager will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's
approval stamp and will return them without action.

B. Action Submittals: Construction Manager will review each submittal, make marks to indicate
corrections or revisions required, and return it. Construction Manager will stamp each submittal
with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.

C. Informational Submittals: Construction Manager will review each submittal and will not return
it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Construction Manager will forward
each submittal to appropriate party.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
for resubmittal without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.

END OF SECTION 013300

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 9

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.

1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-
assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required
by Architect, Owner, Construction Manager or authorities having jurisdiction are not
limited by provisions of this Section.
3. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract
enforcement activities performed by Architect or Construction Manager.

C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed
to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to
show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified
installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved
mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to

verify performance characteristics.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before
products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance
with specified criteria.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g.,
plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation
of the Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an

employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that
certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or
that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully
completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project;
being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.

1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards
establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply
with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but
apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision
before proceeding.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction,

submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before
starting work on the following systems:

1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the

designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-

resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other
Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and inspections
specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar

to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated

for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling

work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed
for installations of the system, assembly, or products that are similar in material, design, and
extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be
performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy
qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for

specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the

experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according
to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where
required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.

2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary
Laboratory Accreditation Program.

H. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer

who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this
Project.

I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing

for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the
following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.

b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing
results to prevent delaying the Work.
c. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and
methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

d. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups and
laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,

inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, through Construction
Manager, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report
whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract
Documents.

J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect or Construction Manager.
2. Notify Architect and Construction Manager seven days in advance of dates and times
when mockups will be constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Construction Manager's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or
construction.

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work.
6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

K. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified
in individual Specification Sections.

1.7 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,

Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are
Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that
the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.

1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing

agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
writing by Owner.

2. Notify Construction Manager at least 48 hours in advance of time when Work that
requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a

certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to

observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of
substrates and conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the
Work, and submittal of written reports.

D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Construction Manager and

Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and
inspections.

1. Notify Construction Manager and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies

observed in the Work during performance of its services.
2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service through Contractor.
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve
or accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:

1. Access to the Work.

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance

and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and
replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted.

2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test
and inspection log for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal working
hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched
areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible
as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching
in Section 017300 "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for quality-control services.

END OF SECTION 014000

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,

and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"

"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on

Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"
"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to
dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on
which Project is to be built.

1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent

requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards
are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless
otherwise indicated.

REFERENCES 014200 - 1
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source.

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's
"Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books'
"National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States."

B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.

1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com.

2. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org.
3. AAPFCO - Association of American Plant Food Control Officials; www.aapfco.org.
4. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials;
www.transportation.org.
5. AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; www.aatcc.org.
6. ABMA - American Bearing Manufacturers Association; www.americanbearings.org.
7. ACI - American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International); www.concrete.org.
8. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete-pipe.org.
9. AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org.
10. AF&PA - American Forest & Paper Association; www.afandpa.org.
11. AGA - American Gas Association; www.aga.org.
12. AHAM - Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org.
13. AHRI - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The); www.ahrinet.org.
14. AI - Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org.
15. AIA - American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org.
16. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org.
17. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org.
18. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction; www.aitc-glulam.org.
19. AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org.
20. ANSI - American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org.
21. AOSA - Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com.
22. APA - APA - The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org.
23. APA - Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org.
24. API - American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org.
25. ARI - Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).
26. ARI - American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).
27. ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org.
28. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org.
29. ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (See
ASCE).

REFERENCES 014200 - 2
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

30. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers;

www.ashrae.org.
31. ASME - ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers);
www.asme.org.
32. ASSE - American Society of Safety Engineers (The); www.asse.org.
33. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.org.
34. ASTM - ASTM International; (American Society for Testing and Materials
International); www.astm.org.
35. ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org.
36. AWEA - American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org.
37. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org.
38. AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada;
www.awmac.com.
39. AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; (Formerly: American Wood-
Preservers' Association); www.awpa.com.
40. AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org.
41. AWWA - American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org.
42. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com.
43. BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com.
44. BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org.
45. BIFMA - BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's
Association); www.bifma.com.
46. BISSC - Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org.
47. BOCA - BOCA; (Building Officials and Code Administrators International Inc.); (See
ICC).
48. BWF - Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton Federation);
www.bwfbadminton.org.
49. CDA - Copper Development Association; www.copper.org.
50. CEA - Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca.
51. CEA - Consumer Electronics Association; www.ce.org.
52. CFFA - Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc.; www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com.
53. CFSEI - Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org.
54. CGA - Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com.
55. CIMA - Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org.
56. CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org.
57. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org.
58. CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org.
59. CPA - Composite Panel Association; www.pbmdf.com.
60. CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org.
61. CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org.
62. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org.
63. CSA - Canadian Standards Association; www.csa.ca.
64. CSA - CSA International; (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services); www.csa-
international.org.
65. CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csinet.org.
66. CSSB - Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org.
67. CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute); www.cti.org.
68. CWC - Composite Wood Council; (See CPA).
69. DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com.
70. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org.

REFERENCES 014200 - 3
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

71. ECA - Electronic Components Association; www.ec-central.org.

72. ECAMA - Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association; (See ECA).
73. EIA - Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA).
74. EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com.
75. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org.
76. ESD - ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org.
77. ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA).
78. EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org.
79. FIBA - Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball
Federation); www.fiba.com.
80. FIVB - Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball
Federation); www.fivb.org.
81. FM Approvals - FM Approvals LLC; www.fmglobal.com.
82. FM Global - FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); www.fmglobal.com.
83. FRSA - Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.;
www.floridaroof.com.
84. FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com.
85. FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org.
86. GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org.
87. GANA - Glass Association of North America; www.glasswebsite.com.
88. GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.org.
89. HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org.
90. HI/GAMA - Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See AHRI).
91. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM).
92. HPVA - Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; www.hpva.org.
93. HPW - H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.; www.hpwhite.com.
94. IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants; www.iapsc.org.
95. IAS - International Approval Services; (See CSA).
96. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC).
97. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.
98. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net.
99. ICPA - International Cast Polymer Alliance; www.icpa-hq.org.
100. ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org.
101. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission; www.iec.ch.
102. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org.
103. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of
North America); www.ies.org.
104. IESNA - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES).
105. IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org.
106. IGMA - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; www.igmaonline.org.
107. IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump Association;
www.igshpa.okstate.edu.
108. ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com.
109. Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA);
www.intertek.com.
110. ISA - International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems,
and Automation Society); www.isa.org.
111. ISAS - Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The); (See ISA).
112. ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International Solid
Surface Fabricators Association); www.isfanow.org.

REFERENCES 014200 - 4
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

113. ISO - International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org.

114. ISSFA - International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA).
115. ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int/home.
116. KCMA - Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.org.
117. LMA - Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA).
118. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org.
119. MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com.
120. MCA - Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org.
121. MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org.
122. MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.metalframingmfg.org.
123. MHIA - Material Handling Industry of America; www.mhia.org.
124. MIA - Marble Institute of America; www.marble-institute.com.
125. MMPA - Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; (Formerly: Wood Moulding &
Millwork Producers Association); www.wmmpa.com.
126. MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com.
127. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.;
www.mss-hq.org.
128. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers;
www.naamm.org.
129. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers
International); www.nace.org.
130. NADCA - National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com.
131. NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.naima.org.
132. NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgqa.com.
133. NCAA - National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.ncaa.org.
134. NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org.
135. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org.
136. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org.
137. NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org.
138. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org.
139. NETA - InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org.
140. NFHS - National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfhs.org.
141. NFPA - NFPA; (National Fire Protection Association); www.nfpa.org.
142. NFPA - NFPA International; (See NFPA).
143. NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org.
144. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com.
145. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org.
146. NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA).
147. NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org.
148. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net.
149. NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org.
150. NSF - NSF International; (National Sanitation Foundation International); www.nsf.org.
151. NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org.
152. NSSGA - National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; www.nssga.org.
153. NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com.
154. NWFA - National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org.
155. PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org.
156. PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org.
157. PLASA - PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology
Association); www.plasa.org.

REFERENCES 014200 - 5
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

158. RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org.

159. RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com.
160. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com.
161. SAE - SAE International; (Society of Automotive Engineers); www.sae.org.
162. SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org.
163. SDI - Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org.
164. SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org.
165. SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association; www.sefalabs.com.
166. SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (See
ASCE).
167. SIA - Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org.
168. SJI - Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.org.
169. SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org.
170. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association;
www.smacna.org.
171. SMPTE - Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpte.org.
172. SPFA - Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.sprayfoam.org.
173. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org.
174. SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org.
175. SRCC - Solar Rating and Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org.
176. SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com.
177. SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org.
178. STI - Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com.
179. SWI - Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com.
180. SWPA - Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org.
181. TCA - Tilt-Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org.
182. TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; (Formerly: Tile Council of America);
www.tileusa.com.
183. TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org.
184. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association; (Formerly: TIA/EIA -
Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance);
www.tiaonline.org.
185. TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance; (See
TIA).
186. TMS - The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.org.
187. TPI - Truss Plate Institute; www.tpinst.org.
188. TPI - Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org.
189. TRI - Tile Roofing Institute; www.tileroofing.org.
190. UBC - Uniform Building Code; (See ICC).
191. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com.
192. UNI - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.org.
193. USAV - USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org.
194. USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org.
195. USITT - United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org.
196. WASTEC - Waste Equipment Technology Association; www.wastec.org.
197. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org.
198. WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org.
199. WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com.
200. WI - Woodwork Institute; (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California);
www.wicnet.org.

REFERENCES 014200 - 6
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

201. WMMPA - Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; (See MMPA).
202. WSRCA - Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com.
203. WPA - Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org.

C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.

1. DIN - Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.; www.din.de.

2. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials;
www.iapmo.org.
3. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.
4. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org.

D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications
or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list.

1. COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil.

2. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov.
3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology;
www.nist.gov.
4. DOD - Department of Defense; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil.
5. DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov.
6. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov.
7. FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov.
8. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov.
9. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.
10. HUD - Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov.
11. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies
Division; http://eetd.lbl.gov.
12. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov.
13. SD - Department of State; www.state.gov.
14. TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research
Program; www.trb.org.
15. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity
Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov.
16. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov.
17. USDJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of Justice;
www.ojp.usdoj.gov.
18. USP - U.S. Pharmacopeia; www.usp.org.
19. USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com.

E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and
regulations in the following list.

1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office;

www.gpo.gov/fdsys.
2. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from
Department of Defense Single Stock Point; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil.

REFERENCES 014200 - 7
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

3. DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS).

4. FED-STD - Federal Standard; (See FS).
5. FS - Federal Specification; Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point;
http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil.

a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil.

b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.
c. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design
Guide; www.wbdg.org/ccb.

6. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD).

7. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov.
8. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See
USAB).

F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following
list.

1. CBHF - State of California; Department of Consumer Affairs; Bureau of Electronic

Appliance and Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation; www.bearhfti.ca.gov.
2. CCR - California Code of Regulations; Office of Administrative Law; California Title 24
Energy Code; www.calregs.com.
3. CDHS - California Department of Health Services; (See CDPH).
4. CDPH - California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program; www.cal-
iaq.org.
5. CPUC - California Public Utilities Commission; www.cpuc.ca.gov.
6. SCAQMD - South Coast Air Quality Management District; www.aqmd.gov.
7. TFS - Texas Forest Service; Forest Resource Development and Sustainable Forestry;
http://txforestservice.tamu.edu.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 014200

REFERENCES 014200 - 8
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.

1.2 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included
in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services
and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, testing agencies, and
authorities having jurisdiction.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for
construction personnel.

B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA

Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.

C. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having
jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire prevention
program.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned

responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link

fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD
line posts and 2-7/8-inch OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch OD top and bottom rails.
Provide concrete or galvanized-steel bases for supporting posts.

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature
controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner,

Architect, Construction Manager, and construction personnel office activities and to
accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and
orderly.

C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate
materials and equipment for construction operations.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,
self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating

units is prohibited.
2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location
and application.
3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for
temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 11 at each return-air
grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures".

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.

1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary."

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.

1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having

jurisdiction.

C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction.

D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type,
number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from
adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction

activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to
produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient
size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.

1. Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination
for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.

I. Telephone Service: Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio
for use when away from field office.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction
area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136.
Comply with NFPA 241.
2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection.
Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial
Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to
Owner.

B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas
adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within
construction limits indicated on Drawings.

1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment

as required to minimize dust.

C. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas
in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads
and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas,
within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations.

1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and
paved areas.
2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas
according to Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material,
regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing.
4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until
immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course
pavement before installation of final course according to Section 321216 "Asphalt
Paving."

D. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

E. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.

F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or
adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

G. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.

1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings.

2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and
individuals seeking entrance to Project.

a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.

H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419

"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

I. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle

waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution."

J. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and
equipment" and not temporary facilities.

K. Temporary Elevator Use: Use of elevators is not permitted.

L. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders
are not adequate.

M. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be
permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of
Substantial Completion.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities,

and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be
removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct

construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible
air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements of 2003 EPA
Construction General Permit, project drawings and specifications, or authorities having
jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.

1. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: In addition to other requirements,

provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and
airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways.

D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide

barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of
stormwater from heavy rains.

E. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and
harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control
procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial
Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

F. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure
fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by
entrance gates.

1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined

sufficient to accommodate construction operations and as indicated on Drawings.
2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized
personnel.

G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas
of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft,
and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

I. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in

progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar
activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate
temporary enclosures.

J. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with
NFPA 241; manage fire prevention program.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas.

2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel
at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor's Moisture Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document
visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.

B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject
to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect materials from water damage and
keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.

C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full
enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration
of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with
high organic content, into partially enclosed building.
2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.
3. Discard or replace water-damaged and wet material.
4. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.
5. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before
enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.

D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building
enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:

1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions.
2. Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured moisture
level within 48 hours.

3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,

ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

END OF SECTION 015000

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 8

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in
Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; and comparable products.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or

model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new
products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or
exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's

product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or
model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type,
function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other
characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers
named in the specification.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product.
Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification
Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable

product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional
information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable
product request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300

"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more

products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if
previously selected products were also options.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent

overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and
to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a

particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide
specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and

properly executed.
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using indicated form properly executed.
3. Refer to other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for
submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish salient characteristics of products.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the
named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions
for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,

provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be
considered.
3. Products:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both

manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience
will not be considered unless otherwise indicated.
b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed
product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

4. Manufacturers:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names,

provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience
will not be considered unless otherwise indicated.
b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers,
provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed
manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's
product.

5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product

indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or
indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.
Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics
that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable
Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named
manufacturers.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample",

provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's
decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution
Procedures" for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with
requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's
product line that includes both standard and premium items.

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable
product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not
satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with
these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents,
that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results,
and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.

END OF SECTION 016000

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the
Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout.
2. Installation of the Work.
3. Cutting and patching.
4. Coordination of Owner-installed products.
5. Progress cleaning.
6. Starting and adjusting.
7. Protection of installed construction.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.

2. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated
construction.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of
construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of
locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding.
Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and
patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or
increase deflection

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components
in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or
components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in
reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or
decreased operational life or safety.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner
that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and
replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

EXECUTION 017300 - 1
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed
surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of
in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate
and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical
systems, and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services,
and other utilities.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public
utilities serving Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the
Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where
indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding
with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

EXECUTION 017300 - 2
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Construction Manager that is necessary to

adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility
appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having
jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown

diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control
of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in
Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered, notify Construction Manager promptly.

B. General: Lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
2. Establish limits on use of Project site.
3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
6. Notify Construction Manager when deviations from required lines and levels exceed
allowable tolerances.
7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established
by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill
and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.
Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

EXECUTION 017300 - 3
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or

loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction
items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size
and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with
other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size
and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.

EXECUTION 017300 - 4
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching.
Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance

of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not
to void existing warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free
passage to adjoining areas.

F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems

are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before
cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.

1. Notify Construction Manager in writing 3 business days, prior to any interruption of

existing services or systems.

G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with
minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where
required by cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections, where applicable.

EXECUTION 017300 - 5
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence
of patching and refinishing.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane
surface of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.

I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,
mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if
the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly.

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure
freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

EXECUTION 017300 - 6
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials
down sewers or into waterways.

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through

the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the

construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise
deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove

malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation
without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements"

3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

END OF SECTION 017300

EXECUTION 017300 - 7
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.

2. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial
demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements.
2. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste.
3. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing and
removal of above- and below-grade improvements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting
from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes
packaging.

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or
selective demolition operations.

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,
recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

D. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent

incorporation into the Work.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills
and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts,
and invoices.

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. General: Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as
required to implement waste management during the entire duration of the Contract.

B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management

procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site.

C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and
used facilities.

1. Comply with Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust
and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.

3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work:

1. Clean salvaged items.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until installation.
4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and
equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to
make items functional for use indicated.

B. Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted on Project site.

C. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use:

1. Clean salvaged items.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

3.3 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove
waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of
accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

END OF SECTION 017419

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,
but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures.

2. Final completion procedures.
3. Warranties.
4. Final cleaning.
5. Repair of the Work.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion

construction photographic documentation.
2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
3. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
4. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's
personnel.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in
other Sections.

1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and
corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why
the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days

prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below
that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction
permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities.
Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
2. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties,
workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar
documents.
3. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools,
spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by
Construction Administrator. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where
applicable.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of

maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item
and name and number of related Specification Section.

4. Submit test/adjust/balance records.

5. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days

prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below
that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.
4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified
in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."
6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
7. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
8. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

9. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a

minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and
tests. On receipt of request, Construction Administrator will either proceed with inspection or
notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of
Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's
list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before
certificate will be issued.

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections

as incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.6 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion,
complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment

Procedures."
2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial
Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list). Certified
copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance.
3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage
complying with insurance requirements.
4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings, as
required by other Sections of the specifications.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance. On receipt of
request, Construction Administrator will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of
unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection
or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate
will be issued.

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections

as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by
construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if
necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential orde.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file. Architect, through Construction Administrator, will return

annotated copy.

1.8 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of
the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,

thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty
and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling
navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of
document.

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or

fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean
according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.
j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish
mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
k. Remove labels that are not permanent.
l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.
Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign
substances.
m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
o. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of
Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective
parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly
adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored,
provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.
Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified
condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other
damaged transparent materials.
2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including
mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and
identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede
operation or reduce longevity.
4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and
noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for
new fixtures.

END OF SECTION 017700

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.

2. Emergency manuals.
3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
4. Product maintenance manuals.
5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.

1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual

Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed
manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are
acceptable.
2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions
and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file.
Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.

a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable
item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance
directory.
b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.

2. One paper copy. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title
pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves.

C. Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for
Substantial Completion and at least 10 days before commencing demonstration and training.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and

maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to
desired information.

B. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each
system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system.
Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page.
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.

C. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual.

2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name and contact information for Contractor.
6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager.
7. Name and contact information for Architect.
8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority.
9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the
systems contained in the manuals.
10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

D. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed
to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.

E. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,
equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

F. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic
PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where
scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable
file size.
2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file
names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names
used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and
subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so
that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening
file.

2.2 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency.
2. Emergency instructions.
3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include
instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire.
2. Flood.
3. Gas leak.
4. Water leak.
5. Power failure.
6. Water outage.
7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,
and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for
notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping.
2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.3 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in

individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and
equipment indicated on Contract Documents.
2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
3. Operating standards.
4. Operating procedures.
5. Operating logs.
6. Wiring diagrams.
7. Control diagrams.
8. Piped system diagrams.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

9. Precautions against improper use.

10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract
Documents.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions.
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as
installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for
identification.

2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and
sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number.

2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Color, pattern, and texture.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

4. Material and chemical composition.

5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service
contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,
identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,
list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,
and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation

including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly
and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential
maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions.

2. Troubleshooting guide.
3. Precautions against improper maintenance.
4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures

for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies
indicated.

B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care
and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.

D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include
only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each
product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a
tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.
Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the

relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and
flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to
ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.

F. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and
maintenance documentation.

END OF SECTION 017823

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents,
including the following:

1. Record Drawings.
2. Record Specifications.
3. Record Product Data.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.

1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal:

1) Submit PDF electronic file of scanned record prints and one set(s) of file
prints.

a) PDF electronic file shall include all drawing sheets in order and in a
single file, whether or not changes and/or additional information were
recorded.

2) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional

information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.

b. Final Submittal:

1) Submit record digital data file(s), PDF electronic file of record digital data
file(s) and two set(s) of record digital data file(s) plots.

a) PDF electronic file shall include all drawing sheets in order and in a
single file, whether or not changes and/or additional information were
recorded.

2) Plot each drawing file, whether or not changes and additional information
were recorded.

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy and annotated PDF electronic file of Project's
Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

1. PDF electronic file shall include all specifications in order and in a single file, whether or
not changes and/or additional information were recorded.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files and
directories of each submittal.

1. PDF electronic file shall include all product data and in a single file, with table of
contents, whether or not changes and/or additional information were recorded.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop
Drawings, incorporating new and revised Drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide
information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be

difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
c. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

2. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use
personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record
prints.
3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
5. Marks shall clearly indicated changes made and actual installation, where installation
varies from that shown originally. Marks that only reference RFI’s, addenda items,
change directive numbers, etc. shall not be acceptable.

B. Record Digital Data Files (CAD Files): Immediately before inspection for Certificate of
Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect and Construction
Manager. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract
Drawings, as follows:

1. Format: Autodesk; Autocad, DWG Version 2010, Microsoft Windows operating system.
2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints.
Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.
3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect through Construction Manager for resolution.

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for
use in recording information.

C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification
on cover sheets.
2. PDF Electronic Files: Annotated electronic file with comment function enabled.
3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files
that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet
identification. Include identification in each digital data file.
4. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
d. Name of Architect and Construction Manager.
e. Name of Contractor.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
4. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file and paper copy, as
indicated by Article 1.2 of this section.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where
applicable.

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file and paper copy, as
indicated by Article 1.2 of this section.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous

record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file and paper copy.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project
record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they
occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record
documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean,
dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record
documents for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours.

END OF SECTION 017839

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel,
including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
3. Demonstration and training video recordings.

1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training,
including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of
instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective
and outline for each training module.

1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and

training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording
of live instructional module.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use prepared and
bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals and in PDF electronic file format
on compact disc.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating

maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for
this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful
learning performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with

requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and
maintenance procedures and training.

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to

minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.

B. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data
has been reviewed and approved by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules
for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification
Sections.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include
a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each
module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or
component:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.

b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
c. Operating standards.
d. Regulatory requirements.
e. Equipment function.
f. Operating characteristics.
g. Limiting conditions.
h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals.
b. Operations manuals.
c. Maintenance manuals.
d. Project record documents.
e. Identification systems.
f. Warranties and bonds.
g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.

b. Instructions on stopping.
c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.

f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures.
b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
c. Routine and normal operating instructions.
d. Regulation and control procedures.
e. Control sequences.
f. Safety procedures.
g. Instructions on stopping.
h. Normal shutdown instructions.
i. Operating procedures for emergencies.
j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.
k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments.
b. Checking adjustments.
c. Noise and vibration adjustments.
d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions.
b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures.
b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
d. Procedures for routine cleaning
e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.
f. Procedures for routine maintenance.
g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions.
b. Repair instructions.
c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly
instructions.
d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.
e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training
module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with
requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules,
to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of
participants, instruction times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires
seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with Owner through Construction Administrator, with at least seven
days' advance notice.

D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully
operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation
and maintenance data submittals.

E. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's
mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.

END OF SECTION 017900

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.

2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

1.2 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones
and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to
Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.

1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of selective demolition activities with starting and ending dates for each activity.

B. Predemolition photographs or video.

C. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Inventory of items that have been removed and salvaged.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification

program.

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as
far as practical.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: Refer to Section 011000 “Summary” for information, regarding

hazardous materials, which will be present during construction.

1. If suspected hazardous materials, beyond those indicated, by said Section 011000, are
encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous
materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

G. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so
as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition
operations.

B. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment

according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and

protect them against damage.

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,

disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas
to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.
2. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies.
3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide
temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain
continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC
systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap

or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same
or compatible piping material and leave in place.
c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and
remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and
make equipment operational.
e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment and deliver to Owner.
f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible
ductwork material and leave in place.

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as
required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and
finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of
construction being demolished.

C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:

1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden
space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices
during flame-cutting operations.
4. Maintain fire watch during and for at least <Insert number> hours after flame-cutting
operations.
5. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
6. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in
Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.

C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved
construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and
recycle or dispose of them according to Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and
Disposal."

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that
will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste
Management and Disposal."

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.

END OF SECTION 024119

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,

mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:

1. Footings.
2. Foundation walls.
3. Slabs-on-grade.
4. Suspended slabs.
5. Concrete toppings.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the
following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-
furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and
placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar
diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing,
and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the
structure.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.

E. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

F. Welding certificates.

G. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials.
2. Admixtures.
3. Waterstops.
4. Curing compounds.
5. Floor and slab treatments.
6. Bonding agents.
7. Adhesives.
8. Vapor retarders.
9. Semirigid joint filler.
10. Joint-filler strips.
11. Repair materials.

H. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating
compliance with requirements:

1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of

concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.

I. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified
tolerances.

J. Field quality-control reports.

K. Minutes of preinstallation conference.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs Project personnel qualified as ACI-
certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete
Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete

products and that complies with LaDOTD requirements for production facilities and equipment.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from
single source from single manufacturer.

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M,
"Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5, and Section 7
“Lightweight Concrete.”
2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

F. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material
evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine
procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each
entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.
c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.
d. Concrete subcontractor.
e. Special concrete finish subcontractor.

2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality
control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures,
curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips,
semirigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, vapor-retarder installation,
anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation,
floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and
concrete protection.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and
damage.

B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other
contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,
and as follows:

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better.

b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge
sealed.
c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.

Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.

D. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.

E. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

F. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic

form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of
concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane
of exposed concrete surface.
2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in
diameter in concrete surface.
3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing
or waterproofing.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

C. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from [ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60
(Grade 420), ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed bars, assembled with clips.

D. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, as drawn.

E. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496/A 496M.

F. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from as-
drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

G. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut true to
length with ends square and free of burrs.

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel
wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater
compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use
CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, gray. Supplement with the following:

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3M coarse aggregate or better, graded.

Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10
years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates
and cementitious materials.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: As indicated on drawings.

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330, ¾-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

D. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

2.5 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with

other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those
permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium
chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,
Type G.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

C. Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor

or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing
chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete and complying with
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CN-CI.

b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Rheocrete CNI.
c. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; EUCON BCN.
d. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; DCI.
e. Sika Corporation; Sika CNI.

D. Non-Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, non-set-

accelerating, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a
protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Rheocrete 222+.

b. Cortec Corporation; MCI-2000.
c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; DCI-S.
d. Sika Corporation; FerroGard 901.

2.6 WATERSTOPS

A. Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513, with factory-installed metal eyelets, for
embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners,
intersections, and directional changes.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:

a. Greenstreak.
b. Williams Products, Inc.

2. Profile: Ribbed with center bulb.

3. Dimensions: 6 inches by 3/8 inch thick (150 mm by 10 mm thick); nontapered.

B. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, with factory-installed metal eyelets, for embedding
in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections,
and directional changes.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:

a. BoMetals, Inc.
b. Greenstreak.
c. Paul Murphy Plastics Company.
d. Vinylex Corp.

2. Profile: Ribbed with center bulb.

3. Dimensions: 6 inches by 3/8 inch thick (150 mm by 10 mm thick); nontapered.

C. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl

rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete,
3/4 by 1 inch (19 by 25 mm).

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; MiraSTOP.

b. CETCO; Volclay Waterstop-RX.
c. Concrete Sealants Inc.; Conseal CS-231.
d. Greenstreak; Swellstop.
e. Henry Company, Sealants Division; Hydro-Flex.
f. JP Specialties, Inc.; Earth Shield Type 20.

2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive
or pressure-sensitive tape.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; Blackline 400.

b. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra 15.
c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Florprufe 120.
d. Insulation Solutions, Inc.; Viper VaporCheck 16.
e. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Perminator 15 mil .
f. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 15.
g. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn 15 mil Green.
h. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 15 mil Class A.

B. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and
manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch (9.5-
mm) sieve, 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 (0.15-mm) sieve, and not more than 5 percent
passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve; complying with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33
for fine aggregates.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2.8 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application

to fresh concrete.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CimFilm.

b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Confilm.
c. ChemMasters; SprayFilm.
d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm.
e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74).
f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm.
g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar.
h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor-Aid.
i. Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin.
j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON.
k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE.
l. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold.
m. Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM.
n. Sika Corporation; SikaFilm.
o. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Film.
p. Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid.
q. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2120 TRI-FILM.
r. Unitex; PRO-FILM.
s. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Envio Set.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene

sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,

dissipating.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB.

b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure 200.
c. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear.
d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; W.B. Resin Cure.
e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W).
f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Res X Cure WB.
g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Kurez W VOX;
TAMMSCURE WB 30C.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 8

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420.

i. Lambert Corporation; AQUA KURE - CLEAR.
j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R.
k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100-CLEAR.
l. Nox-Crete Products Group; Resin Cure E.
m. Right Pointe; Clear Water Resin.
n. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Rez Clear.
o. Symons by Dayton Superior; Resi-Chem Clear.
p. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2519 DC WB.
q. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100.

F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,

nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of
floor covering.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Clear Cure WB.

b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure-N-Seal WB.
c. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure & Seal 20.
d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Cure and Seal WB.
e. Cresset Chemical Company; Crete-Trete 309-VOC Cure & Seal.
f. Dayton Superior Corporation; Safe Cure and Seal (J-18).
g. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Spartan Cote WB II.
h. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Aqua Cure VOX;
Clearseal WB 150.
i. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Cure & Seal 309 Emulsion.
j. Lambert Corporation; Glazecote Sealer-20.
k. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Dress & Seal WB.
l. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-20.
m. Metalcrete Industries; Metcure.
n. Nox-Crete Products Group; Cure & Seal 150E.
o. Symons by Dayton Superior; Cure & Seal 18 Percent E.
p. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2519 WB.
q. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Starseal 309.

2.9 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a
Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or
styrene butadiene.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 9

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing
and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit
requirements, and as follows:

1. Types I and II, non-load bearing, Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or
freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.

E. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet.
Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

F. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (0.85 mm)
thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion
of concrete or debris.

2.10 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be

applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match
adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic

cement as defined in ASTM C 219.
2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,
and application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as
recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested
according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be

applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) and that can be filled in over a scarified surface
to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic

cement as defined in ASTM C 219.
2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as
recommended by topping manufacturer.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days when tested
according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture
designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 10

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

B. Cementitious Materials:

1. Silica Fume: 10 percent maximum.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of

cement.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as

required, for placement and workability.
2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial
slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a
water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.
4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.

2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) at 28 days.

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50.
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of
2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or
plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

B. Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50.
3. Slump Limit: 5 inches (125 mm), 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of
2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or
plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch
(38-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

C. Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) at 28 days.

2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 470 lb/cu. yd. (279 kg/cu. m).
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
4. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.

D. Slabs-on-Metal Deck: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3500 psi (24.1 MPa) at 28 days.

2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 520 lb/cu. yd. (309 kg/cu. m).

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 11

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3. Calculated Equilibrium Unit Weight: 115 lb/cu. ft. (1842 kg/cu. m) plus or minus 3 lb/cu.
ft. (48.1 kg/cu. m) as determined by ASTM C 567.
4. Slump Limit: 5 inches (125 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3 percent.

E. Concrete Toppings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) at 28 days.

2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: [470 lb/cu. yd. (279 kg/cu. m)] [520 lb/cu.
yd. (309 kg/cu. m)] [540 lb/cu. yd. (320 kg/cu. m)].
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

2.13 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.14 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to

ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and
delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32
deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.

1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2
minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of
batch is released.
2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15 seconds
for each additional 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m).
3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project
identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity, and amount
of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure
can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 12

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1. Class C, 1/2 inch (13 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide
top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed
strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork
is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to
prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous
locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads
required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and
other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and
maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that
is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with
tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges."
2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face
of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and
other conditions.
3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 13

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does
not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50
deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be
damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be
maintained.

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports
weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day
design compressive strength.
2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without
loosening or disturbing shores.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply
new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.
Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete
surfaces unless approved by Architect.

3.4 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to
ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that
would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack
weld crossing reinforcing bars.

1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to
minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 14

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with
wire.

3.6 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across

construction joints unless otherwise indicated.
2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.
3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset
joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder
intersection.
4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and
girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls,
near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.
6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
7. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened
or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning

concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-
fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints
after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete
when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before
concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab
junctions, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished
concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.
2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch
(25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07
Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.
3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is
required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate
or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 15

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3.7 WATERSTOPS

A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a
continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed
waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to
manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated,
according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and
firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.

3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded
items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless
approved by Architect.

C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to
limitations of ACI 301.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to

mixture.

D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of
weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures
and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6
inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of
concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration
to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and
other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 16

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured
surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb
slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C)
for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the
temperature range required by ACI 301.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete
on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

G. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled
mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water
equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to
cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes
and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified
limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in

an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface
irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, to be

covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where
indicated:

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete
surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform
color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing
process.
2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick
paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and one-

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 17

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white
portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match
adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens,
rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.
3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part
portland cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water.
Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout
will match adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a
swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent
formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.10 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-
floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4
inch (6 mm) in one direction.

1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive concrete floor toppings or to receive mortar
setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes.

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small
or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.
Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated to receive trowel finish and to be covered with
fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by
hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of
trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that
would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring,
carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-
finish coating system.
2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155
(ASTM E 1155M), for a randomly trafficked floor surface:

a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and of levelness, F(L) 15.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 18

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an
unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on two high spots and
placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 3/16 inch (4.8 mm).

E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry
tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic,
slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.

F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and
elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with
fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish
with Architect before application.

3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in
place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-
place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to
complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still
green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and
terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as
shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations,
complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items.
Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete
surfaces.

3.12 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-
weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and
during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after
placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported
slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 19

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the
remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed
surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:

a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining

cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped
at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less
than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover
material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive

floor coverings.
b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
penetrating liquid floor treatments.
c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining
cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with
bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.

a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without
damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound
manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere
with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity
of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.13 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 20

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until
construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact
faces of joint clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in
formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove
and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two
and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water
for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and
stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than
1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19
mm). Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water,
and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching
mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone
plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding
color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match
before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher
than surrounding surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and
structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and
verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces
sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or
that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of
width, and other objectionable conditions.
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired
areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.
Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 21

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather
edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low
areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent
floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level
surface.
6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with
clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm)
clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and
apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original
concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with
adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching
mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt,
and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place
patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to
match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and
patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's
approval.

3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and
inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement.

2. Steel reinforcement welding.
3. Headed bolts and studs.
4. Verification of use of required design mixture.
5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.
6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.
7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and
slabs.

C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to

ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for
each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 22

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m)
or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests
for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly
selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

3. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform
additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
4. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for
each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture.
5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is
40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test
for each composite sample.
6. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test
for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture.
7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each
composite sample.
b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite
sample.

8. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured
specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens
at 28 days.
b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of
two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

9. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-

cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures
for protecting and curing in-place concrete.
10. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three
consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength
and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by
more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).
11. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and
Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain
Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete
testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive
strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking
strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
12. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may
be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of
concrete.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 23

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

13. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete
when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other
requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency
may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with
ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.
14. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
15. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply
with the Contract Documents.

D. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M)
within 48 hours of finishing.

END OF SECTION 033000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 24

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Structural steel.
2. Grout.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures

and administrative requirements.
2. Division 05 Section "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors through
deck.
3. Division 05 Section "Metal Stairs."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code of

Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

B. Heavy Sections: Rolled and built-up sections as follows:

1. Shapes included in ASTM A 6/A 6M with flanges thicker than 1-1/2 inches.
2. Column base plates thicker than 2 inches.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents
to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator, including comprehensive engineering
design by a qualified professional engineer, to withstand loads indicated and comply with other
information and restrictions indicated.

1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360.
2. Use ASD; data are given at service-load level.

B. Construction: Combined system of moment frame and shear walls, Combined system of braced
frame and shear walls.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
2. Include embedment drawings.
3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,
and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed
and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.
4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.
Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections.
5. For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
design data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.

C. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs):

Provide according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded
joint whether prequalified or qualified by testing.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, fabricator, professional engineer.

E. Welding certificates.

F. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers,
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

G. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.

H. Product Test Reports: For the following:

1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.
2. Direct-tension indicators.
3. Tension-control, high-strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies.
4. Shear stud connectors.
5. Shop primers.
6. Nonshrink grout.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303.
2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1.
3. AISC 360.
4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

D. Submit certificate of compliance in accordance with IBC 1704.4.2.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off
ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel
members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or
overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or
structures as directed.

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.

1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes
repackaging and seals containers.
2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.
3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating
ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are
compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction

without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and
directions for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.

B. Channels, Angles, M, S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M unless noted.

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M unless noted.

D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing.

E. Corrosion-Resisting Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 847/A 847M,

structural tubing.

F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1. Weight Class: As indicated.

2. Finish: Black.

G. Steel Castings: ASTM A 216/A 216M, Grade WCB with supplementary requirement S11.

H. Steel Forgings: ASTM A 668/A 668M.

I. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural
bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened
carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible-washer type with plain
finish.

B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural
bolts[ or tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with splined ends]; ASTM A 563,
Grade DH, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel
washers with plain finish.

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490, compressible-washer type with plain
finish.

C. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy-

hex head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon-
steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain.

D. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished
carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.

E. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 or ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable as
indicated, straight.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel.

2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
3. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.
4. Finish: Plain.

F. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel.

2. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.
3. Finish: Plain.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

G. Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108,
Grade 1035.

H. Eye Bolts and Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1030.

I. Sleeve Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1018.

J. Structural Slide Bearings: Low-friction assemblies, of configuration indicated, that provide

vertical transfer of loads and allow horizontal movement perpendicular to plane of expansion
joint while resisting movement within plane of expansion joint.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Amscot Structural Products Corp.

b. Fluorocarbon Company Limited.
c. R.J. Watson Bridge & Structural Engineered Systems.
d. Seismic Energy Products, L.P.

2. Mating Surfaces: PTFE and PTFE.

2.3 PRIMER

A. All exterior exposed steel: Tnemec Series 90G-1K97 Tneme-Zinc or prior approved equal at
2.5-3.5 dry mils.

B. All other steel: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting
primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

2.4 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic

aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for
application and a 30-minute working time; Minimum compressive strength of 7,000-psi.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate
according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and
AISC 360.

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated.

2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up.
3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain
markings until structural steel has been erected.
4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.
5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-
priming operations.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in

AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to
metal surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-
SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

F. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear

connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Steel Wall-Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall-
opening framing to be attached to structural steel. Straighten as required to provide uniform,
square, and true members in completed wall framing.

H. Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural steel. Weld exposed
joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug-weld fixed steel bar stops to frames. Secure
removable stops to frames with countersunk machine screws, uniformly spaced not more than
10 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

I. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to
pass through steel framing members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes
or enlarge holes by burning.
2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to
steel surfaces.
3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened, unless noted.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances,
appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting
welding work.

1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of
axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2.7 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded

members to a depth of 2 inches.
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing).
5. Galvanized surfaces.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and
spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and
standards:

1. Exterior exposed steel: Abrasive blast in accordance with SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast
Cleaning.
2. All other steel: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's

written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness
of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and
exposed surfaces.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection.
Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

2.8 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel
according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

1. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work unless they will
function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
2. Galvanize lintels, shelf angles and welded door frames attached to structural-steel frame
and located in exterior walls.

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform
shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being
fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the
Contract Documents.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested

and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at
testing agency's option:

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished
weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.
3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

E. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be tested and inspected
according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:

1. Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous

360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.
2. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear
connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and
locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with
requirements.

1. Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other
embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural
steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in
intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel,
connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-
place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 8

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to
AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Base Bearing and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-
reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.
3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.
Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before
packing with grout.
4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain.
Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with
manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges."

D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before
permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be
in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for
discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.

2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean
temperature when structure is completed and in service.

E. Splice members only where indicated.

F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut
sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be
enlarged to admit bolts.

H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear

connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened unless noted.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 9

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances,
appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting
welding work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary
connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.
3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of
axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges" for mill material.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections.

B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on
finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be
accepted.
c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to
requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:

1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree

flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.
2. Conduct tests on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors
already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

E. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the
Contract Documents.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 10

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or
missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1
for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning.

END OF SECTION 051200

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 11

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Wood blocking, cants and nailers.

2. Wood furring and grounds.
3. Plywood backing panels.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements
2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the
ALSC Board of Review.

B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Wood-preservative-treated wood.
2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.
3. Engineered wood products.
4. Shear panels.
5. Power-driven fasteners.
6. Powder-actuated fasteners.
7. Expansion anchors.
8. Metal framing anchors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency
is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency

ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on
end or back of each piece.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, 19
percent for more than 2-inch nominal unless otherwise indicated.

C. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that
show compliance with building code in effect for Project.

1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design
stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated.
Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational
engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a
qualified independent testing agency.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in
contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no

arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior
masonry or concrete walls.
4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawlspaces or
unexcavated areas.
5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.

ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with
requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-
test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test
method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame

spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of
significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with
the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any
time during the test.

1. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for
fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to
accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where
indicated.
2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less
when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where
exterior type is not indicated.

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry

plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing

agency.

E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Lumber located in Roof construction.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:

1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Cants.
4. Furring.
5. Grounds.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species.

C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any
of the following species and grades:

1. Mixed southern pine; No. 2 grade; SPIB.

2. Eastern softwoods; No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA.
3. Northern species; No. 2 Common grade; NLGA.

ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

4. Western woods; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC in thickness indicated or, if not indicated,
not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative

treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

C. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and,
where indicated, flat washers.

2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.

2. KC Metals Products, Inc.
3. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc.
4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.
5. USP Structural Connectors.

B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
manufacturer, that meet or exceed those of products of manufacturers listed. Manufacturer's
published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis
and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing
agency.

C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation.

1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.

D. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), high-
strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B
(HSLAS Type B); G185 coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch thick.

1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated.

ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl

rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded
polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to comply with requirements for
attaching other construction.

B. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.

C. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

D. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.

E. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install

continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

F. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.

2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),
"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-
Family Dwellings.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes
sufficiently wet that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA-registered borate
treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

END OF SECTION 061000

ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.

2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced
architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet
installation.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 123623.13 "Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops."

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products, high-pressure decorative
laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate and cabinet hardware and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.

C. Samples:

1. Plastic laminates, for each color, pattern, and surface finish.

2. Thermoset decorative panels, for each color, pattern, and surface finish.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: 5 years documented experience in the successful fabrication of

plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets for commercial building projects.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinet systems that fail in materials
or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction,
finishes, installation, and other requirements.

B. Grade: Custom.

C. Type of Construction: Frameless.

D. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay.

E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as

required by woodwork quality standard.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Abet Laminati, Inc.

b. Formica Corporation.
c. Lamin-Art, Inc.
d. Panolam Industries International, Inc.
e. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
f. Nevamar.

F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:

1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS.

2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.
3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS.
4. Pattern Direction: As requested by Architect.

G. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3,

Grade VGS.
2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels with PVC or polyester edge
banding.
3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels.

H. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and
drawers unless located directly under tops.

PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

I. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations.

2. Match Architect's sample.
3. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range in the following
categories:

a. Solid colors, matte finish.

b. Wood grains, matte finish.
c. Patterns, matte finish.
d. Several colors and finishes will be selected by Architect. See interior elevations on
drawings.

2.2 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality
standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.

B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of
referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless
otherwise indicated.

1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no
urea formaldehyde.
2. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay.
3. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive
containing no urea formaldehyde.
4. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with
thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with
requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.

2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural
cabinets.

B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of
opening.

C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter.

D. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.

E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf brackets,
B04112.

F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.

PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1. Grade 1 and Grade 2: Side mounted and extending under bottom edge of drawer; [full-
extension type; zinc-plated steel with polymer rollers.
2. Grade 1HD-100: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated-steel ball-bearing slides.
3. For drawers not more than 3 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide
Grade 2.
4. For drawers more than 3 inches high but not more than 6 inches high and not more than
24 inches wide, provide Grade 1.
5. For drawers more than 6 inches high or more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-
100.
6. For computer keyboard shelves, provide Grade 1.
7. For trash bins not more than 20 inches high and 16 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-100.

G. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.

H. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

I. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.

J. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish, as selected by Architect,
that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

1. Dark, Oxidized, Satin Bronze, Oil Rubbed: BHMA 613 for bronze base; BHMA 640 for
steel base; match Architect's sample.
2. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.
3. Bright Chromium Plated: BHMA 625 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 651 for steel
base.
4. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less
than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-
metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.

C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

D. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.

1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent

possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.

PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

B. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work,
and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to
produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and
burrs.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation

areas.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.

B. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install
level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

C. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at
cuts.

D. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws
for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.

E. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a
straight line.
2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16
inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch penetration
into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips, No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws
through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish or No. 10 wafer-head, self-
drilling screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch penetration into concrete masonry units,
blocking, or hanging strips

END OF SECTION 064116

PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 5

 TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 066400 - PLASTIC PANELING (FRP)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) panels for wall [and ceiling] applications.
B. Related Sections: Coordinate with work of other sections including the following:
1. Section 092900 – Gypsum Board.
2. Section 096513 – Resilient Base.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s literature including product characteristics, accessories and
limitations.
B. Selection Samples: Submit samples of colors and finishes if requested by architect.
C. Verification Samples: Submit samples of selected materials specified to verify color and finish.
D. Industry Certifications and Standards: Submit copy of documentation indicating compliance.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer: Minimum of 5-years experience manufacturing similar products.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials and products in unopened factory labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance
with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.

1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty against defects in manufacturing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Panolam FRP by Panolam Industries International, Inc., 1 Corporate Drive, Suite
725, Shelton, CT 06484.. Tel: 877-726-6526, Fax: 203-225-0050. Web: www.panolam.com. Panels shall
comply with the following:

1. Architect shall choose from either the Classic Collection or the Pioneer Collection
both collections shall be available.
3. Surface Texture: Smooth or Embossed as selected by Architect
4. Fire Rating ASTM E 84: [Class A.]
5. Sustainability, Indoor Air Quality: GREENGUARD Gold Certification. 6. Thickness: [0.090
inches. (2.3 mm)]
6. Barco Hardness ASTM D2583: 35 typical.

PLASTIC PANELING (FRP) 066400-1

 TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

7. Water Absorption ASTM D570: 0.2 percent typical.

8. Accessories: Color matched dividers, outside corners, inside corners, end caps and fastening rivets.
9. Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer.

Subject to the above requirements provide products as indicated above and as shown on drawings or
By comparable products by one of the following.

a. Marlite
b. Glasteel
c. Panolam Industries

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittals.
1. Clean substrate of dirt, dust, waxes, and other bond breaking substances prior to beginning installation.
2. Install panels with bottom edge located to clear top of resilient base.
3. Apply adhesive uniformly using adhesive manufacturers recommended trowel to the entire back of
panels completely to the edge (100% coverage).
4. Lay FRP panels in place leaving approximately 1/8 inch between panels and 1/4-inch space top and
bottom.
5. Follow adhesive manufacturer’s recommendations for set and application times.
6. Apply pressure to entire panel face with laminate type roller, removing trapped air and ensure proper
adhesion between surfaces.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Replace installations out of plumb and not aligned with adjacent panels and construction.

B. Clean panel face to remove soiling, stains, dust, and dirt using clean rags, and cleaning agents as instructed
by manufacturer.

C. Leave installation clean, free of residue and debris resulting from work of this section.

END OF SECTION

PLASTIC PANELING (FRP) 066400-2

 TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

PLASTIC PANELING (FRP) 066400-3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 070150.61 - PELASTOMERIC SILICONE ROOF COATING FOR RESTORING AGED

METAL ROOFING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This specification provides a remedial roof coating for application over existing weathered metal
roofing systems of all profiles. Application is restricted to circumstances in which the metal panel
substrate is in sound condition but requires a rejuvenation of the overall finish to prolong the
useful life of the metal roofing system.

When properly applied in conjunction with seam restoration and fastener replacement, the
GacoFlex S42 Series Elastomeric Silicone Roof Coating provides a weathertight seal that protects
the substrate from degradation caused by ultra violet light (UV), water, and other normal
weathering hazards. The metal panels must be free of deflection and should have a slope ratio of
2:12 or greater to promote positive drainage.

Suitable metal surfaces to receive a GacoFlex S42 Series Elastomeric Silicone Roof Coating
include steel (aged at least one year or treated galvanized steel), anodized aluminum, and pre-
finished metal (other than siliconized and fluorocarbon finishes). The GacoFlex S42 Series
Elastomeric Silicone Roof Coating is intended to renew an existing finish or add improved
reflectivity to bare metal.

B. The GacoFlex S42 Series Elastomeric Silicone Roof Coating discussed in this specification has a
moderate rate of water vapor transmission and is not recommended for use on cold storage or
cryogenic structures that may have constant high-water vapor drive causing long-term
accumulations of moisture.

C. This specification is intended only as a guide for the development of a project specification. The
suitability of this specification for a particular project must be determined by a qualified
representative of the owner.

Conditions to check and corrections to consider are:

• The type of existing metal panel roofing system must be identified.
• The existing metal panels must be fully secured and intact.
• Structural elements must be sound.

D. Adhesion tests are strongly recommended prior to bidding with special attention to determine if a
primer is necessary in consideration of the existing substrate type and present material condition
of area indented for Gaco coating application. A Coating Applicator that is licensed by the
product manufacturer should perform wet and dry adhesion tests as instructed in GacoFlex
General Instructions GW-1-3 Adhesion Testing
Procedures using the products listed in below.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Cast-In-Place Concrete: Division 03 30 00

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

B. Flashing/Sheet Metal: Division 07 60 00

C. Roof Accessories: Division 07 72 00
D. Rough Carpentry/Wood Blocking: Division 06 10 00
E. Drains, Vents and Penetrations: Division 22 14 26.13
F. Vapor /Air Barriers: Division 07 25 00
G. Board Insulation: Division 07 22 00
H. Skylights: Division 08 60 00
I. Metal Decking: Division 05 30 00

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. PRODUCT DATA:
Submit manufacturer’s standard submittal package including specification, installation
instructions and general information for each waterproofing material.

B. APPLICATOR QUALIFICATIONS:
Submit current Letter of Good Standing from the specified waterproofing manufacturer.

C. SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS:

1. Applicator to present to owner a completed inspection report verifying substrate condition

and any noted defects not specifically addressed in regard to the installation of the coating.

2. Surface shall be free from loose dirt, stone, debris, moisture, and shall be in stable condition.
Any work on the area to receive this application shall be completed prior to the installation of
the coating.

3. Applicator shall complete a substrate inspection prior to the start of the installation of the
coating. The architect/owner and Applicator shall accept the substrate. Start of the work
constitutes acceptance.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Primary waterproofing materials shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Secondary

materials shall be recommended by the primary manufacturer. The manufacturer shall have a
minimum of ten (10) years’ experience in the manufacture of materials of this type.

B. Applicators shall have a minimum of five (5) years’ experience in the application of
waterproofing materials of the type specified. The Applicator shall possess a current Letter of
Good Standing from the specified waterproofing manufacturer.

C. PRE-BID CONFERENCE:
Ten (10) working days prior to the bid opening there is to be a mandatory Pre-Bid Conference. Those
not attending the Pre-Bid Conference will not be allowed to bid the project. All products considered
an equal to the specified product or any changes in the scope of work, installation, or specifications
must be presented at the Pre-Bid Conference. If a change in the specifications is accepted, it will be
considered as an alternate and will be presented as a bid addendum issued five (5) working days prior
to the bid opening. No other changes to the specification or bid documents will be accepted.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

D. Materials other than those specified shall be submitted to the architect/owner for approval no later
than ten (10) days prior to the bid date. In requesting prior approval, it shall be necessary to
submit:

1. A letter of certification, signed by an officer of the manufacturer, stating that the alternate
material is equal to or better than the specified product.

2. Independent laboratory test data giving physical property values in comparison to the
specified material.

E. PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE:
Prior to the commencement of the installation, meet at the jobsite with a representative of the
coating manufacturer, Applicator, general contractor, architect, and other parties affected by this
section. Review the methods and procedures, substrate conditions, scheduling, and safety.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Owner/owner’s representative shall reject damaged or non-conforming materials. Rejected

materials must be removed immediately from the job site.

B. Store the coating materials as recommended by the manufacturer and conforming to applicable
safety regulatory agencies: town or city, state, and federal. Refer to all applicable data including,
but not limited to: Safety Data Sheets, Product Data Sheets, product labels, and specific
instructions for personal protection.

C. Provide adequate ventilation, protection from hazardous fumes, and overspray potential to
workers and associated trades in close proximity of the site application.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer warrants that the material supplied will meet or exceed physical properties as
published. The Applicator guarantees that workmanship will be free of defects in coating application.
Since performance of previously applied coatings is beyond the control of Manufacturer and
Applicator, requests for additional warranty coverage shall be subject to prior approval by
Manufacturer.

B. A TEN (10) YEAR MATERIAL AND LABOR WARRANTY MUST BE SUPPLIED BY

THE PRODUCT MANUFACTURER.

C. PROTECTION OF BUILDING AND OCCUPANTS:

1. All surfaces not to receive the coating specified shall be protected from overspray hazard, e.g.,
windows, doors, exterior surfaces and facades, parking lots, and vehicles. Protective coverings
shall be secured against wind and shall be vented if used in conjunction with applications
preventing collection and moisture.
2. Applicator to post signs noting potential overspray hazard within 400 ft (122 m) of
applications.
3. All air intake ventilation equipment shall be turned off to prevent fumes from entering
building.
4. Surfaces damaged during application shall be restored at no expense to the owner.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

5. No smoking signs to be posted as mandated by local fire officials.

D. SUBSTRATE: Proceed with work as specified only after substrate construction, preparation, and
detail work has been completed.
E. EQUIPMENT: All equipment used during operations shall be located so as not to adversely affect
the daily operations or endanger occupants, structure, or materials on-site. All spray equipment
must be grounded during operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
Gaco, www.gaco.com – Manufactured by Holcim Solutions and Products US, LLC
Other brands manufactured by Holcim Solutions and Products US, LLC as noted.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. CLEANER:
GacoFlex GacoWash Concentrated Cleaner

B. SACRIFICIAL TAPE:
ScotchBlue™ Original Painter’s Tape or equivalent (as needed)

C. PRIMER:
GacoPrime LVOC Primer (as needed)
ALTERNATE: GacoFlex E5320 Primer over appropriate substrates and/or as a rust inhibitor

D. FLASHING (SEAMS & LAPS):

1.) GacoFlex 66S Reinforcing Polyester Mesh Tape
2.) GacoFlex SF4200 SeamSeal
3.) GacoPatch Silicone Roof Sealant
4.) GacoFlex UF9022 – GacoMastic™
5.) ERsystems® H.E.R.

E. FLASHING (EXPOSED FASTENERS):

1.) GacoFlex SF4200 SeamSeal
2.) GacoPatch Silicone Roof Sealant
3.) GacoFlex UF9022 – GacoMastic™
4.) ERsystems® H.E.R.

F. COATING: GacoFlex S42 Series Elastomeric Silicone Roof Coating having the following
physical properties:

GacoFlex S42 Series | Elastomeric Silicone Roof Coating

PROPERTY VALUE TEST METHOD

TENSILE STRENGTH 450 psi (3.1 MPa) ASTM D412
ELONGATION AT BREAK (0 °F (-18 °C)) 169 % ASTM D412
SOLIDS 96.5 % by weight ASTM D1644

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

PROPERTY VALUE TEST METHOD

SOLIDS 95 % by volume ASTM D2697
VOC 37 g / L (0.081 lb / gal) EPA Method 24
REFLECTANCE (INITIAL) 0.88 C1549

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Metal panels must be structurally sound and securely fastened. Severe oxidation may render some
panels unsuitable to serve as a proper substrate for the coating and should be replaced as needed.

B. Verify that substrate is ready to receive work; surface is clean, dry and free of substances that
could affect bond.

C. Verify that all other work involved with this area, done under other sections, has been completed
and accepted by the architect, general contractor, or owner prior to starting the waterproofing
application.

3.2 PREPARATION

NOTE: IT IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANT FOR THE ROOF TO BE CLEAN AND DRY.

A. Inspect metal fasteners and retighten where possible. Where fasteners are stripped out, missing,
corroded, or neoprene grommets are deteriorated, replace with oversize screws. Inspect horizontal
and vertical seams, panel end laps, and tension bars/straps. Where necessary, remove fasteners to
separate the panels, remove existing sealant, add new butyl caulk, and re-secure with new
fasteners to create a water-tight compression seal.

B. Remove heavy deposits of dirt, leaves and other debris from the roof using a stiff broom. Then
apply GacoWash Concentrated Cleaner according to label instructions with sprayer of choice,
using a 3 - 4 ft (0.9 - 1.2 m) arc pattern. A Hudson-type agricultural sprayer, conventional
pressure sprayer or airless sprayer is recommended. Allow solution to stand for 10-15 minutes,
adding a light mist of water to prevent drying. While it sets, lightly agitate any heavily soiled
areas with a broom or brush. Do not allow dirt to settle in low areas. Use a commercial power
washer >3,000 psi (21 MPa) to remove debris and continue rinsing until all suds are gone. Start at
the highest point of the roof and work towards the lowest point. For low-sloped roofs, work away
from and then back towards, roof drains. It is important to keep the surface wet until all of the
GacoWash and other residue has been completely rinsed off and the surface is clean. After
cleaning and rinsing the roof, ensure no dirt or debris is present.

C. BIOLOGICAL CONTROL: Areas of algae, mildew or fungus on the roof or an existing coating
should be treated with a solution of 1-part household bleach to 3-parts water, followed by a power
wash rinse using clean water.

D. DRYING: Allow surfaces to dry thoroughly. Examine the roof, paying particular attention to
areas of physical damage or previous repairs to determine that residual water has in fact dried
before applying GacoFlex S42 Series Roof Coating.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

NOTE: Drying time depends on weather conditions such as temperature, humidity and air movement.
The above drying times assume good weather (70 F / 21 C daytime temperature) and no rain.
Conditions of lower temperature and rain will require a longer period for drying.

E. Structurally sound metal panels with moderate to extensive oxidation should be cleaned and/or
lightly abraded to remove loose surface rust and treated with a rust-inhibiting primer to help
prevent corrosion from spreading.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. TECHNICAL ADVICE: The installation of this coating shall be accomplished with the advice of,
the manufacturer’s technical representative. Contact Technical Services for assistance.

B. PRIMER:

1. COVERAGE RATE: If adhesion testing indicated the need for a primer, apply
GacoPrime LVOC Primer at an approximate rate of 200 - 250 ft² / gal (18 - 23 m² / 3.8
L). Avoid puddling of primer on the surface. Target Wet Film Thickness (WFT) is 6 - 8
mils. Apply through one of the following methods:
i. BRUSH: Use solvent resistant brush and apply.
ii. ROLLER: Apply GacoPrime with a solvent resistant short nap roller (standard
3/8 in (10 mm) nap recommended).
iii. SPRAY: Do not thin. Use pressure pot or airless sprayer to apply primer Avoid
puddling of primer on surface when spraying. This is a very low viscosity fluid,
so a small tip size is recommended.
2. CURING TIME: Allow appropriate amount of cure time before applying base / top coats
(approximately 2 hours depending on ambient temperature). The primer will dry to a
slightly tacky film. Test the primer film by pressing firmly with a finger and removing.
Properly dried film will be well bonded to the substrate. If the film is removed from the
substrate allow further drying time.

NOTE: Oxidized metal panels that have been treated with a rust-inhibiting primer as described in
3.2.E must be primed with two (2) coats of GacoPrime LVOC Primer.

C. AT ALL FLASHING SEAMS, CORNERS, AND VERTICAL/SIDE LAPS – CHOOSE ONE

OF THE FOLLOWING:

1. Apply GacoFlex S42 Series Elastomeric Silicone Roof Coating by brush or roller at a
minimum width of 6 in (16 cm) centered on the seam at minimum rate of 1.5 gal / 100 ft2
(5.7 L / 9.3 m2) to obtain a Wet Film Thickness (WFT) of 24 mils (approx. 200 LF / gal
(61 LM / 3.8L). Immediately embed a 4 in (100 mm) strip GacoFlex 66S Reinforcing
Polyester Mesh into the wet coating until the Polyester Mesh is completely saturated. The
Polyester Mesh must be smoothly applied without wrinkles, “fish mouths,” blisters, or
pin holes. Once the Coating with embedded Polyester Mesh is firm to the touch, apply
another coat of GacoFlex S42 Series Elastomeric Silicone Coating at a minimum rate of
1.5 gal / 100 ft² (5.75 L / 9.3 m2) to completely encapsulate the Polyester Mesh. Allow to
cure for a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours (longer in overcast or low humidity
conditions).

2. Apply GacoFlex SF4200 SeamSeal applied at a minimum of in (102 mm) wide, crested
and centered at the seam, with a minimum thickness at the center of 64 wet mils

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

(approximately 70 LF / gal (21 LM / 3.8 L). Allow to cure for a minimum of 4 hours
(longer in overcast or low humidity conditions).

3. Apply sacrificial tape ScotchBlue™ ORIGINAL Painter’s Tape (or equivalent) as

required. Apply GacoPatch Silicone Roof Sealant at a minimum of 4 in (102 mm) wide,
crested and centered at the seam, with a minimum thickness at the center of 64 wet mils
(approx. 70 LF / gal (21 LM / 3.8 L). Allow to cure for a minimum of 4 hours (longer in
overcast or low humidity conditions).

4. Apply sacrificial tape ScotchBlue™ ORIGINAL Painter’s Tape (or equivalent) as

required. Apply GacoFlex UF9022 – GacoMastic at the approximate rate of 70 LF / gal
and 4 in (102 mm) wide, crested and centered at the seam. Achieve an average minimum
WFT of 64 mils when measured at center at all areas to receive flashing. Allow to dry a
minimum of forty (40) hours at 75 °F (24 °C) and 55 % R.H. to achieve full cure. Low
humidity and low temperature will result in longer cure times.

5. Apply ERSystems H.E.R. Sealant at the approximate rate of 70 LF / gal and 4 in (102
mm) wide, crested and centered at the seam. Achieve an average minimum WFT of 64
mils when measured at center at all areas to receive flashing. Allow to dry a minimum of
twelve (12) to twenty-four (24) hours at 75 °F (23.9 °C) and 45 % R.H. Weather related
conditions such as frost, dew, mist, condensation, humidity, and temperature must be
taken into consideration prior to coating. Temperature should be above 40 °F (4.45 °C)
more than 5 °F (2.8 °C) above the dew point and rising, for best application results.

NOTE: Refer to manufacturer’s product instructions and/or data sheet for important information
regarding drying times and other important factors to consider regarding application.

D. AT HORIZONTAL SEAMS/END LAPS – CHOOSE ONE OF THE FOLLOWING:

1. Apply sacrificial tape ScotchBlue™ ORIGINAL Painter’s Tape (or equivalent) as

required. Apply GacoFlex SF4200 Acrylic SeamSeal at a minimum rate of 4 in (102 mm)
wide, crested and centered at the seam, with a minimum thickness at the center of 64 wet
mils (approx. 70 LF / gal (22 LM / 3.8 L)). Allow to dry four (4) – six (6) hours before
proceeding to next step of the application process.

2. Apply GacoFlex S42 Series Elastomeric Silicone Roof Coating by brush or roller at a
minimum width of 6 in (16 cm) centered on the seam at minimum rate of 1.5 gal / 100 ft
2 (5.7 L / 9.3 m 2) to obtain a Wet Film Thickness (WFT) of 24 mils (approx. 200 LF /
gal (61 LM / 3.8L). Immediately embed a 4 in (100 mm) strip GacoFlex 66S Reinforcing
Polyester Mesh into the wet coating until the Polyester Mesh is completely saturated. The
Polyester Mesh must be smoothly applied without wrinkles, “fish mouths,” blisters, or
pin holes. Once the Coating with embedded Polyester Mesh is firm to the touch, apply
another coat of GacoFlex S42 Series Elastomeric Silicone Coating at a minimum rate of
1.5 gal / 100 ft² (5.75 L / 9.3 m2) to completely encapsulate the Polyester Mesh. Allow to
cure for a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours (longer in overcast or low humidity
conditions).

3. Apply sacrificial tape ScotchBlue™ ORIGINAL Painter’s Tape (or equivalent) as

required. Apply GacoPatch Silicone Roof Sealant at a minimum of 4 in (102 mm) wide,
crested and centered at the seam, with a minimum thickness at the center of 64 wet mils

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

(approx. 70 LF / gal (21 LM / 3.8 L). Allow to cure for a minimum of four (4) hours
(longer in overcast or low humidity conditions).

4. Apply sacrificial tape ScotchBlue™ ORIGINAL Painter’s Tape (or equivalent) as

required. Apply GacoFlex UF9022 – GacoMastic at the approximate rate of 70 LF / gal
and 4 in (102 mm) wide, crested and centered at the seam. Achieve an average minimum
WFT of 64 mils when measured at center at all areas to receive flashing. Allow to dry a
minimum of forty (40) hours at 75 °F (24 °C) and 55 % R.H. to achieve full cure. Low
humidity and low temperature will result in longer cure time.

5. Apply ERSystems H.E.R. Sealant at the approximate rate of 70 LF / gal and 4 in (102
mm) wide, crested and centered at the seam. Achieve an average minimum WFT of 64
mils when measured at center at all areas to receive flashing. Allow to dry a minimum of
twelve (12) to twenty-four (24) hours at 75 °F (23.9 °C) and 45 % R.H. Weather related
conditions such as frost, dew, mist, condensation, humidity, and temperature must be
taken into consideration prior to coating. Temperature should be above 40 °F (4.45 °C)
more than 5 °F (2.8 °C) above the dew point and rising, for best application results.

NOTE: Refer to manufacturer’s product instructions and/or data sheet for important information
regarding drying times and other important factors to consider regarding application.

E. FLASHING (EXPOSED FASTENERS) – CHOOSE ONE OF THE FOLLOWING:

NOTE: For all methods, cure/drying time can be concurrent with “Section 3.3.C” & “Section
3.3.D” when applied is started at the same time.

1. Apply GacoFlex SF4200 SeamSeal as received to all exposed fasteners. Ensure complete
encapsulation of each exposed fastener and eliminate any voids/air pockets between
flashing product, fasteners and surrounding substrate components. Allow to cure four (4)
– (6) hours before proceeding to next step of the application process.

2. Apply GacoPatch as received to all exposed fasteners. Ensure complete encapsulation of

each exposed fastener and eliminate any voids/air pockets between flashing product,
fasteners and surrounding substrate components. ). Allow to cure for a minimum of four
(4) hours (longer in overcast or low humidity conditions).

3. Apply GacoFlex UF9022 – GacoMastic as received to all exposed fasteners. Ensure

complete encapsulation of each exposed fastener and eliminate any voids/air pockets
between flashing product, fasteners and surrounding substrate components. Allow to dry
a minimum of forty (40) hours at 75 °F (24 °C) and 55 % R.H. to achieve full cure. Low
humidity and low temperature will result in longer cure time.

4. Apply ERSystems H.E.R. Sealant as received to all exposed fasteners. Ensure complete
encapsulation of each exposed fastener and eliminate any voids/air pockets between
flashing product, fasteners and surrounding substrate components. Allow to cure for a
minimum of four (4) hours. Allow to dry a minimum of twelve (12) to twenty-four (24)
hours at 75 °F (23.9 °C) and 45 % R.H. Weather related conditions such as frost, dew,
mist, condensation, humidity, and temperature must be taken into consideration prior to
coating. Temperature should be above 40 °F (4.45 °C) more than 5 °F (2.8 °C) above the
dew point and rising, for best application results.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 8

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

NOTE: Refer to manufacturer’s product instructions and/or data sheet for important information
regarding drying times and other important factors to consider regarding application.

F. SLEEPERS: Any units that are sitting on sleepers must be lifted so that the membrane underneath
the units can be cleaned, primed and coated. An approved slip sheet must be placed under the
sleepers to protect the coating. If the units are not lifted off the deck so as to be able to
accomplish this procedure, the untreated area will be excluded from the manufacturer’s warranty.

G. SILICONE COATING: Apply one (1) coat of GacoFlex S42 Series Elastomeric Silicone Roof
Coating at the average rate of 1.25 gal / 100 ft² (4.7 L / 9.3 m²) to obtain 20 mil Wet Film
Thickness (WFT) / 18 mil Dry Film Thickness (DFT). Coat all surfaces including expansion joint
covers and flashings. At all edges, penetrations, and standing seams or other vertical corrugations,
an extra pass must be applied.

OPTIONAL GRANULAR COAT: An additional granular coat may be added. Apply one coat of
GacoFlex S42 Series Elastomeric Silicone Roof Coating at a minimum rate of 0.5 gal / 100 ft
2 (1.9 L / 9.3 m2). Immediately broadcast white roofing granules into the wet coating at the rate of 30
lbs./ 100 ft2 (13.6 kg / 9.3 m2).

CAUTION: While the use of granules will improve traction, caution should still be exercised when
walking on the coated roofing system, especially in wet conditions.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Any variations from the specified limits found by the Applicator or owner’s representative shall
be corrected by the Applicator.

B. MINIMUM DRY FILM THICKNESS (DFT): Gaco recommends adding a 10 % variance factor
to meet the minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT) mil requirement to qualify as a warrantable
application. It is the Applicator’s responsibility to calculate the amount of coating needed to
obtain the minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT) mil thickness.

C. No traffic shall be permitted on the coated surface for a minimum of three (3) days. Damage to
the surface by other trades shall not be the responsibility of the Applicator.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 9

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design
designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting

agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit
illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping
manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-
resistance-rated assembly.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in
compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Product test reports.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following

requirements:

1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by UL, FM Global or other qualified testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in
"Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems bearing marking of qualified
testing and inspection agency.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Hilti, Inc.
2. Johns Manville.
3. RectorSeal Corporation.
4. Specified Technologies Inc.
5. 3M Fire Protection Products.
6. USG Corporation.

2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according
to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-
resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be
compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items
if any.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479,

based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.

1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479,

based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.

1. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated.
2. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.

D. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed

indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

E. VOC Content: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the
following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24):

1. Sealants: 250 g/L.

2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

F. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to
install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency
for firestopping indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.

B. Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions

and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

C. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during
their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths
required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of
firestopping.

D. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels
permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels will be
visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical
fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to
surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building

Management of Any Damage."
2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
4. Date of installation.
5. Manufacturer's name.
6. Installer's name.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of

testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection
reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.

END OF SECTION 078413

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 078446 - FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions.

2. Joints at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections.
3. Joints in smoke barriers.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Product Schedule: For each fire-resistive joint system. Include location and design designation
of qualified testing agency.

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing agency's illustration

for a particular fire-resistive joint system condition, submit illustration, with
modifications marked, approved by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's fire-
protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated
assembly.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating fire-resistive joint systems have been installed in
compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Product test reports.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to

FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to
comply with UL's "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Fire-resistive joint systems shall comply with the following
requirements:

1. Fire-resistive joint system tests are performed by UL.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

A. Where required, provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist
spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and
maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which fire-resistive joint
systems are installed. Fire-resistive joint systems shall accommodate building movements
without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.

B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Ratings determined per

ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079:

1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of construction

they will join.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:

a. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.

b. CEMCO.
c. Fire Trak Corp.
d. Grace Construction Products.
e. Hilti, Inc.
f. Johns Manville.
g. Nelson Firestop Products.
h. NUCO Inc.
i. Passive Fire Protection Partners.
j. RectorSeal Corporation .
k. Specified Technologies Inc.
l. 3M Fire Protection Products.
m. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.
n. USG Corporation.

C. Joints at Exterior Curtain-Wall/Floor Intersections: Rating determined by ASTM E 119 based

on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa) or ASTM E 2307.

1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the floor

assembly.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of
the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into
the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

a. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.

b. Grace Construction Products.
c. Hilti, Inc.
d. Johns Manville.
e. Nelson Firestop Products.
f. NUCO Inc.
g. Passive Fire Protection Partners.
h. RectorSeal Corporation.

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

i. Specified Technologies Inc.

j. 3M Fire Protection Products.
k. Thermafiber, Inc.
l. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.
m. USG Corporation.

D. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Ratings determined per UL 2079.

1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/ft of joint at 0.30 inch wg at both ambient and elevated
temperatures.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:

a. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.

b. Grace Construction Products.
c. Hilti, Inc.
d. Johns Manville.
e. Nelson Firestop Products.
f. NUCO Inc.
g. Passive Fire Protection Partners.
h. RectorSeal Corporation.
i. Specified Technologies Inc.
j. 3M Fire Protection Products.
k. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.
l. USG Corporation.

E. Exposed Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

F. VOC Content: Fire-resistive joint system sealants shall comply with the following limits for
VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.

2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

G. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming
materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only
components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified
testing agency for systems indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

B. Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions
and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

C. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during
their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to
achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire-
resistive joint system.

D. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the
following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fire-
resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify fire-resistive joint systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels
permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of joint edge so labels will be visible to
anyone seeking to remove or penetrate joint system. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-
type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels
are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Fire-Resistive Joint System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building
Management of Any Damage."
2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
3. Designation of applicable testing agency.
4. Date of installation.
5. Manufacturer's name.
6. Installer's name.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections.

B. Where deficiencies are found or fire-resistive joint systems are damaged or removed due to
testing, repair or replace fire-resistive joint systems so they comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after inspection
reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

3.4 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory" under product Category XHBN or Category XHDG.

B. Wall-to-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems

C. Head-of-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems

END OF SECTION 078446

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Silicone joint sealants.

2. Urethane joint sealants.
3. Preformed joint sealants.

1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers

eight samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. Use ASTM C 1087 or
manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming and other specific joint
preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint
substrates.

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to
Project joint substrates. Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint
Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in
ASTM C 1521.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.

2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint-sealant formulation.
4. Joint-sealant color.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product test reports.

B. Preconstruction compatibility and adhesion test reports.

C. Preconstruction field-adhesion test reports.

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

D. Field-adhesion test reports.

E. Warranties.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or
replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in
this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the
weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.

2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

B. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints
that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone
testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water,
unless otherwise indicated.

C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous

substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have
not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Mildew-Resistant, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920.

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:

a. BASF Building Systems.

b. Dow Corning Corporation.
c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones.
d. May National Associates, Inc.
e. Pecora Corporation.
f. Polymeric Systems, Inc.
g. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.
h. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division.
i. Tremco Incorporated.

2. Type: Single component (S).

3. Grade: Nonsag (NS).
4. Class: 2.
5. Uses Related to Exposure: Traffic (T) or Nontraffic (NT), as applicable to exposure.

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:

a. BASF Building Systems.

b. Bostik, Inc.
c. Lymtal, International, Inc.
d. May National Associates, Inc.
e. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.
f. Pecora Corporation.
g. Polymeric Systems, Inc.
h. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.
i. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division.
j. Tremco Incorporated.

2. Type: Multicomponent (M).

3. Grade: Nonsag (NS).
4. Class: 25.
5. Uses Related to Exposure: Traffic (T) or Nontraffic (NT), as applicable to exposure.

2.4 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Preformed Foam Joint Sealant : Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open-cell

foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 10 lb/cu. ft. and
impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in precompressed sizes

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive
adhesive and covered with protective wrapping.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:

a. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals.

b. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.
c. Sandell Manufacturing Co.
d. Schul International, Inc.
e. Willseal USA, LLC.

2.5 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface
skin), Type O (open-cell material) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by
joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control
sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants

and sealant backing materials.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants.

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as

indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-
sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or
by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and backs of joints.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.

F. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and
joint substrate.
b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor
per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint
Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in
ASTM C 1521.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from
testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.
Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other
requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated
requirements.

END OF SECTION 079200

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 081000a – METAL BI-FOLD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes Metal Bi-Folding Doors.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses,
preparations for hardware, and other details.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.

E. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for
details and openings as those on Drawings.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product test reports.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace

components of Metal Bi-Fold Door systems that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: three years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: Provide products by Schweiss Doors. Address: 72121 470th St, Hector, MN
55342. Phone: 507-426-8273. Or by one of the following:
1. Diamond Doors. Address: 400 Airport Dr, Winkler, MB R6W 0J9, Canada. Phone: (866)
325-7600.
2. Hi-Fold Door Corporation. Address: N6170 1070th St, River Falls, WI 54022. Phone:
(715) 262-3018.

METAL BI-FOLD DOOR 081000a - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

3. Schweiss Doors. Address: 72121 470th St, Hector, MN 55342. Phone: 507-426-8273.

DESIGN CRITERIA

B. Follow Building Code: 2021 IBC.

C. Must withstand a wind speed of 115 mph with 3 second gust.

D. Risk Category: II.

E. Wind Exposure: C.

F. Enclosure: Partially Enclosed.

G. Topographic Factor – Kzt: Must be provided by the engineer of record.

H. Building Height: Contractor to verify at Job Site.

I. Roof Slope: Contractor to verify at Job Site.

J. Door Operational Wind Speed: Maximum Wind Speed for Door Operation is 30 MPH. Do not
operate door if wind speed exceeds the maximum door operating speed. Door must be closed
with floor pins and locks engaged when unattended or when wind speed is expected to exceed
the maximum door operating speed.

2.2 TEHCNICAL INFORMATION

A. Number of hinges: 6.

B. Number of lift points: 4 distributed equally.

C. Electrical system: See electrical drawings.

D. Door Weights:
1. Structural Framing Weight: 4959lbs.
2. Exterior Sheeting and Trim Weight: 645lbs.

E. When the bi-fold door is opening or in the wide-open position, the door tends to pull away from
the building at the hinge line also putting stress on each building column where the roller moves
along the column flange.

2.3 MINIMUM DOOR HEADER REQUIREMENTS

A. Maximum Allowable Vertical Deflection: L/180. Maximum under Dead + Live Load or Dead +
Snow Load Combinations. Vertical Frame Deflection must be held so that the door will open
when the full snow load is applied to the building. Door Dead Load is applied to the building
when the door is open or closed.

METAL BI-FOLD DOOR 081000a - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

B. Maximum Allowable Horizontal Frame Drift is: H/60 in the plane of the wall containing the
door.

2.4 MINIMUM DOOR SIDE COLUMN REQUIREMENTS

A. Wind Load) Maximum Allowable Inward or Outward Deflection of Your Buildings Bi-Fold
Door Side Columns: L/90.

B. Dead Load of Door: L/180. Door Dead Load is applied to the building when the door is open or
closed.

C. Recommended Minimum Flange Thickness of Your Buildings Bi-Fold Door Side Columns:
5/8”.

2.5 UPGRADE EQUIPMENT REQUIRED

A. 3” insulation: EPS Board Ins. w/ 26ga alum. Interior liner & weather seal kit.

B. Commercial Photoelectric Sensors: provides momentary push button operation.

2.6 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors: As required by manufacturer.

B. Floor Anchors: As required by manufacturer.

C. Floor Pins: As required by manufacturer.

2.7 MATERIALS

A. Exterior Cladding: 28 ga with fasteners. Item provided by contractor.

1. Exterior metal siding installed on door to match exterior metal siding of building. The
same siding can be used on interior. Provide J-molds at ends of metal siding and as
shown by manufacturer.

B. Exterior Trim: as needed.

C. Single Leever Locking System (locks both sides of door in one location).

D. Pre-wired Control Box. (Up/Down/Stop Push button station, safety and limit switches) Include
all necessary wiring on door, final power hook-up to panel by contractor.

E. Heavy duty electric opener with break kit. Verify voltage on electrical drawings.

F. Upper and Lower weather seals.

G. All mounting hardware for door installation, including the necessary fasteners.

METAL BI-FOLD DOOR 081000a - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

H. Verify with manufacturer any additional materials needed for complete installation.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Metal Bi-Fold Door to be fabricated by manufacturer. Ensure proper assembly at Project site,
per manufacturer’s specification and necessary code standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Exterior Bi-Fold Door: Install metal bi-fold door of size and profile indicated on drawings and
required by door manufacturer. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as
required by standards specified.

1. Anchors: Provide anchors as needed and required by manufacturer for complete

installation.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Final Adjustments: Check and re-adjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Touchup Painting: Be sure bi-fold door is clean & touch-up paint as needed.

END OF SECTION 08

METAL BI-FOLD DOOR 081000a - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hollow-metal work.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to

NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses,
preparations for hardware, and other details.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.

E. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for
details and openings as those on Drawings.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product test reports.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of hollow metal door and frame systems that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Amweld Building Products.

2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
4. Deansteel Manufacturing Company.
5. Mesker Door Inc.
6. Pioneer Industries, Inc.
7. Republic Builders Products Company.
8. Steelcraft Manufacturing Company; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
9. Windsor Republic Doors.

2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based
on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and
labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance
with NFPA 105.

B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection
ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.

2.3 INTERIOR FRAMES

A. Standard-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 1.

1. Physical Performance: Level C according to SDI A250.4.

2. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated,] cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042

inch.
b. Construction: Full profile welded.

3. Exposed Finish: Factory primed.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

2.4 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2.

1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4.

2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, with
minimum A40 coating.
d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless.
e. Core: Manufacturer's standard insulation material.

3. Thermal-Rating: Provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not

less than 2.1 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363.
4. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with

minimum A40 coating.
b. Construction: Full profile welded.

5. Exposed Finish: Factory Primed.

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not
less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches
wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.
2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042
inch thick.
3. Post-installed Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch
diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall,
with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and
as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

2.6 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable
for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of
scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill
phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M
or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: From corrosion-resistant materials.

G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.

H. Glazing: Section 088000 "Glazing."

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical,
fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly
identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors:

1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit

moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
2. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by
NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated.

C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal
as frames.

1. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face
seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at
crossings and to jambs by butt welding.
2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be
grouted.
4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per
anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at
bottoms of jambs.
5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c., to match coursing, and as
follows:

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.

2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.
4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24
inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.

2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24
inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.

c. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top
and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.

6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised

hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to
SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-mounted

door hardware.
2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for
preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.

E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites. Form corners of stops
and moldings with mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow-
metal work.
2. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors
and frames.
3. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work.
4. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation
types indicated.

2.8 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pre-treat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1. Shop Primer: SDI A250.10.

B. Field Finish: Paint as specified for Steel Substrates in Section 099600 “High Performance
Coatings”

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect.

2.9 ACCESSORIES

A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.

B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with
SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.

b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;
grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.
d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as
necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout
containing anti-freezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,
and secure with post-installed expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of post-installed

expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack un-faced fiber-glass insulation inside frames.

4. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with post-installed
expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment,

twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees
from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:

a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
c. At Bottom of Door: 5/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors and gaskets according to NFPA 105.

C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow-
metal manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not
more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after
installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint
according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in
painting Sections.

END OF SECTION 081113

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Plastic laminate faced doors.

B. Product Data: For each type of door.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:

1. Dimensions and locations of blocking.

2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts.
4. Undercuts.
5. Fire-protection ratings of fire-rated doors.

D. Samples: For plastic-laminate door faces.

1.2 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of plastic laminate faced door systems that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Lifetime from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL

A. Contractor shall field verify information of existing solid wood doors to be matched, prior to
bidding. Failure to perform said verification shall be the responsibility of the contractor.

B. Quality Standard (Solid wood doors): In addition to requirements specified, comply with
AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

C. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products that do
not contain urea formaldehyde.

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

D. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure according to NFPA 252.

1. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating
indicated.
2. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer
stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
3. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated
without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent
seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

2.2 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED DOORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. American Door Products (VT Industries).

2. Eggers Industries.
3. Ideal Architectural Door & Plywood.
4. Marshfield Doors Systems, Inc.
5. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company.

B. Interior Solid-Core Doors:

1. Grade: Premium.
2. Plastic-Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates complying with
NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS.
3. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's
full range of products.
4. Exposed Vertical Edges: Plastic laminate that matches faces, applied before faces.
5. Core: Structural composite lumber.
6. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive
planed before faces and cross-bands are applied

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.

B. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with
applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087111 "Door Hardware."

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and
referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80.

2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated
below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-
rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises
after fitting and machining.

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8
inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise
indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door
to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.

a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

END OF SECTION 081416

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION 4-25-22

SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Exterior and interior storefront framing.

2. Exterior and interior manual-swing entrance doors.

1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other
work.

1. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor
barriers.

C. Samples: For each exposed finish required.

D. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing

fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Energy Performance Certificates: NFRC-certified energy performance values from

manufacturer.

B. Product test reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Sample warranties.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION 4-25-22

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.

C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for

aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated
by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they
relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.

1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to
Architect for review.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed

entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or
replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within
specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by

testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this
Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in
construction.

1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting

structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term
creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
2. Failure also includes the following:

a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.

b. Glass breakage.
c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
e. Failure of operating units.

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION 4-25-22

B. Structural Loads: As required by the International Building Code, 2012 edition.

C. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6
inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches or
an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever
is less.
2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch,
whichever is smaller.

a. Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1/16-inch clearance between framing

members and operable units.

3. Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point, as follows:

a. Perpendicular to Plane of Wall: No greater than 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch
for spans greater than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches or 1/175 times span, for spans less than
11 feet 8-1/4 inches.

D. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not
evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,
assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or
permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.

E. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:

1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:

a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57

lbf/sq. ft..

2. Entrance Doors:

a. Pair of Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure

differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.
b. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure
differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.

F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:

1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested
according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-
load design pressure, but not less than 10 lbf/sq. ft.

G. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows:

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION 4-25-22

1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor
of not more than 0.45 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100.
2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat gain
coefficient of no greater than 0.35 as determined according to NFRC 200.
3. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an condensation
resistance factor of no less than 68 for frames and 68 for glass as determined according to
AAMA Specification 1503.

H. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface
temperature changes:

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer Co., Inc; Trifab
VG 451 or provide comparable products from one of the following.
1. Oldcastle Building Envelope 1-866-653-2278
2. Manko 1-800-642-1488
3. Trulite Glass & Aluminum Solutions, LLC. 1-800-432-8132

2.3 FRAMING

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of

thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Construction: Thermally broken.

2. Frame Size: 2 inches by 4-1/2 inches.
3. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
4. Glazing Plane: Center.
5. Finish: As selected by Architect from the following:

a. AA-M10C21A44/AA-M45C22A44, AAMA 611, Architectural Class 1, Clear

anodic finish.
b. Full range of manufacturer’s standard AA-M10C21A44/AA-M45C22A44, AAMA
611, Architectural Class 1, Color anodic finishes.
c. Full range of manufacturer’s standard AAMA 2605, 70% PVDF, Fluoropolymer
Coatings.
d. Custom color AAMA 2605, 70% PVDF, Fluoropolymer Coating.

6. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.

B. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not
integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.

C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with

nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

D. Materials:

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION 4-25-22

1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.

a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.

b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.

2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer

complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation
and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in
SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS

A. Basis-of-Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer Co., Inc; Series
500 Wide Stile.

1. Door Construction: 2- to 2-1/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch thick,

extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with
reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate
concealed tie rods.

a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum

members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior.

2. Door Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch nominal width.

3. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer’s standard compression type, replaceable, extruded
EPDM rubber.

2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE

A. Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in Section 087100
"Door Hardware."

B. General: Provide entrance door hardware for each entrance door to comply with requirements
in this Section.

1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and
products complying with BHMA standard referenced.
2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of
operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.
3. Opening-Force Requirements:

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION 4-25-22

a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch and not more than 30 lbf to
set the door in motion and not more than 15 lbf to open the door to its minimum
required width.
b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf to fully open door.

C. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive
qualities of each type of entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware
Sets" Article. Products are identified by using entrance door hardware designations as follows:

1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for
each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements.
Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article.
2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and
requirements for description, quality, and function.

D. Butt Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, radius corner.

1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove
in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while entrance door is closed.
2. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin.
3. Quantities:

a. For doors up to 87 inches high, provide three hinges per leaf.

b. For doors more than 87 and up to 120 inches high, provide four hinges per leaf.

E. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.

F. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1.

G. Panic Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing
according to UL 305.

H. Cylinders: As specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

1. Keying: Master key system. Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control
number and include notation "DO NOT DUPLICATE".

I. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for
aluminum framing.

J. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6.

K. Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with accessories required for a complete installation, sized
as required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use; adjustable to
comply with field conditions and requirements for opening force.

L. Concealed Overhead Holders: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1.

M. Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door location
indicated, with integral rubber bumper.

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION 4-25-22

N. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.

O. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners
on mounting strip.

P. Silencers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.

Q. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21, raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with
maximum height of 1/2 inch.

2.6 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black,

resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.

C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.

D. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration

of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or
grinding.

C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.

2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior.
6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.

D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and
for installing entrance door hardware.

F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.

G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest
extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying
finishes.

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION 4-25-22

H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to
Shop Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose
or by installing nonconductive spacers.
2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by
painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200
"Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

E. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust
weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation.

F. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather
stripping.
2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door
hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using
concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.

END OF SECTION 084113

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 8

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:

a. Swinging doors.

2. Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the products listed below.
Coordinating and scheduling the purchase and delivery of these products remain requirements
of this Section.

1. Pivots, thresholds, weather stripping and lock cylinders to be installed under other
Sections.
2. Verify keying system with owner prior to ordering and provide and install permanent
cores.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

C. Other Action Submittals:

1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing

fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and
diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work
to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format[ and use same door numbers]
as in the Contract Documents.
b. Content: Include the following information:

1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each
door and frame.
2) Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor
plans and to door and frame schedule.
3) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style,
function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product.
4) Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and
interfaces with other building control systems.

DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's

final keying instructions for locks.

1.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Door Hardware: See attached schedule.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved
by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the
course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and
keying.

B. Source Limitations: Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical
door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications
and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction are acceptable.

C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated, provide door
hardware rated for use in assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies
are required, provide door hardware that meet requirements of assemblies tested according to
UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. at the tested pressure
differential of 0.3-inch wg of water.

E. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do
not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

G. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with
the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility
Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the
wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.
2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:

a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door.

b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.

DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more
than 1/2 inch.
4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door
will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the
leading edge of the door.

H. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise
indicated.

a. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule” to
comply with requirements in this Section.

1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named
manufacturers' products.
2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of
operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive
qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule"
Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for
each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements.
Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article.
2. References to BHMA Designations: Provide products complying with these designations
and requirements for description, quality, and function.

DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames
according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations
for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors."

C. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless
otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.

2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831.
3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."

D. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where
cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be
painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface
protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes
have been completed on substrates involved.

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment
substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

E. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than
the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30
inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for
door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.

F. Intermediate Offset Pivots: Where offset pivots are indicated, provide intermediate offset
pivots in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than one intermediate
offset pivot per door and one additional intermediate offset pivot for every 30 inches of door
height greater than 90 inches.

G. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction
period.

1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner.

2. Furnish and install permanent cores. Owner reserves the right to install permanent cores.
Hardware supplier shall verify with Owner, through Construction Manager, Owner’s
intent regarding installation of permanent cores.

a. Bid shall include hardware suppliers cost to install permanent cores.

DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

H. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system
cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.

I. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above
accessible ceilings or in equipment room, where installation above accessible ceilings is not
possible. Verify location with Architect.

1. Configuration: Provide least number of power supplies required to adequately serve

doors with electrified door hardware.

J. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant
complying with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

K. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door
hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.

L. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

M. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.

N. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.

O. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure
proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as
intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and
ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent

Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.

3.3 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE (TBD)

END OF SECTION 087100

DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 5

 Page 1 of 14

Finish Hardware Specification

for 5/20/2024 2:01

LDCC Winnsboro Campus Expansion

1710 Warren Street
Winnsboro, LA 71295

Architect: TBA Studio

, LA
USA

Supplier: Twin City Door & Hardware Inc.

3109 Concordia Ave.
Monroe, LA 71201
(318)323-8474 Fax: (318)323-8447
Phone:

Job Number: 21722

Date: May 20, 2024

 Finish Hardware Specification Page 2 of 14

LDCC Winnsboro Campus Expansion

5/20/2024 2:01
Job Number: 21722

General Notes:

APPROVED MANUFATURERS
BUTTS Ives
Mckinney

CYLINDERS Falcon
Schlage, Accentra (Yale)

LOCKSETS Schlage
Falcon, Accentra (Yale)

EXIT DEVICE Von Duprin

Falcon, Accentra (Yale)

CLOSER LCN
Falcon, Accentra (Yale)

FLAT GOODS
AUXILLARY Ives
Trimco
Rockwood

WEATHERSTRIP
THRESHOLD Reese
Pemko
NGP
 Finish Hardware Specification Page 3 of 14

LDCC Winnsboro Campus Expansion

5/20/2024 2:01
Job Number: 21722

Based On:
Hinge - (4-1/2 Std Wt(.134)) Mckinney Products Company (MCK)

Flush Bolt - Manual (Extension) Rockwood (ROC)

Dust Proof Strike Rockwood (ROC)

Removable Mullion Yale Security Group (YSG)

Cylinder - Mortise Schlage Lock Company (SCH)

Cylinder - Rim Schlage Lock Company (SCH)

Mortise Lockset Yale Security Group (YSG)

Exit Device - Rim Yale Security Group (YSG)

Electric Strike HES (HES)

Push Plate Rockwood (ROC)

Push/Pull Set Rockwood (ROC)

Closer Falcon (Flc)

Closer - Parallel Arm Falcon (Flc)

Kick Plate Rockwood (ROC)

Mop Plate Rockwood (ROC)

Floor Stop Rockwood (ROC)

Kickdown Holder Rockwood (ROC)

Overhead Holder/Stop (Surface) Rockwood (ROC)

Weatherstrip Pemko (PEM)

Sweep Pemko (PEM)

Threshold Pemko (PEM)

Hook - Coat/Hat Rockwood (ROC)

Power Supply Securitron Magnalock Corporation (SEC)

Silencer Rockwood (ROC)

 Finish Hardware Specification Page 4 of 14

LDCC Winnsboro Campus Expansion

5/20/2024 2:01
Job Number: 21722

Hardware Finishes:

Finish Finish Description

26D Satin Chromium Plated
600 Primed for Painting
626 Satin chromium plated over nickel
630 Satin stainless steel
689 Aluminum painted
Alum Aluminum
Grey Grey
US26D Satin chromium plated over nickel
US32D Satin stainless steel
 Finish Hardware Specification Page 5 of 14

LDCC Winnsboro Campus Expansion

5/20/2024 2:01
Job Number: 21722

Door List Door List

Door# Hardware Set# Door# Hardware Set#
01 2 43 5
06 1 44 5
08 11A 45 14
09 5 46 7
10 15 47 7
11 15 48 7
12 7 49 5
13 8 50 16
14 7 51 16
15 8 52 6
16 11 53 13
17 4 54 17
18 7 56 4
19 10 57 16
20 4 58 16
21 7 59 17
22 7 60 7
23 7 61 8
24 7 62 7
25 7 63 8
26 7 64 7
27 12 65 7
28 11 66 7
29 10 67 8
30 11 68 7
31 16 69 8
32 16 70 9
33 13 71 11
34 14 72 10
35 5 73 10
36 6 74 7
37 5 75 5
38 4 76 7
39 5 77 13
40 5 80 6
41 5
42 5
 Finish Hardware Specification Page 6 of 14

LDCC Winnsboro Campus Expansion

5/20/2024 2:01
Job Number: 21722

Hardware Set#: 1

Single: 06

Qty UOM Manf Item Type Item Series/Description Finish

3.0 EA MCK Hinge - (4-1/2 Std Wt(.134)) TA2314 4.5x4.5 NRP US32D
1.0 EA SCH Cylinder - Rim 20-057 x Everest-C x GMK 626
1.0 EA YSG Exit Device - Rim 7100-36xPB626F 630
1.0 EA HES Electric Strike 9400 630
1.0 EA Flc Closer - Parallel Arm SC71A x HD/PA x FC 689
1.0 EA ROC Kick Plate K1050 12"x34" Tek US32D
1.0 EA ROC Floor Stop 480H 626
1.0 EA PEM Weatherstrip 303APK 36 x 84 Tek Alum
1.0 EA PEM Sweep 345AV 36" Tek Alum
1.0 EA PEM Threshold 2005AV 36" WS/PA Alum
1.0 EA SEC Power Supply BPS24-1 600
All other access control componets by security contractor.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________

Hardware Set#: 2

Single: 01

Qty UOM Manf Item Type Item Series/Description Finish

3.0 EA MCK Hinge - (4-1/2 Std Wt(.134)) TA2314 4.5x4.5 NRP US32D
1.0 EA SCH Cylinder - Rim 20-057 x Everest-C x GMK 626
1.0 EA YSG Exit Device - Rim 7100-36xPB626F 630
1.0 EA Flc Closer - Parallel Arm SC71A x HD/PA x FC 689
1.0 EA ROC Kick Plate K1050 12"x34" Tek US32D
1.0 EA ROC Floor Stop 480H 626
1.0 EA PEM Weatherstrip 303APK 36 x 84 Tek Alum
1.0 EA PEM Sweep 345AV 36" Tek Alum
1.0 EA PEM Threshold 2005AV 36" WS/PA Alum

______________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Finish Hardware Specification Page 7 of 14

LDCC Winnsboro Campus Expansion

5/20/2024 2:01
Job Number: 21722

Hardware Set#: 3

Qty UOM Manf Item Type Item Series/Description Finish

6.0 EA MCK Hinge - (4-1/2 Std Wt(.134)) TA2714 4.5x4.5 US26D
1.0 EA YSG Removable Mullion KRM200 7’ 600
1.0 EA SCH Cylinder - Mortise 20-061 x 112 x B520-296 x Everest-C x GMK 626
1.0 EA SCH Cylinder - Rim 20-057 x Everest-C x GMK 626
2.0 EA YSG Exit Device - Rim 7100F-36xPB626F 630
2.0 EA Flc Closer - Parallel Arm SC71A x HD/PA x FC 689/Both Leafs
2.0 EA ROC Kick Plate K1050 12"x34" Tek US32D
2.0 EA ROC Floor Stop 440 626
2.0 EA ROC Silencer 608 RKW Grey

______________________________________________________________________________________________________

Hardware Set#: 4

Pair: 17, 20, 38, 56

Qty UOM Manf Item Type Item Series/Description Finish

6.0 EA MCK Hinge - (4-1/2 Std Wt(.134)) TA2714 4.5x4.5 US26D
1.0 EA YSG Removable Mullion KRM200 7’ 600
1.0 EA SCH Cylinder - Mortise 20-061 x 112 x B520-296 x Everest-C x GMK 626
1.0 EA SCH Cylinder - Rim 20-057 x Everest-C x GMK 626
2.0 EA YSG Exit Device - Rim 7100-36xPB626F 630
2.0 EA Flc Closer - Parallel Arm SC71A x HD/PA x FC 689
2.0 EA ROC Kick Plate K1050 12"x34" Tek US32D
2.0 EA ROC Floor Stop 440 626
2.0 EA ROC Silencer 608 RKW Grey
Door #56 add alt 2
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Finish Hardware Specification Page 8 of 14

LDCC Winnsboro Campus Expansion

5/20/2024 2:01
Job Number: 21722

Hardware Set#: 5

Single: 09, 35, 37, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 49, 75

Qty UOM Manf Item Type Item Series/Description Finish

3.0 EA MCK Hinge - (4-1/2 Std Wt(.134)) TA2714 4.5x4.5 US26D
1.0 EA SCH Cylinder - Rim 20-057 x Everest-C x GMK 626
1.0 EA YSG Exit Device - Rim 7100-36xPB626F 630
1.0 EA Flc Closer - Parallel Arm SC71A x HD/PA x FC 689
1.0 EA ROC Kick Plate K1050 12"x34" Tek US32D
1.0 EA ROC Floor Stop 440 626
1.0 EA ROC Kickdown Holder 461 US26D
3.0 EA ROC Silencer 608 RKW Grey
Door #75 add alt 1
______________________________________________________________________________________________________

Hardware Set#: 6

Single: 36, 52, 80

Qty UOM Manf Item Type Item Series/Description Finish

3.0 EA MCK Hinge - (4-1/2 Std Wt(.134)) TA2714 4.5x4.5 US26D
1.0 EA SCH Cylinder - Rim 20-057 x Everest-C x GMK 626
1.0 EA YSG Exit Device - Rim 7100F-36xPB626F 630
1.0 EA Flc Closer - Parallel Arm SC71A x HD/PA x FC 689
1.0 EA ROC Kick Plate K1050 12"x34" Tek US32D
1.0 EA ROC Floor Stop 440 626
3.0 EA ROC Silencer 608 RKW Grey
Door #80 Add Alt 3
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Finish Hardware Specification Page 9 of 14

LDCC Winnsboro Campus Expansion

5/20/2024 2:01
Job Number: 21722

Hardware Set#: 7

Single: 12, 14, 18, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 46, 47, 48, 60, 62, 64, 65, 66, 68, 74, 76

Qty UOM Manf Item Type Item Series/Description Finish

3.0 EA MCK Hinge - (4-1/2 Std Wt(.134)) TA2714 4.5x4.5 US26D
1.0 EA SCH Cylinder - Mortise 20-061 x 112 x B520-296 x Everest-C x GMK 626
1.0 EA YSG Mortise Lockset PBCN8809FL 26D
1.0 EA ROC Floor Stop 440 626
1.0 EA ROC Kickdown Holder 461 US26D
3.0 EA ROC Silencer 608 RKW Grey
Door #60, 62, 64, 65, 66, and 68 add alt 2
Door #74 and # 76 add alt 1
______________________________________________________________________________________________________

Hardware Set#: 8

Single: 13, 15, 61, 63, 67, 69

Qty UOM Manf Item Type Item Series/Description Finish

3.0 EA MCK Hinge - (4-1/2 Std Wt(.134)) TA2714 4.5x4.5 US26D
1.0 EA YSG Mortise Lockset PBCN8801FL 626
1.0 EA ROC Floor Stop 440 626
1.0 EA ROC Hook - Coat/Hat RM828 US32D
3.0 EA ROC Silencer 608 RKW Grey
Door #61, 63, 67 and #69 add alt 2
______________________________________________________________________________________________________

Hardware Set#: 9

Single: 70

Qty UOM Manf Item Type Item Series/Description Finish

3.0 EA MCK Hinge - (4-1/2 Std Wt(.134)) TA2714 4.5x4.5 US26D
1.0 EA YSG Mortise Lockset PBCN8801FL 626
1.0 EA ROC Floor Stop 440 626
3.0 EA ROC Silencer 608 RKW Grey
Door #70 add alt 2
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Finish Hardware Specification Page 10 of 14

LDCC Winnsboro Campus Expansion

5/20/2024 2:01
Job Number: 21722

Hardware Set#: 10

Single: 19, 29, 72, 73

Qty UOM Manf Item Type Item Series/Description Finish

3.0 EA MCK Hinge - (4-1/2 Std Wt(.134)) TA2714 4.5x4.5 US26D
1.0 EA YSG Mortise Lockset PBCN8801FL 626
1.0 EA ROC Floor Stop 440 626
1.0 EA ROC Kickdown Holder 461 US26D
3.0 EA ROC Silencer 608 RKW Grey
Door #72 and #73 add alt 1
______________________________________________________________________________________________________

Hardware Set#: 11

Single: 16, 28, 30, 71

Qty UOM Manf Item Type Item Series/Description Finish

3.0 EA MCK Hinge - (4-1/2 Std Wt(.134)) TA2714 4.5x4.5 US26D
1.0 EA SCH Cylinder - Mortise 20-061 x 112 x B520-296 x Everest-C x GMK 626
1.0 EA YSG Mortise Lockset PBCN8808FL 626
1.0 EA Flc Closer SC71A x Rw/PA x FC 689
1.0 EA ROC Floor Stop 440 626
1.0 EA ROC Kickdown Holder 461 US26D
3.0 EA ROC Silencer 608 RKW Grey
Door #71 add alt 1
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Finish Hardware Specification Page 11 of 14

LDCC Winnsboro Campus Expansion

5/20/2024 2:01
Job Number: 21722

Hardware Set#: 11A

Single: 08

Qty UOM Manf Item Type Item Series/Description Finish

3.0 EA MCK Hinge - (4-1/2 Std Wt(.134)) TA2714 4.5x4.5 US26D
1.0 EA SCH Cylinder - Mortise 20-061 x 112 x B520-296 x Everest-C x GMK 626
1.0 EA YSG Mortise Lockset PBCN8808FL 626
1.0 EA Flc Closer SC71A x Rw/PA x FC 689
1.0 EA ROC Floor Stop 440 626
3.0 EA ROC Silencer 608 RKW Grey

______________________________________________________________________________________________________

Hardware Set#: 12

Single: 27

Qty UOM Manf Item Type Item Series/Description Finish

3.0 EA MCK Hinge - (4-1/2 Std Wt(.134)) TA2714 4.5x4.5 US26D
1.0 EA SCH Cylinder - Mortise 20-061 x 112 x B520-296 x Everest-C x GMK 626
1.0 EA YSG Mortise Lockset PBCN8805FL 626
1.0 EA ROC Overhead Holder/Stop OH903S 630
(Surface)
3.0 EA ROC Silencer 608 RKW Grey

______________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Finish Hardware Specification Page 12 of 14

LDCC Winnsboro Campus Expansion

5/20/2024 2:01
Job Number: 21722

Hardware Set#: 13

Single: 33, 53, 77

Qty UOM Manf Item Type Item Series/Description Finish

3.0 EA MCK Hinge - (4-1/2 Std Wt(.134)) TA2714 4.5x4.5 US26D
1.0 EA SCH Cylinder - Mortise 20-061 x 112 x B520-296 x Everest-C x GMK 626
1.0 EA YSG Mortise Lockset PBCN8805FL 626
1.0 EA ROC Kick Plate K1050 12"x34" US32D
1.0 EA ROC Floor Stop 440 626
3.0 EA ROC Silencer 608 RKW Grey
Door #77 add alt 1
______________________________________________________________________________________________________

Hardware Set#: 14

Pair: 34, 45

Qty UOM Manf Item Type Item Series/Description Finish

6.0 EA MCK Hinge - (4-1/2 Std Wt(.134)) TA2714 4.5x4.5 US26D
2.0 EA ROC Flush Bolt - Manual 555 US26D
(Extension)
1.0 EA ROC Dust Proof Strike 570 26D
1.0 EA SCH Cylinder - Mortise 20-061 x 112 x B520-296 x Everest-C x GMK 626
1.0 EA YSG Mortise Lockset PBCN8805FL 626/Leaf#1
2.0 EA ROC Floor Stop 440 626
1.0 EA PEM Threshold 271A 72" WS/PA Alum
2.0 EA ROC Silencer 608 RKW Grey

______________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Finish Hardware Specification Page 13 of 14

LDCC Winnsboro Campus Expansion

5/20/2024 2:01
Job Number: 21722

Hardware Set#: 15

Single: 10, 11

Qty UOM Manf Item Type Item Series/Description Finish

3.0 EA MCK Hinge - (4-1/2 Std Wt(.134)) TA2714 4.5x4.5 US26D
1.0 EA YSG Mortise Lockset PBCN8802FLxIND 626
1.0 EA Flc Closer - Parallel Arm SC71A x SS/HO x FC 689
1.0 EA ROC Kick Plate K1050 12"x34" US32D
1.0 EA ROC Hook - Coat/Hat RM828 US32D
3.0 EA ROC Silencer 608 RKW Grey

______________________________________________________________________________________________________

Hardware Set#: 16

Single: 31, 32, 50, 51, 57, 58

Qty UOM Manf Item Type Item Series/Description Finish

3.0 EA MCK Hinge - (4-1/2 Std Wt(.134)) TA2714 4.5x4.5 US26D
1.0 EA ROC Push Plate 70C US32D
1.0 EA ROC Push/Pull Set 102x70C US32D
1.0 EA Flc Closer SC71A x Rw/PA x FC 689
1.0 EA ROC Kick Plate K1050 12"x34" US32D
1.0 EA ROC Mop Plate K1050 5"x35" US32D
1.0 EA ROC Floor Stop 440 626
3.0 EA ROC Silencer 608 RKW Grey
Door #57 and #58 add alt 2
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Finish Hardware Specification Page 14 of 14

LDCC Winnsboro Campus Expansion

5/20/2024 2:01
Job Number: 21722

Hardware Set#: 17

Single: 54, 59

Qty UOM Manf Item Type Item Series/Description Finish

1.0 EA SCH Cylinder - Rim 20-057 x Everest-C x GMK 626

Hardware supplier to verify type, style, quantity and finish of cylinder with aluminum door supplier.
All other hardware furnished by aluminum door supplier.
Door #54 to have access control by aluminum door supplier and security contractor.
Door #54 and #59 add alt 2
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified
in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:

1. Doors.
2. Storefront framing.
3. Glazed entrances.
4. Interior borrowed lites.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to

ASTM E 1300 and ICC's 2012 International Building Code by a qualified professional engineer,
using the following design criteria:

1. Design Wind Pressures: As required by ICC’s 2012 International Building Code.

2. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass
to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load.
3. Sloped Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped more than 15 degrees from vertical, design
glass to resist each of the following combinations of loads:

a. Outward design wind pressure minus the weight of the glass. Base design on glass
type factors for short-duration load.
b. Inward design wind pressure plus the weight of the glass plus half of the design
snow load. Base design on glass type factors for short-duration load.
c. Half of the inward design wind pressure plus the weight of the glass plus the
design snow load. Base design on glass type factors for long-duration load.
4. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential
shading within individual glass lites.

1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape
sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility
with elastomeric glazing sealants.

1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current
sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.

GLAZING 088000 - 1
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12
inches square.

C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use
same designations indicated on Drawings.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and
design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers

and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's

"Glazing Manual."
2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing
Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing
with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and
safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with

certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall
indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other
openings, whether or not glazing passes hose-stream test, whether or not glazing has a
temperature rise rating of 450 deg F, and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.

D. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least

one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in

which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within
specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from

GLAZING 088000 - 2
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass
contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other
indications of deterioration in coating.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which

laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within
specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed
from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning
laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge
separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding
those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which

insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within
specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal
under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning
insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the
obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in

thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

B. Strength: Provide fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.

C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties
specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated
below:

1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's

WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. Winter Nighttime
U factor 0.29, Summer Daytime U-factor 0.27
2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient 0.25 and Visible light Transmittance 35: Center-of-glazing
values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.
3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.
4. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface.
5. Indoor lite: Clear fully tempered float glass.
6. Tint color: selected by owner.

GLAZING 088000 - 3
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 INSULATING GLASS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on

drawings.
1. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Glass Enterprises Inc.
b. Guardian Glass
c. Vitro Architectural Glass

B. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by

a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other
requirements specified.

1. Sealing System: Dual seal.

2. Spacer: Aluminum with black, color anodic finish.

2.4 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to
maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:

1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864.

2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864.
3. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.
4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned neoprene,

EPDM, silicone or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509,
Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense
compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of
pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.

2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with
other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units,
and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

GLAZING 088000 - 4
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at
time of installation.
3. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, shall have a VOC content of not more
than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.

2.6 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric
tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer
rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and
complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.

2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous
pressure.
3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous
pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive
on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with
a full bead of liquid sealant.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.

C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass

manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).

E. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and
density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant
performance.

F. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that
listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-
protection rating indicated.

GLAZING 088000 - 5
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

2.8 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type (Exterior Hollow Metal doors): Clear fully tempered float glass.

1. Thickness: 1/4 inch.

2. Low-E.
3. Visible Light Transmittance: 44%
4. Shading Coefficient: 0.67
5. Winter Night Time U-Value: 1.02
6. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.76 maximum.

B. Provide safety glazing labeling.

C. Glass Type (Interior Hollow Metal doors): Clear fully tempered float glass.

1. Thickness: 1/4 inch.

2. Provide safety glazing labeling.

D. Glass Type (Interior Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts): Clear Fully tempered float glass.

1. Thickness: 1/4 inch.

2. Provide safety glazing labeling.

E. Glass Type (Interior Borrowed Lites): Clear Fully tempered float glass.

1. Thickness: 1/4 inch.

2. Provide safety glazing labeling.

2.9 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type (Exterior Storefront Glazing): Low-e-coated, tinted insulating glass Vitro
Architectural Glass (formerly PPG Glass); SolarGray + Solarban 60.

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch.

2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 0.25 inches.
3. Outdoor Lite: Tinted fully tempered float glass with low-e coating.

a. Tint Color: Gray.

b. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface.

4. Interspace Content: Air.

5. Indoor Lite: Clear fully tempered float glass with low-e coating.

6. Visible Light Transmittance: 35 percent minimum.

7. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.29 maximum.

B. Silicone-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition C, Type I, Quality-Q3, and

complying with other requirements specified, as manufactured by Vitro Architectural Glass
(formerly PPG Glass).

GLAZING 088000 - 6
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch.

2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 0.25 inches.
3. Outdoor Lite: Tinted fully tempered float glass with low-e coating.

a. Tint Color: Gray.

b. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface.

4. Interspace Content: Air.

5. Indoor Lite Glass: Clear fully tempered float glass with opaque silicone coating on
fourth surface.

a. Silicone Coating Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to

provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant
thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from
Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or
other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and
appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways
in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.

GLAZING 088000 - 7
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

3.2 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush
with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover
horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.
Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.
Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.3 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings

exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place
with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and
installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners
and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without
developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket
manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-
glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to
produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints
with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass
lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding

GLAZING 088000 - 8
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and
backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance
for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond
of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers
to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

END OF SECTION 088000

GLAZING 088000 - 9
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 090561.13 MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work includes Moisture Vapor Emission (MVE) Control System to prepare surface of
concrete to receive moisture sensitive adhesives and floor coverings. MVE Control
System will protect finish flooring from moisture and pH Alkalinity.

1. Exterior rated, no moisture limit, trowel grade mortars to repair concrete prior to
application of MVE Control coating.
2. Static and dynamic concrete crack repair materials.
3. Fluid-applied, resin-based, membrane-forming coating to control the moisture
vapor emission rate (MVER) of interior slab on grade.
4. Bond promoting primer for non-absorbent substrate to receive cementitious
underlayments.
5. Self-leveling floor underlayment

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. 00 00 00 Procurement and Contracting, including General and Supplementary

Conditions, apply to this Section, including but not limited to:

B. 01 00 00 General Requirements apply to this Section, including but not limited to:

C. 01 31 19.33 Pre-installation Meetings

D. 01 43 13 Manufacturer Qualifications

E. 01 43 23 Installer Qualifications

F. 01 43 33 Manufacturer's Field Services

G. 01 45 16 Field Quality Control Procedures

H. 01 45 23 Testing and Inspecting Services

I. 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete

J. 03 54 16 Hydraulic Cement Underlayment

K. 07 16 00 Cementitious and Reactive Waterproofing

L. 07 26 00 Vapor Retarder

M. 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring

N. 09 68 00 Carpeting

MAPEI Moisture Vapor Emission Control 090561.13 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1.3 REFERENCES – Current versions at Bid Date

A. ASTM F 1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of
Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride.

B. ASTM F 2170 - Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete
Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes.

C. ASTM 1907 – Standard Practices for Determining the Moisture-Related Acceptability of

Concrete Floors to Receive Moisture- Sensitive Finishes

D. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

E. ASTM C109 – Standard Test Method for the Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars.

F. ASTM C1708 – Standard Test Method for Self-Leveling Mortars Containing Hydraulic
Cement

G. ASTM F2873 – Standard Practice for the Installation of Self-Leveling Underlayment and
the Preparation of Surface to Receive Resilient Flooring.

H. ASTM E1155 – Standard Test Method for Determining FF (Floor Flatness) and FL
(Floor

I. ASTM F3010 – Standard practice for Two-Component Resin Based Membrane-Forming

Moisture Mitigation System for use Under Resilient Floor Covering

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. MVE: Moisture Vapor Emission

B. MVER: Moisture Vapor Emission Rate (measured in lbs/1000 sf / 24 hours)
C. RH: Relative Humidity (measured in percentage)
D. VOC: Volatile Organic Compound (measured in g/L)
E. CSP: Concrete Surface Profile defined by ICRI

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with provisions of Section 01300.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.

C. Shop Drawings: Details of construction and relationship with adjacent construction.

Indicate location of building movement joints.

D. Warranty:

1. MVE Control System Manufacturers Lifetime Warranty

2. Underwriters Insurance Coverage with A rating in the amount of $5,000,000 x
per occurrence

MAPEI Moisture Vapor Emission Control 090561.13 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: Dates that Contractor’s on-site personnel received training by the
moisture vapor control system manufacturer.
B. Submit list of at least three similar projects performed by the Contractor within the
previous three years that used the same products and similar moisture vapor control
system and self-leveling underlayment.
C. Pre-Installation Moisture Vapor Test Reports
D. Field Quality Control Reports including Moisture Vapor Tests and Bond Strength Pull
Tests on coatings and repair mortars.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened original packaging until ready for installation.
Record product codes and batch numbers and shelf life.

B. Store products in a dry area with temperature maintained between 50 deg F (10 deg C)
and 85 deg F (29 deg C) and protect from direct sunlight.

C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based
materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years manufacturing concrete resurfacing and

rehabilitation products. Employs factory trained personnel who are available for on-site
product knowledge training.

B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years installing moisture vapor emission control

systems.

C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and

application workmanship.
1. Finish areas designated by Architect.
2. Do not proceed with remaining work until mockup is approved by Architect.
3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
4. Mockup will be basis for quality control evaluation on remainder of Work.

1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with MVE control systems manufacturer’s written

instructions for substrate and ambient temperature, but not less than 65 deg F (18 deg C)
and not more than 85 deg F (29.4 deg C) at least 48 hours before use.

B. Maintain ambient air temperature and relative humidity in installation areas within range
recommended in writing by MVE control systems manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg
F (18 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29.4 deg C) and not less than 40 or more than 60
percent air relative humidity for 48 hours before, during installation, and for 48 hours
after installation, unless longer period is recommended in writing by manufacturer.

C. Install MVE control systems where concrete surface temperature will remain a minimum

MAPEI Moisture Vapor Emission Control 090561.13 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

of 5 deg F (3 deg C) higher than the dew point for ambient temperature and relative
humidity conditions in installation areas for 48 hours before installation, during
installation, and for 48 hours after installation unless longer period is recommended in
writing by manufacturer.

1.11 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE: Conduct conference at [Project site] [Off site address]

A. Discuss Contract Document Requirements, moisture tests, manufacturer

recommendations, installer’s recommendations, scheduling, and protection of work from
damage by other trades.
B. Attendance required by: Contractor, Floor Installer, Manufacturer’s Representative,
Independent testing agency, Concrete Subcontractor, Ready Mix supplier.
C. Objective of conference is:
1. Review methods and procedures
2. Tour job site representative areas to inspect and discuss condition of substrate
3. Review concrete finishing requirements
4. Review and finalize construction schedule
5. Review required inspections, testing, certifications, material usage procedures
6. Review environmental restrictions and forecasts
7. Record content of conference including attendance and topics.
D. Furnish record of pre-installation conference to all parties who are affected by MVE
control systems work.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Flooring products shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of
Public Health’s “Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic
Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers.”

2.2 CONTROL SYSTEMS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Mapei

Planiseal VS or comparable product by one of the following:

1. H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. / TEC.

2. KOSTER American Corporation.
3. Laticrete International, Inc.
4. MAPEI Corporation.
5. Master Builders Solutions, brand of MBCC Group, a Sika company.

B. Components of MVE Control System from single source manufacturer. Do not mix
products from different manufacturers. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
the following:

1. MVE Control Epoxy Coating component of the MVE Control System: ASTM
F3010 qualified, fluid-applied, two component, 100% solids epoxy resin, low
viscosity, penetrating, one-coat membrane forming system; formulated for

MAPEI Moisture Vapor Emission Control 090561.13 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

application on concrete substrates to reduce MVER to level required for

installation of floor covering indicated, including adhesives. Basis of Design:
MAPEI Planiseal VS .

a. Performance for MVER ASTM F1869: up to 25 lbs per 1000 square feet
(9.07 kg per 92.9 m²) per 24 hours.

b. Performance for Relative Humidity ASTM F2170: up to 100% RH

c. VOC Content SCAQMD Rule No 1113: < 50 g/L

d. Viscosity: < 250 cps

e. Pull Off / Bond Strength / Concrete Adhesion ASTM D7234: > 1000 psi
(6.90 mPa) at 28 days with failure in concrete substrate

f. Permeability ASTM E96: < 0.1 perm at > 10 mil Dry Film Thickness

g. Reduction of Moisture Vapor Transmission ASTM E96: > 96% at 10 mil

DFT

h. Alkali Resistance ASTM D1308: No affect up to pH 14 at 14 days

i. Relative Humidity Resistance ASTM 2170: Resists up to 100% RH.

2. Textured Primer: Fast-drying, high-performance, low-VOC, textured primer over

non-absorbent MVE Control Epoxy Coating to receive up to one inch thickness
of Self-Leveling Underlayment: Basis of Design: MAPEI Primer X®.

3. Self-Leveling Underlayment: Professional, High Strength, Self-leveling

underlayment with a minimum compressive strength after 24 hours > 1250 psi,
and after 28 days > 4200 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM C109 /
C109M. Basis of Design: MAPEI Novoplan 2 Plus.

2.3 SUBSTITUTIONS: Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions
of Section 01600

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Allow at least 7 days after placement of concrete to begin this Work.

B. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture RH content ASTM F2170, off-gassing MVE ASTM F1869.

C. Verify slab has not been contaminated.

D. Record ambient air RH, dew point and temperature.

E. Record slab temperature.

F. Concrete substrates must be structurally sound, solid, and meet industry standards as
defined in ACI Committee 201 Report “Guide to Durable Concrete”.

MAPEI Moisture Vapor Emission Control 090561.13 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

G. Notify Architect of out of tolerance conditions that will affect Work. Proceed with
installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Installation of
moisture control system indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION TESTING

A. Moisture testing: Conform to ICRI test standards for three tests in the first 1000 sq ft and
one test per 1000 sq ft after that. Perform no fewer than three tests in each installation
area and with tests evenly spaced in installation to best represent the widest range of
conditions.

3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean and prepare concrete substrate according to MVE control system manufacturer’s
written instructions to ensure adhesion of systems to concrete.
B. For direct application of epoxy MVE control coating without mechanical profiling (bead
blasting), concrete must be porous, have a CSP of #2 to #3, and be in pristine condition
with no contamination present.
C. Mechanically remove coatings and other substances that are incompatible with MVE
control systems and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended in writing by MVE control systems Manufacturer. Do not use solvents. Do
not acid etch. Mechanically remove troweled CSP 1 finish. Concrete surface must be
mechanically profiled using dustless, engineer-approved methods to obtain a CSP of #2
to #3.
1. Achieve ICRI 310.2R Minimum CSP 3 by shot blasting using apparatus that
abrades the concrete surface with shot, contains the dispensed shot within the
apparatus and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup. Shot-blast with spherical
steel shot SAE size range 230 – 300 as necessary to produce the required profile.
Remove all residual shot with a magnet. Use a handheld grinder to CSP 2 only in
areas that cannot be reached with bead blasting.]
D. Excessively weak, soft, dusty, cracked, or uneven surfaces may not be suitable substrates
and may require additional concrete removal techniques such as scarification and then
patching prior to application of the MVE Control System.
E. Asbestos abated slabs may have hydrophobic organic compounds in the capillaries of the
concrete which will be a bond break for coatings. Microscopic petrographic examination
according to ASTM C856 to evaluate the concrete condition, potential deleterious
substances and suitability for shot-blasting and coating adhesion.
F. Reinforcing fibers that become visible after shot blasting must be removed and vacuumed
leaving no fibers exposed above the concrete surfaces.
G. Do not install MVE Control System if substrate testing reveals unacceptable conditions.
H. Ensure that all old adhesives, contaminants, curing compounds, oils, silicates, dust and
other bond breakers are completely removed.
I. Remove dust and debris by broom sweeping and then vacuuming with high-efficiency
particulate arrestance (HEPA) filter. Do not use sweeping compound as they contain oils
and wax that would contaminate the concrete surface and inhibit bond of MVE Control
System.
J. After shot blasting, repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to MVE control
system manufacturer’s written instructions.
K. Do not skimcoat entire concrete slab prior to application of epoxy MVE control system.

MAPEI Moisture Vapor Emission Control 090561.13 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

L. Allow concrete to off-gas after bead blasting for a minimum of 24 hours but no more than
48 hours to avoid contamination by other trades. Failure to wait may result in the epoxy
coatings ability to perform as a MVE control due to pin-holing, blisters and fish-eyes.

3.4 INSTALLATION MVE CONTROL SYSTEM - EPOXY

A. General: Install MVE control system according to ASTM F3010 and manufacturer’s
written instructions to product a uniform, monolithic surface free of surface deficiencies
such as pin holes, fish eyes and voids.

B. Adjust application methods per manufacturer’s written instruction as determined by site

conditions, presence of sub-slab vapor barrier, concrete mix design, lightweight
aggregates, suspended slab vs slab on grade, and age of concrete.

C. Refer to the Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for details on handling and safety equipment.

D. Mixing: Mix in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions. Mix only full units.
Strictly follow minimum mixing time.

E. In a single coat application, apply MVE control system epoxy to manufacturer’s

recommended rate with no less than dry film thickness of 10 mils minimum to achieve
design perm rating. Apply with notched squeegee or notched trowel and back roll with
3/8 nap roller. Adjust application rate depending on job site concrete conditions
including porosity and profile.

F. Cure MVE Control System components according to the manufacturer’s written

instruction. Prevent contamination or other damage during curing processes.

G. After curing, examine MVE control system for surface deficiencies. Repair surface
deficiencies according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect MVE Control System to ensure that all voids and pinholes are filled/sealed before
moving on to the next flooring phase. Do so by filling any voids and/or shaving off the
tops of any bubbles and reapplying a thin coating of MVE Control System over the
surface. Verify no bond break present such as amine blush or airborne contaminants
from other trades.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF PRIMER FOR SELF-LEVELER

A. Self-Leveling Underlayment up to 3/8 inch thickness: Apply Primer T to epoxy MVE

control system and allow primer to dry completely.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF SELF-LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT

A. Read all installation instructions thoroughly before installation.

B. Before installation, close doors and windows, and turn off HVAC systems to prevent
drafts during application and until the floor cures. Protect areas from direct sunlight.

MAPEI Moisture Vapor Emission Control 090561.13 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

C. Make sure concrete substrate and ambient room temperatures are between 50°F and 95°F
(10°C and 35°C) before application. In large applications, allow for indirect air
circulation to dissipate humidity created by leveler application. Temperatures must be
maintained within this range for at least 72 hours after the installation of self-leveler. In
cooler conditions, use indirect auxiliary heaters to maintain ambient and substrate
temperatures within the required range. For temperatures above 85°F (29°C), follow ACI
hot-weather application guidelines to ensure a successful installation.

D. Water to be clean, potable, and cool, not warmer than 70 deg F.

E. Conventional piston, rotor-stator or underlayment-type pumps may be used for

application of self-leveling over large areas.

F. Strictly follow manufacturer’s mixing instructions for exact water cement ratios, mixing
times, drill speed and type of mixing blade. Self-leveler is a calcium aluminate non-
shrink leveler when mixed correctly. Overwatering will cause shrinkage and potential
delamination.

G. Maintain continuous flow of wet material to avoid trapping air or creating a cold joint.

H. Maintaining a wet edge throughout placement. Quickly pour or pump self-leveler onto
properly prepared and primed surface in ribbon pattern.

I. Apply Mapei Novaplan 2 Plus self leveler with gauge rake to desired depth. Break
surface tension of material with smoother or needle roller to allow self-leveler to flow.
Apply at 3/16-inch minimum thickness.

J. Verify with Manufacturer regarding minimum time to install ceramic tile, or non-
breathable floor coverings on self-leveler.

3.8 CLEANUP

A. Use soap with water or use denatured alcohol to clean equipment before MVE Control
System cures to a hardened state. Cured material can only be removed mechanically.

3.9 PROTECTION - MVE CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Protect the surface of the cured MVE control system from traffic and damage until
covered by floor finish. Protection may include plywood, or other suitable protection
board.

END OF SECTION 090561.13

MAPEI Moisture Vapor Emission Control 090561.13 - 8

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Evaluation Reports: Submit evaluation reports certified under an independent third-party inspection
program administered by an agency accredited by IAS to ICC-ES AC98 accreditation criteria for
inspection agencies.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Code-Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing members
are certified in accordance with the product-certification program of the Steel Framing Industry
Association (SFIA) or similar organization providing a verifiable code-compliance program.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested

according to ASTM E 119.

B. Design framing systems in accordance with AISI S220, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. General: Where structural drawings/notes indicate a thicker base-steel thickness (heavier gauge) or
wider flange, the structural drawings/notes shall govern.

B. Framing Members, General: Comply with AISI S220 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with AISI S220 requirements for metal unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Protective Coating: Comply with AISI S220; ASTM A653/A653M, G40 (Z120); or coating
with equivalent corrosion resistance. Galvannealed products are unacceptable.

a. Coating to demonstrate equivalent corrosion resistance with an evaluation report

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Allied Studco, Inc.

2. ClarkDietrich Building Systems.
3. Marino Ware Industries.
4. The Steel Network, Inc.

D. Interior Partition Steel Studs and Runners: AISI S220. Use either steel studs and runners or steel studs
and runners of equivalent minimum base-steel thickness.

1. Product: ClarkDietrich; ProSTUD Drywall Framing System with Smart Edge technology or
comparable product.
2. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 20 ga. EQ
3. Flange: 1-1/4 inch.
4. Web Width: As indicated on drawings.

E. Exterior Wall Steel Studs and Runners: AISI S220. Use either steel studs and runners or steel studs
and runners of equivalent minimum base-steel thickness.

1. Product: ClarkDietrich; ProSTUD Drywall Framing System with Smart Edge technology or
comparable product.
2. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 20 ga. EQ
3. Flange: 1-1/4 inch.
4. Web Width: As indicated on drawings.

F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053 inch minimum base-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-
inch wide flanges.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches.

2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch thick, galvanized steel.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other
properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to
framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab
bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members.
Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacing indicated, but not less than spacing required
by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls,
install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at
suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install
runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch
clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.
c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead
structure.

2. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for
door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match
framing required above door heads.

E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch
from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

END OF SECTION 092216

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Interior gypsum board.

2. Texture finishes.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples:

1. Textured Finishes: 24-inch by 24-inch for each textured finish indicated and on same
backing indicated for Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical
to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to
ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Certainteed.
2. James Hardie Building Products, Inc.
3. National Gypsum Company.
4. Temple-Inland.
5. United States Gypsum Company.
6. ClarkDietrich Building Systems.

B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Gypsum Ceiling/Furr-down Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 1/2 inch.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced

galvanized steel sheet.

2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible
with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."

2.6 TEXTURE FINISHES

A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.

B. Non-Aggregate Finish: Pre-mixed, vinyl texture finish for spray application.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; ProRoc Easi-Tex Spray Texture.

b. National Gypsum Company; Perfect Spray EM Texture.
c. USG Corporation; BEADEX FasTex Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture.

2. Texture: As selected by Architect.

GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.

C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural

abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch wide spaces at these locations and trim edges
with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting
structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

D. Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used
for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Control Joints: Install control joints, according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Architect for visual effect.

E. Pre-fill open joints and damaged surface areas.

F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not
intended to receive tape.

G. Texture Finish Application: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces
receiving texture finishes. Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a
uniform texture, matching approved mockup, and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin
application or of application patterns.

H. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove
from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise
damaged during drywall application.

I. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

END OF SECTION 092900

GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 093000 - TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Ceramic tile.
2. Thresholds.
3. Waterproof membrane.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples:

1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.
2. Assembled samples, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for
each color and finish required.
3. Stone thresholds in 4 inch lengths.

1.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount
installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation.

2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation.
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.

TILING 093000 - 1
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products

listed or comparable product by one of the following:

1. American Olean
2. Crossville
3. Daltile

2.2 TILE PRODUCTS

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for
types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

B. FloorScore Compliance: Tile for floors shall comply with requirements of FloorScore
Standard.

C. Floor Tile Type: CT

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Daltile, Haut Monde.

2. Module Size: 12 inch by 12 inch Floor Tile.
3. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range
(Standard Colors and Groups:1, 2, 3, 4, &5).
4. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
5. Trim Units: As indicated on drawings.

D. Wall Tile Type: CWT-1 & CTB -1

1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Olean, Color Story Wall.

2. Module Size: 4 inch by 4 inch.
3. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range
(Standard Colors and Groups:1, 2, 3, 4, &5).
4. Tile Color and Pattern: selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
5. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
6. Trim Units: As indicated on drawings.

E. Wall Tile Type: CWT-2 & CTB -2

1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Olean, Color Story Wall.

2. Module Size: 4 inch by 4 inch.
3. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range
(Standard Colors and Groups:1, 2, 3, 4, &5).
4. Tile Color and Pattern: selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
5. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
6. Trim Units: As indicated on drawings.

TILING 093000 - 2
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

2.3 THRESHOLDS

A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between
adjacent floor finishes.

1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above
adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of
threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface.

B. Thresholds:

1. Description: Stainless steel, 1.4301 (V2A)

2.4 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies with
ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated.

B. Fluid-Applied Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one
of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but
are not limited to, the following]:

a. Bostik, Inc.; Durabond D-222 Duraguard Membrane.

b. C-Cure; Pro-Red Waterproofing Membrane 63.
c. Custom Building Products; Redgard Waterproofing and Crack Prevention
Membrane.
d. Laticrete International, Inc.; Latapoxy 24hr HydroProofing.
e. MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic HPG.
f. TEC, a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; HydraFlex - Waterproofing Crack
Isolation Membrane.

2.5 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.

b. Bostik, Inc.
c. C-Cure.
d. Custom Building Products.
e. Laticrete International, Inc.
f. MAPEI Corporation.
g. Mer-Kote Products, Inc.
h. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.

2. Prepackaged, dry-mortar mix to which only water must be added.

TILING 093000 - 3
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

3. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.

2.6 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company.

b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.
c. Bostik, Inc.
d. C-Cure.
e. Custom Building Products.
f. Laticrete International, Inc.
g. MAPEI Corporation.
h. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based

formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations
indicated.

B. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change
color or appearance of grout.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company; Grout Sealer.

b. Bostik, Inc.; CeramaSeal Grout & Tile Sealer.
c. C-Cure; Penetrating Sealer 978.
d. Custom Building Products; Surfaceguard Sealer.
e. MAPEI Corporation; KER 004, Keraseal Penetrating Sealer for Unglazed Grout
and Tile.
f. TEC, a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; TA-256 Penetrating Silicone Grout
Sealer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of installed tile.

TILING 093000 - 4
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are
incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances
that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by
ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set
mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-
setting material manufacturer.

B. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project
site before installing.

C. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent
grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of
temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods
specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series
"Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation
methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting
materials used.

1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile
installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:

a. Tile floors in wet areas.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for
straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other
penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and
center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to
minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless
otherwise indicated.

F. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated or otherwise recommended by tile manufacturer,

install tile with the following joint widths:

TILING 093000 - 5
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1. Wall Tile: 1/16 inch.

2. Floor Tile: 1/16 inch.

G. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,
contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting
materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above
them.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint
Sealants."

I. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless
otherwise indicated.

J. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors and tile floor wall
bases according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has
penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft
cloth.

K. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to
produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.

END OF SECTION 093000

TILING 093000 - 6
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.

1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product test reports.

B. Evaluation reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to NVLAP.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL

A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.

B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.

C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
"Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS (ACT-1)

A. Basis-of-Design Product : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World

Industries, Inc.; Optima Tegular Model 3251 or comparable product, approved by Architect.

1. CertainTeed Corp.
2. Chicago Metallic Corporation.
3. Tectum Inc.
4. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.

B. Color: White.

C. LR: 0.90.

D. NRC: 0.95, Type E-400 mounting according to ASTM E 795.

E. Edge/Joint Detail: Square tegular.

F. Thickness: 1 inch.

G. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches.

2.4 ACOUSTICAL PANELS (ACT-2)

A. Basis-of-Design Product : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World

Industries, Inc.; Ceramaguard 607 or comparable product, approved by Architect.

1. CertainTeed Corp.
2. Chicago Metallic Corporation.

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

3. Tectum Inc.
4. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.

B. Color: White.

C. LR: 0.88.

D. NRC: 0.55, Type E-400 mounting according to ASTM E 795.

E. Edge/Joint Detail: Square.

F. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

G. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches.

2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM (ACT-1)

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World

Industries, Inc.; Suprafine XL 9/16” Exposed Tee or comparable product, approved by
Architect.

B. 9/16” Tee System, Double-web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed
from cold-rolled steel sheet; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less
than G30 coating designation; with prefinished 9/16 inch wide metal caps on flanges.

1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.

2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Standard.
3. Face Design: Flat, flush.
4. Cap Finish: Baked Polyester painted, white.

C. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not
indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with
seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that
used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.

2.6 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM (ACT-2)

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World

Industries, Inc.; Prelude XL 15/16” Exposed Tee or comparable product, approved by Architect.

B. 15/16” Tee System, Double-web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed
from cold-rolled steel sheet; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less
than G30 coating designation; with prefinished 15/16 inch wide metal caps on flanges.

1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.

2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Standard.
3. Face Design: Flat, flush.
4. Cap Finish: Aluminum, baked Polyester painted, white.

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

C. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not
indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with
seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that
used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design
requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling
Systems Handbook."

B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply
with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as indicated on reflected ceiling plans.

END OF SECTION 095113

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 096500 – MOISTURE (VAPOR) BARRIER

PART 1 – GENERAL

This specification applies to the installation of a moisture barrier over existing concrete. For installation of
(VCT) over the moisture barrier see 096520. Refer to finish floor manufacturer’s recommendations
regarding installation instructions, restrictions, moisture conditions, and compatibility.

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Moisture testing shall be completed prior to installing the finish floor.

B. Scope of work – Remove resilient tile floor and glue. Install Laticrete Vapor Ban Primer ER over
existing concrete. Install new resilient tile floor over the vapor barrier.

1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION

A. Resilient tile floor see section 096520

1.3 MOISTURE EVALUATION

A. Moisture testing must be conducted in accordance with finish floor goods and adhesive
manufacturers requirements.

1.4 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 096520 Resilient Tile Flooring

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Remove existing resilient tile floor and glue completely.

B. Furnish and install Laticrete Vapor Ban Primer ER over existing concrete slab where shown to
replace existing resilient flooring. See drawings.
C. Furnish and install new resilient tile floor see section 096510.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturers' installation instructions under provisions of appropriate Sections.

B. Submit manufacturer's certification under provisions that the materials supplied conform to ANSI
for resilient tile.
C. Submit proof of warranty.
D. Submit Health Product Declarations (HPD) for resilient tile installation material.
E. Submit sample of installation system demonstrating compatibility/functional relationships
between adhesives and other components under provision of appropriate sections. Submit proof
from resilient tile manufacturer or supplier verifying suitability of resilient tile for specific

VAPOR BARRIER 1
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

application and use; including dimensional stability, water absorption, freeze/thaw resistance (if
applicable), resistance to thermal cycling, and other characteristics that the may project may
require. These characteristics must be reviewed and approved by the project design
professional(s).
F. Submit list from manufacturer of installation system/adhesive identifying a minimum of three (3)
similar projects, each with a minimum of five (5) years service.
G. For alternate materials, at least thirty (10) days before bid date submit independent laboratory test
results confirming compliance with specifications listed in Part 2 - Products.

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

Pre-installation conference: At least three weeks prior to commencing the work attend a meeting at
the jobsite to discuss conformance with requirements of specification and job site conditions.
Representatives of owner, architect, general contractor, resilient tile subcontractor, Manufacturer,
Installation System Manufacturer and any other parties who are involved in the scope of this
installation must attend the meeting.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING / SITE CONDITIONS

A. Acceptance at Site: deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken
and labels, including grade seal, intact until time of use, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Store resilient tile and installation system materials in a dry location; handle in a manner to
prevent chipping, breakage, and contamination.
C. Protect materials from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions;
store at room temperature when possible.
D. Store materials in a dry location.
E. Provide ventilation as recommended by manufacture.
F. Maintain ambient temperatures as recommended by manufacture.

1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate installation of tile work with related work.

B. Proceed with resilient tile work only after the moisture barrier is installed and approved by the
manufacture.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor warrants the work of this Section to be in accordance with the Contract Documents
and free from faults and defects in materials and workmanship for a period as determined by local
or project requirements. The manufacturer of adhesives, and other installation materials shall
provide a written twenty-five (25) year warranty, which covers materials and labor - reference
LATICRETE Warranty Data Sheet 025.0 for complete details and requirements.

1.11 MAINTENANCE
Submit maintenance data required by manufacture.

VAPOR BARRIER 2
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following LATICRETE Vapor Ban Primer
ER or approved equal.

1. Ardex MC Rapid + Ardex EP 2000

2. Mapei Planiseal MB + Mapei

2.2 PRODUCT

A. Vapor Ban Primer ER is a single-coat, 100% solids, liquid applied 2-part epoxy coating
Specifically designed for controlling the moisture vapor emission rate form new or existing
Concrete slabs. Surface preparation is required when removing an existing floor finish.

2.3 INSTALLATION

A. Remove existing resilient tile floor and all glue completely.

B. All dirt, oil, paint, laitance, efflorescence, sealers, curing compounds, dust, construction debris,
Any other bond breaking contaminants must be removed by diamond grinding or shot blasting
To an ICRI concrete surface profile (CSP) of 1-3 then swept and thoroughly vacuumed clean.

C. Use of chemicals to remove contaminants is prohibited. Use of sweeping compound is not

Recommended as they may contain oil which will act as a bond breaker.

D. Water drop test is recommended to determine if concrete is absorptive prior to application. Refer
To TDS230 for water drop test instructions. If the water drop test yield a non-suction/non
Absorptive result the surface must be prepared by diamond grinding or shot blasting to an ICRI
Concrete surface profile (CSP) of 1-3.

E. Surface temperature must be 50-90 deg. F. during application and for 24 hours after installation.
In all cases, the surface temperature of the prepared concrete slab must be warm enough to avoid
Condensation on the surface of the concrete.

2.4 JOINTS, CRACKS, SURFACE DEPRESSIONS & IRREGULARITIES

A. All joints and cracks should be evaluated and repaired if necessary prior to installation of
VAPOR BAN Primer ER. See manufactures instruction for information on how to repair these
Irregularities prior to beginning work.

B. MOISTURE EVALUATION – Moisture testing must be conducted in accordance with finish

Floor goods and adhesive manufactures requirements.

2.5 MIXING

VAPOR BARRIER 3
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

A. See manufactures requirements for mixing.

B. DO NOT MIX VAPOR BAN PRIMER ER IN A PLASTIC BUCKET AS MIX GENERATES

EXCESSIVE HEAT.

2.6 APPLICATION

A. Pour ribbons of Vapor Ban Primer ER onto the prepared concrete and spread using appropriate round
or square notch squeegee that is designed to apply the desired thickness in a single coat. Apply an even
coat making sure to cover all areas thoroughy. Immediately following, while epoxy is still wet, use a high
quality 3/8” (9 mm) nap non-shedding paint roller to back roll at 90 degrees from the squeegee direction to
help ensure full coverage and uniform thickness. Use a paint brush to apply epoxy around penetrations.
Periodically check mill thickness using a wet film thickness gauge. Allow to cure for 3 to 4 hours at 50 to
90 degrees F prior to installation of underlayment or finish flooring.

B. See manufactures application requirements prior to installation. Install in strict accordance with
manufactures specification.

END OF SECTION

VAPOR BARRIER 4
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Resilient base.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 4
inches long.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient base shall comply with requirements of FloorScore

certification.

2.2 THERMOPLASTIC-RUBBER BASE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Burke Flooring (Flexco).

2. Nora Rubber Products.
3. Roppe Corp.

B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic).

C. Thickness: 0.125 inch.

D. Height: As indicated on Drawings.

E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Preformed.

G. Inside Corners: Preformed.

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

H. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range, within same Collection/Series
as color indicated on drawings.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or

blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product
manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient

products and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of

resilient products.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are
to be installed.

D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient
products.

3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient
base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

H. Job-Formed Corners: Job-formed corners are not acceptable

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.

B. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 096513

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:
1. Vinyl Composite floor tile (VCT)

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns,
doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

1. Show details of special patterns.

C. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing identical

products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

B. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient tile flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore
certification.

2.2 VINYL COMPOSITE FLOOR TILE - VCT

A. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong; Style:
Imperial Texture. Provide Product indicated or Comparable Product by one of the following:
1. Johnsonite
2. Armstrong
3. Tarkett
4. Congoleum

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066. Class 2 Through-Pattern. ISO 10595, Type II

C. Wearing Surface: As indicated by Manufacturer.

D. Thickness: 0.374 inch.

E. Size: 12 by 12 inches.

F. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of

Collection/Series of color/patterns (Standard Colors and Groups:1, 2, 3, 4, &5).

G. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or

blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer
for applications indicated.

H. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit
floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content:

a. Vinyl Composition Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L or less.

b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L or less.

I. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by floor tile
manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion
of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and
that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor
tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale
recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.
4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to
floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the
following:

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed

with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate
of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170.
Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative
humidity level.

C. Fill cracks, holes, top of expansion joints, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling
and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
Level with MAPEI Novoplan 2 leveler or approved equal. Mapei 1144 E. Newport Center
Drive Deerfield Beach, Flordia 333442 Phone 1-888-876-2734 Fax 954-246-8800.

D. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be
installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient
floor tile.

3.2 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor
offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using
cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles. See floor pattern plan on drawings.

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed
tiles.

1. Lay tiles. See floor pattern plan on Drawings.

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent
fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles
to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking
device.

G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers,
and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern
between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to
substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.

H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.

B. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying
liquid floor polish.

1. Apply two coat(s).

C. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 096519

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 099000 – PAINTING AND COATING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface preparation.
B. Field application of paints, stains, and varnishes.
C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and
unless otherwise indicated, including the following:
D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having
factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.
2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.
3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.
4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of
equipment.
5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated.
6. Glass.
7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.
E. See Schedule of finishes included in this Section.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 02581 - Traffic Paint: Pavement markings.
B. Section 03356 - Concrete Floor Finishing.
C. Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items.
D. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Exposed telephone and electrical panel boards.
E. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry.
F. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
G. Section 08111 - Standard Steel Doors.
H. Section 08112 - Standard Steel Frames.
I. Section 08331 - Overhead Coiling Doors.
J. Section 08675 - Steel Sliding Fire Windows.
K. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.
L. Section 09290 - Glass Fiber Reinforced Units.
M. Division 15 - Mechanical: Painted identification.
N. Division 16 - Electrical: Painted identification.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.

PAINTING AND COATING 099000 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

B. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications;
2012.
C. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and
Wood-Base Materials; 2007.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Conform to ASTM D 16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, including VOC content.
C. Samples: Submit two painted samples, illustrating selected colors for each color and system
selected with specified coats cascaded. Submit on aluminum sheet, 6 x 6 inch in size.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures.
E. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with
minimum three years documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with
minimum three years experience.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for products and finishes.
1.08 MOCK-UP
A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up.
B. Provide panel, 8 feet long by 8 feet wide, illustrating specified coating color, texture, and finish.
C. Provide door and frame assembly illustrating paint coating color, texture, and finish.
D. Locate where directed.
E. Mock-up may remain as part of the work.
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code,
coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and
instructions for mixing and reducing.
C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90
degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges
required by the paint product manufacturer.

PAINTING AND COATING 099000 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of
substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the
humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for
exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior,
unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
F. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
B. Supply 1 gallon of each color; store where directed.
C. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer;
no exceptions. Sherwin-Williams is the basis of design.
1. Approved manufacturers:
a. Benjamin Moore
b. Sherwin Williams
c. PPG Industries
B. Primer Sealers: Same manufacturer as top coats.
C. Block Fillers: Same manufacturer as top coats.
2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL
A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.
1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly
dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of
drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
2. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a
single production run.
3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is
specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
B. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer
categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.
C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:
1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following:
a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings.
2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at
project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PAINTING AND COATING 099000 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS – EXTERIOR

A. Wood: Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of SW B42W8041, Exterior Latex Wood Primer.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of SW A89-Series, SuperPaint Exterior Satin.

PAINTING AND COATING 099000 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

B. Drywall, Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat:

1. One coat of SW B51-450 Series, Multi-Purpose Interior/Exterior Latex Primer.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of SW A89-Series, SuperPaint Exterior Satin.
C. Masonry/Concrete, Opaque Paint System, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of SW LX2W50, Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer.
2. Flat: Two coats of SW A89-Series, SuperPaint Exterior Satin.
D. CMU, Opaque Waterproofing System, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat SW CF1W50, ConFlex Block Filler.
2. Flat: Two coats of SW CF11W51 Series, ConFlex XL Elastomeric Smooth.

E. Ferrous Metals, (doors, frames, & handrails), Primed, Latex, 2 Coat:

1. Touch-up with SW B66-1300 Series, Pro-Cryl Universal Water Based Primer.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of B53-1150 Series, WB Alkyd Urethane Enamel Semi-Gloss.
F. Galvanized Metals, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of SW B66-1300 Series, Pro-Cryl Universal Water Based Primer.
2. Gloss: Two coats of SW B66-1661 Series, Pro Industrial DTM Acrylic Eg-Shel.
G. Aluminum, Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of SW B66-1300 Series, Pro-Cryl Universal Water Based Primer.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of SW B66-1661 Series, Pro Industrial DTM Acrylic Eg-Shel.
H. Architectural PVC, Plastic, Fiberglass: Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of SW B51W1150, Extreme Bond Interior/Exterior Bonding Primer.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of SW A89-Series, SuperPaint Exterior Satin.
I. Traffic Marking Paint Latex, 2 Coat:
1. Two Coats Setfast Low VOC Acrylic Traffice Marking Paint, TM Series; White
Yellow, Red, or Black.

2.04 PAINT SYSTEMS – INTERIOR

A. Gypsum Board/Plaster Ceilings, Latex Flat Finish, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of B28W2600, ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer.
2. Flat: Two coats of B30-2600 Series, ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Flat.
B. Gypsum Board/Plaster Walls, Latex-Acrylic Semi-Gloss Finish, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of B28W2600, ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of B31-2600 Series, ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss.

Alternate for upgrade Scuff Resistant Semi-Gloss:

1. One coat of B28W2600, ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer.
2. Eggshell: Two coats of SW K46-1150 Series, Pre-Catalyzed Waterbased Semi-Gloss.
C. Concrete/Masonry, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of SW LX2W50, Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer.
2. Flat: Two coats of SW B3-2600 Series, ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss.
D. Ferrous Metals (doors, frames, & handrails), Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of SW B66-1300 Series, Pro-Cryl Universal Water Based Primer.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of B53-1150 Series, WB Alkyd Urethane Enamel Semi-Gloss.
E. Galvanized Metals, Latex, 3 Coat:

PAINTING AND COATING 099000 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1. One coat of SW B66-1300 Series, Pro-Cryl Universal Water Based Primer.

2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of B66-1661 Series, Pro Industrial DTM Acrylic Eg-Shel.

F. Aluminum, Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat:

1. One coat etching primer: SW B71Y1, DTM Wash Primer.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of B66-1661 Series, Pro Industrial DTM Acrylic Eg-Shel.
G. Concrete/Masonry, Epoxy Enamel, 3 Coat: (typically wet areas)
1. One coat of SW LX2W50, Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer.
2. Gloss: Two coats of SW B73V300 Series, Waterborne Catalyzed Epoxy Gloss.
H. CMU, Pre-Catalyzed Epoxy Finish Semi-Gloss, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat SW CF1W50, ConFlex Block Filler.
2. Eg-shel: Two coats of SW K46-1150 Series, Pre-Catalyzed Waterbased Semi-Gloss.

I. Wood, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat:

1. One coat of SW B28W8111, Premium Wall & Wood Interior Latex Primer
2. Semi-Gloss: Two coats of SW K46-1150 Series, Pre-Catalyzed Waterbased Semi-Gloss.
J. Wood, Transparent, Varnish, Stain:
1. One coat of Minwax Performance Series Tintable Interior Stain 7150/7151.
2. One coat Minwax Performance Fast-Dry, Sanding Sealer 81580.
3. Satin: Two coats of Minwax Performance Series Fast-Dry Varnish 9150/9151 Series.
K. Fabrics/Insulation Jackets, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of SW B66-310 Series, Pro-Cryl Universal Water Based Primer.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of B66-1661 Series, Pro Industrial DTM Acrylic Eg-Shel.
L. Metal Decking DryFall Finish, Latex Flat, 2 Coat:
1. Flat: Two coats of B42W181, Pro Industrial Waterborne Acrylic DryFall Flat.
(possible primer if rusting is present)
M. Metal Decking DryFall Finish, Latex Eg-Shel, 2 Coat:
1. Eg-Shel: Two coats of B42W82, Pro Industrial Waterborne Acrylic DryFall Eg-Shel.
(possible primer if rusting is present)
N. Epoxy Floor Coating, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of SW B70V8100, ArmorSeal 8100 Water Based Epoxy Floor Coating.
(reduce with one pint of water per gallon)
2. Satin or Gloss: Two coats of B70-8100/8160 Series ArmorSeal 8100 Water Based Epoxy
Floor Coating.
O. Resinous / Industrial Coatings for Concrete Floors.
High Performance Flooring Coatings – Sherwin-Williams

2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding
materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically
indicated or not; commercial quality.
B. Patching Material: Latex filler.
C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.

PAINTING AND COATING 099000 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition
that may potentially affect proper application.
C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes
unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.
2. Plaster and Stucco: 12 percent.
3. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.
4. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.
5. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.
6. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces: 8 percent.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result
for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Remove surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
D. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove or repair
existing coatings that exhibit surface defects.
E. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
F. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate
and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
G. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali
powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate;
rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a
solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.
H. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime
defects after repair.
I. Plaster Surfaces to be Painted: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex
patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali
surfaces.
J. Insulated Coverings to be Painted: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton.
K. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces to be Painted: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse
floors with clear water. Verify required acid-alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry.
L. Aluminum Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure
water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately
following cleaning.
M. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with

PAINTING AND COATING 099000 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.

N. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld
splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing
or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution,
ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime
after repairs.
O. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and
rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent.
Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.
P. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal
knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has
dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.
Q. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal
knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has
dried; sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent
with thinner.
R. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied.
C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is
applied.
D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.
E. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to
applying next coat.
G. Wood to Receive Transparent Finishes: Tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain
before set. Wipe excess from surface.
H. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed
prior to finishing.
3.04 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Refer to Division 15 and Division 16 for schedule of color coding of equipment, duct work, piping,
and conduit.
B. Paint shop-primed equipment, where indicated.
C. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical
components and paint separately.
D. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed
prior to finishing.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and

PAINTING AND COATING 099000 - 8

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

remove daily from site.

3.06 SCHEDULE - SURFACES TO BE FINISHED
A. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically noted.
2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels.
3. Stainless steel items.
B. Paint the surfaces described 1 coat.
C. Mechanical and Electrical: Use paint systems defined for the substrates to be finished.
1. Paint all insulated and exposed pipes occurring in finished areas to match background
surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Paint shop-primed items occurring in finished areas.
3. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are
visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces.
4. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match
face panels.

END OF SECTION

PAINTING AND COATING 099000 - 9

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 099600 - HIGH PERFORMANCE COMMERCIAL COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
exterior substrates:
1. Concrete masonry units (CMU)
2. Gypboard
3. Overhead Steel

B. Scope
1. If there is a discrepancy between this section and other sections related to painting, this
section shall take precedence.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish
selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of
each paint system specified in Part 3.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark

samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as
materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.

HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1. Quantity: Furnish an additional [5] percent, but not less than [1 gal. (3.8 L)] of each
material and color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following.

1. Sherwin-Williams
2. Tnemec
3. Dupont

B. Bidders desiring to use coatings other than those specified shall submit their proposal in writing
to the Architect at least ten (10) days prior to the bid opening. Requests for substitution shall
include manufacturer’s literature for each product giving the name, descriptive information,
solids by volume, recommended dry film thickness and a list of five projects where each
product has been used and rendered satisfactory service. No request for substitution shall be
considered that would decrease film thickness, the number of coats applied or fail to meet the
performance requirements outlined in Section 2.2. The coating contractor shall submit
manufacturer’s certified test reports showing that the substitute product(s) equal or exceed the
performance of the specified products outlined in the painting schedule.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Modified Alkyd (Interior Steel Primer)
1. ASTM D 3359 Adhesion
Requirements: No less than a rating of 5.
2. ASTM B 117 Salt Fog
Requirements- No cracking, blistering, rusting or delamination of film. No rust
creepage at scribe after 500 hours.
3. Exterior Exposure (45˚ Facing South, Kansas City, MO)
Requirements- No cracking, blistering, rusting or delamination of film after 4 years.

B. Self-Crosslinking Acrylic (Interior Overhead Steel Finish Coat)

1. ASTM D 4541 Adhesion to Concrete
Requirement: Minimum 400 psi
2. ASTM D 3363 Hardness
Requirement: No less than a rating of 3H
3. ASTM D 4585 Humidity
Requirement: No rusting, blistering, cracking or delamination after 2000 hours.

C. Cementitious Acrylic Block Filler

1. ASTM D 2246 Freeze Thaw
Requirement: No blistering, cracking, or loss of adhesion after 30 cycles.

HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

2. Exterior Exposure Light Industrial Area

Requirement: No blistering, cracking or delamination of film after three years expo-
sure.
3. ASTM D 3359 Adhesion
Requirement: No less than a rating of 5.
4. ASTM D 4585 Humidity
Requirement: No blistering, cracking or visible loss of integrity after 1500 hours

D. Waterborne Epoxy
1. ASTM D 2486 Scrubbability
Requirement: Passes after minimum of 8000 cycles
2. ASTM E84 Surface Burning & Flame Smoke Spread
Requirement: Class A.

E. Zinc-rich primer
1. Test Method: ASTM G 85 Prohesion
Requirement: No blistering, cracking, or delamination of film. No more than 1/64”
rust creepage at the scribe after 15,000 hours.
2. Test Method: ASTM B 117 Salt Fog
Requirement: No blistering, cracking, or delamination of film. No more than 1%
rusting on the surface and no more than 1/4” rust creepage at the scribe after 20,000
hours.

F. Epoxy Intermediate Coat

1. Test Method: ASTM G 85 Prohesion
Requirement: No blistering, cracking, or delamination of film. No more than 1/8”
rust creepage at the scribe after 5,000 hours.
2. Test Method: ASTM B 117 Salt Fog
Requirement: No blistering, cracking, delamination or rusting on the plane and no
rust creepage at the scribe after 10,000 hours (with zinc primer).

G. Fluoropolmer Finish Coat

1. Test Method: ASTM D 4587 QUV Exposure (UVA 340 bulbs, Cycle 4: 8 hours
UV/4 hours condensation)
Requirement: No blistering, cracking, or chalking. No less than 60% gloss retention
after 25,000 hours exposure.
2. Test method: ASTM D 4141C (EMMAQUA)
Requirement: No blistering, cracking, or chalking. No less than 95% gloss retention
after 1250 MJ/m2 exposure.
3. Volume Solids:
Requirement: No less than 60% volume solids

HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3. Wood: 15 percent.
4. Plaster: 12 percent.
5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
are dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and

conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural

Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and
incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required
to produce paint systems indicated.

C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.

D. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.

E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.

F. Ferrous Metal
1. Interior Steel:
a. Shop: SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Clean

HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

b. Field:
1) Clean and dry.
2) Feather-edge the remaining intact coatings with the failed areas to create a
smooth transition.
3) Spot power tool clean in accordance with SSPC-SP3

G. CMU
1. Allow new masonry to cure a minimum of 14 days.
2. Remove mortar spatter and level protrusions.

H. Gypboard
1. Clean and dry.
2. Sand joint compound and feather-edge.

3.3 PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Gypboard in Corridors
1. Prime Coat: Tnemec Series 51-792 PVA Sealer 1.0-2.0 dry mils
2. Intermediate Coat: Tnemec Series 1029 Enduraone 2.0-3.0 dry mils
3. Topcoat: Tnemec Series 1029 Enduraone 2.0-3.0 dry mils

4. Prime Coat: SW B28W2600 ProMar 200 Zero VOC Primer 1.0-2.0 dry mils
5. Intermediate Coat: SW B66-1560 Series Pro Industrial Multi-Surface Acrylic Eg-Shel
1.5-2.3 dry mils
6. Topcoat: SW B66-1560 Series Pro Industrial Multi-Surface Acrylic Eg-Shel 1.5-2.3 dry
mils

B. CMU Substrates in Stairwells:

1. Prime Coat: Tnemec Series 130 Envirofill 60-80 sq. Ft/Gal
2. Intermediate Coat: Tnemec Series 1029 Enduraone 2.0-3.0 dry mils
3. Topcoat: Tnemec Series 1029 Enduraone 2.0-3.0 dry mils

4. Prime Coat: SW B42W150 Pro Industrial Heavy Duty Block Filler 75-100 sq. Ft/Gal
5. Intermediate Coat: SW B66-1560 Series Pro Industrial Multi-Surface Acrylic Eg-Shel
1.5-2.3 dry mils
6. Topcoat: SW B66-1560 Series Pro Industrial Multi-Surface Acrylic Eg-Shel 1.5-2.3 dry
mils

C. Steel Substrates - Overhead Steel see drawings.

1. Shop primer and field touch-up Coat: Tnemec Series 10-99W Primer 2.5-3.5 dry mils
2. Topcoat: Tnemec Series 115 Unibond 3.0-4.0 dry mils

3. Shop primer and field touch-up Coat: SW B66-1300 Series Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl
Universal Primer 1.9-3.8 dry mils
4. Topcoat: SW B66-1560 Series Pro Industrial Multi-Surface Acrylic Eg-Shel 1.5-2.3 dry
mils

D. Metal Decking: (See Drawings)

1. Primer/Topcoat: Tnemec Series 115 Unibond 3.0-4.0 dry mils

HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

2. Primer/Topcoat: SW B66-1560 Series Pro Industrial Multi-Surface Acrylic Eg-Shel 1.5-

2.3 dry mils

*Note: A test patch is required to verify adhesion to the primer.

SEE COLORS TO BE SELECTED IN SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING & COATING OR SELECTED

FROM MANUFACTURES STANDARD COLOR CHARTS.

The High Performance Industrial coatings are different from the Commercial Coatings for condi-
tioned spaces; High Moisture and Chemical Resistance

-For exposed structural steel:

For carbon steel: (Zinc / Epoxy / Urethane)

Surface prep: Commercial Blast per SSPC SP6 / NACE 3, profile 1.5-2.5 mils
1. Prime Coat: Sherwin-Williams Zinc Clad 4100, 3.0-5.0 mis DFT
2. Intermediate Coat: Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646FC, 4.0-6.0 mils DFT
3. Topcoat: Sherwin-Williams Acrolon Ultra, 2.0-3.0 mils DFT

For Galvanized Steel: (Epoxy / Urethane)

Surface Prep: Brush Off Blast for Galvanized Steel per SSPC-SP16, Profile 1 mil minimum
1. Prime Coat: Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646FC, 4.0-6.0 mils DFT
2. Topcoat: Sherwin-Williams Acrolon Ultra, 2.0-3.0 mils DFT

*The galvanized takes the place of the zinc coating.

END OF SECTION 09960

HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 101416 - PLAQUES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes plaques.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: For plaques.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work.

2. Show plaque mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by
others, and accessories.
3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each plaque at least half
size.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

D. Plaque Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings or in a plaque or

sign schedule.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Sample warranty.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of plaques that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PLAQUES 101416 - 1
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

2.2 PLAQUES

A. Cast Plaque: Plaque with background texture, border, and characters having uniform faces,
sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. A. R. K. Ramos Signage Systems.

b. Gemini Incorporated.
c. Metal Arts; Division of L & H Mfg. Co.
d. Metallic Arts.

2. Plaque Material: Cast bronze.

3. Plaque Thickness: 0.50 inch.
4. Size: 24 inches wide by 18” high.
5. Finishes:

a. Integral Metal Finish: As selected by Architect from full range of industry

finishes.

6. Background Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

7. Integrally Cast Border Style: Raised flat band.
8. Mounting: Concealed studs.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Bronze Castings: Lead-free alloy.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of plaques,
noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:

1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed.

2. For exterior exposure, furnish stainless-steel devices unless otherwise indicated.
3. Exposed Metal-Fastener Components, General:

a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened metal unless otherwise
indicated.

4. Plaque Mounting Fasteners:

PLAQUES 101416 - 2
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of

plaque, screwed into back of plaque, or screwed into tapped lugs cast integrally
into back of plaque, unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard plaques according to requirements indicated.

1. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring
exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed
and contact surfaces.
2. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are
inconspicuous.
3. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to attach to
existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where
possible; use exposed fasteners that match plaque finish.
4. Castings: Fabricate castings free of warp, cracks, blowholes, pits, scale, sand holes, and
other defects that impair appearance or strength. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff
castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks before
finishing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install plaques using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's
written instructions.

1. Install plaques level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with
plaque surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.
2. Install plaques so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard.
3. Before installation, verify that plaque surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris
that would impair installation.
4. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with
grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous
paint.

B. Mounting Methods:

1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of
plaque. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for
displaced adhesive. Place plaque in position and push until flush to surface,
embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support plaque in position until adhesive
fully sets.
b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place plaque in position and flush to surface, install
washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.

PLAQUES 101416 - 3
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as plaques are installed.

END OF SECTION 101416

PLAQUES 101416 - 4
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 101423 - PANEL SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Room-identification signs.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: For panel signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work.

2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by
others, and accessories.
3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille,
and layout for each sign at least half size.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

D. Sign Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings or in a sign schedule.

1. Actual Room Names and Room Numbers to be used will be marked-up on shop drawings
by the Construction Administrator, during the review process.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Sample warranty.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings
and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for signs.

2.2 SIGNS

A. Room-Identification Sign (Provide at each entry door to all rooms (Existing and New) and at
other specifically indicated locations):

1. Basis-of-Design Product: 2/90 Sign Systems; Slide Modular Sign System.

a. See attached examples of design types required per room type, following Part 3 of
this specification.

b. Approved manufactuerers:
1) ASI Signage
2) APCO Signs
3) Inpro Corporation

2. Mounting: Manufacturer's standard method for substrates indicated.

B. Custom Panel Sign: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having
uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:

1. Illuminated Panel Sign: Interior and Backlighted construction with LED lighting
including transformers, insulators, and other accessories for operability, with provision
for servicing and concealing connections to building electrical system. Use tight or sealed
joint construction to prevent unintentional light leakage. Space lamps apart from each
other and away from sign surfaces as needed to illuminate evenly.

a. Power: As indicated on electrical Drawings.

2. Solid-Sheet Sign Acrylic sheet with finish specified in "Surface Finish and Applied
Graphics" Subparagraph below and as follows:

a. Surface-Applied Graphics: Applied photo image.

b. Etched and Filled Graphics: Sign face etched or routed to receive enamel-paint
infill.
c. Inset, Cutout Characters: Sign face routed to receive push-through acrylic graphics.

3. Overall Sign-Panel Depth: 4 inches.

4. Sign-Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth.

a. Edge Condition: Square cut.

b. Corner Condition in Elevation: Custom.

PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

5. Frame: Entire perimeter with continuous edge retainers.

a. Material: Aluminum.
b. Profile: Custom.
c. Corner Condition in Elevation: Custom.
d. Finish and Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

6. Mounting: Projecting from wall with concealed anchors.

7. Surface Finish and Applied Graphics:
a. Photo-Image Graphics: Manufacturer's standard multicolor, 600-dpi halftone or
dot-screen image.
b. Overcoat: Manufacturer's standard.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signage,
noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:

1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed.

2. For exterior exposure, furnish stainless-steel devices unless otherwise indicated.
3. Exposed Metal-Fastener Components, General:

a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened metal unless otherwise
indicated.

4. Sign Mounting Fasteners:

a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of

sign material or screwed into back of sign assembly, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Projecting Studs: Threaded studs with sleeve spacer, welded or brazed to back of
sign material or screwed into back of sign assembly, unless otherwise indicated.
c. Through Fasteners: Exposed metal fasteners matching sign finish, with type of
head indicated, installed in predrilled holes.

B. Adhesives: As recommended by sign manufacturer and that comply with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for
the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."

C. Two-Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high-bond, foam-core tape, 0.045 inch thick, with
adhesive on both sides.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's
written instructions.

PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign
surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.
2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard.
3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that
would impair installation.
4. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with
grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous
paint.

B. Mounting Methods (as applicable):

1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of
sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for
displaced adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface,
embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive
fully sets.
b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install
washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.

2. Projecting Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of
sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for
displaced adhesive. Place spacers on studs, place sign in position, and push until
spacers are pinched between sign and substrate, embedding the stud ends in holes.
Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.
b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place spacers on studs, place sign in position with
spacers pinched between sign and substrate, and install washers and nuts on stud
ends projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.

3. Through Fasteners: Drill holes in substrate using predrilled holes in sign as template.
Countersink holes in sign if required. Place sign in position and flush to surface. Install
through fasteners and tighten.
4. Brackets: Remove loose debris from substrate surface and install backbar or bracket
supports in position so that signage is correctly located and aligned.
5. Adhesive: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose
debris. Apply linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of sign and of
suitable quantity to support weight of sign after cure without slippage. Keep adhesive
away from edges to prevent adhesive extrusion as sign is applied and to prevent visibility
of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage adhesive.
Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.
6. Two-Face Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose
debris. Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to
support weight of sign without slippage. Keep strips away from edges to prevent
visibility at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage tape adhesive.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.

PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 102113 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:
1. Solid-polymer toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.

C. Samples for each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product certificates.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to

ASTM E 84, or another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, by a qualified
testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: [25] [75] [200] or less.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and
Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and
ICC/ANSI A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible.

TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Zamac: ASTM B 86, commercial zinc-alloy die castings.

B. Adhesives: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."

2.2 SOLID-POLYMER UNITS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Columbia

Partitions, A division of PSiSC; PolyLIfe HDPE, graffiti resistant for toilet partitions for urinal
screens or comparable products by one of the following:

1. Accurate Partitions Corporation.

2. Ampco, Inc.
3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
4. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions.
5. DesignRite Partitions.
6. General Partitions Mfg. Corp.
7. Knickerbocker Partition Corp.
8. Metpar Corp.
9. Partition Systems, Inc

B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced.

C. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung.

D. Door, Panel, Screen and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel
material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges, no-sightline system, and with
homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material.

1. Integral Hinges: Configure doors and pilasters to receive integral hinges.

2. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum strip fastened
to exposed bottom edges of solid-polymer components to prevent burning.
3. Polymer Panel Finish: One color and pattern in each room.

a. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range,

including Black, excepting 100% “post-consumer” colors.

E. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.

F. Brackets (Fittings):

1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: double-ear; extruded aluminum.

TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

a. Provide for both toilet partitions and urinal screens.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware

and accessories.

1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard integral hinge nylon gravity cam unit for solid-polymer
doors.
2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard stainless steel latch unit designed for
emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide
units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments
designated as accessible.
3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard zamac combination hook and rubber-tipped
bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted
accessories.
4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard zamac, rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging
doors.
5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard zamac unit at out-swinging doors that complies with
regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at
compartments designated as accessible.

B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with

antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.

C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or

chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-
type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use
stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling

mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to
conceal supports and leveling mechanism.

B. Urinal-Screens: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring.

C. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide, in-
swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide, out-swinging
doors with a minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide, clear opening for compartments designated as
accessible.

TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,
straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended
anchoring devices.

B. Clearances: Maximum 1/2 inch between pilasters and panels; 1 inch between panels and walls.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's

written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open
approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging
doors to return doors to fully closed position.

END OF SECTION 102113

TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 10 2213 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Wire mesh systems for walls and ceilings.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 3329.02 Sustainable Design Reporting - LEED v4.

B. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Cylinders for locksets.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless

Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2018.
B. ASTM A510/A510M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods
and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel, and Alloy Steel; 2018.
C. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015, with Errata(2016).

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data for mesh materials, finishes.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate plan and vertical dimensions, elevations, component details; head,
jamb, and sill details; location of hardware. Provide component details, anchorage, and type
and location of fasteners.
1. Show field measurements on shop drawings.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions
requiring special attention.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in

this section, with not less than three years of documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Products: (Southwest Solutions Group) Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide products indicated on drawings or comparable products by one of the
following:

1. Southwest Solutions Group. www.southwestsolutions.com Phone: 1-(800) 803-1083

2. Acorn Wire & Iron Works
3. American Wire Corporation
4. Central Wire & Iron Works, LLC
5. Jesco Industries, Inc

WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 102213 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

B. The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a
standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed
substitution
C. No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for
approval has been received by the Architect at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of
Bids. Such requests shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be
substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution including drawings,
performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement
setting forth changes in other materials, equipment or other portions of the Work, including
changes in the work of other contracts that incorporation of the proposed substitution would
require, shall be included. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is
upon the proposer. The Architect's decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed
substitution shall be final.
D. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.
If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such approval
will be set forth in an Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any
other manner.
E. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS

A. Wire Mesh Partitions: Factory-fabricated modular assemblies of panels, doors, anchors,
hardware, and accessories as required to provide a complete system.
1. Design Criteria:
a. Design partition system to provide for movement of components without damage,
undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to design loads.
b. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building
structural members, and clearances of intended openings.
c. Comply with applicable code for wire mesh opening size.
2. Performance:
a. Installed Wall Assembly: Resist a lateral load of 250 lbs without damage
or permanent set.
b. Hinged Door and Panel in Open Position: Resist a downward load of 250 lbs (1112
N) without damage or permanent set.

2.03 COMPONENTS
A. Woven Wire Mesh: Heavy duty.
1. Material: ASTM A510/A510M uncoated crimped steel wire. 2. Frame: 1-1/4" x 1-1/4"
x 1/8" Angle
2. Door Frame: 1-1/4" x 1-1/4" x 1/8" Angle
3. Warp and Fill Wire Size: 10 gage, 0.1019 inch (2.59mm).
4. Mesh Opening Size: 1 x 2 inch (50 mm).
5. Mesh Weave: Plain weave, double crimped.
6. Posts: 2" x 2" 14 ga. square tubing
B. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.

2.04 FASTENERS
A. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized.
B. Anchorage Devices: Provide power driven, powder actuated, and drilled expansion bolts.

2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Plates, Gussets, Clips: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered,

WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 102213 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

manufacturer's standard shapes, same finish as framing members.

B. Post Caps: Manufacturer's standard.
C. Floor and Ceiling Pilaster Shoe: Manufacturer's standard.

2.06 FABRICATION
A. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation.
B. Make exposed joints flush or tight.
C. Provide components required for anchorage to adjacent construction.
D. Frame openings made for penetrating mechanical and electrical components.

2.07 FINISHES
A. Painted Finish: Manufacturer's standard powder coat finish.
1. Color: Gray.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that substrate surfaces and required openings are readyto receive work.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion ordefects.

3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb or Level: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
B. Maximum Misalignment From True Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

3.05 CLEANING
A. Remove temporary protection to prefinished surfaces.

END OF SECTION

WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 102213 - 3

 TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

Section 102226 – OPERABLE PARTITIONS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Manually operated, individual acoustical panel operable partition.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 03 Sections for concrete tolerances required.
2. Division 05 Sections for primary structural support, including pre-punching of support members by
structural steel supplier per operable partition supplier's template.
3. Division 06 Sections for wood framing & supports, and all blocking at head and jambs as required.
4. Division 09 Sections for wall and ceiling framing at head and jambs.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified in writing by the operable partition
manufacturer, as qualified to install the manufacturer's partition systems for work similar in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.
B. Acoustical Performance: Test operable partitions in an independent acoustical laboratory in accordance
with ASTM E90 test procedure and classified in accordance with ASTM E413 to attain no less than the
STC rating specified. Provide a complete and unedited written test report by the testing laboratory upon
request.
C. Preparation of the opening shall conform to the criteria set forth per ASTM E557 Standard Practice for
Architectural Application and Installation of Operable Partitions.
D. The operable wall must be manufactured by a certified ISO-9001-2015 company or an equivalent quality
control system.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM International

1. ASTM E557 Standard Practice for Architectural Application and Installation of Operable Partitions.
2. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission
Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.
3. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
4. ASTM C1048 - Heat-Treated Flat Glass—Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass.
5. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
6. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation

B. Health Product Declaration Collaborative

1. Health Product Declaration Open Standard v2.1

OPERABLE PARTITIONS 102226 - 1

 TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

C. International Standards Organization

1. ISO 14021 - Environmental Labels and Declarations - Self-Declared Environmental Claims (Type II
Environmental Labeling).
2. ISO 14025:2011-10, Environmental Labels and Declarations - Type III Environmental Declarations -
Principles and Procedures.
3. ISO 14040:2009-11, Environmental Management - Life Cycle Assessment - Principles and
Framework.
4. ISO 14044:2006-10, Environmental Management - Life Cycle Assessment - Requirements and
Guidelines.
5. ISO 21930 – Sustainability in Buildings and Civil Engineering Works — Core Rules for
Environmental Product Declarations of Construction Products and Services.

D. Other Standards

1. ADA – Americans with Disabilities Act.

2. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings.
3. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.
4. NEMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Material descriptions, construction details, finishes, installation details, and operating
instructions for each type of operable partition, component, and accessory specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of operable partitions. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, attachments to other construction, and accessories. Indicate dimensions, weights, conditions at
openings, and at storage areas, and required installation, storage, and operating clearances. Indicate
location and installation requirements for hardware and track, including floor tolerances required and
direction of travel. Indicate blocking to be provided by others.
C. Setting Drawings: Show imbedded items and cutouts required in other work, including support beam
punching template.
D. Samples: Color samples demonstrating full range of finishes available by architect. Verification samples
will be available in same thickness and material indicated for the work.
E. Reports: Provide a complete and unedited written sound test report indicating test specimen matches
product as submitted.
F. Create spaces that are healthy for occupants.

1. Furnish products and materials with Health Product Declaration (HPD), Manufacturer Inventory, or
other material health disclosure documentation. Products without an HPD or other disclosure
documentation are not acceptable.

G. Furnish materials that generate the least amount of pollution.

1. Furnish products and materials that have third party verified environmental product declarations
(EPD’s). Consider products and materials that have optimized environmental performance (reduced
life cycle impacts). Products without an EPD or other disclosure documentation are not acceptable.

H. Buy American: Folding door to be manufactured in the United States in compliance with applicable U.S.
Federal Trade Commission (FTC) and U.S. Customs Service and Border Protections regulations and be
labeled "Made in America".

OPERABLE PARTITIONS 102226 - 2

 TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Clearly mark packages and panels with numbering systems used on Shop Drawings. Do not use
permanent markings on panels.
B. Protect panels during delivery, storage, and handling to comply with manufacturer’s direction and as
required to prevent damage.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Provide written warranty by manufacturer of operable partitions agreeing to repair or replace any
components with manufacturing defects.
B. Warranty period: Two (2) years.
C. Suspension System Warranty:

1. OP-01: Five (5) years.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS, PRODUCTS, AND OPERATION

A. Basis Of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Modernfold, Inc. 215 West New
Road Greenfield, IN 46140 Phone 800.869.9685 [email protected] Acousti-Seal Legacy or
comparable product by one of the following.

1. KWIK-WALL Company
2. Moderco Inc.
3. Advanced Equipment Corporation

B. Doors to be manufactured in the U.S.A.

C. Products: Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide the following product

1. OP-01: Acousti-Seal Legacy - Single Panel: Manually operated individual panel operable partition.
a. Nominal Panel Thickness 3 inches
b. Frame – Roll formed & welded 16 ga. Steel
c. Skin / Face options – steel
d. Finish options – Fabric and Dry Erase Board (Selected by Architect).
e. Width – 25’-0” total width verify at job site / Operable Panel size + or – 42.19” to be verified.
f. Height – 12’-0” verify at job site
g. STC – 52
h. Hanging weight – 11 lbs / sq. ft.

2.2 OPERATION

A. OP-01: Acousti-Seal Legacy - Series of individual flat panels, manually operated, top supported with
operable floor seals.

B. Final Closure:

1. OP-01: Horizontally expanding panel edge with removable crank.

2.3 PANEL CONSTRUCTION

OPERABLE PARTITIONS 102226 - 3

 TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

A. OP-01: Nominal 3-inch (76mm) thick panels in manufacturer's standard 48-inch (1220mm) widths. All
panel horizontal and vertical framing members fabricated from minimum 16-gage formed steel with
overlapped and welded corners for rigidity. Top channel is reinforced to support suspension system
components. Frame is designed so that full vertical edges of panels are of formed steel and provide
concealed protection of the edges of the panel skin.
B. Panel skin shall be: Fabric selected by Architect

1. OP-01: Roll-formed steel wrapping around panel edge. Panel skins shall be lock formed and welded
directly to the frame for unitized construction. Acoustical ratings of panels with this construction
minimum:
a. 52 STC

C. Hinges for Closure Panels shall be: TBD

D. Panel Trim: No vertical trim required or allowed on edges of panels; minimal groove appearance at panel
joints.

E. Panel Weights:

1. OP-01: 52 STC - 11 lbs./square foot

2.4 PANEL FINISH

A. Panel finish shall be:

1. OP-01: Fabric and Dry Erase Board selected by Architect.

B. Panel Trim: Exposed panel trim of one consistent color:

1. OP-01: To Be Advised

2.5 SOUND SEALS

A. Vertical Interlocking Sound Seals between panels: Roll-formed steel astragals, with reversible tongue and
groove configuration in each panel edge for universal panel operation. Rigid plastic or aluminum
astragals or astragals in only one panel edge are not acceptable.
B. Horizontal Top Seals: Continuous contact extruded vinyl bulb shape with pairs of non-contacting vinyl
fingers to prevent distortion without the need for mechanically operated parts.
C. Horizontal bottom floor seals shall be:

1. OP-01: Modernfold SM2 Bottom Seal. Manually activated seals providing nominal 2" (51mm)
operating clearance with an operating range of + 0.50" (13mm) to -1.50" (38mm). Seal shall be
operable from panel edge or face. Extended seal shall exert nominal 120 pounds (54 kg) downward
force to the floor throughout operating range.
`
2.6 SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. OP-01: #17 Suspension System - “Smart Track”

1. Suspension Tracks: Minimum 11-gauge, 0.12-inch (3.04mm) roll-formed steel track, suitable for
either direct mounting to a wood header or supported by adjustable steel hanger brackets,

OPERABLE PARTITIONS 102226 - 4

 TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

supporting the load-bearing surface of the track, connected to structural support by pairs of 0.38-inch
(10mm) diameter threaded rods. Aluminum track is not acceptable.
a. Exposed track soffit: Steel, integral to track, and pre-painted off-white.

2. Carriers: Two all-steel trolleys with steel tired ball bearing wheels. Non-steel tires are not acceptable.
Suspension system shall provide automatic indexing of panels into stack area using preprogrammed
switches and trolleys without electrical, pneumatic, or mechanical activation.

2.7 OPTIONS

A. Work Surfaces shall be as indicated on drawings:

1. OP-01: Markerboard: White enamel on steel, bonded to the face of the panel with horizontal trim
without exposed fasteners. Trim is not acceptable on vertical edges to provide uninterrupted work
surface.

B. Available accessories/options:

1. OP-01: Pocket Doors: Acousti-Seal Pocket Doors by Modernfold, Inc. Equipped with electric
interlock system. (see supplement specification)

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with ASTM E557, operable partition manufacturer's written installation instructions,
Drawings and approved Shop Drawings.
B. Install operable partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting have been
completed.
C. Match operable partitions by installing panels from marked packages in numbered sequence indicated on
Shop Drawings.
D. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed or unmatched panels are not acceptable.

3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean partition surfaces upon completing installation of operable partitions to remove dust, dirt,
adhesives, and other foreign materials according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to the manufacturer and Installer
that ensure operable partitions are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operable partitions to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free from binding, warp, excessive
deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire
operational range. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.

3.4 EXAMINATION

OPERABLE PARTITIONS 102226 - 5

 TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

A. Examine flooring, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of operable partitions.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate proper operation and maintenance procedures to Owner's representative.

B. Provide Operation and Maintenance Manual to Owner's representative.

END OF SECTION 102226

OPERABLE PARTITIONS 102226 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

102600 – RESILIENT PLASTIC CORNER GUARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Corner guard system for wall protection:

1.02 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Surface Mounted, Resilient Plastic Corner Guard Systems

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for each type of corner guard specified.

B. Detail drawings indicating mounting details with the appropriate fasteners for
specific project substrates.
C. Samples for verification purposes of corner guard, 6" (152mm) long, in full size
profiles of each type and color indicated.
D. Cleaning and maintenance instructions for door and wall protection systems.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in unopened factory packaging to the jobsite and store in original
packaging in a climate controlled location away from direct sunlight.

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Products must be installed in an interior climate controlled environment.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Standard Koroseal Limited Lifetime Warranty against material and manufacturing

defects.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis Of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Koroseal Wall

Protection Systems, Louisville, KY. Ph: 855-753-5474; Fax: 330-668- 7703;
Internet Address: www.korogard.com or comparable products by one of the
following.

1. Construction Specialties
2. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, InPro CorporationAmerican
3. Floor Products Company, Inc.

STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARD 102600 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

B. Provide all corner guards and wall protection from a single source.

2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Corner Guards

1. Surface-Mounted, Resilient Plastic Corner Guards: Model, Size, Attachment

Method, Grade, Thickness
a. Cover: Rigid, impact-resistant plastic, nominal 0.078 inch (1.9 mm) thick,
in dimensions and profiles indicated.
b. Retainer:
i. Continuous, one-piece, extruded aluminum retainer, nominal
0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
c. G100 Series: 2 inch (50 mm); Corner Radius: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm).
d. Accessories: Prefabricated aluminum retainer with concealed
splices,mounting hardware, and other accessories as required.
End caps:
(1) Match plastic cover color.
(2) Field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on plastic
covers.
e. Color: As selected.

2.03 MATERIALS

1. Rigid Plastic Material: Extruded, textured, chemical-and stain-resistant,

high-impact, acrylic modified vinyl plastic, thickness as indicated. Comply
with specified requirements of ASTM D 256 for impact resistance and
ASTM E 84 for flame spread and smoke developed characteristics. Color:
As selected by Architect from the manufacturer's full range of standard
colors.
2. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) for 6063-T5
3. Fasteners: Use non-corrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners
compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors, and other items
being fastened. Use theft-proof fasteners where exposed to view.

2.04 COMPONENTS

A. Attachment

1. Adhesive: Field applied heavy duty adhesive

2. Fasteners: Pre-drilled beveled holes and Phillips head screws.

2.05 FINISHES

A. Resilient Plastic: Color to be selected by architect from full range of manufacturer

selections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARD 102600 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions in which the corner guard systems will be installed.

1. Complete all finishing operations, including painting, before beginning

installation of corner guards.

B. Wall surface shall be dry and free from dirt, grease, and loose paint.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. General: Prior to installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose
particles.

3.03 INSTALLATION
1. General: Locate the corner guard as indicated on the approved detail drawing
for the appropriate substrate and in compliance with the Koroseal installation
instructions. Install corner guard level and plumb at the height indicated on the
drawings.

2. Installation of Corner Guards:

a. Install wall surface protection units plumb, level, and true to line without
distortions.
b. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that
might be visible in the finished work.
c. Install aluminum retainers, mounting brackets, and other accessories in
strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
d. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of over 20 feet (6 m), splice
aluminum retainer and plastic cover at same locations along the run.

3.04 CLEANING

1. Clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard non-ammonia based

household cleaning agent.
2. Clean metal components in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
3. Remove excess adhesive in manner recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARD 102600 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Public-use washroom accessories.

2. Public-use shower room accessories.
3. Under-lavatory guards.
4. Custodial accessories.

B. Owner-Furnished Material.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each
accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated.

2. Identify products using designations indicated.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.

2. American Specialties, Inc.
3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
4. Bradley Corporation.

B. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-265.

2. Description: Double-roll toilet dispenser with vandal-resistant self-locking mechanisms.
3. Mounting: Partition mounted serving two adjacent toilet compartments and Surface
mounted. RE: Drawings.
4. Operation: Controlled delivery with 4 heavy-duty brake springs.
5. Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2 inch diameter tissue rolls.
6. Material and Finish: Chrome-plated steel, bright polished.

C. Combination Towel (Folded) Dispenser/Waste Receptacle:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick; B-3947.

2. Description: Combination unit for dispensing C-fold or multifold towels, with removable
waste receptacle.
3. Mounting: Recessed with projecting receptacle.

a. Designed for nominal 4-inch wall depth.

4. Minimum Towel-Dispenser Capacity: 600 C-fold or 800 multifold paper towels.

5. Minimum Waste-Receptacle Capacity: 18 gal.
6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
7. Lockset: Tumbler type for towel-dispenser compartment.

D. Liquid-Soap Dispenser:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-2112 surface mounted.

2. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid form.
3. Mounting: Horizontally oriented, surface mounted with concealed vandal-resistant
mounting.
4. Capacity: 40 oz.
5. Materials: Satin Finish Stainless Steel.
6. Lockset: Vandal resistant (requires key to open) Tumbler type.
7. Refill Indicator: Window type.

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

E. Grab Bar:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-6806 Satin Finish.

2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.
3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick.

a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin) on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area.

4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches.

5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.

F. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick; B-270.

2. Mounting: Partition mounted.
3. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover.
4. Receptacle: Removable.
5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

G. Mirror Unit:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-290 2436 Tempered Glass Welder-Frame mirror.

2. Frame: Stainless-steel angle, 0.05 inch thick.

a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth.

3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated
below.

a. One-piece, galvanized-steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking

mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.
b. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices
requiring a special tool to remove.

4. Size: As indicated on Drawings.

2.2 WARM-AIR DRYERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. American Specialties, Inc.

2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
3. Bradley Corporation.
4. World Dryer Corporation.

B. Warm-Air Dryer:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Excel Dryer Corporation; Xlerator XL series.

2. Mounting: Recess mounted.
a. Provide Excel Dryer Corporation; ADA Compliant Recess Kit

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

3. Operation: Electronic-sensor activated with timed power cut-off switch.

4. Electrical Requirements: 110-120 V, 16 A, 1490 W.
5. Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

2.3 UNDER-LAVATORY GUARDS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc.

2. Truebro by IPS Corporation.

B. Under-lavatory Guard:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Truebro LA Guard 2.

2. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent
direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing
coverings.
3. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.

2.4 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.

2. American Specialties, Inc.
3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
4. Bradley Corporation.
5. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
6. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc

B. Mop and Broom Holder:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-239 x 34.

2. Description: Unit with holders.
3. Length: 34 inches
4. Mop/Broom Holders: Three, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type.
5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate

to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to
ASTM F 446.

END OF SECTION 102800

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fire-protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers
indicated are accommodated.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET

A. Basis-of-Design Product : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide JL Industries, Inc.;

1537 “Clear VU FX2” or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Larsen’s Manufacturing Co.

2. Grainger

3. Hallmann

B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated (Unless located in a fire wall then it shall be rated same as
wall).

C. Cabinet Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.

FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 104413 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

D. Semirecessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping
surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).

1. Rolled-Edge Trim: 3 inch backbend depth.

E. Cabinet Trim Material: Stainless-steel sheet.

F. Door Material: Stainless-steel sheet.

G. Door Style: Full acrylic bubble with frame.

H. Door Glazing: Molded acrylic bubble.

1. Acrylic Bubble Color: Clear, transparent.

I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet
type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

J. Accessories:

1. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply
on door handle.
2. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style,
size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated.

a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE

EXTINGUISHER."

1) Location: Applied to cabinet glazing.

2) Application Process: Diecut vinyl letters.
3) Lettering Color: Red.
4) Orientation: Vertical.

K. Materials:

1. Cold-Rolled Steel: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

a. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.

b. Color: White.

2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

a. Finish: No. 4 directional satin finish.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and
hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.

FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 104413 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of
cabinet and trim style.

B. Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not
indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

D. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated.

E. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral
locking devices operate properly.

END OF SECTION 104413

FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 104413 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire
extinguishers.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and maintenance data.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and
function.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.

1. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable
Fire Extinguishers."

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting
bracket indicated.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide JL

Industries, Inc.; Cosmic 10E or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Ansul Incorporated.
b. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.
c. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc.
d. Larsens Manufacturing Company.

2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,
Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections,
maintenance, and recharging.

2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide JL Industries, Inc.;

MB846A or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Ansul Incorporated.
2. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.
3. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group.
4. Larsens Manufacturing Company.

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in

red letter decals applied to mounting surface.

a. Orientation: Vertical.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.

B. Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1. Mounting Brackets: 48 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.

C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations
indicated.

END OF SECTION 104416

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 122413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes manually operated roller shades.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband
materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.

1. Motor-Operated Shades: Include details of installation and diagrams for power, signal,
and control wiring.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

D. Roller-Shade Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product certificates.

B. Product test reports.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate
aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.

ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Draper, Inc.;

Clutch Operated Flexshade or comparable product by one of the following:

1. BTX Window Automation, Inc.

2. DFB Sales.
3. Hunter Douglas Contract.
4. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.
5. MechoShade Systems, Inc.
6. Nysan Solar Control Inc.; Hunter Douglas Company.
7. OEM Shades Inc.
8. Shade Techniques, LLC.
9. Silent Gliss USA, Inc.
10. SM Automatic, Inc.

2.2 ROLLER SHADES

A. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that
stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated.

1. Bead Chains: Stainless Steel.

a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade.

b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops.
c. Chain-Retainer Type: Clip, jamb mount.

2. Spring Lift-Assist Mechanisms: Manufacturer's standard for balancing roller-shade

weight and lifting heavy roller shades.

a. Provide for shadebands that weigh more than 10 lb or for shades as recommended
by manufacturer, whichever criteria are more stringent.

B. Spring Operating Mechanisms: Roller contains spring sized to accommodate shade size
indicated. Provide with positive locking mechanism that can stop shade movement at each half-
turn of roller and with manufacturer's standard pull.

1. Pole: Manufacturer's standard type in length required to make operation convenient from
floor level and with hook for engaging pull.

C. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall

thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of

ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end

assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.

1. Roller Mounting Configuration: Single roller.

2. Roller Drive-End Location: Right side of inside face of shade.
3. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back of roller.
4. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method.

D. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller
assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions
indicated.

E. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to join up to

three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive-end assembly.

F. Shadebands:

1. Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric.

2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.

a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material.

b. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

G. Installation Accessories:

1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and
operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners.

a. Shape: L-shaped.
b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband
when shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches.

2. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps.

3. Side Channels: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at sides of shades as
shades are drawn down. Provide side channels with shadeband guides or other means of
aligning shadebands with channels at tops.
4. Bottom (Sill) Channel or Angle: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at
bottoms of shades when shades are closed.
5. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 SHADEBAND MATERIALS

A. Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a qualified
testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

B. Light-Filtering Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant.

1. Source: Roller-shade manufacturer.

2. Type: PVC-coated fiberglass.

ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

3. Weave: Mesh.
4. Thickness: 0.017 inches.
5. Orientation on Shadeband: Up the bolt.
6. Openness Factor: 5 percent.
7. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.4 ROLLER-SHADE FABRICATION

A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including
requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels.

B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at
74 deg F :

1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening

in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2-inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch.
Length equal to head-to-sill or -floor dimension of opening in which shade is installed
less 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch.
2. Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between
shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical
separations between openings.

C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible

except as follows:

1. Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than

[1:4] <Insert ratio>, provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband
length to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement
without distortion of the material.
2. Skylight Shades: Provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband as
required to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement
without distortion or sag of material.
3. Railroaded Materials: Railroad material where material roll width is less than the
required width of shadeband and where indicated. Provide battens and seams as required
by railroaded material to produce shadebands with full roll-width panel(s) plus, if
required, one partial roll-width panel located at top of shadeband.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ROLLER-SHADE INSTALLATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

C. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units, according to manufacturer's
written instructions.

1. Opaque Shadebands: Located so shadeband is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of
glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware.

D. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or
malfunction throughout entire operational range.

E. Clean roller-shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION 122413

ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 123553.19 – WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK

PART 1 – MANUFACTURERS

1.00 MANUFACTURERS

A. The basis of this specification is wood casework manufactured and constructed

according to the standards used by Leonard Peterson & Co., Inc., 400 Webster
Road, Auburn, Alabama. The specified design is Vanguard –
CONVENTIONAL RADIUS LIP. All laboratory equipment covered by the
specification shall be the product of one manufacturer and be fabricated at one
geographic location to assure shipping continuity and single-source responsibility.
All quotations from a manufacturer other than Leonard Peterson & Co., Inc. shall
contain a review of the following capabilities:

1. List of shop facilities

2. List of engineering and manufacturing personnel
3. Proof of financial ability to fulfill the contract
4. List of a minimum of ten (10) installations over the last five (5)
years of comparable scope
5. Proof of project management and installation capabilities
6. AWI Premium Grade Certification Number.

B. The selected manufacturer must warrant for a period of three (3) years, starting on
the date of acceptance or occupancy, whichever comes first, that all products sold
under the contract referenced above shall be free from defects in material and
workmanship. Purchaser shall notify the manufacturer’s representative
immediately of any defective product. The manufacturer shall have a reasonable
opportunity to inspect the goods. The purchaser shall return no product until
receipt by purchaser of written shipping instructions from the manufacturer.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements listed

above or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Flinn Scientific
b. Carolina Biological Supply
c. Fenco Labs
C. Samples:
Samples from non-specified manufacturers will be required and reviewed per
specification. Samples shall be delivered, at no cost to the architect or owner to a
destination set forth by the architect or owner. This must be done seven (7) days
before quotation deadline as a condition of approval of each bidder. Samples
shall be full size, production type samples. Miniature, or “Show Room” type
samples are not acceptable. Furnish the following:

WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553.19

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1. One combination drawer and cupboard base unit showing complete

construction details, including one shelf.
2. One leg corner sample showing table construction.
3. One sample of all top materials shown or called for, of sufficient
size to perform finish requirements test.
4. Sample of mechanical service fittings, locks, door pulls, hinges,
and interior hardware and other material deemed necessary for
review.

D. The above samples of the successful manufacturer may be impounded by the

architect or owner to insure that material delivered to the jobsite conforms in
every respect to the samples submitted.

PART 2 – MATERIALS

2.00 MATERIALS

A. General:

1. Casework shall be conventional radius lipped design and constructed in

accordance with the best woodworking practices. All cabinetry shall be
produced in manufacturers own facility and operated under his control and
supervision. First class quality of casework shall be established and
maintained by use of proper machinery, finishing products, tools, fixtures
and skilled workmanship.

2. Casework units to be dowel pin construction with all joints properly glued
making each unit rigid and self-supporting.

3. Material shall be selected so that the finished installation shall provide an

attractive and harmonious appearance. All exterior casework surfaces
exposed to view after installation shall be Northern Red Oak. Solid woods
and veneers behind closed doors or drawers shall be of color and graining
in conformance with the normally accepted standard required of the
scientific laboratory equipment industry.

B. Solid Woods:

All solid woods shall be hardwood carefully and thoroughly air-dried, then kiln
dried in humidity controlled kilns to a moisture content of 4-1/2%. All kiln dried
lumber shall then be tempered to a moisture content of 6% before use. This
moisture content shall be maintained throughout production.

C. Plywoods:

All plywood shall be hardwood. Soft woods such as Fir or Pine are not permitted.

WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553.19

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

1. Veneer Core Plywood:

Veneer core plywood shall be either 7-ply (3/4”) or 9-ply (1”) and shall be
compliant with ANSI/HPVA HP-1 2009.

2. Composition Core Plywood:

Composition core plywood shall be 3-ply and shall be compliant with

ANSI A208.1-2009, and/or ANSI A208.2-2009.

3. Face Veneers:

Plywood face veneers shall be Grade A, plain sliced, book matched, red
oak on face, and Grade 1, red oak on back.

D. Banding:

Plywood panels shall be edge banded with a multiple ply hardwood edge-banding
or PVC depending on location and/or finish.

E. Tempered Hardboard:

Tempered Hardboard shall be a wood fiber/resinous combination formed with

heat and pressure into sheets providing a hard, smooth surface and shall be
compliant with ANSI A135.4-2004.

F. Dowels:

Assembly dowels, used to joint rails to panels, shall be fluted hardwood 8mm in
diameter x 36mm in length. All dowels glued into components.

G. Glass:

Glass for framed sliding and swinging doors shall be 1/8” float glass (tempered
glass provided when specified). Glass for unframed sliding doors shall be ¼”
float glass.

H. Glues:

All glues used in the manufacture of plywood, assembly of component parts and
cabinetry to be water resistant with no added urea formaldehyde.

I. Finishes:

WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553.19

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

Conversion varnish with no added urea formaldehyde and shall comply with
HUD 24 CFR 3280.308.

J. Hardware:

1. Drawer and door pulls: Bar Type made of extruded aluminum 4-1/2” long
and ½” wide having dull brushed finish. Pull attached with two (2) No. 10
flat head machine screws countersunk on 4”centers. Pulls provided for all
hinged doors and drawers. (Plastic pulls or a design not compatible for
use by the handicapped is not acceptable.)

2. Latching Handles: Made of dull chrome plated die cast zinc alloy
approximately 4-1/4” in length in streamlined design. Handle operates
with one-quarter turn. Paired door cases have latching handle on right
door and dummy matching handle on left door. A 3-point latching system
provides positive engagement at top and bottom of door with 5/16”
diameter tapered epoxy coated steel rods engaging in case top and bottom
and latch plate engaging behind left door or into side wall of case
depending upon design. Latching handles are provided on all case doors
over 48” high.

3. Hinges: Butt style, 5-knuckle, institutional type of dull finished stainless

steel, 2-1/2” by 3-1/8”, unequal winged, tight pinned and with wing
thickness of .081”. Each hinge is secured by seven plated No. 7 flat head
screws. (Surface mounted hinges shall not be acceptable.)

Doors hung with paired hinges are capable of supporting 175 pounds at
12” from pivot point of hinges with no distortion of hinges or degradation
of casework. Hinged doors up to 48” high furnished with 1 pair of hinges.
Hinged doors over 48” high furnished with 1-1/2 pair of hinges.

4. Drawer Slides: 100 lb. rated capacity, full extension, zinc plated, linear
ball bearing made of cold rolled steel. Drawers removable without the use
of tools.

5. Shelf support clips: double pin type made of vinyl having anti-tipping
seismic feature. Each clip capable of supporting 200 pounds. Clips
engage into holes drilled into cabinet end panels or partitions.

6. Catches: spring loaded, nylon roller type, designed for quiet operation
provided for hinged doors. Cabinets with locked paired doors have elbow
catches inside left-hand doors. Cabinet and case doors provided with 2
catches, one at top and one at bottom, where elbow catches are not
furnished.

WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553.19

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

7. Base molding (when call for or specified): pliable black vinyl, 1/8” thick
by 4” high with top edge rounded. Molding secured with self-stick or
applied waterproof adhesives. Formed stainless steel caps are fastened to
exposed corners. Exposed cabinet work provided with base molding
unless otherwise specified.

8. Leg shoes: molded black vinyl 2-1/2” high. Legs attached to floor
provided with shoes, and furnished with semi-concealed plated metal
angle clips for securement.

9. Drawer and hinged door locks (except tall case doors): dead bolt style,
heavy-duty, five-tumbler, of non-ferrous metal and master-keyed having
3/8” bolt throw and single bitted style keyway. Barrel and back plate of
locks are riveted together; lock bolts are non-removal. Locks with cams
held in place with machine screws or nuts are not acceptable. Locks are
secured to rear of drawer and door fronts with flat head screws. Each lock
furnished with one non-ferrous key when keyed alike and two non-ferrous
keys when keyed differently. Locks furnished as indicated on details or as
is standard with catalog descriptions unless otherwise specified. Latching
handles shall be provided with locks where required. Locks shall be
keyed to same master key as locks provided for other drawer and hinged
door cabinets.

10. Number plates: oval-shaped and made of non-ferrous metal with black
numerals. Plates secured with brads (self-stick number plates are not
acceptable). Number plates furnished only when specified.

11. Glides: black nylon, minimum 1-3/4” diameter and adjustable on 3/8”
diameter x 1-1/2” plated stem. Glides provide on table legs not attached to
floors.

12. Support rods, ¾” diameter aluminum with the upper ends rounded and the
lower ends tapered to fit support rod plates. Support rod plates made of
aluminum secured into table top with heavy brass nut. Cross bars made of
¾” diameter aluminum with rounded ends, and provide with clamps for
attachment to support rods.

13. Label holders: Furnished in brushed stainless steel attached to drawer

heads or doors with screws. Label holders have a 1” x 2” label opening.

2.01 CONSTRUTION

A. General:

The prime intent of this specification is to define the essential minimum cabinet
case and table requirements of the materials, and construction, finish and

WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553.19

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

workmanship to be supplied. Cabinetry to be of convention lipped style design

having drawer and doors provided with radiused edges overlapping openings on
all edges. Each cabinet unit shall be completely factory assembled and finished.
Cabinets constructed with flush interiors having no offsets maximizing drawer
and cupboard space and ease of cleanability. All exposed joints shall be closely
fitted and tight showing no open joints when finished. All exposed corners eased.
Individual cabinet, case and table units shall meet or exceed the
Recommended Standards and Practices outlined in SEFA 8.

B. Base Cabinets:

1. End panels, partitions, bottoms and shelves:

Exposed end panels, partitions, bottoms and shelves to be ¾” thick red oak
veneer core plywood. Unexposed end panels, partitions, bottoms and
shelves to be ¾” thick birch or maple veneer core plywood providing light
cabinet interiors behind closed doors. Exposed edges of end panels,
partitions and bottoms to be banded in red oak. Edges of shelves behind
solid doors to be red oak wood or red oak PVC depending on finish.

Interiors of end panels and partitions to be drilled to receive dowel

inserted edges of rails, bottoms and toe boards and bored for shelf clips
where required. Bottoms machined for and provided with dowels (on
maximum of 96mm centers) for insertion into end panels or partitions and
grooved to receive cupboard backs.

Cupboard base cabinet shelves to be ¾” thick veneer core plywood,

adjustable on 1-1/4” (32mm) centers.

2. Top Frame:

Cabinet top frame to be comprised of a front rail and a back rail. Front
rail to be 4” x 1” hardwood having exposed edge red oak banded and end
edges drilled and provided with three (3) dowels for horizontal glued
insertion into cabinet end panels at front. Back rail shall be ¾” hardwood
varying in height from 9” high for 35” high cabinets to 7-3/4” high for 29”
high cabinets and inserted vertically at rear into cabinet end panels. End
edges of back rails each drilled and provided with four (4) dowels for
glued insertion into ends panels.

3. Intermediate Rails:

Intermediate Rails to be 4” x ¾” hardwood having exposed edge red oak

banded and end edges each drilled and provided with 3 dowels for
insertion into end panels. Intermediate rails placed horizontally at face of
panels between all drawers or drawers and cupboards. Intermediate rails

WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553.19

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

machined to receive engagement of lock bolts and security panels when

specified.

4. Backs:

Interior cupboard backs to be ¼” thick tempered hardboard and provided

removable. Backs set into grooved cabinet bottom and attached at top to
rear vertical rail with minimum of two (2) screws. Exposed interior
cupboard backs to be ¼” veneer core red oak plywood provided
removable unless specified as fixed.

Exposed exterior finished oak backs for free standing cabinets or mobile
units to be of ¾” thick red oak veneer core plywood with exposed edges
banded. Free standing units up to 8’0” long shall be provided with one
piece back and shipped assembled to cabinets.

5. Drawers:

Drawer fronts to be 13/16” thick one piece solid oak up to 8” high with
grain running horizontally. Drawer sides and backs to be 15/32” thick, 11
ply birch plywood and bottoms ¼” tempered hardboard. Drawer front and
back attached to sides with interlocking lap or dovetail joinery. Bottom
fully grooved into front, sides and back. All joints glued and pinned as
required.

Drawers provided with 100 lb. full extension slides and pulls as described
under Hardware. Drawers over 26” wide to have two (2) pulls.

6. Security Panels:

Security panels shall be ¼” thick tempered hardboard attached to back of

front intermediate rails and fastened into security clips or rails at rear of
cabinet. Security panels provided only when locks are keyed differently
between drawers or drawers and cupboards.

7. Hinged Paneled Doors:

Doors shall be 13/16” thick of 5-ply construction having solid core with
hardwood framing minimum 1-3/4” wide, hardwood crossbands and
vertical veneered oak faces. Paired cabinet doors to have matched grain
pattern. Doors provided with two (2) hinges, one (1) pull and one (1)
catch as described under Hardware.

8. Toe Spaces:

WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553.19

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

Base Cabinets to have recessed toe space 4” high x 2-1/2” deep. Toe
board made of ¾” thick water resistant hardwood. End edges machined
for and provided with three (3) dowels for glued insertion into cabinet end
panels. Toe boards further secured to underside of bottom with glue
block(s) for rigidity.

C. Wall Cases, Counter Mounted Cases, and Tall Storage Cases:

1. End Panels, Partitions, Bottoms and Shelves:

Exposed end panels, partitions, bottoms and shelves to be red oak veneer
core plywood. Unexposed components to be birch or maple veneer core
plywood providing light cabinet interiors behind closed doors. Exposed
edges of end panels, partitions and bottoms to be banded in red oak.
Edges of shelves behind solid doors to be red oak wood or red oak PVC
depending on finish. End panels machined to receive doweled bottoms,
tops and toe boards. Dowels to be spaced on maximum 96mm centers.
End panels bored to receive adjustable shelf clips on 1-1/4” (36 mm)
centers.

End panels, partitions and bottoms of tall cases to be ¾” thick.

Tops, of wall cases, counter mounted cases and tall cases to be 1” thick.
Bottoms of wall cases and counter mounted cases to be 1” thick. All
exposed front edges to be hardwood edge banded.

Wall and counter mounted cases to be provided with ¾” thick veneer core
plywood shelves. Shelves for tall case to be 1” thick veneer core
plywood. Exposed front edge of shelves to be banded. All shelves to be
full depth and adjustable except for center shelf provided in tall cases
which shall be fixed.

2. Backs:

Unexposed interior backs shall be ¼” tempered hardboard grooved into

tops, ends and bottoms. Exposed interior backs shall be ¼” veneer core
red oak plywood attached to tops, ends and bottoms. Backs are further
supplied and secured with ¾” x 3” wide batten strips behind back of backs
for reinforcement and through which hardware shall be attached for
securement to walls. Exposed exterior back shall be ¾” thick veneer core
red oak plywood having red oak edge bands.

3. Toe Boards:

4” high toe boards provided at base of tall storage cases shall be ¾” thick
water resistant hardwood. End edges to each machined for and provided

WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553.19

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

with 3 dowels for insertion into case ends. Toe boards set flush with face
of ends and further secured to underside of bottom with glue block(s) for
rigidity.

4. Hinged Panel Doors:

Doors up to 48” high shall be 13/16” thick. Doors over 48” high shall be a
minimum 1” thick. Door shall be of 5-ply construction same as described
for base cabinets and provided with similar hardware except doors over
36” high to have 1-1/2 pair of hinges and 2 catches.

Tall case doors to be provided with latching handles securing doors to

cabinet walls or behind left hand doors and to case tops and bottoms.

5. Hinged Glassed Doors:

Doors up to 48” high shall be 13/16” thick and over 48” high shall be a
minimum 1” thick. Door shall be made of 3” wide solid red oak (plywood
not acceptable) rails having mitered mortis and tenon corner glued and
reinforced with pins.

Doors provide with hardware same as described for panel doors.

Glass shall be set with wood molding.

6. Sliding Panel and Sliding Glazed Doors:

Similar in construction to hinged door descriptions. Each door face

machined to receive recessed plated steel fingertip pull. Door top and
bottom edges machined for hardware to allow doors to operate on non-
ferrous metal tracks. Doors up to 30” high shall be furnished with and
operate on self-lubricating plastic slides. Doors over 30” high shall be
furnished with and operate on ball bearing sheaves.

D. Apron and Table Frame Construction:

1. Apron and table frames made of hardwood. Exposed rails minimum ¾”

thick x 4-3/4” high red oak grooved for acceptance of cross rails and
corner blocks.

2. Reinforcing cross rails made of hardwood, grooved, glued and screwed

into front and back rails.

3. Apron and table rail corner blocks, for attachment of legs shall be 13
gauge formed plated steel grooved and screwed into aprons.

WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553.19

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

4. Legs, solid oak, minimum 2-1/4” square and furnished with 4-1/2” long
uniquely designed bolt which passes through leg having exposed head
conforming to leg edge rounding and treaded end furnished with washer
and nut for secure attachment behind corner block. Depending upon table
requirements, legs are provided with leg shoes or adjustable glides, as
described under Hardware.

5. Leg stretchers, where required, to be not less than 1” x 2-3/4” mortised

and tenoned into legs and secured with bolts. Cross stretchers shall be of
similar construction, tenoned into stretchers and secured with bolts.

6. Book compartment bottoms furnished in 22 gauge black powder coated

formed steel, tempered hardboard, birch or maple plywood depending on
style of unit in which compartment occurs.

7. Panel legs, for attachment of aprons, to be 1-1/4” thick constructed of

hardwood plywood having top and bottom concealed solid hardwood
bands. Exposed edges faced with solid oak bands.

E. Cabinet Finish:

1. After assembly of cabinets but prior to the application of wood stain and
sealing cabinet and case parts to be sanded smooth and loose fibers and
dust removed.

2. Exposed cabinet and case parts and backs of doors then receive an
application of stain. Excess stain to be removed by wiping with wood
wool and/or cloth, and parts allowed to thoroughly dry. Unexposed
interiors behind solid doors and drawers left natural providing light
interiors for ease of viewing.

3. After drying, exposed parts, cabinet and case interiors, shelves, drawers
and doors to receive a double coat of clear resinous wood sealer.
Exposed cabinet parts, drawers, doors, and cupboard and case interiors
then receive a double coat of clear, chemical resistant synthetic varnish.
Between all applications of sealer and varnish, cabinet parts to be lightly
sanded and wiped. The resulting exterior finish shall be semi-gloss and
provide an acid, alkali, solvent, water and abrasive-resistant surface.

4. Applied finish to meet Finish Test Requirements of SEFA 8.

2.02 COUNTERTOPS:

1. General:

A. Countertops constructed per specification covering particular type.

WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553.19

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

B. Tops having sinks provided with drip grooves cut into underside of exposed
edges.
C. Adhesives or fasteners to be provided for securing of tops to cabinet work.
Such materials to allow for contraction or expansion of tops where
necessary.
D. Tops shall be 1” thick unless otherwise specified and provided with 4” high
curbs where tops abut walls, columns, case ends, etc.
2. Types:

A. Phenolic Resin is fabricated from composite panels comprised of multiple

layers of selected papers impregnated with special phenolic resins,
manufactured under heat and pressure to form a solid black chemical
resistant composite throughout the entire thickness of the panel. Tops
shall be furnished black in color having black exposed edges honed
smooth and exposed corners and edges chamfered back approximately
1/8”. Tops shall have a non-glaring surface.

B. Epoxy Resin is fabricated from a molded modified epoxy resin that has
been especially compounded and cured to provide optimum physical and
chemical resistance. Tops have a uniform mixture throughout, and do not
depend on a surface coating that can be readily removed by chemical or
physical abuse. Tops are non-glaring and black in color. All exposed
edges shall be chamfered back approximately 1/8". All curbs and
backsplashes to be 4” high-applied.

2.03 SINKS:

1. Epoxy resin sinks are cast of black modified epoxy resin having high resistance to
chemicals, heat and shock as normally encountered in laboratories. Castings are
done in permanent molds producing sinks with all inside corners coved and
bottoms dished. Sinks to be drop-in style.
Epoxy resin sinks provided with 1-1/2” epoxy resin outlets.
Tail pieces, traps and drain lines to be furnished by Others unless otherwise noted
on details or in equipment schedule.

2. Sinks shall be installed by Casework Contractor.

Outlets to be installed by Others.

2.04 PLUMBING FIXTURES:

1. Plumbing fixtures furnished in laboratory grade chrome plated brass as

manufactured by Water Saver Faucet Company.
Fixtures provided with brass tank nipples complete with locknuts and washers for
attachment to countertops.
Water fixtures provided with inline vacuum breakers unless otherwise indicated.
Fixtures supplied assembled (tank nipples loose).

WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553.19

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

2. Safety shower and eyewash units shall be furnished in make and model numbers
listed on the drawings or outlined in equipment schedule as manufactured by
Water Saver Faucet Co.

3. Pedestal electric boxes, cast aluminum finished in black textured coating

furnished with tank nipples and locknuts for attachment to countertops.
Electrical boxes mounted in table or cabinet aprons shall be steel.
Electric receptacles, switches, etc., shall be specification grade 20 amp and UL
approved. Receptacles located within 6’0” of sinks to be G.F.I. type.
Cover plates for receptacles shall be stainless steel.
Mounting of electric boxes in table aprons or cabinet units to be by Casework
Manufacturer.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.00 EXECUTION

1. For approval by owner or architect, within 30 days after receipt of order submit
shop details showing floor plans, rough-ins and elevations of casework and
equipment being supplied. Floor plans with rough-in details to be in 3/16” scale.
Elevation drawings to be in 3/8” scale.

2. Prior to fabrication of casework field check project site to assure proper fit of
materials being provided. Adjust drawings as necessary to insure proper fit of all
casework and equipment to building conditions.

3. Deliver casework only after wet operations are complete and building is closed in,
dry and has proper climate control for installation of casework.
(Area in which laboratory casework is installed to be maintained between 65 and
75 degrees F. with relative humidity maintained between 45% - 55%.)
If these conditions are not met and maintained, product warranty is void.

4. Install casework in accordance to manufacturers recommended practice by

qualified casework installer having a minimum of 3 years’ experience in the
installation of institutional casework.

5. Adjust casework and hardware so that doors and drawers operate smoothly.
Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.

6. Advise owner or contractor on procedures and precautions to be taken to protect

casework and other materials installed from damage by work performed by other
trades.

7. During installation keep job site clean and remove debris on a daily basis. Floors
are to be broom cleaned upon completion.

WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553.19

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 123623.13 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes plastic-laminate countertops.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products and high-pressure decorative
laminate.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.

C. Samples:

1. Plastic laminates, for each color, pattern, and surface finish.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: 5 years documented experience in the successful fabrication of

plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets for commercial building projects.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products or installer approved by manufacturer.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of plastic-laminate-clad countertop systems that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 123623.13 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" for grades indicated for construction, installation, and other requirements.

B. Grade: Custom.

C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on

drawings.
a. Approved Manufacturers:
1) Wilsonart
2) Arborite
3) Formica

D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, within Collection/Series of color

indicated on drawings.

E. Core Material at Sinks: exterior-grade plywood.

F. Core Thickness: 3/4 inch.

1. Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches at front, back, and ends with additional
layers of core material laminated to top.

G. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL, on underside
of countertop substrate.

2.2 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality
standard unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.

B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of
referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless
otherwise indicated.

1. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.

PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 123623.13 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch OD, molded-plastic grommets and
matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. Color to be selected.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "OG or SG series" by Doug

Mockett & Company, Inc, as selected by Architect.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde and/or water-based adhesives.

B. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Sealants: Use products that comply with the
following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24):

1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.

2. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
3. Structural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L.
4. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Provide front and end
overhang of 1 inch over base cabinets. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:

1. Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to

Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where
necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

C. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive appliances, plumbing fixtures,
electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in
diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove
splinters and burrs.

1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition countertops to average prevailing humidity conditions in

installation areas.

PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 123623.13 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed.

B. Assemble countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not
completed in the shop.

1. Provide cutouts for appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items.
2. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish.

C. Field Jointing: Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge
surfaces is not required.

1. Secure field joints in plastic-laminate countertops with concealed clamping devices

located within 6 inches of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches.
Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to exert a constant, heavy-
clamping pressure at joints.

D. Install countertops level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

E. Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish
at cuts.

F. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other
supports into underside of countertop.

1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation
from a straight line.
2. Secure backsplashes [to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls
with adhesive.
3. Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or
another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material
manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 123623.13

PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 123623.13 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

SECTION 123661 - SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Solid-surface-material countertops and backsplashes.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For countertop materials.

B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles,
methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

C. Samples: For each type of material exposed to view.

1.3 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of simulated stone countertop systems that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace simulated stone materials that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS

A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:

1. Front: 3/4-inch.
2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner.
3. Endsplash: Matching backsplash.

B. Countertops: 3/4-inch thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material.

SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 123661 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION MARCH 2024

C. Backsplashes: 3/4-inch thick, solid surface material.

2.2 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS

A. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.

B. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch
sanded.

C. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with
ANSI SS1.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated by

the drawings or comparable products by one of the following:

a. Avonite Surfaces.
b. Dupont Co.
c. Formica Corporation.
d. Wilsonart International.

2. Type: Provide Standard Type or Veneer Type made from material complying with
requirements for Standard Type, as indicated unless Special Purpose Type is indicated.
3. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of
countertop. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form
seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth,
remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

END OF SECTION 123661

SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 123661 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 211300 - FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following fire-suppression piping inside the building:

1. Wet-pipe sprinkler systems.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Wet Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping and that is connected to
water supply. Water discharges from sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat
melts fusible link or destroys frangible device.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-suppression, wet-pipe sprinkler systems design shall be approved by authorities having

jurisdiction.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Piping materials, including sprinkler specialty fittings.

2. Pipe hangers and supports.
3. Valves, including listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, and specialty
valves and trim.
4. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics, mounting, finish,
and other pertinent data.
5. Alarm devices, including electrical data.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Fire-hydrant flow test report.

D. Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13 and others as
applicable, including hydraulic design calculations, shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for

FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 211300 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

review and comments. The corrected drawings shall then be submitted to the State Fire Marshall
and Property Insurance Association for approval as applicable. Submit five copies of all drawings,
stamped as approved by these agencies, to the Architect.

E. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test
Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for
Underground Piping."

F. Welding certificates.

G. Field quality-control test reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing fire-suppression

systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering
responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.

B. NFPA Standards: Fire-suppression-system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and

testing shall comply with the following:

1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems".

2. Property Insurance Association
3. City of Winnsboro Fire Prevention Bureau

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings,
including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounting, steel cabinet with hinged cover, with space for
minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers required
by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for
each type of sprinkler on Project.

FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 211300 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM PIPING AND FITTINGS

A. Piping shall be standard weight wrought steel pipe, Schedule 40 (minimum). Fitting shall be cast
iron. Pipe and fittings shall be UL listed for use in sprinkler work.

2.2 PIPING SYSTEM VALVES

A. Valves shall be approved for fire protection piping systems and shall be installed as required by
NFPA.

2.3 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER HEADS

A. Shall be upright, concealed sidewall or concealed pendent, as specified or noted, of the proper
temperature rating, and installed throughout the areas as required by the insurance authority.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system design
calculations required in Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Report test results promptly and in writing.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable thicknesses, fire-rated construction and other conditions
where hose connections are to be installed.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS, GENERAL

A. Flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings with finish and pressure
ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground applications,
unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Drawings shall indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:

FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 211300 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1. Listed Fire-Protection Valves: UL listed and FMG approved for applications where required
by NFPA 13.

a. Shutoff Duty: Use ball, butterfly, or gate valves.

2. Unlisted General-Duty Valves: For applications where UL-listed and FMG-approved valves
are not required by NFPA 13.

a. Shutoff Duty: Use ball, butterfly, or gate valves.

b. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves.

3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.

B. Threaded Joints: Comply with NFPA 13 for pipe thickness and threads.

C. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with listed coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts.

1. Steel Pipe: Square-cut or roll-groove piping as indicated. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid,
grooved-end-pipe couplings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Dissimilar-Metal Piping Joints: Construct joints using dielectric fittings compatible with both
piping materials.
3. NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions, couplings, or nipples.
4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.
5. NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange insulation kits.

3.6 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.

B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location
and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical. Coordinate with other
trades.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities
having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved
working plans.

C. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in
pipe sizes.

D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller. Unions are not required on flanged
devices or in piping installations using grooved joints.

FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 211300 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

E. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger
connections.

F. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, sized
and located according to NFPA 13. Coordinate exact location with Owner and Architect to avoid
installation in publicly visible location. Indicate in shop drawing submittal.

G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

H. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves. Drain
to floor drain or outside building.

I. Install alarm devices in piping systems.

J. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials.

1. Install sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13.

K. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection. Include pressure gages
with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining
pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they will not be
subject to freezing.

L. Fill wet-pipe sprinkler system piping with water.

3.7 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, specialty valves and trim, controls,
and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.

3.8 SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS

A. Drawings shall indicate sprinkler types to be used. Where specific types are not indicated, use the
following sprinkler types:

1. Rooms without ceilings: Upright sprinklers.

2. Rooms with suspended and rigid ceilings: Concealed pendent sprinklers.
3. Wall mounting: Sidewall concealed pendent sprinklers.
4. Sprinkler finishes:

a. Upright, concealed pendent and sidewall sprinklers: White-baked enamel, with white-
baked enamel escutcheon and cover plate (as applicable) in finished spaces exposed to
view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view.

FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 211300 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3.9 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling panels
and tiles.

B. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing. Use dry-type
sprinklers with water supply from heated space.

3.10 FREEZE PROTECTION

A. The contractor shall be responsible for freeze protection of piping and sprinkler heads in unheated
areas.

3.11 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to specialty valves, hose valves, specialties, fire department connections and
accessories.

D. Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 26.

E. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm as applicable.

F. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

G. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables."

H. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening

values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and
UL 486B.

3.12 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13.

3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until
no leaks exist.

FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 211300 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
4. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"
Chapter.
5. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.

B. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.

3.14 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.

C. Protect sprinklers from damage until substantial completion.

3.15 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a service representative to train owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and
maintain fire sprinkler system.

3.16 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,

operate, and maintain specialty valves.

END OF SECTION 211300

FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 211300 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 220523 – VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general-duty valves.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve
design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and
required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities;
shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. ASME Compliance: ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

B. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and
design criteria.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.
4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If outdoor
storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

VALVES 220523 - 1
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VALVES, GENERAL

A. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Ferrous Valves: NPS 2-1/2 and larger with flanged ends, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.

D. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Valve Actuators:

1. Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller, except plug valves.
2. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 10
plug valves, for each size square plug head.

F. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves.

G. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and
ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.

H. Valve Grooved Ends: AWWA C606.

I. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.

C. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully-closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.

D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

VALVES 220523 - 2
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is
suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated, use
the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, gate, or plug valves.

2. Throttling Service: Angle, ball, butterfly or globe valves.
3. Pump Discharge: Swing check valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves
with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted.

3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. End chains to 60 inches above finished floor
elevation.

F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

2. Dual-Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.

B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts
according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

VALVES 220523 - 3
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy
solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

END OF SECTION 220523

VALVES 220523 - 4
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 220700 - PIPE INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements; field-
applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 23 Section "Duct Insulation" for insulation for ducts and plenums.
2. Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe insulation shields and protection
saddles.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field
applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates
of tests.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those

specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and
sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

rating of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
rating of 150 or less.

PIPE INSULATION 220700 -1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping installer for insulation application.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems. Insulation application may begin
on segments of piping that have satisfactory test results.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:

a. CertainTeed Manson.
b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
d. Schuller International, Inc.

2. Cellular-Glass Insulation:

a. Pittsburgh-Corning Corp.

3. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

b. Rubatex Corp.

4. Closed-Cell Phenolic-Foam Insulation:

a. Kooltherm Insulation Products, Ltd.

PIPE INSULATION 220700 -2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with the
following:

1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory-applied, all-
purpose, vapor-retarder jacket.
2. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing.
3. Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and
grades:

a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-fiber insulation,
for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging cloth to unfaced
glass-fiber insulation.
b. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass-fiber insulation to metal surfaces.

4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for indoor

applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
5. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195.
6. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 196.
7. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with
ASTM C 449/C 449M.

B. Cellular-Glass Insulation: Inorganic, foamed or cellulated glass, annealed, rigid, hermetically

sealed cells, incombustible.

1. Preformed Pipe Insulation, without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1.
2. Preformed Pipe Insulation, with Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2.

C. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials.

Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.

1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.

D. Closed-Cell Phenolic-Foam Insulation: Preformed pipe insulation of rigid, expanded, closed-

cell structure. Comply with ASTM C 1126, Type III, Grade 1.

E. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions
used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.

2.3 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and
aluminum foil.

C. PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils thick; roll stock ready for shop or
field cutting and forming.

PIPE INSULATION 220700 -3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

2. PVC Jacket Color: White or gray.
3. PVC Jacket Color: Color-code piping jackets based on materials contained within the
piping system.

D. Standard PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20-mil-
thick, high-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC.

1. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, reducers,
end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for
lavatories for the disabled.
2. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

E. Aluminum Jacket: Factory cut and rolled to indicated sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209, 3003
alloy, H-14 temper.

2.4 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS

A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape.
Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, pre-sized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..

1. Tape Width: 4 inches.

B. Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick.

2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick.
3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick.
4. Brass: 0.010 inch thick.
5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch thick.

C. Wire: 0.080-inch, nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-inch,

soft-annealed, galvanized steel.

2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

PIPE INSULATION 220700 -4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of
piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each piping system.

C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.

D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.

E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.

H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

I. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

J. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.

K. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-
retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying
insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties.

L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic.

1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation on
anchor legs at least 12 inches from point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation ends.
Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the insulation
material manufacturer.

PIPE INSULATION 220700 -5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger, support, and
shield.

M. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, taper
insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.

N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.

O. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.

2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
strip and spaced 4 inches o.c.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Apply insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.

a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor retarder.

4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and
joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.
5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids with
vapor-retarder mastic.

P. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls, terminate insulation
flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor-retarder mastic.

Q. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
floors.

R. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through penetrations
of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Fire-stopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section "Fire-
stopping."

S. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.

1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retarder mastic where floor
supports penetrate vapor retarder.

3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without
deforming insulation materials.

PIPE INSULATION 220700 -6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor-
retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of 15 to 20 feet to
form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation segments.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6
inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple longitudinal
tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.

B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:

1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlapping
seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.

C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:

1. Apply pre-molded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When pre-molded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered sections
of pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe
insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.
3. Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers.
4. Cover fittings with heavy PVC fitting covers. Overlap PVC covers on pipe insulation
jackets at least 1 inch at each end. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments
and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.

D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:

1. Apply pre-molded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When pre-molded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber blanket
insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow
valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for
access to strainer basket without disturbing insulation.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure
fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and
vapor-retarder mastic.
5. Use preformed heavy PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting
covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-
retarder mastic.
6. For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation with canvas
jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

PIPE INSULATION 220700 -7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3.5 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:

1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without deforming
insulation materials.
2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor-
retarder mastic.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6
inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple longitudinal
tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.

B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:

1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of the
same thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlapping
seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.

C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:

1. Apply pre-molded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When pre-molded sections of insulation are not available, apply mitered sections of
cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.
3. Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers.
4. Cover fittings with heavy PVC fitting covers. Overlap PVC covers on pipe insulation
jackets at least 1 inch at each end. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments
and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.

D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:

1. Apply pre-molded segments of cellular-glass insulation or glass-fiber blanket insulation

to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve
operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access
to strainer basket without disturbing insulation.
2. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3. Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure
fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and
vapor-retarder mastic.
4. Use preformed heavy PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting
covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-
retarder mastic.
5. For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation with canvas
jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

PIPE INSULATION 220700 -8

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3.6 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:

1. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation.

2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.

B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:

1. Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of the same thickness
as pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.

C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:

1. Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation.

2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.

D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:

1. Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe insulation and
attached according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Apply cut segments of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to
permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For
check valves, fabricate removable sections of insulation arranged to allow access to
strainer basket.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage
of air to the pipe surface.

3.7 CLOSED-CELL PHENOLIC-FOAM INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:

1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without deforming
insulation materials.
2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor-
retarder mastic.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6
inches o.c.

PIPE INSULATION 220700 -9

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple longitudinal
tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.

B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:

1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of the same material
and thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlapping
seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.

C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:

1. Apply pre-molded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When pre-molded sections of insulation are not available, apply mitered sections of
phenolic-foam insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.
3. Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers.
4. Cover fittings with heavy PVC fitting covers. Overlap PVC covers on pipe insulation
jackets at least 1 inch at each end. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments
and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.

D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:

1. Apply pre-molded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When pre-molded sections of insulation are not available, apply mitered segments of
phenolic-foam insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing
and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange
insulation for access to strainer basket without disturbing insulation.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure
fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and
vapor-retarder mastic.
5. Use preformed heavy PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting
covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-
retarder mastic.
6. For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation with canvas
jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

3.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION

A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with
factory-applied jackets.

1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.

PIPE INSULATION 220700 -10

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of jacket manufacturer's
recommended adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.

B. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2. Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Apply jackets with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at
end joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation
with vapor-retarder mastic.

C. Apply PVC jacket where indicated, with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints.
Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

D. Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints.
Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant
recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches
o.c. and at end joints.

3.9 FINISHES

A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as specified in
Division 9 Section "Painting."

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of the
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.

3.10 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following
systems, materials, and equipment:

1. Flexible connectors.
2. Vibration-control devices.
3. Fire-suppression piping.
4. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.
7. Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.

PIPE INSULATION 220700 -11

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation
materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:

1. Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by Architect.

2. Remove fitting covers from 20 elbows or 1 percent of elbows, whichever is less, for
various pipe sizes.
3. Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves, whichever is less, for
various pipe sizes.

B. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals noncompliance

with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials according to these
Specifications.

C. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection according to
these Specifications.

3.12 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor retarders, and
field-applied jackets.

B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material,
thickness, and jacket requirements.

3.13 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Service: Domestic hot water.

1. Operating Temperature: 60 to 140 deg F.

2. Insulation Material: Fiberglass, with jacket.
3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

a. Copper Pipe: 1” thick

4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper.

5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
6. Finish: Painted.

B. Service: Condensate drain piping.

1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F.

2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric.
3. Insulation Thickness: ½”
4. Field-Applied Jacket: None.
5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
6. Finish: None.

PIPE INSULATION 220700 -12

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

C. Service: Exposed sanitary drains and domestic water supplies and stops for fixtures for the
disabled.

1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 120 deg F.

2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric.
3. Insulation Thickness: ¾”
4. Field-Applied Jacket: PVC P-trap and supply covers.
5. Vapor Retarder Required: No.
6. Finish: None.

D. Service: Refrigerant suction and hot-gas piping.

1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 50 deg F.

2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric.
3. Insulation Thickness: 0.75 inch.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: None, interior; exterior as noted.
5. Vapor Retarder Required: No.
6. Finish: No.

E. Service: Domestic cold water.

1. Operating temperature: 45 to 80 deg F.

2. Insulation material: Mineral fiber.
3. Insulation thickness: 0.5 inch.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: ASJ.
5. Vapor retarder required: Yes.
6. Finish: None.

F. Service: Waste from floor and hub drains: Same as domestic cold water.

3.14 EXTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION

A. All insulation outside, exposed to weather shall be covered with aluminum metal jacket. At
joints, fittings, etc. only, a white elastomeric coating may be used.

END OF SECTION 220700

PIPE INSULATION 220700 -13

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 221100 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes domestic water piping from locations indicated to fixtures and equipment
inside the building.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide components and installation capable of producing domestic water piping systems with the
following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Domestic Water Service Piping: 160 psig.

2. Domestic Water Distribution Piping: 125 psig.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Required where indicated only. Submittal of pipe and fittings not required unless a
change from specification is proposed.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances," and
NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9," for combined
fire-protection and domestic water service piping to building.

C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic, potable
domestic water piping and components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on piping.

D. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9,"
for potable domestic water piping and components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221100 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

B. Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or other manufactured fitting the
same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

C. Transition Couplings for Underground Pressure Piping: AWWA C219, metal, sleeve-type coupling
or other manufactured fitting the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends
compatible with, piping to be joined.

2.2 DUCTILE-IRON PIPING

A. Piping for fire-suppression applications shall be listed for fire-protection service.

B. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint, bell- and plain-spigot
end, unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron, standard

pattern; or AWWA C153, ductile-iron, compact pattern.

a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber
gaskets, and steel bolts.

2. Ductile-Iron Piping, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM A 47, malleable-iron castings or

ASTM A 536 ductile-iron castings with dimensions matching pipe.

a. Ductile-Iron-Piping, Keyed Couplings: AWWA C606 for ductile-iron-pipe

dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts and
nuts.

C. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint, bell- and plain-spigot end,
unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

1. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron, standard pattern;

or AWWA C153, ductile-iron, compact pattern.

a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

2. Ductile-Iron, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM A 47, malleable-iron castings or ASTM A 536

ductile-iron castings with dimensions matching pipe.

a. Ductile-Iron-Piping, Keyed Couplings: AWWA C606, for ductile-iron-pipe

dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts and
nuts.

3. Ductile-Iron, Flexible Expansion Joints: Compound, ductile-iron fitting with combination of

flanged and mechanical-joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include
two gasketed, ball-joint sections and one or more gasketed, sleeve section. Assemble
components for offset and expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111 ductile-iron glands,
rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
4. Ductile-Iron, Deflection Fittings: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and
flexing sections for up to 20-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends complying
with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111 ductile-iron glands, rubber
gaskets, and steel bolts.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221100 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

5. Ductile-Iron, Expansion Joints: Three-piece, ductile-iron assembly consisting of telescoping

sleeve with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections complying
with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for expansion
indicated. Include AWWA C111 ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

2.3 COPPER TUBING

A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L, water tube, annealed temper.

1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22,

wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges
if required to match piping.
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with
ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.

B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L, water tube, drawn temper.

1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-

copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges
if required to match piping.
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with
ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.
4. Copper, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75 copper tube or ASTM B 584 bronze castings.

a. Copper-Tubing, Keyed Couplings: Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to

AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for hot water, and
bolts and nuts.

2.4 PE ENCASEMENT

A. PE Encasement for Underground Metal Piping: ASTM A674 or AWWA C105 PE film, 0.008-inch
minimum thickness, tube or sheet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in
applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Grooved joints may be used on aboveground grooved-end piping.

D. Fitting Option: Mechanically formed tee-branch outlets and brazed joints may be used on
aboveground copper tubing.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221100 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

E. Underground Domestic Water Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size
range:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Soft copper tube, Type L; Pipe joints to be avoided and permitted
only to the extent of run lengths exceeding that of a single roll length of tubing. Should
joints be required use wrought copper pressure fittings and silver-fos soldered joints. Under
the building slab or any other concrete flatwork.

F. Aboveground Domestic Water Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range:

1. Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Submittal required. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not
indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast-iron
butterfly or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
2. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Cast-iron, grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.

B. Extend domestic water service piping to exterior water distribution piping in sizes and locations
indicated.

C. Install underground ductile-iron piping according to AWWA C600, AWWA M41, and NFPA 24.
Install buried piping inside building between wall and floor penetrations and connection to water
service piping outside building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or floor. Install
thrust-block supports at vertical and horizontal offsets.

1. Encase piping with polyethylene film according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

D. Install underground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

E. Install underground AWWA PVC piping according to NFPA 24, AWWA M23, and ASTM F 645.
Install buried piping inside building between wall and floor penetrations and connection to water
service piping outside building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or floor. Install
thrust-block supports at vertical and horizontal offsets.

F. Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 645. Install buried
piping inside building between wall and floor penetrations and connection to water service piping
outside building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or floor. Install thrust-block supports at
vertical and horizontal offsets.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221100 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

G. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration
through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation
watertight. Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for sleeves
and mechanical sleeve seals.

H. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make
installation watertight. Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for
wall penetration systems.

I. Install aboveground domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain
and plumb.

J. Fill water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full
of water.

K. Perform the following steps before operation:

1. Close drain valves and hydrants.

2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of piping
during installation.
5. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
6. Remove filter cartridges from housings, and verify that cartridges are as specified for
application where used and that cartridges are clean and ready for use.

L. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do not operate
water heaters before filling with water.

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.

B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy
solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed-coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts
according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Mechanically Formed Outlets: Form tee in copper tube according to equipment manufacturer's
written instructions. Use tool designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet,
dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar.

3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sectional valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or
equipment. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for
piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221100 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

B. Install shutoff valve on each water supply to equipment and on each water supply to plumbing
fixtures without supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly
or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

C. Install drain valves for equipment, at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping,
and where required to drain water piping.

1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices.

B. Install supports according to Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports."

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod
diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 and smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2-1/2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

F. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and connect to the
following:

1. Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."
3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment
connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of
unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221100 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Re-inspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or
inspection, make required corrections and arrange for re-inspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Test domestic water piping as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each
test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it
was tested.
3. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without
exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand
for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable and non-potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if
methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652
or as described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of
chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 8 hours.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221100 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after the standing time.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

END OF SECTION 221100

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221100 - 8

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 221119 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following plumbing specialties:

1. Roof flashing assemblies.

2. Key-operation hydrants.
3. Miscellaneous piping specialties.
4. Cleanouts.
5. Floor drains.
6. Through-penetration fire-stop assemblies.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following
minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Domestic Water Piping: 125 psig.

2. Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities and shipping, installed, and operating weights.
Indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of
components; and piping and wiring connections for the following:

1. Water hammer arresters and air vents.

2. Drain valves and hydrants.
3. Cleanouts and floor drains.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Field test reports.

D. Maintenance Data: For plumbing specialties to include in maintenance manuals. Include the
following:

1. Hydrants.

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 221119- 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

plumbing specialties and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1
Section "Product Requirements."

B. Plumbing specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.

D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for piping
materials and installation.

E. NSF Compliance:

1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for
plastic domestic water piping components. Include marking "NSF-PW" on plastic
potable-water piping and "NSF-DWV" on plastic drain, waste, and vent piping.
2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,
Sections 1 through 9," for potable domestic water plumbing specialties.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES

A. Roof Flashing Assemblies:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:

Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div.

Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.

B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch- thick, lead flashing
collar and skirt extending at least 6 inches from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot
reinforcement and counterflashing fitting.

1. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap.

2. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap.
3. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.

2.2 KEY-OPERATION HYDRANTS

A. General: As scheduled, ASME A112.21.3M, key-operation hydrant with pressure rating of

125 psig.

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 221119- 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

B. Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1 threaded or solder joint.

C. Outlet: ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads.

D. Operating Keys: One with each key-operation hydrant.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, piston type with pressurized
metal-tube cushioning chamber. Sizes indicated are based on ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A
through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

B. Open Drains: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot,
cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where required,
increaser fitting, joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.

C. Deep-Seal Traps: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected
piping and cleanout trap seal primer valve connection.

1. NPS 2: 4-inch- minimum water seal.

2. NPS 2-1/2 and larger: 5-inch- minimum water seal.

D. Floor-Drain Inlet Fittings: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and
trap seal primer valve connection.

E. Fixed Air-Gap Fittings: Manufactured cast-iron or bronze drainage fitting with semi-open
top with threads or device to secure drainage inlet piping in top and bottom spigot or
threaded outlet larger than top inlet. Include design complying with ASME A112.1.2 that
will provide fixed air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping.

F. Expansion Joints: ASME A112.21.2M, assembly with cast-iron body with bronze sleeve,
packing gland, and packing; of size and end types corresponding to connected piping.

2.4 CLEANOUTS

A. Cleanouts.

1. Application: Floor cleanout, Wall cleanout; for installation in exposed piping, and
exterior cleanout.
2. Products:

a. Floor Cleanout in finished areas: Tyler Pipe, Wade Div.; #W-7000 w/ satin
nickel bronze top.
b. Floor Cleanout in tile floors: Tyler Pipe, Wade Div.; #W-7000-T.
c. Floor Cleanout in terrazzo floors: Tyler Pipe, Wade Div.; #W-7000-U.
d. Floor Cleanout in unfinished utility or storage areas: Tyler Pipe, Wade Div.;
#W-8550-D.
e. Wall Cleanout: Tyler Pipe, Wade Div.; #W-8450-R w/ stainless steel cover
plate.
f. Cleanout in exposed piping: Tyler Pipe, Wade Div.; #W-8550-R.
g. Exterior Cleanout: Tyler Pipe, Wade Div.; #W-7040-X w/ nickel bronze
top.

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 221119- 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3. Cleanouts in waterproof floors shall have flashing flange and clamping device.
4. Cleanouts in carpeted areas shall be provided with carpet makers (Wade option No.
72).
5. Reference Section 224200 for additional alternate manufacturers.

2.5 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Floor Drains, Wade Div. #W-1100, shall be provided as indicated on drawings.

1. Body Material: Gray iron.

2. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.
3. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.
4. Top Shape: Round.
5. Trap Material: Cast iron.
6. Trap Pattern: Deep-seal P-trap.
7. Trap Features: Trap seal primer valve drain connection.
8. Reference Section 224200 for additional alternate manufacturers.

2.6 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES

A. Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:

a) ProSet Systems Inc.

2. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug.
3. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack.
4. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral
nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
5. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with
neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC
protective cap for plug.
6. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining
materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal
protruding pipe fittings.

C. Install expansion joints on vertical risers, stacks, and conductors if indicated.

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 221119- 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

D. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping
unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 75 feet.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

E. Install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor, for floor cleanouts for piping
below floors.

F. Install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with
finished wall, for cleanouts located in concealed piping.

G. Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through
floors with waterproof membrane.

H. Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing
according to manufacturer's written instructions.

I. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush
with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.

2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor
drainage.
3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
otherwise indicated.

J. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to building substrate

if supports are specified and to building wall construction if no support is indicated.

K. Fasten recessed-type plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls.

L. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting and recessed-type plumbing

specialties.

M. Install individual shutoff valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball, gate,
or globe valve if specific valve is not indicated. Install shutoff valves in accessible locations.
Refer to Division 22 Section "Valves" for general-duty ball, butterfly, check, gate, and globe
valves.

N. Install air vents at piping high points. Include ball, gate, or globe valve in inlet.

O. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
indicated.

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 221119- 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 and 23 Sections.

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect plumbing specialties to piping specified in other Division 22 and 23 Sections.

D. Ground equipment.

E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

F. Connect plumbing specialties and devices that require power according to Division 26
Sections.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

END OF SECTION 221119

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 221119- 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 221300 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes soil and waste, sanitary drainage and vent piping inside the building and to
locations indicated.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following
minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic
piping components. Include marking with "NSF-DWV" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping;
"NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and
"NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.

B. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Non-pressure Piping: ASTM C 1173 with
elastomeric sleeve. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and include
corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221300 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2.2 CAST-IRON SOIL PIPING

A. Hub-and-Spigot Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.

1. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

2.3 DUCTILE-IRON PIPING

A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot
end, unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard

pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber
gaskets, and steel bolts.

2. Ductile-Iron Piping, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM A 47, malleable-iron castings or

ASTM A 536, ductile-iron castings with dimensions matching pipe.

a. Ductile-Iron-Piping, Keyed Couplings: AWWA C606, for ductile-iron-pipe

dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts and
nuts.

B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end,
unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

1. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or

AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

2. Ductile-Iron, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM A 47, malleable-iron castings or ASTM A 536,

ductile-iron castings with dimensions matching pipe.

a. Ductile-Iron-Piping, Keyed Couplings: AWWA C606, for ductile-iron-pipe

dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts and
nuts.

3. Ductile-Iron, Flexible Expansion Joints: Compound, ductile-iron fitting with combination of

flanged and mechanical-joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include
two gasketed ball-joint sections and one or more gasketed sleeve sections. Assemble
components for offset and expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands,
rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
4. Ductile-Iron, Deflection Fittings: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and
flexing sections for up to 20-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends complying
with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber
gaskets, and steel bolts.
5. Ductile-Iron, Expansion Joints: Three-piece, ductile-iron assembly consisting of telescoping
sleeve with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections complying

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221300 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for expansion
indicated. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

2.4 COPPER TUBING

A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.

1. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper,
solder-joint fittings.

B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type M, water tube, drawn temper.

1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-

copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end.
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with
ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

2.5 PVC PIPING

A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, Schedule 40, solid-wall drain, waste and vent (DWV).

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D2665, socket type, made to ASTM D3311 DWV patterns.

2.6 PE ENCASEMENT

A. PE Encasement for Underground Metal Piping: ASTM A674 or AWWA C105, PE film,
0.008-inch minimum thickness, tube or sheet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may be
used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Aboveground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use any of the piping materials allowed in accordance
with governing Plumbing Code unless otherwise noted.

D. Underground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use any of the piping materials allowed in accordance
with governing Plumbing Code unless otherwise noted.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221300 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.

B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary
sewer. Install as indicated and as required by governing Plumbing Code.

C. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make
installation watertight. Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for
wall penetration systems.

D. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

E. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades
and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream.
Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants,
cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as
completed.

F. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise
indicated or dictated by local plumbing code:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and
smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.
2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

G. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is
without membrane waterproofing.

H. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities
having jurisdiction.

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.

B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

1. Gasketed Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings.

C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy
solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Grooved Joints: Assemble joint with keyed coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to
coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221300 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. Install
the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:

a. 100 feet and less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer than 100 feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer than 100 feet, if indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Install supports according to Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports."

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

E. Install hangers for soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod
diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
3. NPS 4: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.
4. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to 60
inches.

F. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod
diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

2. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required
by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221300 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but
not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Specialties."
4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and
union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and
larger.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be
made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe
tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Re-inspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for re-inspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or,
in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each
test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed
before it was tested.
3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside
leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water
to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before
inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for
leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled
with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack
openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping
system equal to pressure of 1-inch WG. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water
closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing
additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas
and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221300 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to
prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.9 PROTECTION

A. Exposed Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex
paint; color to match adjacent finish.

END OF SECTION 221300

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221300 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 223436 - ELECTRIC DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following electric water heaters:

1. Flow-control, instantaneous electric water heaters.

2. Light-commercial electric water heaters.
3. Compression tanks.
4. Water heater accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Field quality-control test reports.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric water heaters to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.

D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of electric water heaters through one source from a
single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of electric
water heaters and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Product Requirements."

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.

D. ASME Compliance: Where indicated, fabricate and label commercial water heater storage
tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

ELECTRIC DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223436 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

E. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9," for all components that will be in contact with potable water.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of electric water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.

b. Faulty operation of controls.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion:

a. Instantaneous Electric Water Heaters: One year.

b. Light-Commercial Electric Water Heaters:

1) Storage Tank: Three years.

2) Controls and Other Components: One year.

c. Compression Tanks: One year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.

2.2 INSTANTANEOUS ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

A. Flow-Control, Instantaneous Electric Water Heaters: Comply with UL 499 for tankless electric
(water heater) heating appliance.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Chronomite Laboratories, Inc.

b. Eemax, Inc.
c. Hot Aqua, Inc.
d. Stiebel Eltron, Inc.

ELECTRIC DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223436 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2. Construction: Copper piping or tubing complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for
potable water, without storage capacity.

a. Connections: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
c. Heating Element: Resistance heating system.
d. Temperature Control: Flow-control fitting.
e. Safety Control: High-temperature-limit cutoff device or system.
f. Jacket: Aluminum or steel with enameled finish or plastic.

3. Support: Bracket for wall mounting.

4. Capacity and Characteristics:

a. Temperature Control: Flow-control fitting.

2.3 LIGHT-COMMERCIAL ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

A. Description: Comply with UL 174 for household, storage electric water heaters.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Bradford White Corporation.
b. Lochinvar Corporation.
c. Smith, A. O. Water Products Company.
d. State Industries, Inc.

2. Storage-Tank Construction: Steel, vertical arrangement.

a. Tappings: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
c. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank
linings, including extending lining material into tappings.

3. Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances:

a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.

b. Dip Tube: Provide unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank.
c. Drain Valve: ASSE 1005.
d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 or ASHRAE 90.2.
e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.
f. Heat Trap Fittings: Inlet type in cold-water inlet and outlet type in hot-water
outlet.
g. Heating Elements: Two; electric, screw-in immersion type; wired for
simultaneous operation, unless otherwise indicated.
h. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat for each element.
i. Safety Control: High-temperature-limit cutoff device or system.
j. Relief Valve: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3 for
combination temperature and pressure relief valves. Include relieving capacity at
least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater
working-pressure rating. Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into
storage tank.

ELECTRIC DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223436 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

4. Special Requirements: NSF 5 construction with legs for off-floor installation.

2.4 COMPRESSION TANKS

A. Description: Steel pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-installed
butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating pressure at tank.

1. Manufacturers:

a. AMTROL Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
c. Flexcon Industries.
d. Honeywell Sparco.
e. Myers, F. E.; Pentair Pump Group (The).
f. Smith, A. O.; Aqua-Air Div.
g. State Industries, Inc.
h. Taco, Inc.
i. Watts Regulator Co.
j. Wessels Co.

2. Construction:

a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.

Include ASME B1.20.1, pipe thread.
b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank
linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.
c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.

2.5 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and
complying with ASME PTC 25.3. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and
include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valves with
sensing element that extends into storage tank.

B. Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3.
Include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating.

C. Water Heater Stand and Drain-Pan Units: High-density-polyethylene-plastic, 18-inch- high,

enclosed-base stand complying with IAPMO PS 103 and IAS No. 2. Include integral or
separate drain pan with raised edge and NPS 1 drain outlet with ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

D. Water Heater Stands: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel stand for floor
mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water. Include dimension that will
support bottom of water heater a minimum of 18 inches above the floor.

E. Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel bracket
for wall mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water.

ELECTRIC DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223436 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

F. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not less than base
of water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4.

G. Piping Manifold Kits: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated inlet and outlet piping
arrangement for multiple-unit installation. Include piping and valves for field assembly that are
capable of isolating each water heater and of providing balanced flow through each water
heater.

H. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 or ASHRAE 90.2.

I. Water Regulators: ASSE 1003, water-pressure reducing valve. Set at 25-psig- maximum outlet
pressure, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Shock Absorbers: ASSE 1010 or PDI WH 201, Size A water hammer arrester.

2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test and inspect water heater storage tanks, specified to be ASME-code construction, according
to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. Hydrostatically test water heater storage tanks before shipment to minimum of one and one-half
times pressure rating.

C. Prepare test reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Install commercial water heaters on concrete bases.

1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial water heaters if installation on stand,
bracket, suspended platform, or direct on floor is indicated.

B. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and
referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so
controls and devices needing service are accessible.

C. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use
relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial-water-heater
relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward
pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

D. Extend commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic water
piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

E. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or
over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters

ELECTRIC DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223436 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for hose-end
drain valves.

F. Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters.

G. Install pressure gage(s) on inlet and outlet of commercial electric water- heater piping.

H. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple water heaters. Fabricate,
modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each water heater. Include
shutoff valve, thermometer in each water heater inlet and outlet, and throttling valve in each
water heater outlet. Refer to Division 22 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves.

I. Install water regulator, with integral bypass relief valve, in booster-heater inlet piping and water
hammer arrester in booster-heater outlet piping.

J. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without
integral or fitting-type heat traps.

K. Fill water heaters with water.

L. Charge compression tanks with air.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for
easy removal of water heaters.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables."

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.

B. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified
above.

END OF SECTION 223436

ELECTRIC DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223436 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 224200 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and related components.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with
disabilities.

B. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this
Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste
pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are included where indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances,
equipment, and supports and indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and
flow-control rates for each type of fixture indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category
through one source from a single manufacturer.

1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single
manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that category.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article
100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

PLUMBING FIXTURES 224200 – 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336,
"Americans with Disabilities Act"; about plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in U.S. Architectural & Transportation

Barriers Compliance Board's "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS), 1985-494-187"
about plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act,"
about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

F. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for
fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

G. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate roughing-in and final plumbing fixture locations, and verify that fixtures can be installed
to comply with original design and referenced standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. For fixture descriptions refer to schedule on drawings.

2.2 ALTERNATE ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Water Closets, Urinals, Lavatories - American Standard, Kohler, Sloan, Toto.

B. Sinks – Advance Tabco, Elkay, Just, Moen.
C. Water Closet Seats – Bemis, Beneke, Church, Centoco, Toto.
D. Lavatory/Sink Accessories – Advance Tabco, Chicago, Dearborn, McGuire.
E. Undercounter Pipe Insulation Kits – Mainline, Plumberex, Truebro.
F. Flush Valves – American Standard, Delta Commercial, Moen, Sloan, Toto, Zurn.
G. Fixture Carriers – Mifab, Jay R Smith, Josam, Wade, Watts, Zurn.
H. Faucets/Trim - American Standard, Delta Commercial, Elkay, Kohler, Moen, Toto.
I. Electric Water Coolers – Elkay, Halsey-Taylor, Murdock, Oasis.
J. Service Sinks – Fiat, Florestone, Mustee, Stern Williams, Swan, Zurn.
K. Water Heaters - A.O. Smith, Bradford-White, Lochinvar, PVI, Rheem, State.
L. Hot Water Circulator Pumps – Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Grundfos, Taco.
M. Instantaneous Electric Water Heaters – Chronomite, Eemax, Hot Aqua, Stiebel Eltron.
N. Expansion Tanks – Amtrol, Mainline, Watts, Wessels.
O. Wall Faucets - Acorn, Jay R Smith, Josam, Mifab, Wade, Watts, Woodford, Zurn.
P. Floor Drains, Floor Sinks – Jay R Smith, Josam, Mifab, Sioux Chief, Wade, Watts, Zurn.
Q. Trap Primer Valves – Josam, Mifab, PPP, Sioux Chief, Zurn.

PLUMBING FIXTURES 224200 – 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

R. Mixing Valve Assemblies – Bradley, Leonard, Lawler, Powers, Symmons.

S. Emergency Plumbing Fixtures – Acorn, Bradley, Guardian.
T. Backflow Preventers – Ames, Beeco, Febco, Watts, Wilkins.
U. Water Hammer Arrestors - Josam, Mifab, Sioux Chief, Wade, Watts, Zurn.
V. Cleanouts - Josam, Mifab, Sioux Chief, Wade, Watts, Zurn.
W. Icemaker Outlet Box- Guy Gray, Oatey, Water-Tite.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water soil and for waste piping systems and supports to verify actual
locations and sizes of piping connections and that locations and types of supports match those
indicated, before plumbing fixture installation. Use manufacturer's roughing-in data where
roughing-in data are not indicated.

B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 FIXTURE INSTALLATION

A. Assemble fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written
instructions.

B. For wall-hanging fixtures, install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate.

1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.
2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.
3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.

C. Install back-outlet, wall-hanging fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.

D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building substrate.

E. Install wall-hanging fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.

F. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.

G. Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers' written instructions and roughing-in
drawings.

H. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.
Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valve if stops are not specified with fixture. Refer to
Division 22 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves.

PLUMBING FIXTURES 224200 – 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

I. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to
sanitary drainage system.

J. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage
system.

K. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide side
of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.

L. Install toilet seats on water closets.

M. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not
available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

N. Install water-supply, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves.

O. Install faucet, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets
are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

P. Install traps on fixture outlets.

1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.

2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.

Q. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within
cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for escutcheons.

R. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 and 23 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect water supplies from water distribution piping to fixtures.

C. Connect drain piping from fixtures to drainage piping.

D. Supply and Waste Connections to Fixtures and Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Connect
fixtures and equipment with water supplies, stops, risers, traps, and waste piping specified. Use size
fittings required to match fixtures and equipment. Connect to plumbing piping.

E. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

PLUMBING FIXTURES 224200 – 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Verify that installed fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.

B. Check that fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.

C. Inspect installed fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace
malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and
controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets, and flush valves to produce proper flow and stream.

C. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and
materials. Do the following:

1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and
spouts.
2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

END OF SECTION 224200

PLUMBING FIXTURES 224200 – 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 224500 - EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following emergency plumbing fixtures:

1. Combination emergency shower and eye/face wash equipment.

2. Water-tempering equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Plumbed Emergency Plumbing Fixture: Fixture with fixed, potable-water supply.

B. Tepid: Moderately warm.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include flow rates and capacities, furnished
specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Product Certificates: Submit certificates of performance testing specified in "Source Quality

Control" Article.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For emergency plumbing fixtures to include in maintenance
manuals.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.

B. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z358.1, "Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment."

EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES 224500 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,"
for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMBINATION EMERGENCY SHOWER AND EYE/FACE WASH EQUIPMENT

A. Combination Emergency Shower and Eye/Face Wash Equipment, EWS:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product

indicated on Drawings.

2. Description: Plumbed, freestanding, pedestal shower and eye/face wash equipment.

a. Capacity: Deliver potable water at rate not less than 20 gpm (shower) and 3.0 gpm
(eye/face wash) for at least 15 minutes.
b. Supply Piping: NPS 1-1/4 (shower) and NPS ½ (eye/face wash) chrome-plated
brass or stainless steel with flow regulator and stay-open control valve.

2.2 WATER-TEMPERING EQUIPMENT

A. Water-Tempering Equipment, EMV:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product

indicated on Drawings.

2. Description: Factory-fabricated, hot- and cold-water-tempering equipment with

thermostatic mixing valve.

a. Thermostatic Mixing Valve: Designed to provide 85 deg F tepid, potable water at

emergency plumbing fixtures, to maintain temperature at plus or minus 5 deg F
throughout required 15-minute test period, and in case of unit failure to continue
cold-water flow, with union connections, controls, metal piping, and corrosion-
resistant enclosure.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Certify performance of plumbed emergency plumbing fixtures by independent testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
connections before plumbed emergency plumbing fixture installation.

EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES 224500 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION

A. Assemble emergency plumbing fixture piping, fittings, control valves, and other components.

B. Install fixtures level and plumb.

C. Fasten fixtures to substrate.

D. Install shutoff valves in water-supply piping to fixtures. Use ball, gate, or globe valve if
specific type valve is not indicated. Install valves chained or locked in open position if
permitted. Install valves in locations where they can easily be reached for operation. Valves
are specified in Division 22 Section "Valves."

1. Exception: Omit shutoff valve on supply to group of plumbing fixtures that includes
emergency plumbing fixture.
2. Exception: Omit shutoff valve on supply to emergency equipment if prohibited by
authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Install dielectric fitting in supply piping to fixture if piping and fixture connections are made of
different metals. Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."

F. Install trap and waste to wall on drain outlet of fixture receptors that are indicated to be directly
connected to drainage system.

G. Install indirect waste piping to wall on drain outlet of fixture receptors that are indicated to be
indirectly connected to drainage system. Drainage piping is specified in Division 22 Section
"Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

H. Install escutcheons on piping wall and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations.
Escutcheons are specified in Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

I. Fill self-contained fixtures with flushing fluid.

J. Install equipment nameplates or equipment markers on fixtures and equipment signs on water-
tempering equipment. Identification materials are specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical
Identification."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect hot- and cold-water-supply piping to hot- and cold-water-tempering equipment.

Connect output from water-tempering equipment to emergency plumbing fixtures.

EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES 224500 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

C. Directly connect emergency plumbing fixture receptors with trapped drain outlet to sanitary
drainage and vent piping.

D. Indirectly connect emergency plumbing fixture receptors without trapped drain outlet to
sanitary or storm drainage piping.

E. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

F. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Specification Sections.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Mechanical-Component Testing: After plumbing connections have been made, test for
compliance with requirements. Verify ability to achieve indicated capacities and temperatures.

B. Electrical-Component Testing: After electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance
with requirements.

1. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

C. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements
are made.

D. Report test results in writing.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace fixture flow regulators for proper flow.

B. Adjust equipment temperature settings.

END OF SECTION 224500

EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES 224500 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 230000 - GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

1. The mechanical portion of this project includes all labor, materials, equipment, etc., required to
provide the complete mechanical work to fulfill the intent of the Contract Documents.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS

1. All applicable provisions of Division 0 and 1 govern work under this division. Refer to these
articles in the specifications for additional information.

2. All work shall be in compliance with the currently enforced edition of the applicable state, national,
and local ordinance and building codes. No additional compensation shall be granted for work
which must be changed as a result of the work not originally complying with the codes and
standards, etc.

3. Refer to each section for additional applicable codes and reference standards.

1.3 FEES, PERMITS AND TAXES

1. This Contractor is responsible for all inspection fees and permits required by local authorities
having jurisdiction. The Contractor is also responsible for all taxes levied for labor and materials
associated with the mechanical portion of the work. After completion of the work, a certificate of
final inspection shall be provided showing approval from the local Inspector.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

1. Submittals shall be provided for all equipment, fixtures and other items indicated. Product data
shall be from published manufacturer’s data. Data shall include enough information so that the
Engineer can verify compliance with codes, standards, and the contract documents. Submittal shall
not contain data that is not relevant to the equipment being submitted. The data shall be
highlighted by arrows, underlining, etc. Broad, general data, is not acceptable. Data shall be
presented at one time, in a neatly bound and organized manner.

2. Submit a single electronic copy or a minimum of 5 copies of each required submittal. Electronic
submittals shall be divided by individual specification division and only combined where total
document size is less than 100 pages. The Engineer will return the copies marked with action taken
and corrections or modifications required. Unless resubmittal is requested, the submittal may serve
as the final submittal.

3. The contractor shall provide and maintain at the site a set of prints which accurately represent the
actual installation of all work under this Division. Any changes in sizes, locations, dimensions, etc.
shall be shown.

4. At the completion of the Project, a set of marked-up drawings, including DIMENSIONED, location
of all underground piping shall be provided to the owner.

GENERAL PROVISIONS 230000 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1.5 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS

1. Operating and Maintenance Data includes printed information, such as manufacturer's installation
instructions, manufacturer’s service manuals, manufacturer’s lubrication charts, standard wiring
diagrams, and a parts list including the price of each item.

2. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Operating and
Maintenance Data includes information on several products that are not required, mark copies to
indicate the applicable information.

3. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and
maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include
operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows:

1. Operation Data:

1. Emergency instructions and procedures.

2. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards.
3. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend operations.
4. Description of controls and sequence of operations.
5. Piping and wiring diagrams.

2. Maintenance Data:

1. Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts.

2. Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier.
3. Maintenance procedures.
4. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance.
5. Maintenance record forms.
6. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials.
7. Copies of maintenance service agreements.
8. Copies of warranties and bonds.

4. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and
index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify
each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents.

5. Do not submit Operating and Maintenance Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract
Documents has been confirmed.

1.6 PRIOR APPROVAL

1. The drawings and specifications are intended to indicate a standard of quality for items by
identifying manufacturer’s names and model numbers. It is the responsibility of the contractor to
prove equality for any substitutions.

The contractor shall submit a list of proposed substitutions to the Engineer. All proposed
substitutions shall be in writing to the Engineer, at least, ten (10) calendar days prior to bid

GENERAL PROVISIONS 230000 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

opening. The submittal will list the proposed substitutions from published manufacturer’s data,
which cover the applicable features of the submitted equipment. Any approvals shall be issued in
writing.

1.7 GUARANTEE

1. The contractor shall fully guarantee the installation against defects in materials and workmanship
which may occur under normal usage for a period of one year after owner’s acceptance. Defects
shall be promptly remedied at no cost to the owner. This guarantee is in addition to, and not a limit
to, any other guarantees or warranties.

1.8 DEFINITIONS. The following words and phases are defined:

1. "Indicated": The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the
Drawings; or to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and similar requirements in the
Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to
help the user locate the reference. Location is not limited.

2. "Directed": Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved,"

"required," and "permitted" mean directed by the Architect/Engineer, requested by the
Architect/Engineer, and similar phrases.

3. "Approved": The term "approved," when used in conjunction with the Architect's/Engineer’s
action on the Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the
Architect's/Engineer’s duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

4. "Regulations": The term "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued
by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the
construction industry that control performance of the Work.

5. "Furnish": The term "furnish" means to supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading,
unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

6. "Install": The term "install" describes operations at the Project site including the actual unloading,
temporary storage, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to
dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

7. "Provide": The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended
use.

8. "Installer": An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an
employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity,
including installation, erection, application, or similar operations. Installers are required to be
experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform

9. "Project site" is the space available to the Contractor for performing construction activities, either
exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the Project. The extent
of the Project site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description
of the land on which the Project is to be built.

GENERAL PROVISIONS 230000 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

10. "Testing Agencies": A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific
inspections or tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to
interpret results of those inspections or tests.

1.9 INSPECTION OF THE SITE

1. The drawings are prepared from the most accurate information available. However, in order to
insure responsible bidding by the contractor, he shall, prior to placing any bids, visit the site to
verify existing conditions, the locations, sizes, depths, pressures, etc., of all existing utilities and
become familiar with working conditions, hazards, existing grades, obstructions, local requirements
involved, etc.

2. All proposals shall take these existing conditions and any speculated revisions needed into account.
The contractor shall be fully responsible for his bid regardless of any additional site information
which may be uncovered after a contract is signed.

1.10 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY

1. The plans and specifications do not include items necessary for the contractor to insure the safety
of his personnel on the project construction site. Construction site safety for the project is the
responsibility of the contractor. Reference other sections of these specifications for any additional
information.

1.11 DAMAGE

1. The contractor shall be held accountable to repair, at no cost to the owner, any damage to existing
wiring, piping, or other materials and equipment intended to remain.

2. The contractor shall be held accountable to repair, at no cost to the owner, any damage to project
due to failure to recognize associated hazards such as leaks, scheduling of work, poor
workmanship, excessive cutting, etc.

1.12 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

1. Should be considered as complimentary to each other. What is required by one shall be binding as
if required by both. If conflicts between plans and specifications are found, the Engineer shall be
contacted to secure clarification, prior to bidding. The contractor shall verify all dimensions and
existing conditions.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 WORKMANSHIP

1. All work shall be done in a professional and complete manner by experienced craftsmen.
Unsatisfactory workmanship shall be duly noted and corrected at the contractor’s expense.

2. Only new materials shall be used, unless otherwise indicated on plan or prior approved.

GENERAL PROVISIONS 230000 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2.2 MANUFACTURER’S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

1. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.

2.3 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT

1. The contractor shall provide protection of stored material and installed equipment against dirt, rust,
moisture, and abuse from other trades. Where tarps or other cover is used, provide air circulation to
prevent condensate build up. No materials or equipment shall be stored directly on the ground.
Ductwork, piping and equipment are prohibited from use as scaffolding or personnel supports.

2. Upon completion of work, all equipment, fixtures, piping, etc., shall be cleaned to the satisfaction
of the Architect. All repairs due to damage shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

2.4 CONFLICTS, INTERFERENCES AND COORDINATION BETWEEN TRADES

1. Coordinate work so as to conform with the progress of the work of others. The drawings are only
intended to indicate the extent, general location and arrangement, of piping systems, ductwork and
equipment. The drawings are not to be construed as shop drawings. Any questions regarding the
information given on the plans shall be directed to the Engineer for clarification. The contractor
shall refer to other sections of the specifications and other drawings such as structural, electrical,
etc., in order to eliminate conflicts when laying out his work. The contractor shall be responsible
for the proper coordination of the mechanical work with the installations under other Divisions for
clearances, etc. Any changes required to avoid interferences shall be submitted to the Architect for
approval and shall be made, as approved, without additional cost to the Owner.

2. Code requirements shall have precedence over plans or specifications in the event of a conflict. If a
discrepancy or conflict exists between specifications and drawings, drawings shall take precedence
over specifications except as pertaining to quality. Manufacturer’s installation instructions shall
govern the installation of all equipment.

3. The contractor shall coordinate with equipment suppliers for any requirements specific to the
equipment provided which may not be shown on the plans or given in the specifications. The
contractor shall include the provision and installation of such requirements in his bid. The
contractor shall coordinate with equipment suppliers, prior to bid, to determine what ancillary
equipment is or is not provided with the equipment, such as bolts, gaskets, oils, drive belts, etc.
Coordinate with Owner for owner supplied equipment.

4. Equipment requiring set grades or elevations and piping has precedence over ductwork, conduit,
boxes, etc. as to location.

5. The contractor shall coordinate with other equipment providers to insure correct operation of the
equipment, such as, phase rotation, interlocking, accessibility, etc.

6. The contractor shall examine the Architectural plans for the location of suitable openings and aisles
for the passage of equipment to be installed under this Division. The contractor shall be
responsible for having suitable openings and aisles left open until his equipment has been properly
installed.

7. Except as otherwise noted, it shall be understood that the indication and/or description of any item,
in the drawings or specifications, or both, carries with it the instruction to furnish and install the

GENERAL PROVISIONS 230000 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

item, regardless of whether or not this instruction is explicitly stated as part of the indication or
description.

8. The right is reserved to make reasonable changes in locations of equipment indicated in Drawings
prior to installation without an increase in the contract cost.

9. The drawings and specifications do not undertake to indicate every item required to produce a
complete and properly operational installation. Material, equipment or labor not indicated, but
which can be reasonably inferred to be necessary for a complete installation shall be provided.

2.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

1. Every effort shall be made to build-in the work as the job progresses. As required, cutting and
patching for the installation of sleeves, piping, equipment, etc., shall be coordinated with the
General Contractor. Do not cut any structural element without written permission from the
Structural Engineer.

2.6 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

1. The contractor shall make final connection of all required services to all equipment items
furnished, including that provided by others or by the owner. Equipment shall be left in a ready to
operate condition.

2.7 FLASHING AND WATERPROOFING

1. All building penetrations to the outside shall be flashed and sealed, as required, to prevent leaks.

2.8 DEMONSTRATION:

1. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

operate all mechanical systems.

END OF SECTION 230000

GENERAL PROVISIONS 230000 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 230500 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement other
Division 22 and 23 Sections.

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

2. Escutcheons.
3. Dielectric fittings.
4. Flexible connectors.
5. Mechanical sleeve seals.
6. Equipment nameplate data requirements.
7. Labeling and identifying mechanical systems and equipment.
8. Non-shrink grout for equipment installations.
9. Installation requirements common to equipment specification sections.
10. Cutting and patching.
11. Touchup painting and finishing.
12. Mechanical demolition.

B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in Division 22 through 23 piping system Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe
and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated
spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and
physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples
include installations within unheated shelters.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

A. Product Data: For dielectric fittings, flexible connectors, mechanical sleeve seals, and identification
materials and devices.

B. Coordination Drawings: Detail major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment
rooms in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Show space
requirements for installation and access. Indicate if sequence and coordination of installations are
important to efficient flow of the Work. Include the following:

1. Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve-stem movement.
2. Required clearances for installing, servicing and maintaining equipment, insulation,
accessories, and specialties, including space for disassembly required for periodic
maintenance.
3. Equipment and accessory service connections and support details.
4. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.
5. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.
6. Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and
their relationship to other penetrations and installations.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of
identification devices.

B. Equipment Selection: Equipment of differing electrical characteristics, physical dimensions,

capacities and ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing
and connecting mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and
equipment spaces are adequately adjusted in advance related to all impacted trades by the
equipment supplier and associated contractor including all additional costs as necessary. If
minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of equipment are specified, equipment must meet design
and commissioning requirements.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed
structural capacity of floor, if stored inside.

C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.

D. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components.

B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction to allow for mechanical installations.

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete
and other structural components, as they are constructed.

D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning before
closing in building.

E. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and
services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and
controlling agencies.

F. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors if mechanical items requiring access are
concealed behind finished surfaces.

G. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting, if devices are
applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar
concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. STEEL PIPING

1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade A or B, Schedule 40, galvanized. Include ends
matching joining method.

2. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53 or ASTM A 106, Schedule 40,
galvanized, seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching joining method.
3. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, hexagonal-stock body with
ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal, bronze seating surface, and female threaded ends.
4. Gray-Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, galvanized, standard pattern.
5. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125.
6. Cast-Iron, Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125, galvanized.
7. Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM A 47, malleable-iron casting; ASTM A 106, galvanized, steel
pipe; or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe.
8. Expansion Joints: Compound, galvanized, steel fitting with telescoping body and slip-pipe
section. Include packing rings, packing, limit rods, chrome-plated finish on slip-pipe
sections, and flanged ends.
9. Double Expansion Joints: Compound, galvanized, steel fitting with telescoping body and
two slip-pipe sections. Include packing rings, packing, limit rods, chrome-plated finish on
slip-pipe sections, and flanged ends.
10. Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing
protective jacket; 150-psig minimum working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating
temperature. Connectors shall have flanged or threaded-end connections to match equipment
connected and shall be capable of 3/4-inch misalignment.

B. DUCTILE-IRON PIPING

1. Piping for fire-suppression applications shall be listed for fire-protection service.

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint, bell- and

plain-spigot end, unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
3. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint, bell- and plain-spigot
end, unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
4. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron, standard
pattern; or AWWA C153, ductile-iron, compact pattern.

a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber
gaskets, and steel bolts.

5. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron, standard pattern;

or AWWA C153, ductile-iron, compact pattern.

a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

6. Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM A 47, malleable-iron castings or ASTM A 536 ductile-iron

castings with dimensions matching pipe.

a. Ductile-Iron-Piping, Keyed Couplings: AWWA C606, for ductile-iron-pipe

dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts and
nuts.

7. Flexible Expansion Joints: Compound, ductile-iron fitting with combination of flanged and
mechanical-joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include two
gasketed, ball-joint sections and one or more gasketed, sleeve section. Assemble
components for offset and expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111 ductile-iron glands,
rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
8. Deflection Fittings: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing sections
for up to 20-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends complying with
AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111 ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets,
and steel bolts.
9. Expansion Joints: Three-piece, ductile-iron assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve with
gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections complying with
AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for expansion indicated.
Include AWWA C111 ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

C. COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS

1. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.

2. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L, water tube, annealed temper.
3. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L, water tube, drawn temper.
4. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper,
solder-joint fittings.
5. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-
copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
6. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges
if required to match piping.
7. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with
ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.
8. Copper, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75 copper tube or ASTM B 584 bronze castings.

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

9. Copper-Tubing, Keyed Couplings: Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to

AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for hot water, and bolts and
nuts.

D. CAST-IRON SOIL PIPING AND FITTINGS

1. Hub-and-Spigot Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.

2. Hub-less Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
3. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.
4. Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners, and
ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
5. Heavy-Duty, Type 304, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel
shield; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve.

a. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch-wide shield with 4 bands.

6. Compact, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310 with ASTM A 167, Type 301, or
ASTM A 666, Type 301, stainless-steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve.

a. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 2-1/8-inch-wide shield with 2 bands.

2.2 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness, unless

thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or
ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32.

1. Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent silver, with 0.10
percent lead content.
2. Alloy Sb5: 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony, with 0.20 percent maximum lead content.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.

1. BAg1: Silver alloy.

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

F. Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for
welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analysis of pipe being welded.

G. Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F 477, elastomeric gasket.

H. Flanged, Ductile-Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber gasket, carbon-steel
bolts and nuts.

2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals, to prevent
galvanic action and stop corrosion.

B. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld-neck end
types and matching piping system materials.

C. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. General: Fabricated from materials suitable for system fluid and that will provide flexible pipe
connections. Include 125-psig minimum working-pressure rating, unless higher working pressure
is indicated, and ends according to the following:

1. 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: Threaded.

2. 2-1/2-Inch NPS and Larger: Flanged.

B. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Stainless-Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel, inner

tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include stainless-steel nipples or flanges, welded to
hose.

C. Rubber, Flexible Connectors: CR or EPDM elastomer rubber construction, with multiple plies of
NP fabric, molded and cured in hydraulic presses. Include 125-psig minimum working-pressure
rating at 220 deg F. Units may be straight or elbow type, unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular design, with interlocking rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular
space between pipe and sleeve. Include connecting bolts and pressure plates.

2.6 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:

1. Steel Sheet Metal: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness, galvanized, round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
3. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

a. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

5. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

B. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type if required to conceal
protruding fittings and sleeves.

1. ID: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping.
2. OD: Completely cover opening.
3. Cast Brass: One piece, with set screw.

a. Finish: Polished chrome-plate.

4. Cast Brass: Split casting, with concealed hinge and set screw.

a. Finish: Polished chrome-plate.

5. Cast-Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting.

2.7 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS

A. General: Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as
referenced in other Division 22 and 23 Sections. If more than one type is specified for application,
selection is installer's option, but provide one selection for each product category.

B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal nameplate with operational data engraved or stamped; permanently
fastened to equipment.

1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and
power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data.
2. Location: Accessible and visible location.

2.8 GROUT

A. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout, non-

staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psig, 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Install piping as described below, unless piping Sections specify otherwise. Individual
Division 22 piping Sections specify unique piping installation requirements.

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to
size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations.
Install piping as indicated, unless deviations to layout are approved by the Engineer in writing.

C. Install piping at slope indicated on plan, in these specifications, or as required by governing codes.

D. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

E. Install piping in concealed locations, except in equipment rooms and service areas.

F. Install piping free of sags and bends. Decrease hanger spacing if required.

G. Install piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited, unless
otherwise indicated.

H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow
sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch clearance around insulation.

J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.

K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

L. Install couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

M. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board partitions,
and suspended ceilings according to the following:

1. Chrome-Plated Piping: Cast brass, one piece, with set screw, and polished chrome-plated
finish. Use split-casting escutcheons if required, for existing piping.
2. Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast brass, with set screw.
3. Uninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates.
4. Insulated Piping: Cast brass; with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.
5. Piping in Utility Areas: Cast brass, with set-screw or spring clips.

N. Sleeves are not required for core drilled holes.

O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and
concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other

wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below
floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses.

3. Install sleeves large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe
or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 8

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6-inch NPS.

b. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to
extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level.

1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout.

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or
pipe insulation, using elastomeric joint sealants.
5. Use Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O, neutral-curing silicone sealant, unless otherwise
indicated.

P. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing
mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.

2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches in diameter.

Q. Underground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe
penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe
and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

R. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at
pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire-stopping materials.

S. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

T. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in
individual piping specification Sections:

1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Soldering Manual," Chapter "The
Soldering of Pipe and Tube"; or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
4. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and
Tube."
5. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

a. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads, unless dry seal
threading is specified.
b. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

6. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, "Recommended Practices and
Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe," using qualified processes and welding
operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 9

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

7. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type,
and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Assemble
joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and
parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and
uniformly using torque wrench.

U. Piping Connections: Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping 2-inch NPS and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment with 2-inch NPS or smaller threaded pipe connection.
2. Install flanges, in piping 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment with flanged pipe connection.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.

3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to provide maximum possible headroom, if mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in
diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to Engineer.

C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

E. Install equipment giving right of way to piping installed at required slope.

F. Install flexible connectors on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to
equipment shafts if possible.

3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of
flow.

1. Stenciled Markers: According to ASME A13.1.

2. Locate pipe markers as follows if piping is exposed in finished spaces, machine rooms, and
accessible maintenance spaces, such as shafts, tunnels, plenums, and exterior non-concealed
locations:

a. Near each valve and control device.

b. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Mark each
pipe at branch, if flow pattern is not obvious.
c. Near locations if pipes pass through walls, floors, ceilings, or enter non-accessible
enclosures.

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 10

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

d. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
f. Spaced at maximum of 25-foot intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to 15 feet
in congested areas of piping and equipment.
g. Pipe Identification:

1) Domestic Water: Grey.

2) Automatic Fire Sprinkler: Fire Red.
3) Natural Gas: Safety yellow, unless as noted otherwise.

B. Equipment: Install equipment marker on or near each major item of mechanical equipment.

1. Stenciled Markers: According to ASME A13.1

2. Lettering Size: Minimum 1-inch-high lettering for name of unit if viewing distance is less
than 24 inches, 2-inch-high lettering for distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger
lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths of size
of principal lettering.
3. Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit to match name of unit indicated on plan.
Include text to distinguish between multiple units, inform user of operational requirements,
indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.

C. Duct Systems: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake, and relief ducts with stenciled signs and
arrows, showing duct system service and direction of flow.

1. Location: In each space, if ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system,
locate signs near points where ducts enter into space and at maximum intervals of 25 feet.

3.4 PAINTING AND FINISHING

A. Refer to Section "Painting" for paint materials, surface preparation, and application of paint.

B. Apply paint to exposed piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Interior Piping and Supports: Use semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include finish coat
over enamel undercoat and primer.
2. Exterior Piping and Supports: Use semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish
coats over primer, for ferrous pipe applications use rust-inhibitive metal primer.

a. Primer shall be a different color than undercoat and undercoat shall be a different
color than the finish coat.
b. Allow sufficient time for each coat to fully dry prior to applying the next coat.

C. Do not paint piping specialties with factory-applied finish.

D. Damage and Touch-up: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 11

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for
mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

B. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.

3.6 DEMOLITION

A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove Work indicated on plans.

B. If pipe, ductwork, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged or disturbed, remove damaged

portions and install new products of equal capacity and quality.

C. Accessible Work: Remove indicated exposed pipe and ductwork in its entirety.

D. Work Abandoned in Place: Cut and remove underground pipe a minimum of 2 inches beyond face
of adjacent construction. Cap and patch surface to match existing finish.

E. Removal: Remove indicated equipment from Project site.

F. Temporary Disconnection: Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational
equipment indicated for relocation.

3.7 GROUTING

A. Install nonmetallic, non-shrink, grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and
other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's written
instructions.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placing of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout around anchors.

G. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION 230500

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 12

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and
equipment:

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.

2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Metal framing systems.
4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
5. Fastener systems.
6. Equipment supports.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 23 Section(s) "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for “The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.”.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined
weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported

equipment and connected systems and components.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 230529 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.

3. Powder-actuated fastener systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.

B. Manufacturers:

1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc.

2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports.
3. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
4. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
5. Empire Industries, Inc.
6. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
7. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.
8. Grinnell Corp.
9. GS Metals Corp.
10. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.
11. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.
12. PHS Industries, Inc.
13. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.

C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pre-galvanized or hot dipped.

D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of
bearing surface of piping.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from
structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels

and other components.

B. Manufacturers:

1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 230529 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3. GS Metals Corp.
4. Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd.
5. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
6. Tolco Inc.
7. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.

C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.

D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Description: 100-psig- (690-kPa-) minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in

sheet metal shield.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.

2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
3. PHS Industries, Inc.
4. Pipe Shields, Inc.
5. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc.
6. Value Engineered Products, Inc.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor
barrier.

D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass.

E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below
ambient air temperature.

2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete
with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials where used.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Hilti, Inc.
b. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.
d. MKT Fastening, LLC.
e. Powers Fasteners.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 230529 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened

Portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported
loads and building materials where used.

1. Manufacturers:

a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

b. Empire Industries, Inc.
c. Hilti, Inc.
d. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
e. MKT Fastening, LLC.
f. Powers Fasteners.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, non-shrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Non-staining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems
and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non-insulated or
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 230529 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232
deg C) pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16 (DN 100 to DN 400), requiring up to 4 inches (100 mm)
of insulation.
3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600), requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4
inches (100 mm) of insulation.
4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to
NPS 24 (DN 15 to DN 600), if little or no insulation is required.
5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 15 to
DN 100), to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
6. Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of non-
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8 (DN 20 to DN 200).
7. Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of non-insulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2 (DN 15 to DN 50).
8. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For
suspension of non-insulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8 (DN 10 to DN 200).
9. Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of non-
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3 (DN 10 to DN 80).
10. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to
DN 750).
11. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
12. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100
to DN 900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
13. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100
to DN 900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-
bolt to retain pipe.
14. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes,
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 (DN 65 to DN 900), if vertical adjustment is required, with steel
pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
15. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30 (DN 25 to
DN 750), from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur.
16. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to
NPS 20 (DN 65 to DN 500), from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion
and contraction might occur.
17. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42 (DN 50 to
DN 1050), if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur
but vertical adjustment is not necessary.
18. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24
(DN 50 to DN 600), if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.
19. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to
NPS 30 (DN 50 to DN 750), if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be
required in addition to expansion and contraction.

G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500).

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 230529 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500), if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy
loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping
installations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of
building attachments.
5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping
installations.

I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads
are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to
flange edge.
8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-
beams for heavy loads.
10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-
beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above
by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg).

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg).
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg).

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 230529 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer
to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed
1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with
springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability
factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.
6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
base support.
7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress
from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include
auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These
supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.

M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.

N. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete

construction.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building
structure.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 230529 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for
grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze
pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual
pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support
together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.

G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65)
and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is
placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building
services piping) are not exceeded.

L. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 230529 - 8

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and
ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch
(1.22 mm) thick.
b. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06 inch
(1.52 mm) thick.
5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance
and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours
of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 230529 - 9

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05
mm).

B. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780.

END OF SECTION 230529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 230529 - 10

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:

1. Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems.

2. HVAC equipment quantitative-performance settings.

3. Sound level measuring.
4. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
5. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce
fan speed or adjust a damper.

B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and
terminals, according to indicated quantities.

C. Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors, and
ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow, smoke, odors,
and other pollutants.

D. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high
air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn
from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.

E. NC: Noise criteria.

F. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable

results.

G. RC: Room criteria.

H. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

I. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause
reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

J. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a
fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was
performance tested.

K. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

L. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the
distribution system.

M. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment.

N. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and
reporting TAB procedures.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: Within 45 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of
evidence that TAB firm and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified
in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

C. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on
approved forms certified by TAB firm.

D. Warranties specified in this Section.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by NEBB.

B. TAB Conference: Meet with Owner's and Architect's representatives on approval of TAB
strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the
participation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service
representatives, HVAC controls installers, and other support personnel. Provide seven days'
advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.

1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:

a. Submittal distribution requirements.

b. The Contract Documents examination report.
c. Work schedule and Project-site access requirements.
d. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
e. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

C. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the
following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified
and referenced in this Specification.

D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing,
Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems." Or TAB firm's forms approved by
Architect.

E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in NEBB's "Procedural Standards

for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required
Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."

F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently
if required by instrument manufacturer.

1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the
name of party performing instrument calibration.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB
period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,
HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to
support and assist TAB activities.

B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
times.

C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in
completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the
Contract Documents. Guarantee shall include the following provisions:

1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract
Documents.

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation
limits.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of

Contract.
2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-
control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required
by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing
devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and
equipment operation.

B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.

C. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record

Documents."

D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions
for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine equipment performance data including fan curves. Relate performance data to Project
conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted
conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect
factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions
different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To
calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and
Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5
and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.

F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,
cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.

G. Examine system and equipment test reports.

H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices,
such as test ports, gage cocks, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual
volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are accessible and appropriate
for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

J. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased,
belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

K. Examine terminal units to verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and
functioning.

L. Examine plenum ceilings used for supply air to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe
penetrations and other holes are sealed.

M. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

N. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.

O. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:

1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller.
2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully
open positions.
4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and three-way
mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected.
5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and
cold walls.
6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
8. Controller set points are set at indicated values.
9. Interlocked systems are operating.
10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values.

P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.

2.2 PREPARATION

A. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.

2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
4. Balance are open.
5. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
6. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be
met.

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained
in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental
Systems" and this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and
balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed.
Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.

C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent
identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-
control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

2.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.

D. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air
dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

H. Check for airflow blockages.

I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

J. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.

K. Check for proper sealing of air duct system.

2.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by
fan manufacturer.

1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct
restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
that houses the fan.

2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, and
other air-handling and -treating equipment.

a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel
must change filters.

3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat
recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with
calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend
corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
5. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than
indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical
connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor
amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full
heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required
brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances.

1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube
traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate
the total airflow for that zone.

2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written

instructions and calculating factors.

D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified
tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors
and the dampers at air terminals.

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

2.6 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS

A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic
temperature-control system.

B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successive
eight-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature
settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.

C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.

2.7 PROCEDURES FOR SOUND-LEVEL MEASUREMENTS

A. Perform sound-pressure-level measurements with an octave-band analyzer complying with

ANSI S1.4 for Type 1 sound-level meters and ANSI S1.11 for octave-band filters. Comply
with requirements in ANSI S1.13, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Calibrate sound meters before each day of testing. Use a calibrator provided with the sound
meter complying with ANSI S1.40 and that has NIST certification.

C. Use a microphone that is suitable for the type of sound levels measured. For areas where air
velocities exceed 100 fpm (0.51 m/s), use a windscreen on the microphone.

D. Perform sound-level testing after air and water balancing and equipment testing are complete.

E. Close windows and doors to the space.

F. Perform measurements when the space is not occupied and when the occupant noise level from
other spaces in the building and outside are at a minimum.

G. Clear the space of temporary sound sources so unrelated disturbances will not be measured.
Position testing personnel during measurements to achieve a direct line-of-sight between the
sound source and the sound-level meter.

H. Take sound measurements at a height approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) above the floor and
at least 36 inches (900 mm) from a wall, column, and other large surface capable of altering the
measurements.

I. Take sound measurements in dBA and in each of the 8 unweighted octave bands in the
frequency range of 63 to 8000 Hz.

J. Take sound measurements with the HVAC systems off to establish the background sound levels
and take sound measurements with the HVAC systems operating.

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 8

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1. Calculate the difference between measurements. Apply a correction factor depending on

the difference and adjust measurements.

K. Perform sound testing at each floor in locations on Project for each of the following space types.
For each space type tested, select a measurement location that has the greatest sound level. If
testing multiple locations for each space type, select at least one location that is near and at least
one location that is remote from the predominant sound source.

1. Private office.
2. Multi-purpose room.
3. Stage.
4. Auditorium/large meeting rooms.
5. Breakrooms.
6. Inside each mechanical equipment room.

2.8 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION

A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.

B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect
control functions.

C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.

D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).

E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.

F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and
correlate with airflow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes.

G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.

H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems.

I. Check main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.

J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates
on a grounded or non-grounded power supply.

K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.

2.9 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 9

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2.10 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in

three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.

B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and
balancing engineer.

1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:

1. Fan curves.
2. Manufacturers' test data.
3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
4. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings
and Product Data.

D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the
final report, as applicable:

1. Title page.
2. Name and address of TAB firm.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated
values.
15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
e. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
f. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 10

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

g. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
3. Terminal units.
4. Position of balancing devices.

F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).
j. Number of belts, make, and size.
k. Number of filters, type, and size.

2. Motor Data:

a. Make and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
f. Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
g. Outside airflow in cfm (L/s).
h. Return airflow in cfm (L/s).
i. Outside-air damper position.
j. Return-air damper position.

G. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 11

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.
d. Make and model number.
e. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m).
f. Tube size in NPS (DN).
g. Tube and fin materials.
h. Circuiting arrangement.

2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

b. Average face velocity in fpm (m/s).
c. Air pressure drop in inches wg (Pa).
d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).

H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:

a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

2. Motor Data:

a. Make and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).
g. Number of belts, make, and size.

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e. Suction static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

I. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 12

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification.

b. Location and zone.
c. Test apparatus used.
d. Area served.
e. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram.
f. Air-terminal-device size.

2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

b. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm (L/s).
c. Final airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
d. Space temperature in deg F (deg C).

J. Sound Measurement Reports: Record sound measurements on octave band and dBA test forms
and on an NC or RC chart indicating the decibel level measured in each frequency band for both
"background" and "HVAC system operating" readings. Record each tested location on a
separate NC or RC chart. Record the following on the forms:

1. Date and time of test. Record each tested location on its own NC curve.
2. Sound meter manufacturer, model number, and serial number.
3. Space location within the building including floor level and room number.
4. Diagram or color photograph of the space showing the measurement location.
5. Time weighting of measurements, either fast or slow.
6. Description of the measured sound: steady, transient, or tonal.
7. Description of predominant sound source.

K. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.

2.11 INSPECTIONS

A. Initial Inspection:

1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check
measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance
readings documented in the Final Report.
2. Randomly check the following for each system:

a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.

b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals.

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 13

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the

reading to the set point.
d. Measure sound levels at two locations.
e. Measure space pressure of at least 10 percent of locations.
f. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.
g. Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report.

B. Final Inspection:

1. After initial inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies that testing
and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a
final inspection be made by Architect.
2. TAB firm test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of
Architect.
3. Architect shall randomly select measurements documented in the final report to be
rechecked. The rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements
recorded, or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour
business day.
4. If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the
final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as
"FAILED."
5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total
measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be
considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
6. TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report
and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the final report.
7. Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner shall
contract the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing and balancing in
accordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the
final payment.

2.12 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that
balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and
winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near-peak
summer and winter conditions.

END OF SECTION 230593

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 14

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes semi-rigid and flexible duct, plenum, and breeching insulation; insulating
cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 22 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation for piping systems.

2. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liner.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field
applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:

1. Removable insulation sections at access panels.

2. Application of field-applied jackets.
3. Applications at linkages for control devices.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those

specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and
sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

rating of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
rating of 150 or less.

DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct installer for insulation application.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may begin on
segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:

a. CertainTeed Manson.
b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
d. Schuller International, Inc.

2. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

b. Rubatex Corp.

2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured
from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.

B. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured
from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.

C. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials.

Comply with ASTM C 534, Type II for sheet materials.

1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.

2.3 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and
aluminum foil.

C. PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils thick; roll stock ready for shop or
field cutting and forming.

1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

2. PVC Jacket Color: White or gray.
3. PVC Jacket Color: Custom color selected by the architect.

D. Aluminum Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets manufactured from aluminum alloy complying with
ASTM B 209, and having an integrally bonded moisture barrier over entire surface in contact
with insulation. Metal thickness and corrugation dimensions are scheduled at the end of this
Section.

1. Finish: Smooth finish.

2. Finish: Cross-crimp corrugated finish.
3. Finish: Stucco-embossed finish.
4. Finish: Factory-painted finish.
5. Moisture Barrier: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.

2.4 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS

A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape.
Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, pre-sized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..

1. Tape Width: 4 inches.

B. Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick.

2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick.
3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick.
4. Brass: 0.010 inch thick.
5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch thick.

C. Wire: 0.080-inch, nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-inch,

soft-annealed, galvanized steel.

D. Weld-Attached Anchor Pins and Washers: Copper-coated steel pin for capacitor-discharge
welding and galvanized speed washer. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.

DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1. Welded Pin Holding Capacity: 100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the attached
surface.

E. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer
manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for
insulation thickness indicated.

1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface

temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of 100
lb for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface.

F. Self-Adhesive Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer
manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for
insulation thickness indicated.

2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length of
ducts and fittings.

B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each duct system.

C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.

DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.

F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.

I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder
integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply insulation
continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal
ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor
retarder.

L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.

2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
3. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and
joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing

insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Install vapor-retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive vapor retarders.

1. Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor-
retarder mastic and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Repair
punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-retarder seal.
2. Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and secure with
outward clinching staples and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.

O. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions.

P. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire/smoke damper sleeves
for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations.

DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with adhesive and
anchor pins and speed washers.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square

foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides
of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinal centerline
of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches. Space 16 inches o.c. each
way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and
clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
d. Do not over compress insulation during installation.

4. Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers.

5. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
6. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2
inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent
insulation segment with 1/2-inch staples, 1 inch o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive
tape having same facing as insulation.
7. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints.
Secure with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
8. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment
for each surface. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually
mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
9. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface
with 6-inch- wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating
sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
10. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated
to receive vapor retarder.

B. Board Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure board insulation with adhesive and anchor
pins and speed washers.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square

foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Space anchor pins as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinal centerline
of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches. Space 16 inches o.c. each
way and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips
to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
d. Do not over compress insulation during installation.

4. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
5. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2
inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent
insulation segment with 1/2-inch staples, 1 inch o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive
tape having same facing as insulation.
6. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment
for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and
inside radius of elbows. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with
individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface
with 6-inch- wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating
sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
8. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated
to receive vapor retarder.

3.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Apply insulation to ducts and plenums as follows:

1. Follow the manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation.

2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the duct and
plenum surface.

3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION

A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with
factory-applied jackets.

1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of jacket manufacturer's
recommended adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.

3.7 FINISHES

A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as specified in
Section "Painting."

DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.

3.8 DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.

B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of this
Section.

C. Insulate the following plenums and duct systems:

1. Indoor concealed supply-, return-, outside and exhaust-air ductwork.

D. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following
systems, materials, and equipment:

1. Fibrous-glass ducts.
2. Metal ducts with duct liner.
3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
4. Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Vibration-control devices.
7. Testing agency labels and stamps.
8. Nameplates and data plates.
9. Access panels and doors in air-distribution systems.

3.9 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Service: Rectangular/round, air ducts, concealed.

1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket.

2. Thickness: 3.0 inches.
3. Thermal Resistance Rating: R-8, installed (minimum)
4. Number of Layers: One.
5. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper.
6. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.

END OF SECTION 230713

DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 8

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 231123 - NATURAL GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fuel gas piping within the building. Products include the following:

1. Pipe, tube, fittings, and joining materials.

2. Piping specialties.
3. Specialty valves.
4. Pressure regulators.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Specialty valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection
data of selected models.
2. Pressure regulators. Include pressure rating, capacity, and settings of selected models.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For natural gas specialties and accessories to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX.

B. Electrical Components and Devices: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by
a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. NFPA Standard: Comply with NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code."

NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and legally dispose of liquids from drips in existing gas
piping. Handle cautiously to avoid spillage and ignition. Notify fuel gas supplier. Handle
flammable liquids used by installer with proper precautions and do not leave on premises from
end of one day to beginning of next day.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.

2.2 PIPES, TUBES, FITTINGS, AND JOINING MATERIALS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M; Type E or S; Grade B; black. Wall thickness of wrought-steel
pipe shall comply with ASME B36.10M.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with
threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.
2. Steel Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel with threaded ends according to
ASME B1.20.1.
3. Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel or ASME B16.11, forged steel.
4. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,
and threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.
5. Cast-Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125.
6. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
7. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.
8. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for natural gas.

2.3 PROTECTIVE COATING

A. Furnish pipe and fittings with factory-applied, corrosion-resistant polyethylene coating for use
in contact with materials that may corrode the pipe.

NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24, copper alloy.

2.5 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads.

B. Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel flanges and
according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.

C. Appliance Connector Valves: ANSI Z21.15 and CSA International listed.

D. Gas Stops: Bronze body with AGA stamp, plug type with bronze plug and flat or square head,
ball type with chrome-plated brass ball and lever handle, or butterfly valve with stainless-steel
disc and fluorocarbon elastomer seal and lever handle; 2-psig minimum pressure rating.

E. Gas Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: ASME B16.33 and CSA International-listed bronze body and
125-psig pressure rating.

1. Tamperproof Feature: Include design for locking.

F. Plug Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: ASME B16.38 and MSS SP-78 cast-iron, lubricated plug
valves, with 125-psig pressure rating.

1. Tamperproof Feature: Include design for locking.

G. General-Duty Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: ASME B16.38, cast-iron body, suitable for fuel
gas service, with "WOG" indicated on valve body, and 125-psig pressure rating.

1. Gate Valves: MSS SP-70, OS&Y type with solid wedge.

2.6 PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. Description: Single stage and suitable for fuel gas service. Include steel jacket and corrosion-
resistant components, elevation compensator, and atmospheric vent.

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads.
2. Line Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.80.
3. Appliance Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18. Regulator may include vent limiting
device, instead of vent connection, if approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Pressure Regulator Vents: Factory- or field-installed, corrosion-resistant screen in opening if

not connected to vent piping.

NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for fuel oil piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections
before equipment installation.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off fuel gas to premises or section of piping.
Perform leakage test as specified in "Field Quality Control" Article to determine that all
equipment is turned off in affected piping section.

3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Flanges, unions, transition, and special fittings with pressure ratings same as or higher than
system pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fuel Gas Piping, 2 psig or Less:

1. NPS 1/2 to NPS 2: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints.

C. Containment Conduits: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints.

3.4 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 psig or Less: Appliance connector valve or gas stop.

B. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 to 2 psig: Gas stop or gas valve.

C. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 2 to 5 psig: Gas valve.

D. Piping Line Valves, NPS 2 and smaller: Gas valve.

E. Piping Line Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Plug valve or general-duty valve.

3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."

B. Concealed Locations: Except as specified below, install concealed gas piping in airtight conduit
constructed of Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe with welded joints. Vent conduit to
outside and terminate with screened vent cap.

NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1. Above-Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible spaces, subject to

approval of authorities having jurisdiction, whether or not such spaces are used as
plenums. Do not locate valves above ceilings.
2. In Partitions: Do not install concealed piping in solid partitions. Protect tubing from
physical damage when installed inside partitions or hollow walls.

a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls.

3. In Walls: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in Part 2
"Protective Coating" Article may be installed in masonry walls, subject to approval of
authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes
or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or
elevator shafts.

a. Exception: Accessible above-ceiling space specified above.

C. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include outlets
of service meters. Locate where readily accessible for cleaning and emptying. Do not install
where condensate would be subject to freezing.

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.
Use minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long, and
same size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for
removal of plug or cap.

D. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or
floors, and in floor channels, unless indicated to be exposed to view.

E. Install fuel gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers.

F. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side
down.

G. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

H. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each
piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.

I. Install corrugated, stainless-steel tubing system according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Include striker plates to protect tubing from puncture where tubing is restrained and cannot
move.

J. Install strainer on inlet of each line pressure regulator and automatic and electrically operated
valve.

K. Install flanges on valves, specialties, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger connections.

L. Install vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and vent
to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-
resistant insect screens in large end.

NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3.6 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Basic piping joint construction is specified in Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials
and Methods."

B. Use materials suitable for fuel gas.

C. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds and

where damage to coating occurs during construction.

3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Pipe hanger and support and equipment support materials and installation requirements are
specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports."

B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum
rod sizes:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of fuel gas piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to appliances using gas with shutoff valves and unions. Install valve upstream
from and within 72 inches of each appliance. Install union downstream from valve.

D. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as
practical to inlet of each appliance using gas.

E. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

1. Do not use gas pipe as grounding electrode.

F. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables."

3.9 PAINTING

A. Use materials and procedures in painting sections. Exact paint finishes shall be as noted on
plans.

NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test, inspect, and purge piping according to NFPA 54 and requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.

B. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results are
obtained.

C. Verify capacities and pressure ratings of, pressure regulators, valves, and specialties.

D. Verify correct pressure settings for pressure regulators.

E. Verify that specified piping tests are complete.

END OF SECTION 231123

NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for split system air conditioning unit applications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include pressure
drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for thermostatic expansion valves, solenoid valves, and
pressure-regulating valves.

B. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.

C. Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."

B. ASME Standard: Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping."

C. UL Standard: Provide products complying with UL 207, "Refrigerant-Containing Components and

Accessories, Nonelectrical"; or UL 429, "Electrically Operated Valves."

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of refrigerant piping and suspension system components with
other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components,
and partition assemblies.

B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies.
Coordinate with requirements for fire-stopping for materials and methods for sealing pipe
penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.

C. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related sections.

REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Refrigerant Valves and Specialties:

a. Sporlan Valve Company.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L.

B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L.

C. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

D. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

E. Bronze Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (silver) or BAg-2 (silver)

2.3 VALVES

A. Service Valves: 500-psig pressure rating; forged-brass body with copper stubs, brass caps,
removable valve core, integral ball check valve, and with solder-end connections.

B. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750; brass body with stainless-steel parts;
thermostatic-adjustable, modulating type; size and operating characteristics as recommended by
manufacturer of evaporator, and factory set for superheat requirements; solder-end connections;
with sensing bulb, distributor having side connection for hot-gas bypass line, and external
equalizer line.

2.4 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALITIES

A. Straight- or Angle-Type Strainers: 500-psig working pressure; forged-brass or steel body with
stainless-steel wire or brass-reinforced Monel screen of 80 to 100 mesh in liquid lines up to 1-1/8
inches, 60 mesh in larger liquid lines, and 40 mesh in suction lines; with screwed cleanout plug and
solder-end connections.

B. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 500-psig maximum working pressure and 200 deg F operating
temperature; all-brass body with replaceable, polished, optical viewing window with color-coded
moisture indicator; with solder-end connections.

C. Replaceable-Core Filter-Dryers: 500-psig maximum working pressure; heavy gage protected with
corrosion-resistant-painted steel shell, flanged ring and spring, ductile-iron cover plate with steel
cap screws; wrought-copper fittings for solder-end connections; with replaceable-core kit, including
gaskets and the following:

1. Filter Cartridge: Manufacturer’s standard.

REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

D. Permanent Filter-Dryer: 350-psig maximum operating pressure and 225 deg F maximum operating
temperature; steel shell and wrought-copper fittings for solder-end connections; molded-felt core
surrounded by desiccant.

E. Mufflers: 500-psig operating pressure, welded-steel construction with fusible plug; sized for
refrigeration capacity.

2.5 RECEIVERS

A. Receivers: ARI 495, UL listed, steel, brazed, 400-psig pressure rating, with tappings for inlet,
outlet, and pressure relief valve.

2.6 REFRIGERANTS

A. ASHRAE 34, R-410a: Dichlorotrifluoroethane.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Aboveground, within Building: Type L drawn-copper tubing.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.

B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."

C. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings.

D. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of compressor and other equipment. Install valves
and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection.

E. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between
pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit
installation of full-thickness insulation.

F. Below ground, install copper tubing in protective conduit. Vent conduit outdoors.

G. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be exposed to
mechanical injury.

H. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from
compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.
3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.

REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

4. Liquid lines may be installed level.

I. Install bypass around moisture-liquid indicators in lines larger than NPS 2.

J. Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure-regulating valves, and expansion valves
and at connections to compressors and evaporators.

K. When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats, and
packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near expansion
valve bulb.

L. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports."

M. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long.
2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.
3. Pipe rollers for multiple horizontal runs 20 feet or longer, supported by a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

N. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

O. Support vertical runs at each floor.

3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Braze joints according to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

B. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) during brazing to prevent scale
formation.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test and inspect refrigerant piping according to ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.

1. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser, evaporator,
and safety devices from test pressure.
2. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system at not less than the lower of the
design pressure or the setting of pressure relief device protecting high and low side of
system.

a. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of test.
b. Test joints and fittings by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerine solution over
joint.
c. Fill system with nitrogen to raise a test pressure of 150 psig or higher as required by
authorities having jurisdiction.

REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are
achieved.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat requirements.

B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating
suction pressure.

C. Adjust set-point temperature of the conditioned air or chilled-water controllers to the system design
temperature.

D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to
manufacturer's written instructions:

1. Check compressor oil level above center of sight glass.

2. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.
3. Open refrigerant valves, except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Before installing copper tubing, clean tubing and fittings with trichloroethylene.

B. Replace core of filter-dryer after system has been adjusted and design flow rates and pressures are
established.

3.7 SYSTEM CHARGING

A. Charge system using the following procedures:

1. Install core in filter-dryer after leak test but before evacuation.

2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to a vacuum of 500 micrometers. If
vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.
3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.
4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line. Provide full-operating charge.

END OF SECTION 232300

REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-distribution
systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch WG. Metal ducts include the
following:

1. Rectangular ducts and fittings.

2. Single-wall round spiral-seam ducts and formed fittings.
3. Double-wall round spiral-seam ducts and formed fittings.
4. Duct liner.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-

mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes and flexible ducts.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-moving and -
distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or configuration of
duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for
layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original
design results without increasing system total pressure.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. NFPA Compliance:

1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and
having G90 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed
to view.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet metal ducts.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.2 DUCT LINER

A. Fibrous-Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with NAIMA AH124.

1. Manufacturers:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; Insulation Group.

b. Johns Manville International, Inc.
c. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.
d. Owens Corning.

2. Materials: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be coated to prevent

erosion of glass fibers.

a. Thickness: 2 inch.
b. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature.
c. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-
developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916.
e. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive attachment,
mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner
when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in
duct.

1) Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-lb- tensile, dead-load test

perpendicular to duct wall.
2) Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without
projecting more than 1/8 inch into airstream.
3) Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-hazard
classification of duct liner system.

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

B. Flexible Elastomeric Duct Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

2. Materials: Unicellular polyethylene thermal plastic, preformed sheet insulation

complying with ASTM C 534, Type II, except for density.

a. Thickness: 2 inch.
b. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.24 at 75 deg F mean temperature.
c. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-
developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM C 411.
d. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with
NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

2.3 SEALANT MATERIALS

A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or
mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.

B. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide; glass-fiber-reinforced fabric.

C. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and
modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable,
airtight seal.

D. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when
cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.

E. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, non-sag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized

butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.

F. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.

G. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners

appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for

slabs more than 4 inches thick.
2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate
concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electro-galvanized, all-thread rods or

galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.
3. Galvanized-steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces painted
with zinc-chromate primer.

C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.

D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

2.5 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION

A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction
according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" and
complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod
applications, and joint types and intervals.

1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity

class required for pressure class.
2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

B. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using

manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint
reinforcement.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

b. Nexus Inc.
c. Ward Industries, Inc.

C. Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards--Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

b. Lockformer.

2. Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches wide and up to 2-inch wg pressure class.

3. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant.

D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger
and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts are
lined.

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2.6 APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS

A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive
coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct
liner is prohibited.

B. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.

C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.

D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge
overlapping.

E. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,
unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.

F. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm.

G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12
inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches
longitudinally.

H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either
channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the
following locations:

1. Fan discharges.
2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are greater than 2500
fpm (12.7 m/s) or where indicated.

I. Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as specified for
outer shell and mylar. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform distance
from outer shell without compressing insulation.

1. Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch diameter, with an overall open area of 23
percent.

J. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane
assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means
are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.

2.7 ROUND DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION

A. Round, Spiral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

B. Duct Joints:

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1. Ducts up to 20 Inches in Diameter: Interior, center-beaded slip coupling, sealed before

and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws.
2. Ducts 21 to 72 Inches in Diameter: Three-piece, gasketed, flanged joint consisting of two
internal flanges with sealant and one external closure band with gasket.
3. Round Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of double-lipped, EPDM
rubber gasket. Manufacture ducts according to connection system manufacturer's
tolerances.

a. Manufacturers:

1) Ductmate Industries, Inc.

2) Lindab Inc.

C. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for
longitudinal-seam straight ducts.

D. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no excess
material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance.

E. Fabricate elbows using die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Bend radius of die-
formed, gored, and pleated elbows shall be 1-1/2 times duct diameter. Unless elbow
construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:

1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for
pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg:

a. Ducts 3 to 36 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.

3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for
pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg:

a. Ducts 3 to 26 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.

4. 90-Degree, 2-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems or for material-
handling Class A or B exhaust systems and only where space restrictions do not permit
using radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning vanes.
5. Round Elbows 8 Inches and Less in Diameter: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45- and
90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate
nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored
construction.
6. Round Elbows 9 through 14 Inches in Diameter: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for
30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. Fabricate
nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored
construction.
7. Round Elbows Larger than 14 Inches in Diameter: Fabricate gored elbows unless space
restrictions require mitered elbows.

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

8. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches in Diameter and All Pressures 0.040 inch
thick with 2-piece welded construction.
9. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified above.
10. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 Inches in Diameter and Pressures through 10-Inch
wg: 0.022 inch.

F. Manufacturers:

1. Lindab Inc.
2. McGill AirFlow Corporation.
3. SEMCO Incorporated.

G. Ducts: Fabricate double-wall (insulated) ducts with an outer shell and an inner duct.
Dimensions indicated are for inner ducts.

1. Outer Shell: Base metal thickness on outer-shell dimensions. Fabricate outer-shell

lengths 2 inches longer than inner duct and insulation and in metal thickness specified for
single-wall duct.
2. Insulation: 2-inch- thick fibrous glass, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate insulation
where double-wall duct connects to single-wall duct or uninsulated components, and
reduce outer shell diameter to inner duct diameter.

a. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature.

3. Solid Inner Ducts: Use the following sheet metal thicknesses and seam construction:

a. Ducts 3 to 8 Inches in Diameter: 0.019 inch with standard spiral-seam

construction.
b. Ducts 9 to 42 Inches in Diameter: 0.019 inch with single-rib spiral-seam
construction.

4. Perforated Inner Ducts: Fabricate with 0.028-inch- thick sheet metal having 3/32-inch-
diameter perforations, with overall open area of 23 percent.
5. Maintain concentricity of inner duct to outer shell by mechanical means. Prevent
dislocation of insulation by mechanical means.

H. Fittings: Fabricate double-wall (insulated) fittings with an outer shell and an inner duct.

1. Solid Inner Ducts: Use the following sheet metal thicknesses:

a. Ducts 3 to 34 Inches in Diameter: 0.028 inch.

2. Perforated Inner Ducts: Fabricate with 0.028-inch- thick sheet metal having 3/32-inch-
diameter perforations, with overall open area of 23 percent.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

A. Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following:

1. Supply Ducts (Positive Pressure): 2-inch wg.

2. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 2-inch wg.
3. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 2-inch wg.

B. All ducts shall be galvanized steel.

3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install round ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet unless interrupted by fittings.

C. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

D. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.

E. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure
couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of
3 screws in each coupling.

F. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions
unless specifically indicated.

J. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts,
and similar finished work.

K. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward
to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.

L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and
electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

M. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and
exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts
or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings
on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 8

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

N. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior
walls, install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke
dampers are specified in Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and
installation methods are specified in Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

O. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed. Follow
SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction."

P. Paint interiors of metal ducts, that do not have duct liner, for 24 inches upstream of registers and
grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex finish coat over a compatible galvanized-steel
primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in painting sections.

3.3 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated.

1. For pressure classes lower than 2-inch wg, seal transverse joints.

B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.

3.4 HANGING AND SUPPORTING

A. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch
intersection.

B. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each floor.

C. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of
failure (proof-test) load.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 23 Section

"Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following field tests and inspections according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct
Leakage Test Manual" and prepare test reports:

1. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing

and for compliance with test requirements.
2. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section
being tested. If pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 9

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.
Give seven days' advance notice for testing.
3. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Class 3 for round
ducts, Leakage Class 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classes lower than and equal to
2-inch wg (both positive and negative pressures). Remake leaking joints and retest until
leakage is equal to or less than maximum allowable.

END OF SECTION 233113

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 10

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 233300 - DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Volume dampers.
3. Turning vanes.
4. Duct-mounting access doors.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Flexible ducts.
7. Duct accessory hardware.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Volume dampers.
3. Turning vanes.
4. Duct-mounting access doors.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Flexible ducts.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.

1. Special fittings.
2. Manual-volume damper installations.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise
indicated.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and
having G90 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed
to view.

C. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts
and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

D. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063, temper T6.

E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.2 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Air Balance, Inc.

2. American Warming and Ventilating.
3. CESCO Products.
4. Duro Dyne Corp.
5. Greenheck.
6. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.
7. Prefco Products, Inc.
8. Ruskin Company.
9. Vent Products Company, Inc.

B. Description: Multiple-blade, parallel action gravity balanced, with center-pivoted blades of

maximum 6-inch width, with sealed edges, assembled in rattle-free manner with 90-degree stop,
steel ball bearings, and axles; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static
pressure.

C. Frame: 0.063-inch- thick extruded aluminum, with welded corners and mounting flange.

D. Blades: 0.025-inch- thick, roll-formed aluminum.

E. Blade Seals: Neoprene.

F. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.

DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

G. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.

H. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

2.3 VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Air Balance, Inc.

2. American Warming and Ventilating.
3. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
4. McGill AirFlow Corporation.
5. METALAIRE, Inc.
6. Nailor Industries Inc.
7. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.
8. Ruskin Company.
9. Vent Products Company, Inc.

B. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen
damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed
position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct
consistent with pressure class.

1. Pressure Classes of 3-Inch wg or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with axles
full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

C. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as

indicated, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or
vertical applications.

1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch thick,
with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to
walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.
2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel.
3. Aluminum Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch- thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with
flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where indicated for
installing in ducts.
4. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch- thick aluminum sheet.
5. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch- thick extruded aluminum.
6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
7. Bearings: Stainless-steel sleeve.
8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.
9. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

D. Low-Leakage Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as

indicated, low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or
vertical applications.

DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1. Steel Frames: Angle-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch
thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching
to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.
2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel.
3. Aluminum Frames: U-shaped, 0.10-inch- thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with
flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for
installing in ducts.
4. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch- thick aluminum sheet.
5. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch- thick extruded aluminum.
6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
7. Bearings: Stainless-steel sleeve thrust or ball.
8. Blade Seals: Neoprene.
9. Jamb Seals: Cambered aluminum.
10. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

E. Jackshaft: 1-inch- diameter, galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly

mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.

1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper in

multiple-damper assembly.

F. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick
zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper
operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.4 TURNING VANES

A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and

Flexible" for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1/2-inch- wide, double-vane, curved blades of

galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches
o.c.; and set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

b. Duro Dyne Corp.
c. METALAIRE, Inc.
d. Ward Industries, Inc.

C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces
and fibrous-glass fill.

2.5 DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS

A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

B. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with
insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where
indicated. Include 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.

1. Manufacturers:

a. American Warming and Ventilating.

b. CESCO Products.
c. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
d. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
e. Greenheck.
f. McGill AirFlow Corporation.
g. Nailor Industries Inc.
h. Ventfabrics, Inc.
i. Ward Industries, Inc.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
3. Provide number of hinges and locks as follows:

a. Less than 12 Inches square: Secure with two sash locks.

b. Up to 18 Inches square: Two hinges and two sash locks.
c. Up to 24 by 48 inches: Three hinges and two compression latches with outside.

C. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and round; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with
insulation fill and 1-inch thickness. Include cam latches.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

b. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with spin-in notched frame.

D. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber.

E. Insulation: 1-inch- thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.

2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

2. Duro Dyne Corp.
3. Ventfabrics, Inc.
4. Ward Industries, Inc.

B. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives

complying with UL 181, Class 1.

DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to
two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick
aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with ducts.

D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..

2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

2.7 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.

2. Hart & Cooley, Inc.
3. McGill AirFlow Corporation.

B. Noninsulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically

wound, spring-steel wire.

1. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and 0.5-inch wg negative.

2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F.

C. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound,
spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and 0.5-inch wg negative.

2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F.

D. Flexible Duct Clamps: Nylon strap, in sizes 3 through 18 inches to suit duct size.

2.8 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap
and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to
suit duct insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline
and grease.

DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous
Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories
in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts,
and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where
indicated.

D. Install volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.

E. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches
lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two duct widths
from branch takeoff.

F. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and
terminal units as follows:

1. On both sides of duct coils.

2. Downstream from volume dampers and equipment.
3. To interior of ducts for cleaning; before and after each change in direction, at maximum
50-foot spacing.
4. On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available.

H. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.

2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.
3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.

I. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, round access doors:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 inches in diameter.

2. Two-Hand Access: 10 inches in diameter.
3. Head and Hand Access: 12 inches in diameter.
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 18 inches in diameter.

J. Label access doors.

K. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and
motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.

DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

L. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and higher, cover flexible connectors with
loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.

M. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not
use flexible ducts to change directions.

N. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.

O. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.

B. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 23 Section "Testing,

Adjusting and Balancing."

END OF SECTION 233300

DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 8

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 233713 – DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers and grilles.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire dampers and volume-control dampers not
integral to diffusers and grilles.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.
2. Diffuser and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, quantity, model number,
size, and accessories furnished.

B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, speakers, sprinklers, access
panels and special moldings.
5. Duct access panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:

DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES 233713 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products

specified.

2.2 GRILLES AND REGISTERS

A. As scheduled.

B. Adjustable Bar Diffuser:

1. Products:
a. Krueger.
b. Metalaire.
c. Nailor.
d. Price.
e. Titus.
f. Tuttle & Bailey.

2. Material: Steel.
3. Finish: Baked enamel, Aluminum.
4. Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide.

C. Fixed Face Grille:

1. Manufacturers:
a. Krueger.
b. Metalaire.
c. Nailor.
d. Price.
e. Titus.
f. Tuttle & Bailey.

2. Material: Aluminum, except in the case of integral fire damper, in which case steel.
3. Finish: Baked enamel, white.
4. Face Arrangement: 1/2-by-1/2-by-1/2-inch grid core.
5. Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide.
6. Mounting: Lay in.

2.3 CEILING DIFFUSER OUTLETS

A. As scheduled.

B. Louver/Plaque Face Diffuser:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Krueger.
b. Metalaire.
c. Nailor.
d. Price.

DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES 233713 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

e. Titus.
f. Tuttle & Bailey.

2. Material: Steel.
3. Finish: Baked enamel, white.
4. Face Size: 24 X 24 or 12 X 12, as scheduled on plans.
5. Mounting: Surface or T-bar, as scheduled on plans.
6. Pattern: Four-way/Plaque core style.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of
Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers and grilles level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,
and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design
requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make
final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling
panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict
with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before
starting air balancing.

END OF SECTION 233713

DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES 233713 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 234320 - AIR PURIFICATION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. This section describes the design, performance and installation of an air purification system
intended for use as part of another manufacturer’s air handling unit or mounted on the duct as
shown on the plans, details and equipment schedules.

1.2 REFERENCED CODES & STANDARDS

A. The following codes and standards are referenced through out. The edition to be used is that
currently enforced by the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) or in absence of such direction
that referenced by the current enforceable IBC code or as indicated by the contract documents,
except where specifically referenced by this section of the specifications.

1. ASHRAE Standards 62 & 52

2. National Electric Code NFPA 70
3. UL 86-2007 including ozone chamber test required as of December 21, 2007
4. The cold plasma equipment and power supply shall be UL and CE listed.
5. The technology shall have been tested to DO-160 by an independent lab and
successfully passed all requirements for shock, vibration, EMF and line noise.
Manufacturers not tested to DO-160 shall not be acceptable.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

B. Facility Access and Protection
C. Ductwork
D. Filters
E. Water and Refrigerant Piping
F. Electrical Wiring
G. Control Wiring

1.4 QUALITY and IP ASSURANCE

A. Acceptable manufacturers shall be equal to Global Plasma Solutions, Atmos Air, Bioclimatic,
Active Air Solutions, RGF Enviromental, Plasma Air, Phenomenal Air and American Ion shall
be considered equal subject to meeting all specifications herein. All manufacturers requesting
approval and use must submit product drawings, specifications and test results specified in
section 2.2 and shall provide proof they are a licensed manufacturer not infringing upon patent
# 9,289,779 B2. Manufacturers not having a license based on patent # 9,289,779 B2 shall not
be acceptable.

B. The Air Purification System shall be a product of an established manufacturer within the USA
and shall be made of 100% USA sourced raw materials and components. Ion modules made
outside the USA and assembled in the USA on mounting plates shall not be acceptable.

AIR PURIFICATION SYSTEM 234320-1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

C. A qualified representative from the manufacturer shall be available to inspect the

installation of the air purification system to ensure installation in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendation.

D. Technologies that do not address gas disassociation such as UV Lights, Powered Particulate
Filters and/or polarized media filters shall not be considered. Uni-polar ion generators shall
not be acceptable. “Plasma” particulate filters shall not be acceptable. Any system containing
titanium dioxide (Ti02), which has been listed by the CDC as a known carcinogen, shall not be
acceptable.

E. Projects designed using ASHRAE Standard 62, IAQ Procedure shall require the manufacturer
to provide Indoor Air Quality calculations using the formulas within ASHRAE Standard 62.1-
2007 to validate acceptable indoor air quality at the quantity of outside air scheduled with the
technology submitted. The manufacturer shall provide independent test data on a previous
installation performed within the last two years and in a similar application, that proves
compliance to ASHRAE 62 and the accuracy of the calculations. The data shall be based on
the manufacturer’s use of the same make and model number as the equipment submitted on
this project.

F. The Air Purification Technology shall have been tested by UL or Intertek/ETL to prove
conformance to UL 867-2007 including the ozone chamber testing and peak ozone test for
electronic devices. Manufacturers that achieved UL 867 prior to December 21, 2007 and
have not been tested in accordance with the newest UL 867 standard with the ozone
amendment shall not be acceptable. All manufacturers requesting prior approval shall
submit their independent UL 867 test data with ozone results to the engineer for preliminary
review and during the submittal process. All manufacturers shall submit a copy with their
quotation. Contractors shall not accept any proposal without the proper ozone testing
documentation.

G. The maximum allowable ozone concentration per the UL 867-2007 chamber test shall be
0.007 PPM. The maximum peak ozone concentration per the UL 867-2007 peak test as
measured 2 inches away from the electronic air cleaner’s output shall be no more than
0.0042 PPM. Manufacturers with ozone output exceeding these ozone values shall not be
acceptable.

H. Product to be provided shall have an integral self-cleaning feature.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for ion generators including:

1. Schedule of plasma generators indicating unit designation, number of each type

required for each unit/application.
2. Data sheet for each type of plasma generator, and accessory furnished; indicating
construction, sizes, and mounting details.
3. Performance data for each type of plasma device furnished.
4. Indoor Air Quality calculations using the formulas within ASHRAE Standard
62.1-2007 to validate acceptable indoor air quality at the quantity of outside air

AIR PURIFICATION SYSTEM 234320-2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

Scheduled (when projects are designed with outside air reduction).

5. Product drawings detailing all physical, electrical and control requirements.
6. Copy of UL 867 independent ozone test.
7. Statement on the manufacturer’s letterhead stating that the technology contains no
titanium dioxide (Ti02).

B. Operating & Maintenance Data: Submit O&M data and recommended spare parts lists.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver in factory fabricated shipping containers. Identify on outside of container type of

product and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending.

B. Store in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work traffic.

C. Store indoors and in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendation for storage.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Equipment shall be warranted by the manufacturer against defects in material and

workmanship for a period of eighteen months after shipment or twelve months from owner
acceptance, whichever occurs first. Labor to replace equipment under warranty shall be
provided by the owner or installing contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. The air purification system(s) shall be of the size, type, arrangement and capacity indicated
and required by the unit furnished and shall be of the manufacturer specified.

B. All other Suppliers of comparable products requesting prior approval shall:

1. Submit for prior approval four weeks in advance in accordance with the
requirements of Section 230000.
2. In addition, manufacturers submitting for prior approval for Bi-Polar Ionization must
as part of the prior approval request provide their ASHRAE 62.1-2007 calculations that
prove conformance to the ASHRAE Standard with the reduction of outside air to the
scheduled values. A letter on the manufacturer’s letterhead requesting prior approval
must accompany the request for prior approval stating their calculations are ASHRAE
compliant. A third party validation study performed on a previous installation of the
same application using the same make and model equipment shall also be included.
3. Submit independent test data from ETL or UL showing ozone levels produced during
the UL 867 ozone chamber test. Manufacturers without this test data shall not be
acceptable.
4. Submit pathogen testing per section 2.2.
5. Submit at least two other end user references in the same application with contact
phone number, email, equipment used and application for the equipment at that facility.

AIR PURIFICATION SYSTEM 234320-3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

Manufacturers not having the above references in similar applications using the same
equipment models as proposed on the current project shall not be acceptable.
6. Ionization bars manufactured using DC output ionization modules shall not be
permitted due to corrosion, ion short circuiting, intermittent coil coverage and shock
hazard.
7. Ionization bars manufactured using ion modules not having epoxy coating all circuit
boards and internal components shall not be acceptable.
8. Manufacturers submitting as an alternate shall include their DO-160 test results.
9. It is the responsibility of any alternate manufacturer and mechanical contractor
proposing an alternate to the basis of design to confirm any proposed substituted
product does not infringe on the patented intellectual property of the basis of design.
The engineer and owner recognize the basis of design holds multiple patents and
multiple patents are pending.

2.2 BI-POLAR IONIZATION DESIGN & PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. Each piece of air handling equipment, so designated on the plans, details, equipment schedules
and/or specifications shall contain a Plasma Generator with Bi-polar Ionization output as
described here within.

B. The Bi-polar Ionization system shall be capable of:

1. Effectively killing microorganisms downstream of the bi-polar ionization equipment

(mold, bacteria, virus, etc.).
2. Controlling gas phase contaminants generated from human occupants, building
structure, furnishings and outside air contaminants.
3. Capable of reducing static space charges.
4. Effectively reducing space particle counts.
5. When mounted to the air entering side of a cooling coil, keep the cooling coil free from
pathogen and mold growth.
6. All manufacturers shall provide documentation by an independent NELEC accredited
laboratory that proves the product has minimum kill rates for the following pathogens
given the allotted time and in a space condition:

A. MRSA - >96% in 30 minutes or less

B. E.coli - > 99% in 15 minutes or less
C. TB - > 69% in 60 minutes or less
D. C. diff - >86% in 30 minutes or less
E. Noro Virus -> 93.5% in 30 minutes or less
F. Legionella -> 99.7% in 30 minutes or less

Manufacturers not providing the equivalent space kill rates shall not be acceptable. All
manufactures requesting prior approval shall provide to the engineer independent test
data from a NELAC accredited independent lab confirming kill rates and time meeting
the minimum requirements stated in section 2.2 B, points 6A, 6B and 6C. Products
tested only on Petri dishes to prove kill rates shall not be acceptable. Products being
sold under different trade names than those tested shall not be acceptable.

AIR PURIFICATION SYSTEM 234320-4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

C. The bi-polar ionization system shall operate in a manner such that equal amounts of positive
and negative ions are produced. Uni-polar ion devices shall not be acceptable. Ionizers with
positive and negative output (DC type) shall not be acceptable. All ionizers provided shall
be AC type ionizers with one electrode pulsing between positive and negative.

1. Air exchange rates may vary through the full operating range of a constant
Volume. The quantity of air exchange shall not be increased due to requirements of
the air purification system.
2. Velocity Profile: The air purification device shall not have maximum velocity profile.

D. Humidity: Plasma Generators shall not require preheat protection when the relative humidity
of the entering air exceeds 85%. Relative humidity from 0 - 100%, condensing, shall not
cause damage, deterioration or dangerous conditions within the air purification system. Air
purification system shall be capable of wash down duty.

E. Equipment Requirements:
1. Electrode Specifications (Bi-polar Ionization):
a. Each alternating current (AC) Ionization Bar with Bi-polar Ionization output
shall include a minimum of sixteen 316 medical grade stainless steel ion
needles per foot of coil face width shall be provided. The entire cooling coil
width shall have equal distribution of ionization across the face. Systems
without ion needles at least 0.75” apart shall not be acceptable. The plasma
electrode shall require no more than one inch in the direction of airflow for
mounting. All hardware required for mounting shall be provided by the air
purification manufacturer except self tapping screws for the power supply. Bi-
polar ionization tubes manufactured of glass and steel mesh shall not be
acceptable due to replacement requirements, maintenance, and performance
output reduction over time, ozone production and corrosion. Plasma
generators and bars with recessed needles shall not be acceptable.
b. Electrodes shall be energized when the main unit disconnect is turned on.
c. The ionization output shall be a minimum of 35 million ions/cc per inch of
cooling coil width as measured 1 inch from the cold plasma needles.
d. Ionization bars shall be provided with magnet mounting kits to prevent
penetration into cooling coils.

F. Air Handler Mounted Units:

1. Where so indicated on the plans and/or schedules Plasma Generator(s) shall be supplied
and installed. The mechanical contractor shall mount the Plasma Generator and wire
it to the remote mount power supply using the high voltage cables provided by the air
purification manufacturer. A 115VAC or 230VAC circuit shall be provided to the
plasma generator power supply panel. Each plasma generator shall be designed with
an aluminum casing, liquid tight flexible conduit and a high voltage quick connector.

G. Plasma Requirements

1. Plasma Generators with Bi-polar ionization output shall be capable of controlling gas
phase contaminants and shall be provided for all equipment listed above.

AIR PURIFICATION SYSTEM 234320-5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

a. The Bi-polar ionization system shall consist of Bi-Polar Plasma Generator and
power supply. The Bi-polar system shall be installed where indicated on the
plans or specified to be installed. The device shall be capable of being
powered by 115VAC or 230VAC without the use of an external transformer.
Ionization systems requiring isolation transformers shall not be acceptable.
b. Ionization Output: The ionization output shall be controlled such that
an equal number of positive and negative ions are produced (AC Ionizers only
are acceptable). Imbalanced levels shall not be acceptable.
c. Ionization output from each electrode shall be a minimum of 35 million ions/cc
when tested at 1” from the ionization generator. The ionization bar shall
provide 35 million ions/cc per inch of bar over the entire width of the
ionization bar. Bars with needles spaced further apart will not be acceptable.

2. Ozone Generation
a. The operation of the electrodes or Bi-polar ionization units shall conform to
UL 867-2007 with respect to ozone generation.

H. Electrical Requirements:

1. Wiring, conduit and junction boxes shall be installed within housing plenums
in accordance with NEC NFPA 70. Plasma Generator shall accept an
electrical service of 115 VAC or 230VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz.
The contractor shall coordinate electrical requirements with air purification
manufacturer during submittals.

I. Control Requirements:

1. All Plasma Generators shall have internal short circuit protection, overload protection,
and automatic fault reset.
2. The ionization system shall be provided with a stand-alone, independent ion sensor
designed for duct mounting to monitor the ion output and report to the BAS system that
the ion device is working properly. Ion systems provided without an independent ion
sensor, shall not be permitted. The control voltage to power the ion sensor shall be
12VDC or 24VAC to 240VAC and draw no more than 150mA of current. The sensor
shall provide at minimum, dry contact status to the BAS and optionally a BacNet or
Lonworks interface as specified on the control drawings. Manufacturers not providing a
stand-alone ion sensor shall not be acceptable.
3. The installing contractor shall mount and wire the Plasma device within the air handling
unit specified or as shown or the plans. The contractor shall follow all manufacturer
IOM instructions during installation.
4. A fiberglass NEMA 4X panel with Plasma On/Off Indicator Light (interfaced with
stand-alone ionization detector), Ionization Output On/Off Indicator Light and an
On/Off Illuminated Switch shall be provided to house the power supply.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

AIR PURIFICATION SYSTEM 234320-6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining all air systems until the owner accepts
the building (Owner Acceptance).

3.2 ASSEMBLY & ERECTION: PLASMA GENERATOR

A. All equipment shall be assembled and installed in a workman like manner to the
satisfaction of the owner, architect and engineer.

B. Any material damaged by handling, water or moisture shall be replaced, by the

mechanical contractor, at no cost to the owner.

C. All equipment shall be protected from dust and damage on a daily basis throughout
construction.

3.3 TESTING

A. Provide the manufacturers recommended electrical tests.

3.4 COMMISSIONING & TRAINING

A. A manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide start-up supervision and training of

owner's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of all equipment.

END OF SECTION 234320

AIR PURIFICATION SYSTEM 234320-7

 TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 238130 – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME AIR CONDITIONING – HEAT

RECOVERY

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The variable capacity, heat recovery air conditioning system shall be equal to a Daikin
Variable Refrigerant Volume VRV IV Series (heat and cool model) split system as
specified or approved equal. The system shall consist of multiple evaporators, branch
selector boxes, REFNET™ joints and headers, a three pipe refrigeration distribution
system using PID control and condenser unit. The condenser shall be a direct expansion
(DX), air-cooled heat recovery, multi-zone air-conditioning system with variable speed
inverter driven compressors using R-410A refrigerant. The condensing unit may connect
an indoor evaporator capacity up to 200% of the condensing unit capacity. All zones are
each capable of operating separately with individual temperature control. A dedicated
hot gas pipe shall be required to ensure optimum heating operation performance. Two-
pipe, heat recovery systems utilizing a lower temperature mixed liquid/gas refrigerant to
perform heat recovery are not acceptable due to reduced heating capabilities.

The condensing unit shall be interconnected to indoor unit models and shall range in
capacity from 7,500 Btu/h to 96,000 Btu/h in accordance with manufacturer’s
engineering data book detailing each available indoor unit. The indoor units shall be
connected to the condensing unit utilizing REFNET™ specified piping joints and headers
to ensure correct refrigerant flow and balancing. T style joints are not acceptable for a
variable refrigerant system.

Operation of the system shall permit either individual cooling or heating of each indoor unit
simultaneously or all of the indoor units associated with each branch of the cool/heat selector box.
Each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall be able to provide set temperature independently
via a local remote controller, an Intelligent Controller, an Intelligent Manager or a BMS interface.

Branch selector boxes shall be located as shown on the drawing. The branch selector boxes shall
have the capacity to control up to 290 MBH (cooling) downstream of the branch selector box.
Each branch of the branch selector box shall consist of three electronic expansion valves,
refrigerant control piping and electronics to facilitate communications between the box and main
processor and between the box and indoor units. The branch selector box shall control the
operational mode of the subordinate indoor units. The use of three EEV’s ensures continuous
heating during defrost (multiple condenser systems), no heating impact during changeover and
reduced sound levels. The use of solenoid valves for changeover and pressure equalization shall
not be acceptable due to refrigerant noise.

1.02 FEATURES AND BENEFITS

A. Voltage Platform –Heat recovery condensing units shall be available with a 208-230V/3/60
or 460V/3/60 power supply.

B. Advanced Zoning – A single system shall provide for up to 64 zones.

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME 238130-1

AIR CONDITIONING – HEAT RECOVERY
 TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

C. Independent Control – Each indoor unit shall use a dedicated electronic expansion valve with
2000 positions for independent control.

D. VFD Inverter Control and Variable Refrigerant Temperature – Each condensing unit shall use
high efficiency, variable speed all “inverter” compressor(s) coupled with inverter fan motors
to optimize part load performance. The system capacity and refrigerant temperatures shall be
modulated automatically to set suction and condensing pressures while varying the refrigerant
volume for the needs of the cooling or heating loads. The control will be automatic and
customizable depending on load and weather conditions.
Indoor units shall use PID to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature
condition and optimize efficiency.

E. Configurator software – Each system shall be available with configurator software package to
allow for remote configuration of operational settings and also for assessment of operational
data and error codes. If this software is not provided by an alternate manufacturer, for each
individual outdoor unit the contractor shall do the settings manually and keep detailed records
for future maintenance purposes.

F. Auto-charging – Each system shall have a refrigerant auto-charging function.

G. Defrost Heating – Multiple condenser VRV systems shall maintain continuous heating during
defrost operation. Reverse cycle (cooling mode) defrost operation shall not be permitted due
to the potential reduction in space temperature.

H. Oil Return Heating – Multiple condenser VRV systems shall maintain continuous heating
during oil return operation. Reverse cycle (cooling mode) oil return during heating operation
shall not be permitted due to the potential reduction in space temperature.

I. Low Ambient Cooling – Each system shall be capable of low ambient cooling operation to -
4°F DB.

J. Independent Control – Each indoor unit shall use a dedicated electronic expansion valve for
independent control.

K. Flexible Design –
1. Systems shall be capable of up to 540ft (623ft equivalent) of linear piping between the
condensing unit and furthest located indoor unit.
2. Systems shall be capable of up to 3,280ft total “one-way” piping in the piping network.
3. Systems shall have a vertical (height) separation of up to 295ft between the condensing
unit and the indoor units.
4. Systems shall be capable of up to 295ft from the first REFNET™ / branch point.
5. The condensing unit shall have the ability to connect an indoor unit evaporator capacity
of up to 200% of the condensing unit capacity.
6. Systems shall be capable of 98ft vertical separation between indoor units.
7. Condensing units shall be supported with a fan motor ESP up to 0.32”. WG as standard to
allow connection of discharge ductwork and to prevent discharge air short circuiting.

L. Oil Return – Each system shall be furnished with a centrifugal oil separator and active oil
recovery cycle

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME 238130-2

AIR CONDITIONING – HEAT RECOVERY
 TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

M. Simple Wiring – Systems shall use 16/18 AWG, 2 wire, multi-stranded, non-shielded and
non-polarized daisy chain control wiring.

N. Outside Air – Systems shall provide outside air capability.

O. Space Saving – Each system shall have a condensing unit module footprint as small as 36-
5/8’’ x 30-1/8’’.

P. Advanced Diagnostics – Systems shall include a self diagnostic, auto-check function to detect
a malfunction and display the type and location.

Q. Each condensing unit shall incorporate contacts for electrical demand shedding with optional
3 stage demand control with 12 customizable demand settings.

R. Advanced Controls – Each system shall have at least one remote controller capable of
controlling up to 16 indoor units.

S. Each system shall be capable of integrating with open protocol BACnet and LonWorks
building management systems.

T. Low Sound Levels – Each system shall use indoor and condensing units with quiet operation
as low as 27 dB(A).

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The units shall be tested by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL), in

accordance with ANSI/UL 1995 – Heating and Cooling Equipment and bear the Listed Mark.

B. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC).

C. The system will be produced in an ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 facility, which are
standards set by the International Standard Organization (ISO). The system shall be
factory tested for safety and function.

D. Mechanical equipment for wind-born debris regions shall be designed in accordance with
ASCE 7-2010 and installed to resist the wind pressures on the equipment and the supports.

E. The condensing unit will be factory charged with R-410A.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Unit shall be stored and handled according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

PART 2 – WARRANTY

2.01 STANDARD LIMITED WARRANTY

A. Daikin North America LLC warrants original owner of the non-residential building,
multifamily residence or residence in which the Daikin products are installed that under

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME 238130-3

AIR CONDITIONING – HEAT RECOVERY
 TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

normal use and maintenance for comfort cooling and conditioning applications such
products (the “Products”) will be free from defects in material and workmanship. This
warranty applies to compressor and all parts and is limited in duration to ten (10) years
starting from the ‘’installation date’’ which is one of the two dates below:

a. The installation date is the date that the unit is originally commissioned, but no later than
18 months after the manufacture date noted on the unit’s rating plate.
b. If the date the unit is originally commissioned cannot be verified, the installation date is
three months after the manufacture date.

B. OPTIONAL WARRANTY

1. System shall be provided with an additional 4 year labor warranty to the standard 1
year for a total of 5 years labor coverage.

PART 3 – PERFORMANCE

3.01 The VRV IV REYQ_T system shall perform as indicated below:

Tonnage System SCHE* System SCHE* System SCHE*

(part load - ducted) (part load – non-ducted) (part load - mixed)
6 22.60 27.80 25.20
8 23.00 27.30 25.15
10 25.10 27.90 26.50
12 23.80 25.50 24.65
14 22.80 26.60 24.70
16 22.90 26.60 24.75
18 22.50 25.60 24.05
20 22.70 25.60 24.15
22 22.00 24.40 23.20
24 21.40 23.30 22.35
26 20.30 23.60 21.95
28 20.40 23.20 21.80
30 20.20 22.60 21.40
32 18.70 22.40 20.55
34 18.30 21.80 20.05
36 18.10 21.10 19.60
38 17.90 20.90 19.40

Performance Conditions
Cooling: indoor temp. of 80°F DB, 67°F WB and outdoor temp. of 95°F DB.
Heating: indoor temp. of 70°F DB and outdoor temp. of 47°F DB, 43°F WB.
Equivalent piping length: 25ft

3.02 OPERATING RANGE

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME 238130-4

AIR CONDITIONING – HEAT RECOVERY
 TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

The operating range in cooling or cooling dominant simultaneous cooling/heating will be (-4°F)
23°F DB ~ 122°F DB.
Each system as standard shall be capable of onsite reprogramming to allow low ambient cooling
operation down to -4°F DB
The operating range in heating or heating dominant simultaneous cooling/heating will be -13°F
WB – 60°F WB.
If an alternate equipment manufacturer is selected, the mechanical contractor shall provide, at
their own risk and cost, all additional material and labor to meet low ambient operating condition
and performance.

Cooling mode indoor room temperature range will be 57°F-77°F WB.

Heating mode indoor room temperature range will be 59°F-80°F DB.

3.03 REFRIGERANT PIPING

The system shall be capable of refrigerant piping up to 540 actual feet or 623 equivalent feet from
the condensing unit to the furthest indoor unit, a total combined liquid line length of 3,280 feet of
piping between the condensing and indoor units with 295 feet maximum vertical difference,
without any oil traps.

REFNET™ piping joints and headers shall be used to ensure proper refrigerant balance and flow
for optimum system capacity and performance. T style joints shall not be acceptable as this will
negatively impact proper refrigerant balance and flow for optimum system capacity and
performance.

3.04 DESIGN BASIS

The HVAC equipment basis of design is Daikin North America. All bidders shall furnish the
minimum system standards as defined by the base bid model numbers, model families or as
otherwise specified herein. In any event, the contractor shall be responsible for all specified
items and intents of this document without further compensation.

PART 4 – PRODUCTS

4.01 CONDENSING UNIT

A. General: The condensing unit is designed specifically for use with VRV IV series
components.
1. The condensing unit shall be factory assembled in the USA and pre-wired with
all necessary electronic and refrigerant controls. The refrigeration circuit of the
condensing unit shall consist of Daikin inverter scroll compressors, motors, fans,
condenser coil, electronic expansion valves, solenoid valves, 4-way valve,
distribution headers, capillaries, filters, shut off valves, oil separators, service
ports, liquid receiver and suction accumulator.
High/low pressure gas line, liquid and suction lines must be individually
insulated between the condensing and indoor units.
2. The condensing unit can be wired and piped with access from the left, right, rear
or bottom.

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME 238130-5

AIR CONDITIONING – HEAT RECOVERY
 TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3. The connection ratio of indoor units to condensing unit shall be permitted up to

200%.
4. Each condensing system shall be able to support the connection of up to 64
indoor units dependent on the model of the condensing unit.
5. The sound pressure level standard shall be that value as listed in the Daikin
engineering manual for the specified models at 3 feet from the front of the unit.
The condensing unit shall be capable of operating automatically at further
reduced noise during night time or via an external input.
6. The system will automatically restart operation after a power failure and will not
cause any settings to be lost, thus eliminating the need for reprogramming.
7. The unit shall incorporate an auto-charging feature. Manual changing should be
support with a minimum of 2 hours of system operation data to ensure correct
operation.
8. The condensing unit shall be modular in design and should allow for side-by-side
installation with minimum spacing.
9. The following safety devices shall be included on the condensing unit; high
pressure sensor and switch, low pressure sensor, control circuit fuses, crankcase
heaters, fusible plug, overload relay, inverter overload protector, thermal
protectors for compressor and fan motors, over current protection for the inverter
and anti-recycling timers.
10. To ensure the liquid refrigerant does not flash when supplying to the various
indoor units, the circuit shall be provided with a sub-cooling feature.
11. Oil recovery cycle shall be automatic occurring 2 hours after start of operation
and then every 8 hours of operation. Each system shall maintain continuous
heating during oil return operation.
12. The condensing unit shall be capable of heating operation at -13°F wet bulb
ambient temperature without additional low ambient controls or an auxiliary heat
source.
13. The multiple condenser VRV systems shall continue to provide heat to the indoor units in
heating operation while in the defrost mode.

B. Unit Cabinet:
1. The condensing unit shall be completely weatherproof and corrosion resistant.
The unit shall be constructed from rust-proofed mild steel panels coated with a
baked enamel finish.

C. Fan:
1. The condensing unit shall consist of one or more propeller type, direct-drive 350
or 750 W fan motors that have multiple speed operation via a DC (digitally
commutating) inverter.
2. The condensing unit fan motor shall have multiple speed operation of the DC
(digitally commutating) inverter type, and be of high external static pressure and
shall be factory set as standard at 0.12 in. WG. A field setting switch to a
maximum 0.32 in. WG pressure is available to accommodate field applied duct
for indoor mounting of condensing units.
3. The fan shall be a vertical discharge configuration with a nominal airflow
maximum range of 5,544 CFM to 24,684 CFM dependent on model specified.
4. Nominal sound pressure levels shall be as shown below.

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME 238130-6

AIR CONDITIONING – HEAT RECOVERY
 TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

5. The fan motor shall have inherent protection and permanently lubricated bearings
and be mounted.
6. The fan motor shall be provided with a fan guard to prevent contact with moving
parts.
7. Night setback control of the fan motor for low noise operation by way of
automatically limiting the maximum speed shall be a standard feature. Operation
sound level shall be selectable from 3 steps as shown below.

D. Condenser Coil:
1. The condenser coil shall be manufactured from copper tubes expanded into
aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.
2. The heat exchanger coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and rifled bore tube design
to ensure high efficiency performance.
3. The heat exchanger on the condensing units shall be manufactured from Hi-X
seamless copper tube with N-shape internal grooves mechanically bonded on to
aluminum fins to an e-Pass Design.
4. The fins are to be covered with an anti-corrosion Ulta Gold coating as standard
with a salt spray test rating of 1000hr (ASTM B117 & Blister Rating:10), Acetic
acid salt spray test: 500hr (ASTM G85 & Blister Rating:10)
5. The pipe plates shall be treated with powdered polyester resin for corrosion
prevention. The thickness of the coating must be between 2.0 to 3.0 microns.
6. The outdoor coil shall have three-circuit heat exchanger design eliminating the
need for bottom plate heater. The lower part of the coil shall be used for inverter
cooling and be on or off during heating operation enhancing the defrost
operation.

E. Compressor:
1. The inverter scroll compressors shall be variable speed (PVM inverter) controlled
which is capable of changing the speed to follow the variations in total cooling
and heating load as determined by the suction gas pressure as measured in the
condensing unit. In addition, samplings of evaporator and condenser
temperatures shall be made so that the high/low pressures detected are read every
20 seconds and calculated. With each reading, the compressor capacity (INV
frequency) shall be controlled to eliminate deviation from target value. Non
inverter-driven compressors, which may cause starting motor current to exceed
the nominal motor current (RLA) and require larger wire sizing, shall not be
allowed.
2. The inverter driven compressor in each condensing unit shall be of highly
efficient reluctance DC (digitally commutating), hermetically sealed scroll “G-
type” or “J-type”.
3. Neodymium magnets shall be adopted in the rotor construction to yield a higher
torque and efficiency in the compressor instead of the normal ferrite magnet type.
At complete stop of the compressor, the neodymium magnets will position the
rotor into the optimum position for a low torque start.
4. The capacity control range shall be as low as 3% to 100%.
5. The compressors’ motors shall have a cooling system using discharge gas, to
avoid sudden changes in temperature resulting in significant stresses on winding
and bearings.
6. Each compressor shall be equipped with a crankcase heater, high pressure safety
switch, and internal thermal overload protector.

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME 238130-7

AIR CONDITIONING – HEAT RECOVERY
 TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

7. Oil separators shall be standard with the equipment together with an intelligent
oil management system.
8. The compressor shall be spring mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration
eliminating the standard need for spring insolation.
9. Compressor configurations
Tonnage Number of Compressor Types
Compressors
6 1 Inverter controlled
8 2 All inverter controlled
10 2 All inverter controlled
12 2 All inverter controlled
14 2 All inverter controlled
16 3 All inverter controlled
18 4 All inverter controlled
20 4 All inverter controlled
22 4 All inverter controlled
24 4 All inverter controlled
26 4 All inverter controlled
28 4 All inverter controlled
30 6 All inverter controlled
32 6 All inverter controlled
34 6 All inverter controlled
36 6 All inverter controlled
38 6 All inverter controlled

10. In the event of compressor failure the remaining compressors shall continue to
operate and provide heating or cooling as required at a proportionally reduced
capacity. The microprocessor and associated controls shall be designed to
specifically address this condition.
11. In the case of multiple condenser modules, conjoined operation hours of the
compressors shall be balanced by means of the Duty Cycling Function, ensuring
sequential starting of each module at each start/stop cycle, completion of oil
return, completion of defrost or every 8 hours and extending the operating life of
the system. When connected to a central control system, sequential start is
activated for all system on each DIII network.

F. Electrical:
1. The power supply to the condensing unit shall be 208-230 volts or 460V, 3
phase, 60 hertz +/- 10%.
2. The control voltage between the indoor and condensing unit shall be 16VDC
non-shielded, stranded 2 conductor cable.
3. The control wiring shall be a two-wire multiplex transmission system, making it
possible to connect multiple indoor units to one condensing unit with one 2-cable
wire, thus simplifying the wiring installation.
4. The control wiring lengths shall be as shown below.

4.02 BS(4/6/8/10/12)Q_T BRANCH SELECTOR BOX FOR VRV IV HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME 238130-8

AIR CONDITIONING – HEAT RECOVERY
 TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

A. General: The branch selector boxes are designed specifically for use with heat
recovery system components.
1. These selector boxes shall be factory assembled, wired, and piped.
2. These branch controllers must be run tested at the factory.
3. These selector boxes must be mounted indoors.
4. When simultaneously heating and cooling, the units in heating mode shall
energize their subcooling electronic expansion valve.

B. Unit Cabinet:
1. These units shall have a galvanized steel plate casing.
2. Each cabinet shall house 3 electronic expansion valves for refrigerant control per
branch.
3. The cabinet shall contain one subcooling heat exchanger per branch.
4. The unit shall have sound absorption thermal insulation material made of flame
and heat resistant foamed polyethylene.
5. Nominal sound pressure levels must be measured and published on the submittals
by the manufacturer. These sound levels must not exceed the values below.

C. Refrigerant Valves:
1. The unit shall be furnished with 3 electronic expansion valves per branch to control the
direction of refrigerant flow. The use of solenoid valves for changeover and pressure
equalization shall not be acceptable due to refrigerant noise.
2. The refrigerant connections must be of the braze type.
3. In multi-port units, each port shall have its own electronic expansion valves. If
common expansion/solenoid valves are used, redundancy must be provided.
4. Multiple indoor units may be connected to a branch selector box with the use of a
REFNET™ joint provided they are within the capacity range of the branch
selector.

D. Condensate Removal:
1. The unit shall not require provisions for condensate removal. A safety device or
secondary drain pan shall be installed by the mechanical contractor to comply
with the applicable mechanical code.

E. Electrical:
1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz.
2. The unit shall be capable of operation within the limits of 187 volts to 255 volts.
3. The minimum circuit amps (MCA) shall be 0.1 and the maximum overcurrent
protection amps (MOP) shall be 15.
4. The control voltage between the indoor and condensing unit shall be 16VDC non-
shielded 2 conductor cable.

4.03 VRV INDOOR UNITS:

4.04 ROUND FLOW SENSING CEILING CASSETTE UNIT

A. General: Indoor unit shall be a round flow ceiling cassette fan coil unit, operable with
R-410A refrigerant, equipped with an electronic expansion valve, direct drive DC
(ECM) type fan, for installation into the ceiling cavity equipped with an air panel
grill. It shall be available in capacities from 7,500 Btu/h to 48,000 Btu/h. It shall be

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME 238130-9

AIR CONDITIONING – HEAT RECOVERY
 TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

a round flow air distribution type, fresh white, impact resistant decoration panel, or
optional self-cleaning filter panel. The supply air is distributed via four individually
motorized louvers. To save energy and optimize occupancy comfort, the indoor unit
shall be equipped with built in occupancy sensor and surface temperature sensor.
Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable
room temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying
mechanism that dehumidifies while limiting changes in room temperature when used
with the remote control. The indoor units sound pressure shall range from 30 dB(A)
to 45 dB(A) at High speed measured at 5 feet below the unit.

B. Indoor Unit:
1. The indoor unit shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in
the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control
circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain
pan, condensate drain pump, condensate safety shutoff and alarm, self-
diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time delay, and test run switch.
2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to
shipment from the factory.
3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit.
4. The round flow supply air flow can be field modified to 23 different airflow
patterns to accommodate various installation configurations including corner
installations.
5. Return air shall be through the concentric panel, which includes a resin net, mold
resistant, antibacterial filter.
6. The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan with antibacterial
treatment and condensate pump. The condensate pump provides up to 33-1/2” of
lift from bottom of unit to top of drain piping and has a built in safety shutoff and
alarm.
7. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor.
8. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208~230V/1-phase/60Hz.
9. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum.
10. To save energy and optimize occupancy comfort, the indoor unit shall be
equipped with built in occupancy sensor and surface temperature sensor.
11. Supplied air shall be directed automatically by four individually controlled
louvers.

C. Unit Cabinet:
1. The cabinet shall be space saving and shall be located into the ceiling.
2. Four auto-adjusted louvers shall be available to choose, which include standard,
draft prevention and ceiling stain prevention.
3. The airflow of the unit shall have the ability to shut down outlets with multiple
patterns allowing for simpler installation in irregular spaces.
4. Fresh air intake shall be possible.
5. A branch duct knockout shall exist for branch ducting of supply air.
6. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and
polyethylene insulation.
7. Optional high efficiency air filters are available for each model unit.

D. Fan:

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME 238130-10

AIR CONDITIONING – HEAT RECOVERY
 TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1. The fan shall be direct-drive DC (ECM) type fan, statically and dynamically
balanced impeller with three fan speeds available.
2. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor
output range from 0.08 to 0.16 HP.
3. The airflow rate shall be available in three manual settings.
4. The DC fan shall be able to automatically adjust the fan speed in 5 speeds based
on the space load.
5. The fan motor shall be equipped as standard with adjustable external static
pressure (ESP) settings to allow operation with the high efficiency air filter
options.
6. The fan motor shall be thermally protected.

E. Filter:
1. The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable long-life filter with
mildew proof resin and antibacterial treatment.
2. Optional high efficiency disposable air filters shall be available.

F. Coil:
1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes
expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.
2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube
design to ensure highly efficient performance.
3. The coil shall be a 2, or 3-row cross fin copper evaporator coil with up to 21 FPI
design completely factory tested.
4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the condensate will be
1 -1/4 inch outside diameter PVC.
5. A condensate pan with antibacterial treatment shall be located under the coil.
6. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line.

G. Electrical:
1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The
acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts.
2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a
maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet).
3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote controller shall
be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet.

H. Control:
1. The unit shall have controls provided by manufacturer to perform input functions
necessary to operate the system.
2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via optional
LonWorks or BACnet gateways.
3. The unit shall be compatible with a Intelligent Touch Manager advanced multi-
zone controller.

I. Optional Accessories Available:

1. A high efficiency disposable air filter kit
2. Air intake kit
3. Remote “in-room” sensor kit.

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME 238130-11

AIR CONDITIONING – HEAT RECOVERY
 TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

4.05 FOUR WAY CEILING CASSETTE UNIT (2’x2’)

A. General: Indoor unit shall be a ceiling cassette fan coil unit, operable with R-410A
refrigerant, equipped with an electronic expansion valve, for installation into the
ceiling cavity equipped with an air panel grill. It shall be available in capacities from
7,500 Btu/h to 18,000 Btu/h. It shall be a four-way air distribution type, white,
impact resistant with a washable decoration panel. The supply air is distributed via
motorized louvers which can be horizontally and vertically adjusted from 0° to 90°.
Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable
room temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying
mechanism that dehumidifies while limiting changes in room temperature when used
with remote control. The indoor units sound pressure shall range from 29 dB(A) to
34 dB(A) at low speed measured at 5 feet below the unit.

B. Indoor Unit:
1. The indoor unit shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the
unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control
circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain
pan, condensate drain pump, condensate safety shutoff and alarm, self-
diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time delay, and test run switch.
2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to
shipment from the factory.
3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit.
4. The 4-way supply air flow can be field modified to 3-way and 2-way airflow to
accommodate various installation configurations including corner installations.
5. Return air shall be through the concentric panel, which includes a resin net mold
resistant filter.
6. The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan and condensate pump.
The condensate pump provides up to 21” of lift and has a built in safety shutoff
and alarm.
7. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor.
8. All electrical components are reached through the decoration panel, which
reduces the required side service access.
9. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208~230V/1-phase/60Hz.
10. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum.

C. Unit Cabinet:

1. The cabinet shall be space saving and shall be located into the ceiling.
2. Three auto-swing positions shall be available to choose, which include standard,
draft prevention and ceiling stain prevention.
3. The airflow of the unit shall have the ability to shut down one or two sides
allowing for simpler corner installation.
4. Fresh air intake shall be possible by way of direct duct installation to the side of
the indoor unit cabinet.
5. A branch duct knockout shall exist for branch ducting supply air.
6. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and
polyethylene insulation.

D. Fan:

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME 238130-12

AIR CONDITIONING – HEAT RECOVERY
 TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1. The fan shall be direct-drive turbo fan type with statically and dynamically
balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available.
2. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor
output range from 0.06 to 0.12 HP.
3. The airflow rate shall be available in high and low settings.
4. The fan motor shall be thermally protected.

E. Filter:
1. The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable long-life filter with
mildew proof resin.

F. Coil:
1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes
expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.
2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube
design to ensure highly efficient performance.
3. The coil shall be a 2-row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 17 FPI design
completely factory tested.
4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the condensate will be
1 -1/32 inch outside diameter PVC.
5. A condensate pan shall be located under the coil.
6. A condensate pump with a 21 inch lift shall be located below the coil in the
condensate pan with a built in safety alarm.
7. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line.

G. Electrical:
1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The
acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts.
2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a
maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet).
3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote controller shall
be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet.

H. Control:
1. The unit shall have controls provided by the manufacturer to perform input
functions necessary to operate the system.
2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via optional
LonWorks or BACnet gateways.
3. The unit shall be compatible with a Intelligent Touch Manager advanced multi-
zone controller.

I. Optional Accessories Available:

1. Direct fresh air intake kit.
2. Supply air duct connections.
3. Remote “in-room” sensor kit.

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME 238130-13

AIR CONDITIONING – HEAT RECOVERY
 TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

4.06 CONCEALED CEILING DUCTED UNIT

A. General: Indoor unit shall be a built-in ceiling concealed fan coil unit, operable with
refrigerant R-410A, equipped with an electronic expansion valve, direct-drive DC
(ECM) type fan with auto CFM adjustment at commissioning, for installation into the
ceiling cavity. It is constructed of a galvanized steel casing. It shall be available in
capacities from 7,500 Btu/h to 48,000 Btu/h. It shall be a horizontal discharge air
with horizontal return air configuration. All models feature a low height cabinet
making them applicable to ceiling pockets that tend to be shallow. Computerized
PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room
temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying
mechanism that dehumidifies while limiting changes in room temperature when used
with the remote control. Included as standard equipment, a condensate drain pan and
drain pump kit that pumps to 18-3/8” from the drain pipe opening. The indoor units
sound pressure shall range from 29 dB(A) to 43 dB(A) at low speed measured 5 feet
below the ducted unit.

B. Indoor Unit:
1. The indoor unit shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in
the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control
circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain
pan, condensate drain pump, condensate safety shutoff and alarm, self-
diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time delay, and test run switch.
The unit shall be equipment with automatically adjusting external static pressure
logic that is selectable during commissioning. This adjusts the airflow based on
the installed external static pressure.
2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to
shipment from the factory.
3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit.
4. The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan and condensate pump.
The condensate pump provides up to 18-3/8” of lift from the center of the drain
outlet and has a built in safety shutoff and alarm.
5. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor.
6. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208~230V/1-phase/60Hz.
7. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum.

C. Unit Cabinet:
1. The cabinet shall be located into the ceiling and ducted to the supply and return
openings.
2. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and
polyethylene insulation.

D. Fan:
1. The fan shall be direct-drive DC (ECM) type fan, statically and dynamically
balanced impeller with three fan speeds available.
2. The unit shall be equipment with automatically adjusting external static pressure
logic selectable during commissioning.
3. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor
output range of 0.12 to 0.47 HP respectively.

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME 238130-14

AIR CONDITIONING – HEAT RECOVERY
 TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

4. The airflow rate shall be available in three settings.

5. The fan motor shall be thermally protected.
6. The fan motor shall be equipped as standard with adjustable external static
pressure (ESP) settings.

E. Coil:
1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes
expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.
2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube
design to ensure highly efficient performance.
3. The coil shall be a 3 row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 15 fpi design
completely factory tested.
4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the condensate will be
1-1/4” outside diameter PVC.
5. A condensate pan shall be located under the coil.
6. A condensate pump with an 18-3/8” lift shall be located below the coil in the
condensate pan with a built in safety alarm.
7. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line.

F. Electrical:
1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The
acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts.
2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a
maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet).
3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote controller shall
be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet.

G. Control:
1. The unit shall have controls provided by the manufacturer to perform input
functions necessary to operate the system.
2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via optional
LonWorks or BACnet gateways.
3. The unit shall be compatible with an Intelligent Touch Manager advanced multi-
zone controller.

H. Optional Accessories Available:

1. Remote “in-room” sensor kit.
a. MERV 13 Filter kit. Can be configured for right or left access. Filters replaceable
without tools.

PART 5 – EXECUTION

5.01 INSTALLATION

A. Contractor shall be factory trained, certified and an authorized provider/installer of the

equipment and shall provide verification of such and shall provide examples of installation of
systems of this type and size.

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME 238130-15

AIR CONDITIONING – HEAT RECOVERY
 TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

B. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer’s requirements, shop drawings, and contract
documents.

C. Coordinate electrical installation with electrical contractor. The electrical contractor shall
provide all power wiring. The electrical contractor shall provide conduit and wiring of the
flow switch.

D. Coordinate controls with control contractor.

5.02 START-UP

A. All members of the mechanical contractor’s installation team shall complete and be certified
to install the equipment that was submitted. The certification of each team member shall be
provided to the manufacturer prior to commencing installation.
B. Installation shall be completed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s installation manual.
Extra care shall be provided to allow for expansion and contraction of the piping. Expansion
loops shall be installed per the manufacturer’s recommendation and at no additional expense
to the owner. All refrigerant piping shall be purged with dry nitrogen during the installation
process – purge pressure shall be 1.5-3 psig.
C. All refrigerant piping shall be insulated with a minimum of ¾” thick Armaflex II insulation
OR whatever the local code authority requires. The thicker of the two. All insulation shall be
sealed to not allow for any air to enter the insulation. Joints shall be glued and sealed per the
insulation manufacturer’s recommendation. All insulation located outdoors shall be jacketed
with aluminum jacket or coated with a UV stable coating if allowed in the insulation portion
of these contract documents.
D. Under no circumstances shall the equipment be operated prior to start-up. The equipment
shall not be operated without filters in place. The equipment shall not be utilized for
temporary cooling. If temporary cooling is required, the general contractor shall provide and
not rely on this equipment.
E. The installing contractor shall document all fan coil units, branch selector boxes and outdoor
units, prior to start-up. The data shall be separated and provided by system.
F. The installing contractor shall complete the installation of all the fan coil units, branch
selector boxes and outdoor units along with all the piping. Prior to pressure testing the
system, a technical service representative of the manufacturer, not sales person, shall provide
an onsite review of the systems. Any deficiencies in the piping shall be documented and
signed by both the technical service representative of the manufacturer AND the installing
contractor. Upon remediation of any deficiencies the mechanical contractor shall pressurize
the system with nitrogen to 500 psig. The start time shall be documented via photo and sent
to manufacturer. The system shall maintain at 500 psig for a minimum of 24 hours.
Photographic documentation shall be provided to the manufacturer. In the event that the
system does not hold 500 psig for 24 hours, the contractor shall repair the various leaks and
start the process offer, documenting as described above. The evacuation and charging of the
system will not occur until this documentation is provided.
G. The equipment manufacturer shall verify that all the fan coil units, branch selector boxes and
outdoor units are communicating with each other. All equipment shall have power supplied
and available for operation of the system. The manufacturer shall verify that communication
between all equipment, including room controllers is operational. Any deficiencies in wiring
shall be documented by the manufacturer and corrected by the installing contractor prior to
start-up of the equipment.

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME 238130-16

AIR CONDITIONING – HEAT RECOVERY
 TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

H. The manufacturer shall connect their diagnostic tool (Service Checker) and create a
diagnostic log of each system and each fan coil unit of the following data, at a minimum,
which will be used as a baseline for the testing that will be completed prior to the contractor
provided one year warranty:
I. Verify that each system operates with the proper temperatures, differential temperatures and
superheat conditions in both cooling and heating.
J. Verify that each fan coil unit operates properly in both heating and cooling. This is to verify
that the piping is installed properly.
K. Provide a copy of all operational logs to the mechanical contractor and provide a copy of all
operational logs with the Operation and Maintenance manuals.
L. In the event that the system utilizes a touch screen or web based controller that is specific to
the manufacturer, the MANUAFACTURER, shall properly install and set-up the controller,
complete with plan view of system, scheduling, grouping and temperature schedules. The
scheduling, room numbering, temperature set points – occupied and unoccupied shall be done
in conjunction with the owner.
M. The equipment MANUFACTURER shall provide a minimum of eight (8) hours (two (2) –
four hour segments) of onsite training for the owner and their representatives regarding their
specific installation. At a minimum, the manufacturer shall demonstrate how the system
operates, interpretation of diagnostic codes, reset procedures, proper operation of room
controllers. All training shall be documented and signed by the owner’s representatives.
Documentation of owner training shall be included with the Operation and Maintenance
manuals submitted at the close of the project.
N. The equipment MANUFACTURER shall be responsible for the first year labor warranty for
the system. The warranty period shall start when proper operational logs are delivered to the
contractor.
O. The equipment MANUFACTURER shall provide ten (10) year parts warranty on all
equipment including room controllers. The warranty shall be in effect for ten (10) years have
start-up or 10 years + six (6) months after shipment, whichever comes first.

END OF SECTION 238130

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME 238130-17

AIR CONDITIONING – HEAT RECOVERY
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 238138 – SPLIT SYSTEM OUTSIDE AIR UNITS (HEAT PUMP)

Part 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The variable capacity, heat pump air conditioning system shall be a Daikin Variable
Refrigerant Volume Series (heat or cool model) split system as specified. The system
shall consist of multiple evaporators, REFNET™ joints and headers, a two-pipe
refrigeration distribution system using PID control, and Daikin VRV outdoor unit. The
outdoor unit is a direct expansion (DX), air-cooled heat pump, multi-zone air-
conditioning system with variable speed driven compressors using R-410A refrigerant.
The outdoor unit may connect an indoor evaporator capacity up to 200% of the outdoor
condensing unit capacity. All zones are each capable of operating separately with
individual temperature control.

The outdoor unit shall be interconnected to indoor unit models specifically compatible
with the outdoor unit. The indoor units shall be connected to the outdoor utilizing
specified piping joints and headers provided by the unit manufacturer.

Operation of the system shall permit either cooling or heating of all of the fan coil units. Each fan
coil or group of fan coils shall be able to provide set temperature independently via a local remote
controller, an Intelligent Controller, an Intelligent Manager or a BMS interface – LonWorks or
BacNet. If a third party building automation system is specified, the variable refrigerant volume
system shall be connected to it via either Lonworks or BacNet.

1.02 FEATURES AND BENEFITS

A. Voltage Platform – Heat pump condensing units shall be available with voltage and phase
scheduled on the electrical prints..
B. Advanced Zoning – A single system shall provide for up to 41 zones.
C. Auto-charging – Each system shall have a refrigerant auto-charging function.
D. Charge Checking – Each system shall have a refrigerant charge checking function.
E. Defrost Heating – Each system shall maintain continuous heating during defrost operation.
F. Oil Return Heating – Each system shall maintain continuous heating during oil return
operation.
G. Independent Control – Each fan coil shall use a dedicated electronic expansion valve for
independent control.
H. VFD Inverter Control – Each condensing unit shall use a high efficiency, variable speed
“inverter” compressor coupled with inverter fan motors for superior part load performance.
Compressor capacity shall be modulated automatically to maintain a constant suction
pressure, while varying the refrigerant volume for the needs of the cooling or heating loads.
Indoor fan coil units shall use PID control to control superheat and maintain the temperature
setpoint within +/- 1°F.
I. Flexible Design –
1. Systems shall be capable of up to 540ft (640ft equivalent) of linear piping between the
condensing unit and furthest located fan coil unit.
2. Systems shall be capable of up to 3,280ft total “one-way” piping in the piping network.

SPLIT SYSTEM OUTSIDE AIR UNITS (HEAT PUMP) 238138-1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3. Systems shall have a vertical (height) separation of up to 295ft between the condensing
unit and the fan coil units.
4. Systems shall be capable of 295ft from the first REFNET™ / branch point.
5. The outdoor unit shall connect an indoor evaporator capacity up to 200% of the outdoor
condensing unit capacity.
6. Systems shall be capable of 49ft between fan coil units.
7. Condensing units shall be supported with a fan/fan motor ESP up to 0.32” WG as
standard to allow connection of discharge ductwork and to prevent discharge air short
circuiting.
J. Simple Wiring – Systems shall use 16 AWG, 2 wire, multi-stranded, non-shielded and non-
polarized daisy chain control wiring.
K. Energy Efficiency – System shall have equivalent or better performance than high efficiency
air cooled or water cooled chiller systems.
L. Outside Air – Systems shall provide outside air capability.
M. Advanced Diagnostics – Systems shall include a self-diagnostic, auto-check function to
detect a malfunction and display the type and location.
N. Advanced Controls – Each system shall have at least one remote controller capable of
controlling up to 16 fan coil units.
Each system shall be capable of integrating with open protocol BACnet and LONworks
building management systems.
O. Low Sound Levels – Each system shall use indoor and outdoor units with quiet operation as
low as 25 dB(A).

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The units shall be listed by Electrical Laboratories (ETL) and bear the cETL label.
B. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC).
C. The system will be produced in an ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 facility, which are
standards set by the International Standard Organization (ISO). The system shall be
factory tested for safety and function.
D. Mechanical equipment for wind-born debris regions shall be designed in accordance with
ASCE 7-2002 and installed to resist the wind pressures on the equipment and the supports.
E. The outdoor unit will be factory charged with R410A.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Unit shall be stored and handled according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Part 2 – WARRANTY

2.01 WARRANTY

The unit manufacturer shall warrants to the customer who is the original owner and user that
under normal use and maintenance for comfort cooling and conditioning applications such
products will be free from defects in material or workmanship. This warranty applies to parts only
and is limited in duration to one (1) year from the earlier to occur of (a) the date of original
installation, whether or not actual use begins on that date, or (b) eighteen (18) months from the
date of shipment by the manufacturer. Repaired or replacement parts are warranted for the
balance of the warranty period applicable to the original part following the date on which the
repaired or replacement part is provided to the Customer.

SPLIT SYSTEM OUTSIDE AIR UNITS (HEAT PUMP) 238138-2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2.02 EXTENDED WARRANTY

For its compressors only, the unit manufacturer shall provide the above warranty (which is
applicable to parts only) for a six (6) year period. This extended warranty for compressors is
limited in duration to six (6) years from the earlier to occur of (a) the date of original installation,
whether or not actual use begins on that date, or (b) eighteen (18) months from the date of
shipment by the manufacturer, and applies to the compressor and compressor parts only. The
effective date of this extended warranty shall be established as above.

2.03 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

The system must be installed by a factory trained contractor. The bidders shall be required to
submit training certification proof with bid documents. The mechanical contractor’s installation
price shall be based on the systems installation requirements. The mechanical contractor bids
with complete knowledge of the HVAC system requirements. Untrained contractors who wish to
bid this project may contact the local manufacturer’s representative to arrange training prior to
bid day..

Part 3 – PERFORMANCE

3.01 The variable refrigerant volume system outdoor unit shall perform as indicated on the contract
documents.

3.02 REFRIGERANT PIPING

The system shall be capable of refrigerant piping up to 540 actual feet or 620 equivalent feet from
the outdoor unit to the furthest indoor unit, a total combined liquid line length of 3,280 feet of
piping between the condensing and indoor units with 295 feet maximum vertical difference,
without any oil traps. REFNET™ piping joints and headers shall be used to ensure proper
refrigerant balance and flow for optimum system capacity and performance. T style joints shall
not be acceptable

3.03 DESIGN BASIS

The HVAC equipment basis of design is Daikin AC. All bidders shall furnish the minimum
system standards as defined by the base bid model numbers, model families or as otherwise
specified herein (see Key General Specifications Alternate Supplier Checklist). In any event, the
contractor shall be responsible for all specified items and intents of this document without further
compensation.

Part 4 – PRODUCTS

4.01 OUTDOOR UNIT

A. General: The outdoor unit is designed specifically for use with variable refrigerant
volume components.
1. The outdoor unit shall be factory assembled and pre-wired with all necessary
electronic and refrigerant controls. The refrigeration circuit of the condensing

SPLIT SYSTEM OUTSIDE AIR UNITS (HEAT PUMP) 238138-3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

unit shall consist of Daikin scroll compressors, motors, fans, condenser coil,
electronic expansion valves, solenoid valves, 4-way valve, distribution headers,
capillaries, filters, shut off valves, oil separators, service ports and refrigerant
regulator.
High/low pressure gas line, liquid and suction lines must be individually
insulated between the outdoor and indoor units.
2. The outdoor unit can be wired and piped with outdoor unit access from the left,
right, rear or bottom.
3. The connection ratio of indoor units to outdoor unit shall be permitted up to
200%.
4. Each outdoor system shall be able to support the connection of up to 41 indoor
units dependent on the model of the outdoor unit.
5. The sound pressure level standard shall be that value as listed in the Daikin
engineering manual for the specified models at 3 feet from the front of the unit.
The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating automatically at further reduced
noise during night time.
6. The system will automatically restart operation after a power failure and will not
cause any settings to be lost, thus eliminating the need for reprogramming.
7. The unit shall incorporate an auto-charging feature and a refrigerant charge check
function.
8. The outdoor unit shall be modular in design and should allow for side-by-side
installation with minimum spacing.
9. The following safety devices shall be included on the condensing unit; high
pressure switch, control circuit fuses, crankcase heaters, fusible plug, high
pressure switch, overload relay, inverter overload protector, thermal protectors
for compressor and fan motors, over current protection for the inverter and anti-
recycling timers.
10. To ensure the liquid refrigerant does not flash when supplying to the various fan
coil units, the circuit shall be provided with a sub-cooling feature.
11. Oil recovery cycle shall be automatic occurring 2 hours after start of operation
and then every 8 hours of operation.
12. The outdoor unit shall be capable of heating operation at 0°F dry bulb ambient
temperature without additional low ambient controls.
13. The system shall continue to provide heat to the indoor units while in the defrost
mode.
B. Unit Cabinet:
1. The outdoor unit shall be completely weatherproof and corrosion resistant. The
unit shall be constructed from rust-proofed mild steel panels coated with a baked
enamel finish.
C. Fan:
1. The condensing unit shall consist of one or more propeller type, direct-drive 350
and 750 W fan motors that have multiple speed operation via a DC (digitally
commutating) inverter.
2. The condensing unit fan motor shall have multiple speed operation of the DC
(digitally commutating) inverter type, and be of high external static pressure and
shall be factory set as standard at 0.12 in. WG. A field setting switch to a
maximum 0.32 in. WG pressure is available to accommodate field applied duct
for indoor mounting of condensing units.
3. The fan shall be a vertical discharge configuration with a nominal airflow
maximum range of 6,350 CFM to 13,000 CFM dependent on model specified.
4. Nominal sound pressure levels shall not exceed 63 db(A).

SPLIT SYSTEM OUTSIDE AIR UNITS (HEAT PUMP) 238138-4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

5. The fan motor shall have inherent protection and permanently lubricated bearings
and be mounted.
6. The fan motor shall be provided with a fan guard to prevent contact with moving
parts.
7. Night setback control of the fan motor for low noise operation by way of
automatically limiting the maximum speed shall be a standard feature. Operation
sound level shall be selectable from 3 steps as shown below.

Operation Sound (dB) Night Mode

Sound Pressure Level (dB)
Step 1 max. 55
Step 2 max. 50
Step 3 max. 45

D. Condenser Coil:
1. The condenser coil shall be manufactured from copper tubes expanded into
aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.
2. The heat exchanger coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and rifled bore tube design
to ensure high efficiency performance.
3. The heat exchanger on the condensing units shall be manufactured from Hi-X
seamless copper tube with N-shape internal grooves mechanically bonded on to
aluminum fins to an e-Pass Design.
4. The fins are to be covered with an anti-corrosion acrylic resin and hydrophilic
film type E1.
5. The pipe plates shall be treated with powdered polyester resin for corrosion
prevention. The thickness of the coating must be between 2.0 to 3.0 microns.
E. Compressor:
1. The inverter scroll compressors shall be variable speed (PAM inverter) controlled
which is capable of changing the speed to follow the variations in total cooling
and heating load as determined by the suction gas pressure as measured in the
condensing unit. In addition, samplings of evaporator and condenser
temperatures shall be made so that the high/low pressures detected are read every
20 seconds and calculated. With each reading, the compressor capacity (INV
frequency or STD ON/OFF) shall be controlled to eliminate deviation from target
value.
2. The inverter driven compressor in each condensing unit shall be of highly
efficient reluctance DC (digitally commutating), hermetically sealed scroll “G-
type” with a maximum speed of 6,480 rpm.
3. Neodymium magnets shall be adopted in the rotor construction to yield a higher
torque and efficiency in the compressor instead of the normal ferrite magnet type.
At complete stop of the compressor, the neodymium magnets will position the
rotor into the optimum position for a low torque start.
4. The capacity control range shall be as low as 6% to 100%.
5. Each non-inverter compressor shall also be of the hermetically sealed scroll type.
6. Each compressor shall be equipped with a crankcase heater, high pressure safety
switch, and internal thermal overload protector.
7. Oil separators shall be standard with the equipment together with an intelligent
oil management system.
8. The compressor shall be spring mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration.

SPLIT SYSTEM OUTSIDE AIR UNITS (HEAT PUMP) 238138-5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

9. Units sized 8-10 ton shall contain a minimum of 2 compressors, 12-20 ton units
shall contain a minimum of 4 compressors. In the event of compressor failure
the remaining compressors shall continue to operate and provide heating or
cooling as required at a proportionally reduced capacity. The microprocessor and
associated controls shall be designed to specifically address this condition.
10. In the case of multiple condenser modules, conjoined operation hours of the
compressors shall be balanced by means of the Duty Cycling Function, ensuring
sequential starting of each module at each start/stop cycle, completion of oil
return, completion of defrost or every 8 hours.
F. Electrical:
1. The power supply to the outdoor unit shall be as scheduled on the electrical
prints.
2. The control voltage between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be 16VDC non-
shielded, stranded 2 conductor cable.
3. The control wiring shall be a two-wire multiplex transmission system, making it
possible to connect multiple indoor units to one outdoor unit with one 2-cable
wire, thus simplifying the wiring operation.

4.02 OUTSIDE AIR PROCESSING UNIT

A. General: Indoor unit shall be a built-in ceiling concealed fan coil unit, operable with
refrigerant R-410A, equipped with an electronic expansion valve, for installation into
the ceiling cavity. The unit shall be capable of introducing up to 100% outside air
controlled to a fixed discharge air temperature. It is constructed of a galvanized steel
casing. It shall be available in capacities from 48,000 Btu/h to 96,000 Btu/h. It shall
be a horizontal discharge air with horizontal return air configuration. All models
feature a low height cabinet making them applicable to ceiling pockets that tend to be
shallow. Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a
comfortable room temperature condition. The indoor units sound pressure shall
range from 42 dB(A) to 47 dB(A) at low speed measured 5 feet below the ducted
unit.

B. Indoor Unit:
1. The indoor unit shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in
the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control
circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, self-diagnostics,
auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time delay and test run switch.
2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to
shipment from the factory.
3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit.
4. The indoor units shall be equipped with a discharge air thermistor.
5. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208~230V/1-phase/60Hz.
6. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum.

C. Unit Cabinet:
1. The cabinet shall be located into the ceiling and ducted to the supply and return
openings.
2. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and
polyethylene insulation.

D. Fan:

SPLIT SYSTEM OUTSIDE AIR UNITS (HEAT PUMP) 238138-6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1. The fan shall be direct-drive Sirocco type fan, statically and dynamically
balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available.
2. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz, with a motor
output of 0.51 HP.
3. The fan motor shall be thermally protected.

E. Coil:
1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes
expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.
2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube
design to ensure highly efficient performance.
3. The coil shall be a 3 row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 13 Fins per inch
design completely factory tested.
4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the condensate will be
1-5/16 inch outside diameter PVC.
5. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line.

F. Electrical:
1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The
acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts.
2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a
maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet).
3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote controller shall
be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet.

G. Control:
1. The unit shall have controls provided by the manufacturer to perform input
functions necessary to operate the system.
2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via optional
LonWorks or BACnet gateways.
3. The unit shall be compatible with an Intelligent Touch Manager advanced multi-
zone controller.

END OF SECTION 238138

SPLIT SYSTEM OUTSIDE AIR UNITS (HEAT PUMP) 238138-7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 260000 - GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. The electrical portion of this project includes all labor, materials, equipment, etc., required to
provide the complete electrical work to fulfill the intent of the Contract Documents.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. All applicable provisions of Division 0 and 1 govern work under this division. Refer to these
articles in the specifications for additional information.

B. All work shall be in compliance with the currently enforced edition of the applicable state, national,
and local ordinance and building codes, and the National Electric Code. No additional compensation
shall be granted for work which must be changed as a result of the work not originally complying
with the codes and standards. etc.

C. Refer to each section for additional applicable codes and reference standards.

1.3 FEES, PERMITS AND TAXES

A. This Contractor is responsible for all inspection fees and permits required by local authorities having
jurisdiction. The Contractor is also responsible for all taxes levied for labor and materials associated
with the electrical portion of the work. After completion of the work, a certificate of final inspection
shall be provided showing approval from the local Electrical Inspector.

B. This contractor is responsible for any fees, charges or installation costs charged by the local utility
for the new electrical service provided.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall be provided for all items indicated. Product data shall be from published
manufacturer’s data. Data shall include enough information so that the Engineer can verify
compliance with codes, standards, and the contract documents. Submittal shall not contain data that
is not relevant to the equipment being submitted. The data shall be highlighted by arrows,
underlining, etc. broad, general data, is not acceptable. Data shall be presented at one time, in a
neatly bound and organized manner.

B. The contractor shall provide and maintain at the site a set of prints which accurately represent the
actual installation of all work under this Division. Any changes in sizes, locations, dimensions, etc.
shall be shown. Changes in circuitry shall be clearly and completely indicated as the work
progresses.

GENERAL PROVISIONS 260000-1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

C. At the completion of the Project, a set of marked-up drawings, including DIMENSIONED, location
of all underground conduit shall be provided to the owner.

1.5 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS

A. Operating and Maintenance Data includes printed information, such as manufacturer's installation
instructions, manufacturer’s service manuals, manufacturer’s lubrication charts, standard wiring
diagrams, and a parts list including the price of each item.

B. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Operating and Maintenance
Data includes information on several products that are not required, mark copies to indicate the
applicable information.

C. Do not submit Operating and Maintenance Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract
Documents has been confirmed.

D. Submittals: Submit 3 copies of each required submittal. The Engineer will return the copies marked
with action taken and corrections or modifications required. Unless resubmittal is requested, the
submittal may serve as the final submittal.

1.6 PRIOR APPROVAL

A. The contractor shall submit a list of proposed substitutions to the Engineer. All proposed
substitutions shall be in writing to the Engineer, at least, ten (10) calendar days prior to bid opening.
The submittal will list the proposed substitutions from published manufacturer’s data, which cover
the applicable features of the submitted equipment. Any approvals shall be issued in writing.

1.7 GUARANTEE

A. The contractor shall fully guarantee the installation against defects in materials and workmanship
which may occur under normal usage for a period of one year after owner’s acceptance. Defects
shall be promptly remedied at no cost to the owner. This guarantee is in addition to, and not a limit
to, any other guarantees or warranties.

1.8 DEFINITIONS. The following words and phases are defined:

A. "Indicated": The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the
Drawings; or to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and similar requirements in the
Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to
help the user locate the reference. Location is not limited.

B. "Directed": Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required,"

and "permitted" mean directed by the Architect/Engineer, requested by the Architect/Engineer, and
similar phrases.

GENERAL PROVISIONS 260000-2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

C. "Approved": The term "approved," when used in conjunction with the Architect's/Engineer=s action
on the Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Architect's/Engineer=s
duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

D. "Regulations": The term "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued
by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the
construction industry that control performance of the Work.

E. "Furnish": The term "furnish" means to supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading,
unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

F. "Install": The term "install" describes operations at the Project site including the actual unloading,
temporary storage, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to
dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

G. "Provide": The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended
use.

H. "Installer": An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an
employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity,
including installation, erection, application, or similar operations. Installers are required to be
experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform

I. "Project site" is the space available to the Contractor for performing construction activities, either
exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the Project. The extent of
the Project site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of
the land on which the Project is to be built.

J. "Testing Agencies": A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific

inspections or tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to
interpret results of those inspections or tests.

1.9 INSPECTION OF THE SITE

A. The drawings are prepared from the most accurate information available. However, the contractor
shall, prior to placing any bids, visit the site to verify existing conditions, proposed conduit routings,
etc.

B. All proposals shall take these existing conditions and any speculated revisions needed into account.
The contractor shall be fully responsible for his bid regardless of any additional site information
which may be uncovered after a contract is signed.

1.10 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY

A. The plans and specifications do not include items necessary for the contractor to insure the safety of
his personnel on the project construction site. Construction site safety for the project is the
responsibility of the contractor. Reference other sections of these specifications for any additional
information.

GENERAL PROVISIONS 260000-3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1.11 DAMAGE

A. The contractor shall be held accountable to repair, at no additional cost, any damage to existing
wiring, piping, or other materials and equipment intended to remain.

1.12 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. Should be considered as complimentary to each other. What is required by one shall be binding as if
required by both. If conflicts between plans and specifications are found, the Engineer shall be
contacted to secure clarification, prior to bidding. The contractor shall verify all dimensions and
existing conditions.

1.13 MANUFACTURER’S DRAWINGS AND DATA

A. Submit Shop Drawings for approval, for all items indicated below.

1. Panelboards
2. Disconnect Switches
3. Lighting

B. Provide O&M Manuals i.a.w, Paragraph 1.5, for all items indicated below.

1. Panelboards
2. Lighting Contactors

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 WORKMANSHIP

A. All work shall be done in a professional and complete manner by experienced craftsmen.
Unsatisfactory workmanship shall be duly noted and corrected at the contractors expense.

B. Only new materials shall be used, unless otherwise indicated on plan or prior approved.

2.2 MANUFACTURER’S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

A. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer=s installation instructions.

2.3 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT

A. The contractor shall provide protection of stored material and installed equipment against dirt, rust,
moisture, and abuse from other trades. Where tarps or other cover is used, provide air circulation to
prevent condensate build up. No materials or equipment shall be stored directly on the ground.

GENERAL PROVISIONS 260000-4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2.4 CONFLICTS, INTERFERENCES AND COORDINATION BETWEEN TRADES

A. Coordinate work so as to conform with the progress of the work of others. The drawings are only
intended to indicate the extent, general location and arrangement, of conduit systems and equipment.
Any questions regarding the information given on the plans shall be directed to the Engineer for
clarification. The contractor shall refer to other sections of the specifications and other drawings
such as structural, mechanical, etc., in order to eliminate conflicts when laying out his work. The
contractor shall be responsible for the proper coordination of the electrical work with the
installations under other Divisions for clearances, etc. Any changes required to avoid interferences
shall be submitted to the Architect for approval and shall be made, as approved, without additional
cost.

B. Code requirements shall have precedence over plans or specifications in the event of a conflict. If a
discrepancy or conflict exists between specifications and drawings, drawings shall take precedence
over specifications except as pertaining to quality. Manufacturer’s installation instructions shall
govern the installation of all equipment.

C. Control wiring, schematics, or logic shown on plan is only intended to show the general intent.
Such plans are not to be considered shop drawings. The contractor is responsible for determining
and coordinating the detailed requirements, including but not limited to wiring, to interface systems
and provide a fully functional system which follows the intent.

D. The contractor shall coordinate with equipment suppliers for any requirements specific to the
equipment provided which may not be shown on the plans or given in the specifications. The
contractor shall include the provision and installation of such requirements in his bid. The
contractor shall coordinate with equipment suppliers, prior to bid, to determine what ancillary
equipment is or is not provided with the equipment, such as lugs, terminal blocks, etc.

E. Equipment requiring set grades or elevations and piping has precedence over conduit, boxes, etc. as
to location.

F. The contractor shall coordinate with other equipment providers to insure correct operation of the
equipment, such as, phase rotation, interlocking, accessibility, etc.

G. Low voltage temperature control systems for HVAC systems including controls, relays, time clocks,
wiring and devices will be furnished and wired under Division 23. 120Vac wiring required in
support of HVAC and other mechanical/plumbing systems shall be furnished and wired under
Division 26.

H. The contractor shall examine the Architectural plans for the location of suitable openings and aisles
for the passage of equipment to be installed under this Division. The contractor shall be responsible
for having suitable openings and aisles left open until his equipment has been properly installed.

I. Except as otherwise noted, it shall be understood that the indication and/or description of any item,
in the drawings or specifications, or both, carries with it the instruction to furnish and install the
item, regardless of whether or not this instruction is explicitly stated as part of the indication or
description.

J. It shall be understood that the plans are not intended to indicate exact raceway routings.
Determination as to the routing shall be made in consideration of structural conditions and
interferences with other trades or by terminal locations on apparatus.

GENERAL PROVISIONS 260000-5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

K. The right is reserved to make reasonable changes in locations of equipment indicated in Drawings
prior to installation without an increase in the contract cost.

L. The drawings and specifications do not undertake to indicate every item required to produce a
complete and properly operating installation. Material, equipment or labor not indicated, but which
can be reasonably inferred to be necessary for a complete installation shall be provided.

2.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Every effort shall be made to build-in the work as the job progresses. As required, cutting and
patching for the installation of sleeves, conduits, equipment, etc., shall be coordinated with the
General Contractor. Do not cut any structural element without written permission from the
Structural Engineer.

2.6 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. The contractor shall make final connection of all required services to all equipment items furnished,
including that provided by others or by the owner. Equipment shall be left in a ready to operate
state.

2.7 FLASHING AND WATERPROOFING

A. Any building penetrations to outside shall be flashed, as required, to prevent leaks.

END OF SECTION 260000

GENERAL PROVISIONS 260000-6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 260500 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Work of this section includes specification of the following:

Wire and connectors.

Wiring and control devices.
Electrical identification.
Firestopping
Demolition
Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
Touchup painting.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide electrical components, devices, and accessories specified in this section that are UL listed
and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.

B. The materials and methods used for all electrical components, devices, and accessories specified in
this section shall comply with NFPA 70.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and arrange
in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations that
follow.

1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other structural
components as they are constructed.

B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow
of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in the
building.

C. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate installation
of identification devices with completion of finished surface.

D. Where electrical identification markings and devices will be concealed by acoustical ceilings and
similar finishes, coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation.

E. Verify characteristics, sizes, and ratings, of motors actually supplied prior to providing starter,
overload protection and branch circuit wiring.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Wire/Cable
a. Anaconda
b. American Wire and Cable
c. Southwire
d. Okonite Company

2. Wire/Cable Connectors

Split-Bolt Connectors
a. Appleton
b. Crouse-Hinds
c. Teledyne

Solderless Pressure Connectors

a. Burndy
b. Thomas and Betts
c. AMP

Spring Wire Connectors

a. Burndy
b. Thomas and Betts
c. Teledyne

Compression Connectors
a. Burndy
b. Crouse-Hinds
c. Teledyne

B. All wire sizes specified shall be i.a.w. American Wire Gauge (AWG) designations.

C. Conductors, No. 10 awg and smaller shall be solid or stranded copper. Larger than 10 awg shall be
stranded copper. Copper clad conductors are not permitted.

D. Conductors shall be copper with not less than 95% conductivity.

E. Insulation for power conductors shall be type THW or THHN, rated 600 volts, rated 75 deg. C
minimum. Conductor insulation for feeders size 1/0 and larger may be type RHW moisture and
heat resistant rubber. Conductor insulation shall have the manufacturers name, type insulation and
conductor size imprinted on the jacket at regular intervals. Branch circuit conductors sizes #6 awg
and smaller may be type TW. For conductors wired in fluorescent light fixture cable runs use type
RHH or THHN insulation rated 90 deg. C.

F. Conductor phasing shall be as follows. From left to right, the first bus in each panel shall be Phase
‘A’, middle bus ‘B’, and right bus ‘C’.

G. Insulation shall be color coded as required by NFPA 70, 210-5. Color coding shall be consistent
throughout the project. Use white conductors only for circuit neutrals. When unable to provide a

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

white conductor, the neutral shall be identified at switches, panelboards, junction boxes, etc. with
white tape or paint. Equipment grounds shall be green. Isolated equipment grounds shall be green
with yellow stripe.

H. All materials used for wire connections and splices shall be of the size, ampacity, material type,
and class suitable for the service.

I. Provide wire and cable terminations made with UL-listed one-piece, compression deforming type,
solderless high conductivity copper or copper alloy terminal lugs as follows:

1. Terminal lugs shall have hole sizes and spacing i.a.w. NEMA standards.
2. Terminal lugs on wire sizes 3/0 and smaller shall be single hole, single compression type.
Wire and cable No. 6 awg and smaller may be terminated on mechanical type connections or
terminal strips integral with the equipment or wiring device. The mechanical connector and
terminal strip shall be UL-listed copper, either tubular type with a pressure plate or screw
type with a wire clamp. The screw shall not directly compress the conductors.
3. Terminal lugs for use on wire sizes 4/0 and larger shall be two-hole, long barrel, double
compression type.

J. In general, there shall be no splices from the power source to the load without written approval
from the Engineer. If written approval is given, provide splices and taps which are made with
solderless copper compression deforming connectors and which bear the UL label. All splices and
taps shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer=s written instructions.

1. A solid barrel crimped connector shall be used for splices and taps on wire sizes No. 8 AWG
and smaller.
2. A solid barrel compression connector or bolting solid barrel terminal lugs shall be used for
splices and taps on wire sizes No. 6 AWG and larger.

K. Connection to motors, solenoids and other devices with integral leads sized No. 4 AWG and
smaller (including all current transformers) shall be made with ring-type pressure connectors.
Provide connectors bolted together and taped with oil-resistant electrical tape. Soldered or
insulation piercing type connectors shall not be used. No connection shall be inside a conduit
fitting.

2.2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

A. Wire markers shall be a vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted
numbers and letters.

B. Engraved-Plastic labels, signs, and instruction plates shall be a melamine plastic laminate punched
or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1/16-inch minimum thickness for signs up to 20 sq. in. and 1/8-
inch minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters on white background.

C. Nameplates and signs fasteners shall be self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless-
steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

D. The service entrance panelboard shall be labeled “Service Entrance”, i.a.w., NFPA 70, Section
230-70(b).

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

E. “Danger - 480 Volts” warning signs shall be black lettering on either orange or yellow background.
Sign shall be at least 4"x6" and may be either self-adhering or mechanically fastened.

2.3 TOUCHUP PAINT

A. Equipment touch-up paint shall be selected to match the installed equipment finish. For galvanized
surfaces, a zinc-rich paint recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Materials and components shall be installed level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other
building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.

Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.

C. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact
routing and lengths required. Wire and cable routing indicated on the Drawings is approximate
unless dimensioned. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions.

D. Branch circuit wiring is generally sized not to exceed a two-percent voltage drop, but in no case
shall exceed a three-percent voltage drop.

3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring in a conduit raceway with conductors of the types and sizes as shown on the
drawings and specified in these specifications. Where no type or size is given install conductors as
required by code.

B. From panels extend a complete system of wiring to all fixtures, motors, devices, and other
equipment. Employ multi-wire circuits as indicated. Connect circuits to panelboards to give an
evenly balanced load. Secure approval for any departure from the circuit arrangement as shown.

C. Numerals shown on the drawing Ahome-runs@ indicate the circuit arrangement. Cross marks on
branch circuit runs indicate the number of conductors required. Where no cross marks are shown,
two conductors are indicated.

D. All home runs shall be 12 (twelve) awg or larger as indicated. Provide 10 (ten) awg where home
runs exceed 60 feet in length. No wire smaller than #12 is permitted serving lighting or outlets.

E. Do not pull conductors until the entire conduit system is complete and the building is Ain the dry@.
Use only UL approved lubricants to facilitate conductor pulling.

F. Furnish all switches, connections, branch circuits, wiring, etc. to HVAC equipment, as needed, to
provide a complete power wiring system. Install and connect 120 Vac control devices which are to
be included in power wiring.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

G. Furnish raceway, backboxes, wiring, connections, etc. for all equipment and systems furnished
under this or other section(s) of these specifications, or by Owner, for a complete installation i.a.w.
suppliers and manufacturers instructions. All equipment shall be connected ready for operation,
i.a.w, detailed wiring diagrams furnished by the equipment manufacturer and in cooperation with
the respective subcontractor or Owner. Provide receptacles to match equipment furnished plugs.

H. Install wiring at outlets with a minimum of 8" of slack conductor.

I. Install pre-finished cord sets where connection with an attachment plug is indicated or specified, or
use attachment plug with suitable strain relief clamps.

J. Solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers shall be used for copper conductor splices
and taps, No. 8 awg and smaller.

K. Insulation on approved splices and taps for wire sizes No. 8 AWG and smaller shall consist of:

1. Half-lapped layers of all weather pvc tape installed to a thickness equivalent to the conductor
insulation. Or
2. An insulation system consisting of a heat shrink or cold shrink system properly sized for the
application.

L. Insulation on approved splices and taps for wire sizes No. 6 AWG and larger shall consist of:

1. A minimum of three half-lapped layers of yellow, varnished cambric tape and three half-
lapped layers of all weather pvc tape. An electrically insulating putty may be used over
irregular shapes prior to application of the tape.
2. An insulation system consisting of a heat shrink or cold shrink system properly sized for the
application.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES

A. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and
maintenance of equipment.

B. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification
with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or required by codes and
standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

C. Clean surfaces before applying self-adhesive identification products.

D. Tag and label circuits designated to be extended in the future. Identify source and circuit numbers
in each cabinet, pull and junction box, and outlet box. Color-coding may be used for voltage and
phase identification.

E. Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for exterior underground
power, control, signal, and communication lines located directly above power and communication
lines. Locate 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. If width of multiple lines installed in a common
trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 16 inches, overall, use a single line marker.

F. Install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are
needed for system or equipment operation. Install metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

G. Panel schedules for existing branch circuit panel boards shall be updated for all circuit changes.

H. All enclosures containing 480 volt circuit conductors shall be clearly labeled with a ADanger - 480
Volts@ warning sign.

I. Label raceway branch circuit junction boxes as to the panel(s) and circuit number(s) from which
the circuit(s) originates. Use machine printed, pressure sensitive, abrasion resistant label tape on the
faceplate and wiremarkers or tags within the box.

J. Provide engraved nameplates to identify all electrical distribution and control equipment and loads
served. Letter height shall be 1/8 inch for individual switches and loads served, 1/4 inch for
distribution and control equipment identification.

K. Panelboards, switchboards and motor control centers shall have 1/4 inch letter engraved nameplates
to identify with the equipment designation, 1/8 inch lettering to identify the voltage rating and
source.

L. Provide an engraved nameplate with 1/8 lettering to identify the conductor color coding scheme at
each panelboard and switchboard. Mount on the interior of the door if so equipped, otherwise on
the back of the trim.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Penetrations of fire rated floor and wall assemblies shall be sealed with firestop material
appropriate to achieve the designated fire resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping materials
and installation requirements are specified in Division 7.

3.5 DEMOLITION

A. Remove all existing lighting lamps and fixtures exercising caution to prevent damage. All such
lamps and fixtures shall be made available to the owner. Any items the owner does not want shall
be properly disposed of by the contractor.

B. Remove all existing duplex receptacles. In receptacle locations not subject to reuse, repair wall and
prepare for new finish.

C. All lighting and duplex receptacle branch circuit wiring will be pulled back to the originating
panelboard and removed.

D. In wall raceway may be capped and abandoned in place. All existing raceway which is run above
the ceiling shall be removed and disposed of by the contractor. In wall raceway may be reused
where appropriate for the location of a new receptacle outlet.

E. Remove existing telephone and cable outlets. Also remove existing door hold devices. Pull
telephone wiring back to existing terminal board and remove. Pull dictation cable back to nearest
junction box which is exterior to the room and disconnect. Pull door hold device cabling back to
the nearest junction box and remove. Remove existing nurse call and intercom devices. Pull
wiring back to nearest junction box external to the room and remove. Repair wall and make ready
for new finish.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

F. All demolished materials shall be removed from the project site and disposed of properly.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to
permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed
surfaces. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

3.7 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING

A. The following procedure should be used for refinishing and/or touch-up needed:

1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit
the degree of damage at each location.
2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and
application of successive coats.
3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 260500

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING & BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment and basic requirements for
grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits, and systems. Grounding requirements
specified in this Section may be supplemented in other Sections of these Specifications.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Referenced standards include:

NFPA 70 - National Electric Code

OSHA 1910 - Standards for General Industry
ANSI/IEEE 81 - Guide for Measuring Earth Resitivity. Ground Impedence, and Earth
Surface Potentials of a Ground System

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide electrical components, devices, and accessories specified in this section that are UL listed
and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.

B. Grounding rod resistance shall be 10 ohms or less.

C. Grounding system to be tested i.a.w. ANSI/IEEE Std 81 using the “two-point” method.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Mechanical Connectors
a. O.Z. Gedney
b. Burndy
c. Thomas & Betts, Electrical

2. Exothermic Connections
a. Caldweld
b. Thermoweld

GROUNDING & BONDING 260526 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2.2 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS

A. Where types, sizes, ratings, and quantities indicated are in excess of National Electrical Code
(NEC) requirements, the more stringent requirements and the greater size, rating, and quantity
indications govern.

2.3 WIRE AND CABLE GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Wire and cable grounding conductors shall conform to NEC Table 8, except as otherwise indicated.

B. All equipment grounding conductors shall be insulated with green color insulation.

C. Grounding-electrode conductors shall be stranded copper cable.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS CONDUCTORS

A. Where required, braided bonding jumpers shall be a copper tape, braided No. 30 AWG bare copper
wire, terminated with copper ferrules. Bonding straps shall be soft copper, 0.05
inch thick and 2 (two) inches wide.

2.5 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS

A. Pressure type connectors shall be of a high-conductivity-plated design.

B. Bolted Clamps shall be heavy-duty type.

C. Exothermic-welded connections shall be as provided in kit form and selected per manufacturer's
written instructions for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Equipment grounding conductors shall be installed to comply with NEC Article 250. Where types,
sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, are more than required by NEC use the
more stringent requirements.

1. Install insulated equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors for the items below
in addition to those required by Code:
a. Feeders and branch circuits.
b. Lighting circuits.
c. Receptacle circuits.
d. Flexible raceway runs.
e. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.
f. Single phase motor or appliance branch circuits.
g. Three phase motor or appliance branch circuits.

GROUNDING & BONDING 260526 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2. Install a separate equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater, heat-tracing
assembly, and antifrost heating cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected
equipment, and components.

B. Exothermic welded connections shall be used for all underground connections or connections to
structural steel

C. Equipment grounding conductor connections will be made with bolted pressure clamps.

D. Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal
for all isolated grounding receptacle circuits. Isolate grounding conductor from raceway and from
panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the
applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.

E. As noted on the plans, for designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate
equipment enclosure from supply raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose.
Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate equipment grounding
terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system
or service, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Install an equipment grounding conductor to air duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V
and more, including air cleaners and heaters. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct.

G. Provide grounding and installation for telephone equipment i.a.w., NFPA 70, Section 800.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding conductors shall be routed along the shortest and straightest paths possible, except as
otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected
to strain, impact, or damage.

B. For underground grounding conductors, use bare copper wire buried at least 24 inches below grade.

C. Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building=s main service
equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect
grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by grounding clamp connectors. Where a
dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to street side of fitting. Bond
metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. Use braided-type bonding
jumpers to electrically bypass water meters.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Select connectors,

connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be
galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to assure high conductivity and to make contact
points closer in order of galvanic series.

GROUNDING & BONDING 260526 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.

B. Use exothermic-welded connections for connections to structural steel and for underground
connections. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that
show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.

C. Equipment grounding-wire terminations for No. 8 awg and larger, use pressure-type grounding
lugs. No. 10 awg and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type
connectors.

1. Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression
connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide
embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector
has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.

D. Where metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without mechanical and electrical connection
to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a
bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically
noncontinuous conduits at both entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding
conductors, except as otherwise indicated.

E. Where insulated grounding conductors are connected to grounding rods or grounding buses,
insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable.

END OF SECTION 260526

GROUNDING & BONDING 260526 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems and its contents.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported

equipment and connected systems and components.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel slotted support systems.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with NFPA 70.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field
assembly.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit.

b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
c. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
d. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to

MFMA-4.
3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated
fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of

threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or
cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces
as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,
shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or
their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:

1) Hilti Inc.
2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened

portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

2) Hilti Inc.
3) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS
Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for
attached structural element.
5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with
ASTM A 325.
6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical
equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in
diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel support
system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding
specified design load limits.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-
1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above
suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and
RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength
will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported
components plus 200 lb.

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods
unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.

2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock
washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm)
thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs
less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69
7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,
transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing
bars.

3.3 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION 260529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

1. Raceways include the following:

a. EMT - Electrical Metallic Tubing
b. FMC - Flexible Metal Conduit
c. LFMC - Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit
d. PVC - PVC coated, Rigid Steel Conduit
e. RNC - Rigid Non-metallic Conduit
f. RSG - Rigid Steel Galvanized Conduit

2. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets include the following:

a. Device boxes.
b. Floor boxes.
c. Outlet boxes.
d. Pull and junction boxes.
e. Cabinets and hinged-cover enclosures.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

B. Referenced standards include:

NFPA 70 - National Electric Code

ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard, Rigid Steel Galvanized Conduit
ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard, Electrical Metallic Tubing
OSHA 1910 - Standards for General Industry
NEMA FB1 - National Electrical Manufacturers Assoc., fittings
NEMA TC 3 - PVC fittings

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways and boxes with other construction elements to
ensure adequate headroom, working clearance, and access.

B. Field verify measurements.

C. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 260533 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Metal Conduit and Tubing:

a. Allied Tube and Conduit
b. Triangle
c. Wheatland
d. Anaconda (flexible conduit)

2. Nonmetallic Conduit and Tubing:

a. Carlon
b. Robroy
c. Anaconda

3. Conduit Bodies and Fittings:

a. Crouse-Hinds
b. Appleton
c. O-Z/Gedney

4. Fire Rated Fittings:

a. Crouse-Hinds
b. O-Z/Gedney
c. Appleton

5. Expansion/Deflection Fittings:
a. Crouse-Hinds
b. O-Z/Gedney
c. Appleton

6. Cable Trough/Wireway
a. B-Line
b. Wiremold
c. Hoffman
d. Hammond

7. Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets:

a. Crouse-Hinds
b. Hoffman
c. B-Line
d. Robroy

2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. EMT and Fittings

1. All electrical metallic tubing shall comply with the latest revision of ANSI C80.3.

2. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) shall be galvanized steel and shall be used for all indoor
concealed or exposed work, unless otherwise noted. Connectors and couplings shall be
threadless compression type.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 260533 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

B. FMC

1. Flexible metal conduit shall be used for final connections to motors. Conduit shall be of an
interlocked steel construction.

C. LFMC

1. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall be used in wet locations for final connections to
motors and other equipment subject to vibration. Preference given to neoprene jacketed
Seal-tite by Anaconda or equal.
D. PVC

1. PVC coated rigid steel conduit shall be used for all transitions from below grade to 18
(eighteen) inches above the finished grade or floor.

E. RSG

1. All rigid steel galvanized conduit shall comply with the latest revision of ANSI C80.1.

2. Rigid steel galvanized conduit shall be used for all exterior exposed work, unless otherwise
noted. Rigid steel galvanized conduit shall be used in all NEC, classified, hazardous
locations whether interior or exterior.

F. Fittings

1. All fittings shall comply with the requirements of NEMA FB 1, standard for conduit fittings,
cast metal boxes, and conduit bodies. All fittings used shall be compatible with the conduit
and tubing materials used.

2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT

A. RNC

1. Unless otherwise noted, all rigid nonmetallic conduit shall be schedule 40 PVC complying
with NEMA TC 3 standards.

2. RNC shall be used for underground cable runs, unless otherwise noted. Provide schedule 80
PVC where underneath roadways and drives subject to vehicle traffic.

B. Fittings

1. Unless otherwise noted, all fittings used with nonmetallic conduit shall be schedule 40 PVC
complying with NEMA TC 3 standards. The fittings used shall be compatible with conduit
size and type.

2.4 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES

A. Metal Boxes

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 260533 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1. Provide galvanized steel metal boxes sized to accommodate devices and conductors as per
NEC Art. 370 at each outlet location indicated on the drawings or as required. Boxes shall
be a minimum of 1.5" deep, of metal a minimum of 1/16" thick.

2. Boxes used with exposed conduit should be a four-inch square utility box.

3. The owner reserves the right to make adjustments to the location of outlet boxes prior to
rough-in.

4. Sizes and configuration of boxes shall be as required for the intended service. The boxes
shall conform to and be applied, i.a.w, NEC requirements. Supports, gaskets, extension
rings, etc. shall be provided where required.

5. Gang type boxes shall be used where multiple wiring devices are located together.

B. Floor Boxes

1. Floor boxes shall be located as indicated on the drawings. Coordinate with architect/owner
prior to final placement. A multi-function floor box, providing completely segregated power
and data cabling and outlets, shall be used where power and communications outlets are
shown in the same general location, even when the outlets are shown on different electrical
plan sheets.

2. Nonmetallic boxes suitable for concrete encasement may be used.

3. Boxes equal to Wiremold 880MP, rectangular, series, with separate, brushed aluminum, flip
lid, cover plates.

2.5 CABLE TROUGH/WIREWAY

A. The contractor shall furnish a complete wireway/trough system in accordance with the
requirements as specified on the plan drawings.

B. The wireway shall be NEMA 3R, 14 or 16 gauge galvanized steel, provided with removable
covers.

C. All wireways shall be provided with dividers, as needed to maintain cable separation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for compliance with
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of raceway installation. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 260533 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

A. Install raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets as indicated, according to manufacturer's written
instructions.

B. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size. Homeruns shall be 3/4" minimum.

C. Conceal conduit and EMT, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors,
except in equipment room. Do not run conduit in cavity of exterior wall.

D. Keep raceways at least 12 inches away from hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above
water piping.

E. Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations. Provide adequate headroom.

F. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

G. All conduits, concealed or exposed, shall be supported and substantially fastened to structural
members at intervals of not more than 8 (eight) feet. Attach supporting devices with screws, bolts,
expansion sleeves or other workmanlike means appropriate to the surface. Boxes which are not
embedded in masonry or concrete shall be fastened to the structure in the same manner as for
conduits.

H. Use temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.

I. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portion
of bends is not visible above the finished slab. Where conduits emerge from the ground or slab,
provide a rigid steel adapter, elbow and conduit. Slope conduits to drain away from the building.
All metal conduits installed underground shall be PVC coated. PVC coated rigid steel conduit shall
be used within five feet from foundation walls.

J. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and straight
legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.

K. Use raceway fittings compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

L. Run concealed raceways, with a minimum of bends, in the shortest practical distance considering
the type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated.

M. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle third of slab thickness where practical, and leave
at least 1-inch concrete cover.

1. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete

placement.
2. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete.
3. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size parallel to or at right angles to main reinforcement.
Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.
4. Transition from nonmetallic tubing to rigid steel conduit before rising above floor.

N. Install exposed raceways parallel to or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members, and
follow the surface contours as much as practical.

1. Run parallel or banked raceways together, on common supports where practical.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 260533 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same centerline. Use factory elbows only where
elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways.

O. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight.

1. Make raceway terminations tight. Use bonding bushings or wedges at connections subject to
vibration. Use bonding jumpers where joints cannot be made tight.
2. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.

P. Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter
squarely and install locknuts with dished part against the box. Where terminations are not secure
with 1 locknut, use 2 locknuts: 1 inside and 1 outside the box. Provide bushings on ends where
auxiliary system conduit raceway is stubbed out into furred space, adjacent to backboard, etc.

Q. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into the hub
so the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align
raceways so the coupling is square to the box and tighten the chase nipple so no threads are
exposed.

R. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or monofilament plastic
line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of the
pull wire.

S. Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to the above
requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90-
degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to
comply with these requirements.

T. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding
equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with the
finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; FMC may be used 6
inches above the floor. Install screwdriver- operated, threaded flush plugs flush with floor for
future equipment connections.

U. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 6 feet of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed
lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all
motors. Use liquidtight flexible conduit in wet or damp locations. Install separate ground
conductor across flexible connections.

V. Provide galvanized sheet metal pull boxes with screw type cover, as required, to avoid excessive
runs or bends between outlets.

W. Grade all raceway away from service entrance equipment to prevent water damage.

X. Provide expansion fittings in all conduits crossing an expansion joint. Fitting shall be OZ type
AEX@ for rigid metal conduit or schedule 40 pvc. Fitting shall be OZ type ATX@ for EMT. Metallic
conduit not containing a grounding conductor shall have OZ type ABJ@ bonding jumpers installed
across expansion joints. Provide expansion fittings for PVC conduit runs over 150 feet, or
outdoors or in areas or runs subject to temperature variations over 75 degrees F, and as
recommended by the manufacturer.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 260533 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

Y. Grouped raceways shall be supported with galvanized steel channel assemblies equal to Kindorf B-
909 and single bolt straps equal to Kindorf C-105. Raceway supports shall be spaced within 2
(two) feet of termination and/or connection and 8 (eight) feet on center for rigid steel, and EMT
conduit. RNC shall be supported i.a.w. NFPA 70, 347-8. FNMC shall be supported within 12
(twelve) inches of termination/connection and 4.5 (four and one-half) feet on center.

Z. The drawings indicate approximate locations only. Determine the exact location on site in
consideration of all structural and architectural conditions.

AA. Provide and install Alow point drains@ in all above grade, outdoor raceway. Provide and install
breather drains in the bottom of outdoor control panels. As much as possible, route conduits into
the bottom of control panels.

BB. All phase conductors and, where used, the grounded conductor, and all equipment grounding
conductors shall be grouped together in a single raceway. Where multiple phase conductors are run
in parallel, separate conduits shall be run to contain one set of all phase conductors, neutral (if
used) and the equipment grounding conductor.

CC. Where underground conduits stub-up through concrete equipment pad “blocked out” windows,
after curing blocks, fill the block-out window with gravel to 1” of the top and cap with mortar.
Caulk all entrances and around the mortar.

DD. Set floor boxes level and trim after installation to fit flush to finished floor surface.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner that ensures coatings, finishes, and
cabinets are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.

3.4 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including chips, scratches,
and abrasions.

END OF SECTION 260533

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 260533 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Identification for raceways.

2. Identification of power and control cables.
3. Identification for conductors.
4. Warning labels and signs.
5. Equipment identification labels.
6. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with NFPA 70.

B. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

C. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

D. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks
used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in
other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's
wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes,
standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of
color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field.

2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted,
flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching
wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

2.2 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of
color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and
chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend
label.

2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08
mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and
chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend
label.

C. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification
legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels,

configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise
indicated.

C. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-

inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for
application.
2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.
3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm).

2.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting.
White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine
screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and
methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners
appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and
junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors
listed below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied.

b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black.
2) Phase B: Red.
3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a

minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent
possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

G. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors
using adhesive-film-type labels.

H. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-
adhesive warning labels Baked-enamel warning signs.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.

2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of
equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches.

b. Controls with external control power connections.

I. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label
that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control
panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,
lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is
provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless

otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high
letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use
labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.
b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for
viewing from the floor.
d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with
appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of
the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by

panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated
acrylic or melamine label.
b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.
c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
d. Switchboards.
e. Enclosed switches.
f. Contactors.

END OF SECTION 260553

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices:

1. Indoor occupancy sensors.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

B. PIR: Passive infrared.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors.

1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: UL listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, and marked for intended use.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that
penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke
detectors, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Hubbell Lighting.
2. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
3. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.
4. Novitas, Inc.
5. Sensor Switch, Inc.
6. TORK.

B. General Description: Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a separate relay unit.

1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and
off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum
range of 1 to 15 minutes.
2. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A.
Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.
3. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A
tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc,
150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70.
4. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.

b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch (13-mm) knockout in a standard
electrical enclosure.
c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged
door.

5. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal
operation of the sensor.
6. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure.
7. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (21.5 to 2152 lx); keep
lighting off when selected lighting level is present.

C. PIR Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a combination of heat and
movement in area of coverage.

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum movement of

any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm).
2. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq.
ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.
3. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90 feet (27.4 m) when mounted
on a 10-foot- (3-m-) high ceiling.

D. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a change in pattern of

reflected ultrasonic energy in area of coverage.

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12
inches (305 mm) in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12
inches/s (305 mm/s).
2. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of
600 sq. ft. (56 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.
3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area
of 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.
4. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of
2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.
5. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet (27.4 m)
when mounted on a 10-foot- (3-m-) high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet
(4.3 m).

E. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by using a combination of PIR

and ultrasonic detection methods in area of coverage. Particular technology or combination of
technologies that controls on-off functions shall be selectable in the field by operating controls
on unit.

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.

2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum movement of
any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm),
and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches (305 mm)
in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s (305
mm/s).
3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area
of 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas
indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-
limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless
otherwise indicated.

C. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in
junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring.

1. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by occupancy sensors at each sensor.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements.
2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time
delays.

B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit occupied conditions. Provide up to two
visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

END OF SECTION 260923

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 262200 - DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS (1000 V and Less)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes dry-type distribution and specialty transformers rated 1000 V and less.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Referenced Standards include:

NFPA 70 - National Electric Code

OSHA 1910 - Standards for General Industry

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data on features, components, ratings, and performance for each type of
transformer specified. Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevation views. Show minimum
clearances and installed devices and features.

B. Submit shop drawings which detail wiring and identify terminals for tap changing and connecting
field-installed wiring.

C. Provide a product certificate signed by the transformer manufacturer certifying that the products
furnished comply with requirements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide transformers specified in this Section that are listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100.

B. As defined in OHSA Regulation 1910.7, the Listing and Labeling Agency shall be a "Nationally
Recognized Testing Laboratory".

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of
each ventilated-type unit throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and is not in
a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.

DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS (1000 V and Less) 262200-1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

transformers that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Cutler-Hammer
2. General Electric
3. Square D
4. Siemens

2.2 TRANSFORMERS, GENERAL

A. Transformers shall be factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units of types specified, designed
for 60-Hz service.

B. Transformer cores shall be grain-oriented, nonaging silicon steel.

C. The transformer coils shall have continuous windings without splices, except for taps.

D. The transformer internal coil connections shall be either brazed or pressure type.

E. The transformer enclosure shall be suitable for the environment in which it is installed.

2.3 GENERAL-PURPOSE DISTRIBUTION AND POWER TRANSFORMERS

A. Transformer cores shall have one leg per phase with one coil in the primary and secondary.

B. The transformer enclosure shall be an indoor, ventilated unit.

C. The transformer winding insulation shall be a minimum 185 deg C class for transformers larger
than 15 kVA with a rated temperature rise of 115 deg C maximum above a 40 deg C ambient.

D. The transformer shall have provision for at least two 2.5 percent taps above and four 2.5
percent taps below the rated high voltage.

E. Where indicated as “low-noise”, the transformer shall have a maximum audible sound level 5dB
below the NEMA ST-20 limits.

F. Where required as indicated on the plans, the transformer shall have a minimum K-Factor rating
of 4. The transformers shall comply with UL 1561 requirements for nonsinusoidal load current
handling capability to the degree defined by the designated K-factor.

1. Transformer design prevents overheating when carrying full load with harmonic content
corresponding to the designated K-factor.

2. Nameplate states the designated K-factor of the transformer.

DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS (1000 V and Less) 262200-2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2.4 FINISHES

A. The transformer shall have an exterior finish consisting of the manufacturer's standard paint over
corrosion-resistant pretreatment and primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Arrange the transformer to provide adequate spacing for access and for circulation of cooling air
in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

B. Identify transformers and install warning signs according to Section 16050.

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.

D. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions for maximum attenuation of

transformer noise.

3.2 GROUNDING

A. The transformer shall be grounded in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70 and the
applicable requirements of Section 16060.

3.3 TESTING

A. Include the following minimum inspections and tests according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91 for test methods and data correction factors.

1. Inspect accessible components for cleanliness, mechanical and electrical integrity, and
damage or deterioration. Verify that temporary shipping bracing has been removed. Include
internal inspection through access panels and covers.
2. Inspect bolted electrical connections for tightness according to manufacturer's published
torque values or, if not available, those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3. Insulation Resistance: Perform megohmmeter tests of primary and secondary winding to
winding and winding to ground.

a. Minimum Test Voltage: 1000 V, dc.

b. Minimum Insulation Resistance: 500 megohms.
c. Duration of Each Test: 10 minutes.
d. Temperature Correction: Correct results for test temperature deviation from 20 deg C
standard.

DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS (1000 V and Less) 262200-3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

B. Compare test results with specified performance or manufacturer's data. Correct deficiencies
identified by tests and retest. Verify that transformers meet specified requirements. Test results
shall be provided to Owner and Engineer.

3.4 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect components. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt,
and debris. Repair scratches and mars on finish to match original finish. Clean components
internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at utilization equipment

throughout normal operating cycle of facility.

END OF SECTION 262200

DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS (1000 V and Less) 262200-4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

1. This Section includes lighting and power panelboards and associated auxiliary equipment rated
600 V and less for the following types:

Lighting and appliance branch - circuit panelboards

Distribution panelboards

1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Submit product data for each type of panelboard, accessory item, and component specified.

2. Submit shop drawings for panelboards. Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations.
Show tabulations of installed devices, major features, and voltage rating. Include the following:

1. Enclosure type with details.

2. Bus configuration and current ratings.
3. Short-circuit current rating of panelboard.
4. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective devices and
auxiliary components.
5. Wiring Diagrams: Details of schematic diagram including control wiring and differentiating
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

4 Submit panelboard schedules for installed panelboards after load balancing.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1. Provide products specified in this Section that are UL listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100.

2. Acceptable manufacturers shall be companies regularly engaged in the design, manufacture, and
testing of panelboards for electrical use and shall have been producing such products for at least
five (5) years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Acceptable manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Cutler-Hammer
2. General Electric
3. Square D

2.2 PANELBOARD FABRICATION

PANELBOARD 262416 - 1
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.

1) Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a) Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

b) Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
c) Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
d) Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
NEMA 250, Type 12.

2) Front: Dead front, secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts,
match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.
3) Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged
trim cover.
4) Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with
enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.
5) Finishes:

a) Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating
with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and
thermosetting topcoat.
b) Back Boxes: Steel. Same finish as panels and trim.

2. The directory frame shall be metal with a transparent protective cover, mounted inside each
panelboard door.

3. The panelboard bus shall be hard drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity with compression type
main and neutral lugs. Panelboard shall have a full-capacity neutral bus.

4. The equipment ground bus will be adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground
conductors and be bonded to the box.

5. Unless otherwise noted or indicated on the drawings, only panelboards listed as approved for
service entrance equipment use with a main disconnect shall be used as a service entrance panel.

6. Minimum rating of panelboards shall be 10,000 AIC rms sym. Refer to the drawings for higher
rating requirements. Refer to the drawings for panel bus ratings.

7. Panelboards shall have provisions for at least the number of branch-circuits as indicated on the
drawing panel schedules. Circuits will be filled with circuit breakers, at least, as indicated on the
panel schedule.

8. The panelboard box shall be fabricated of code gauge, galvanized sheet steel i.a.w. UL standards.
The box shall have standard knockouts on the enclosure.

9. The front shall be fabricated of sheet steel and finished with a baked on gray enamel over a rust
inhibitor. Panelboards shall have a full hinged cover. Doors shall have flush type cylinder locks
and catches. Panelboard locks shall be master keyed, with two keys furnished for each
panelboard.

PANELBOARD 262416 - 2
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

10. Incoming mains location: Top and bottom.

11. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

(i) Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

(ii) Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.
(iii) Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type.
(iv) Feed-Through Lugs: Compression type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at
opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
(v) Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate
at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.
(vi) Gutter-Tap Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at
same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.

2.4 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

1. Circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type full module, with quick-make and quick-break toggle action
mechanism. Trip indication shall be shown by breaker handle taking position between on and off.
All multiple pole services shall be common trip with a single handle. Circuit breakers shall be
replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

2. Circuit breakers shall be fully rated with an interrupting rating equal to that of the panelboard to
which they are installed.

3. Circuit breakers will be of the same manufacturer as the panelboard installed.

4. Circuit breakers shall have mechanical compression connections.

5. Single pole circuit breakers serving fluorescent lighting loads shall have the SWD marking.

6. Circuit breakers serving air conditioning branch loads shall be UL listed as HACR type.

7. All circuit breakers shall be of the same manufacturer as the panelboard to which they are
installed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

1. Panelboards shall be installed at 90 inches above finished floor to the top of the trim, unless
otherwise indicated.

2. Panelboards shall be mounted plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount flush
panelboards uniformly flush with wall finish.

3. Type the circuit directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads.
Install the typed directory in the panelboard.

4. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

PANELBOARD 262416 - 3
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

5. Wiring shall be neatly arranged in panelboard gutters.

6. For flush mount panelboards, stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible
ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty
conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.

7. Set field-adjustable circuit breaker trip ranges.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

1. Label each panelboard with engraved laminated-plastic or metal nameplates mounted with
corrosion-resistant screws.
3.3 GROUNDING

1. Make equipment grounding connections for panelboards as indicated, i.a.w, NEC. Provide ground
continuity to main electrical ground bus.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, according to

manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.5 TESTING

1. Make insulation-resistance tests of each panelboard bus, component, and connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuits.

Panelboard bus insulation tests shall consist of a 1000 volt Amegger@ test, phase-to-phase and each
phase-to-ground, each test shall be held for a minimum of one minute. Minimum acceptable
insulation resistance shall be 500 megohms. Test results shall be corrected for temperature
deviations from a 20 deg C standard. Provide test results to Owner and Engineer.

2. Make continuity tests of each circuit.

3. Measure steady-state load currents at each panelboard feeder. Should the difference at any
panelboard between phases exceed 20 percent, rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the
phase load within 20 percent. Take care to maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.

END OF SECTION 262416

PANELBOARD 262416 - 4
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Work of this section includes specification of the following:

1. Receptacles
2. Switches
3. Wall Plates

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data on the switches, receptacles, and wall plates to be used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Wiring Devices:
a. Arrow
b. Hubbell
c. Leviton

2.2 RECEPTACLES

A. Receptacles shall be specification grade, duplex type, rated 20 amp, 120 volt service, unless
otherwise noted. Receptacles shall be of the straight-blade design, NEMA configuration 5-20R.
Receptacles of critical branch circuits shall be red.

Hubbell 5351, Arrow-Hart 5351, or Leviton 5351: 125 V single convenience receptacle
Hubbell 5352, Arrow-Hart 5352, or Leviton 5352: 125 V duplex convenience receptacle

B. GFCI receptacles may be a feed-through, as needed to protect downstream receptacles on the same
circuit. The duplex receptacle configuration shall be NEMA 5-20R. Weatherproof enclosures
shall be provided as indicated on the drawings. Receptacle shall have an integral ground fault
circuit interrupter.

Hubbell GF5362, Arrow-Hart GF5342, or Leviton 6899: 125 V GFCI duplex receptacle.

C. All receptacles shall have plaster ears and grounding straps.

D. Unless otherwise noted by Owner and/or Architect, all receptacles shall be ivory in color with
stainless steel cover plate. Each like receptacle on the project shall be of the same manufacturer
and catalog number.

WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2.3 SWITCHES

A. All toggle switches will be specification grade, quiet type snap switches, rated for 20 amp, 120/277
volt service. At a minimum, side screw terminals shall be provided.

Hubbell HBL1221, Arrow-Hart 1991, Leviton 1221: Single pole toggle switch.
Hubbell HBL1222, Arrow-Hart 1992, Leviton 1222: Double pole toggle switch.
Hubbell HBL1223, Arrow-Hart 1993, Leviton 1223: Three-way toggle switch.
Hubbell HBL1224, Arrow-Hart 1994, Leviton 1224: Four-way toggle switch.

B. Unless otherwise noted by Owner and/or Architect, all switches shall be ivory in color with
stainless steel cover plate. Each like switch on the project shall be of the same manufacturer and
catalog number.

C. Dimming switches shall be compatible with dimming ballast. Dimmer/Ballast combination shall
be capable of consistent dimming down to no more than 5% of full brightness.

2.4 WALL PLATES

A. Single, gang, and combination type wall plates will be used as needed with each corresponding
wiring device.

B. Each wall plate will be of a matching color to the wiring device attached. The plate will be secured
with metal, matching color headed screws. Provide stainless steel plate unless otherwise noted by
Owner and/or Architect.

C. Where weatherproof devices are noted, provide IN-USE type with clear cover. Equal to Pass &
Seymour WIUC10-CL (for single gang applications)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install all wiring devices and assemblies plumb and secure.

B. Install all wall plates when painting is complete.

C. Install all wiring devices by connection to screw terminals only. Connection to pressure terminals
is not acceptable.

D. Use single plates of proper gang where more than one device occurs. Furnish blank plates on
outlets for future use.

E. Unless otherwise noted, install wall devices vertically so that all devices of any given height will
exactly align. Plates must be plumb and true with all four edges in continuous contact with the
wall surface. Do not install devices until plastering or other wall covering work is complete.

F. Protect wiring devices during painting.

WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

G. Wiring devices and other equipment shall, unless otherwise noted, be mounted with respect to
indicated surfaces as follows: Note – verify all device mounting heights with Architect prior to
rough-in. Architectural/ADA requirements take precedence over that given here in the event of
any discrepancies.

Receptacles: 18” AFF or 6" above working surface

Switches: 48" AFF or as otherwise required for ADA compliance
Telephone outlets: same as receptacles
Computer network outlets: same as receptacles
Thermostats: 48" AFF or as otherwise required for ADA compliance

All dimensions to centerline of the device box.

H. Wiring device grounding terminals shall be connected to the branch-circuit equipment grounding
conductor.

I. GFCI receptacles will be functionally tested according to the manufacturers instructions. Record
of the test shall be provided to the owner.

J. Install all switches with the AOFF@ position down.

K. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top.

L. Coordinate exact location of all wiring devices with owner/architect prior to rough-in.

END OF SECTION 262726

WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 262816 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. This Section includes individually mounted switches used as an equipment disconnect.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Referenced standards include:

NFPA 70 - National Electric Code

OSHA 1910 - Standards for General Industry
ANSI/UL 198C - High-Intensity Capacity Fuses: Current Limiting Types
ANSI/UL 198E - Class R Fuses

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data and shop drawings for the fused disconnect specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

disconnect switches and circuit breakers that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following:

1. Molded Case Circuit Breaker:

a. General Electric
b. Square D
c. Cutler-Hammer
d. Siemens

2. Fusible Switches:
a. General Electric
b. Square D
c. Cutler-Hammer
d. Siemens

2.2 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. Fusible Switch Assemblies: Switch shall be heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter
enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. The handle shall be lockable and
interlocked with the cover in the CLOSED position to prevent opening with the switch in the ON
position. Fuse clips shall be designed to accept Class R fuses.

DISCONNECT SWITCHES 262816 -1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

B. Non-fusible Switch Assemblies: Switch shall be heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break load

interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. The handle shall be lockable and
interlocked with the cover in the CLOSED position to prevent opening with the switch in the ON
position.

C. Operation of the handle shall disconnect all three poles.

2.3 FUSES

A. Fuses 600 amps and less shall be ANSI/UL 198E, Class RK1, RK5, size as indicated, dual element,
current limiting, time delay.

B. Interrupting rating shall be 200,000 amps rms symmetrical.

C. Acceptable manufacturers: Bussman, Gould, Reliance Co.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. The location indicated for each disconnect is approximate. Coordinate with the protected
equipment’s installer for the exact location. Install i.a.w. manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install disconnect switches level and plumb.

C. Install all wiring between disconnect switches, and equipment so as to make a complete and
functional installation.

D. Provide grounding i.a.w. NEC requirements.

E. Label the disconnect with the distribution panel name and circuit number feeding the switch.
Labeling shall comply with the applicable requirements of Section 260500.

END OF SECTION 262816

DISCONNECT SWITCHES 262816 -2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Interior solid-state luminaires that use LED technology.

2. Lighting fixture supports.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.

C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.

E. LED: Light-emitting diode.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation.

2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.
3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires.
4. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers.
5. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy efficiency data.
a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data
certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining
luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.

LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering

before shipping.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4.

C. CRI of minimum 80 CCT of 3500 K.

D. Rated L70 life of 50,000 hours for the entire fixture assembly, including driver.

E. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 1 percent of maximum light output.

F. Internal driver.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts:

1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated.
3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during
relamping and when secured in operating position.

C. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to
yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.
3. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated.

LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

D. Housings:

E. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Locate labels
where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles
when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.

b. Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage, and coating.
c. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

2.3 METAL FINISHES

A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining
components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be
and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.4 LUMINAIRE FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling
canopy. Finish same as luminaire.

B. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm)

C. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

D. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with
threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical
connections before fixture installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Supports:

1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight.

2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping.
3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall.
4. Luminaire mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100
percent of luminaire weight and vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.

E. Flush-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Secured to outlet box.

2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around
circumference of luminaire.
3. Trim ring flush with finished surface.

F. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. [Attached to structural members in walls] [Attached to a minimum 20 gauge backing

plate attached to wall structural members] [Attached using through bolts and backing
plates on either side of wall] <Insert means of attachment>.
2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.

G. Suspended Luminaire Support:

1. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with
approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire
oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices.
2. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and [tubing
or rod] [wire support] for suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including
one at each end.
3. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods
to building structure.

H. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires:

1. Secure to any required outlet box.

2. Secure luminaire to the luminaire opening using approved fasteners in a minimum of four
locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.
3. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling grid and
building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after
electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.
2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.
Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.

LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION 265119

LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 265619 – LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Exterior solid state luminaires that are designed for and exclusively use LED lamp
technology.
2. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays.
3. Poles and accessories.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on

exterior surfaces of buildings.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CRI: Color-rendering index.

B. CCT: Correlated color temperature

C. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

D. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

1.3 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION

A. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and
supporting structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.

B. Live Load: Single load of 500 lbf, distributed as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.

C. Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf/sq. ft., applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.

D. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire, calculated and applied as stated in
AASHTO LTS-4.
1. Wind speed for calculating wind load for poles 50 feet or less in height is 110 mph.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting
unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected
area, and verification of indicated parameters.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265619 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories.

3. Details of installation and construction.
4. Luminaire materials.
5. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with
indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories.
6. Photoelectric relays.
7. Drivers, including energy-efficiency data.
8. Lamps, including life, output, and energy-efficiency data.
9. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles.
10. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for
components involved.
11. Anchor bolts for poles.
12. Manufactured pole foundations.

B. Shop Drawings:
1. Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer.

C. Pole and Support Component Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of poles, certifying that
products are designed for indicated load requirements in AASHTO LTS-4 and that load imposed
by luminaire has been included in design.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: UL listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store poles on decay-resistant-treated skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation.
Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.

B. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. For
poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain,
perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty

EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265619 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or
unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage.

1. Warranty Period for Luminaires: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
3. Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
4. Warranty Period for Lamps: Replace lamps and fuses that fail within 12 months from
date of Substantial Completion.
5. Warranty Period for Poles: Repair or replace lighting poles and standards that fail in
finish, materials, and workmanship within manufacturer's standard warranty period, but
not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Lamps: 1 for every 10 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each
type.
2. Ballasts: 1 for every 10 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each
type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In Lighting Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the
following requirements apply to product selection:

2.2 LUMINAIRES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be UL listed and labeled for installation in wet
locations.

B. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for
luminaires.

C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form and
support to prevent warping and sagging.

E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or
deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.

F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during

EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265619 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or
replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens.

G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.

H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat,
and UV radiation.

I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light
distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.

J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.

2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and
cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

L. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested

luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support
materials.

M. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of
hazard by an NRTL.

N. CRI of minimum 70. CCT of 4000 K

O. L70 lamp life of 50,000hours.

P. Internal driver.

Q. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120 V ac

R. Lamp Rating: Lamp marked for outdoor use

S. Source Limitations: Obtain luminaires from single source from a single manufacturer.

2.3 LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS

A. Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A.

B. Contact Relays: Factory mounted, single throw, designed to fail in the on position, and factory
set to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc and off at 4.5 to 10 fc with 15-second minimum time
delay. Relay shall have directional lens in front of photocell to prevent artificial light sources
from causing false turnoff.
1. Adjustable window slide for adjusting on-off set points.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265619 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2.4 POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4.

1. Wind-Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure,
permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in Part 1 "Structural
Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection" Article, with a gust factor of 1.3.
2. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of
luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be
used in pole selection strength analysis.

B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting

requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support

components.

1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points.

2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication, unless stainless-steel items are indicated.
3. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.

D. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."

2.5 STEEL POLES

A. Poles: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum yield of 46,000 psig;
1-piece construction up to 40 feet in height with access handhole in pole wall.

1. Shape: As indicated on plans.

2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation.

B. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and
securely fastened to pole top.

C. Intermediate Handhole and Cable Support: Weathertight, 3-by-5-inch handhole located at

midpoint of pole with cover for access to internal welded attachment lug for electric cable
support grip.

D. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in
Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding," listed for attaching grounding and bonding
conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole.

E. Cable Support Grip: Wire-mesh type with rotating attachment eye, sized for diameter of cable
and rated for a minimum load equal to weight of supported cable times a 5.0 safety factor.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265619 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION

A. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.

C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of photoelectric
device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources.

3.2 POLE INSTALLATION

A. Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their
mounting provisions on the pole.

B. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by
pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level
recommended by pole manufacturer.

1. Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application
and approved by manufacturer.
2. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrink or expanding concrete
grout firmly packed to fill space.
3. Install base covers, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch- diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. Arrange
to drain condensation from interior of pole.

D. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable).

3.3 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a
dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.

B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes." In concrete
foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50
percent overlap.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground metal poles and support structures according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and
Bonding."

1. Install grounding electrode for each pole, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding
system.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265619 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires
and energizing circuits with normal power source.

1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.

END OF SECTION 265619

EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265619 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 271500 - PREMISES DATA/TELEPHONE WIRING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Work of this section includes premises wiring for voice and data communications.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide components, devices, and accessories which are UL listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, Article 100.

B. The materials and methods used shall comply with NFPA 70.

C. All installation and testing shall be by a Certified CAT5E installer.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate premises wiring with requirements of communication services provider and telephone
equipment supplier.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Industry Standard specifications, T568A for Cat 5 materials and distribution.

B. Provide four-plex, RJ45, voice and data outlets in each location shown on the plans. Each outlet to
be flush mounted in double gang outlet boxes with single gang trim rings. If needed, installation of
voice/data outlets in modular cubicle furniture panels may be accomplished with two adjacent
single gang boxes and two duplex type RJ45 outlets.

C. Provide wall plates to match those indicated for power receptacle outlets in same spaces for
materials and finish.

D. Provide 4, four-pair, No. 24 awg minimum (22 awg for homeruns over 60 ft), solid-copper,
unshielded, Cat 5 cables for each outlet shown.

E. All cable to be run in conduit from outlet to accessible ceiling locations. Cable tray or j-hooks, as
noted on the plans, shall be used to extend wiring in accessible ceiling locations to the
communications equipment location. Cable shall be secured using ¾” Velcro straps.

PREMISES DATA/TELEPHONE WIRING 271500-1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

F. Provide S66M1-50 terminal blocks with spool fields for cross connects on the backboard located at
the Telephone Switch Equipment in the Computer/Communications Room. Coordinate exact
location needed with Telephone Switch Equipment provider.

G. All backboards to be 3/4-inch interior grade plywood painted with two coats of fire retardant white
paint. Backboard size as noted on the plans (minimum) or as otherwise required by the
communications equipment supplier.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install voice/data outlet boxes as shown on the plans. Install outlets in workstation cubicle panels
in the base of the panel. Label each jack of the outlet box as either Voice, A, B or C (data).
Maintain consistent designations of jack locations throughout the premises.

B. Install cable without damaging conductors and jacket.

C. Do not bend cable to a smaller radius than minimum recommended by manufacturer.

D. Use pulling methods that will not damage cable or raceway, including fish tape, cable, rope, and
wire-cable grips. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions. Pull cables
simultaneously where more than one is being installed in the same raceway or at the same location.

E. Install exposed cable parallel or perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members and follow
surface contours where possible.

F. All cable pairs to be labeled as to the room number and/or workstation number and the outlet jack
to which it is connected, Voice, A, B, or C.

3.2 TESTING

A. Perform a continuity test of each circuit pair loop and provide documentation.

END OF SECTION 271500

PREMISES DATA/TELEPHONE WIRING 271500-2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 274116.51 - INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT FOR

CLASSROOMS

PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 PROJECT SCOPE

A. This section covers the requirements for an Integrator to design, provide equipment for,
and install instructional classroom technology. This is intended to supply a complete
instructional technology classroom that can be arranged in multiple configurations. There
will be a multimedia display as primary projection, as well as two supplementary flat
panel displays. Flexibility, integration of multiple technologies and sources, and multiple
user groupings are essential to this concept. As an example, all audio and image sources
should be capable of being shown on the screens and heard in the classroom. The work
covered in this document consists of furnishing all labor, material and services necessary
to install a complete audiovisual system as indicated on the project drawings and in these
specifications.

B. Deliverables: Prior to ordering materials or commencing any construction activities, the

Integrator shall provide the owner with a complete bill of materials, including all quantities
of components, devices, equipment, and wiring required to complete this work. Submit
product data, including manufacturer’s data sheets for all proposed system components.
Submit three copies with all specific items that will be provided clearly indicated and any
options highlighted.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Contractors shall be a preferred certified installer of the A/V manufacturer.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. A diagram submitted shall illustrate equipment, location of equipment, and how

equipment is tied together.

B. Mock-up: One (1) typical classroom shall be completely outfitted for of all
equipment specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION

A. Provide a complete Audiovisual System for small to medium sized classrooms. The
system switching and audio amplification equipment shall be securely mounted and
concealed in an enclosure mounted in close proximity to the display device. Audio and
image source equipment can be connected to the system and displayed via active
(powered) interface panels located throughout the room. The audio and image signals from
source devices shall be transmitted from the active interface panels over shielded UTP
cabling architecture.

INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS 274116-1

AND EQUIPMENT FOR CLASSROOMS
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

B. Classroom Definition: A classroom that has fixed instructional media video projection
capabilities, Internet connectivity at the teacher's station, student networking (usually
wireless), a document camera, Blu-ray and/or other multimedia input devices, standard
laptop interface, multimedia control system that is connected to the network and
capabilities for additional add-on modular features.

Technology Enhanced Classrooms (TECs) use standardized control/interface systems and

employ a standardized operational protocol. The principles of this recommendation are to
establish desirable goals with respect to classroom design and installed technology. The
TEC classroom standard includes control systems that have ADA, Section 508 compliant
buttons that are discernible without activating the controls or buttons on the control panel,
easily reached control panel locations, closed captioning, hearing assistance capability,
and user friendly operator protocols among the features that are consistent with universal
design principles.

All new construction general purpose classrooms will meet this minimum standard. The
standard will be met in major renovations wherever possible. The standard will be
retrofitted in existing general purpose classrooms according to an established upgrade
plan.

2.2 GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. The room will be equipped with a standard easy to operate audio video system. The system
shall be controlled by a control system with a control panel mounted near the instructor
area. For ease of use during instruction, the system shall also be able to be controlled
through a Graphical User Interface (GUI) on the teacher’s computer. The audio system
may be monaural or stereo for voice and program sound. System parameters shall be able
to be monitored, administered and controlled over the data network.

Acceptable functionality requirements are listed below categorized by type of

equipment. Quantities are listed for movable, portable or loose equipment, and other
selected entries. Where quantities are not listed, refer to the system drawings.

B. The System components shall all be correctly listed and labeled by Underwriters
Laboratories Incorporated (UL) for their intended use.

C. All products shall be new and under warranty at the time of installation. B-stock,
previously installed, refurbished or used equipment shall not be provided on this project.

D. Where the specification lists several manufacturers for a major item, or group of items, the
AV Integrator shall provide that entire item from one manufacturer only.

E. The Integrator shall provide all options, accessories and hardware necessary to meet the
function of the design even if they are not specifically listed (i.e. mounting kits, separate
or additional power supplies, input modules, transformers, etc.).

INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS 274116-2

AND EQUIPMENT FOR CLASSROOMS
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2.3 FIXED EQUIPMENT

A. ROOM

Provide the following Audio Video System as an all-inclusive system as described below, one
system for each room.

Classroom AV:

Projectors - Epson - BrightLink Pro 1480FI Interactive Laser Projector, 5000 Lumens,
1080p resolution Ultra Short-throw Wall Mount (ELPMB62)/Panasonic – PT-CMZ50 with
PTCMZ50 wall mount bracket

Whiteboard - 53x168" 16:9 IDEA Panoramic Screen with 24" marker Lectern - Spectrum Link
Lectern

Connectivity - Hall Research UH2X-P1 HDMI + USB + LAN over UTP Extender with
HDBaseT™ and PoH (Sender + Receiver )/Kramer TP-590RXR and TP-590TXR

Speakers – Creston – SAROS EXPRESS 4” 2-Way In-Ceiling Speaker, White Textured,

four per classroom/JBL Control 24CT

Lectern Display - Wacom DTK-2451 24" Interactive Pen Display Ingram w/ Articulating
Arm Mount/Smartboard SMART Podium 624

Amplifier – Atlas Sound PA40G 40W 70V/110V single chanel amplifier/ BL CSA140Z Power
Amplifier/ Extron MPA 601

Ceiling Access - Chief CMS492 Ceiling Storage Box (Front of Room)

Lab Setup:

Smartboard – SMART Board MX075 with Intel Compute Card

Multipurpose Room:

Projector – Epson or Panasonic projector with proper lumen output for screen size (TBD) and

ambient light levels in room.

Projector Screen – Owner to select either a pull down screen or low voltage controlled screen

from Da Lite or Draper

Whiteboard – Owner to select size from Da Lite or Everwhite

INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS 274116-3

AND EQUIPMENT FOR CLASSROOMS
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

Connectivity - Hall Research UH2X-P1 HDMI + USB + LAN over UTP Extender with
HDBaseT™ and PoH (Sender + Receiver )/Kramer TP-590RXR and TP-590TXR

Lectern Display - Wacom DTK-2451 24" Interactive Pen Display Ingram w/ Articulating
Arm Mount/Smartboard SMART Podium 624

Speakers – JBL Control 26XT or Extron SF26CT speakers with Extron XPA or LEA G
amplifier.

Microphone – Extron Voice Lift or Shure Microflex wireless microphone with Extron,
Crestron or AMX for room control system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL

A. All equipment and enclosures described in this specification shall be installed plumb
and square per manufacturer’s instructions.

B. All equipment, except that designated as movable, portable or loose equipment, shall be
secured and permanently attached to the permanent structure in a manner which will
require the use of a tool (e.g.: screw driver, nut driver, etc.) for removal.

C. All supports shall meet or exceed the load requirements of the intended application
with a minimum safety factor of five.

D. Provide support structure and hardware with a SAE Grade 8 load rating (min.).

3.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - SYSTEMS

A. Manufacturer
1. Extron Electronics (Basis of Design)
2. Crestron
3. AMX
B. System

VoiceLift Microphone System, part number

HDMI Distribution Amplifier

C. Substitutions: Exceptions to the specifications are not acceptable. No substitutions are

permitted.

INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS 274116-4

AND EQUIPMENT FOR CLASSROOMS
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

D. All equipment part numbers shall be listed in the bill of materials and the system
drawings specifications.

3.3 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify that related conditions, including equipment that
has been previously installed under other sections, are acceptable for product
installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. All devices connected to equipment specified in this section shall bear the UL label
and comply with the applicable National Electrical Code (NEC) standards.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Installer shall perform all initial programming.

B. Integrator shall furnish all equipment, labor, system setup, and other services necessary for
the proper installation of the products/system as indicated on the drawings and specified
herein. System setup information shall include each components proper mounting and
alignment and properly verified signal pathways and operation. Proper operational and
network support control functions shall be verified.

C. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s handling and installation instructions.

D. Install in accordance with all local and pertaining codes and regulations

E. Utilize an Integrator with demonstrated experience in projects of similar size and complexity.

F. Equipment shall be configured and in ready to use condition at the end of installation.

G. Energize and commission equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions. Commissioning the system shall at minimum, consist of the
following:

Install Global Configurator software on PC

Make the following MLC cable connections

Power
Local Area Network
(LAN) Display devices
PVS AV switcher
Classroom Source
Devices

Create a new Global Configurator project file

Configure MLC 104IP Plus Series using Global Configurator

INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS 274116-5

AND EQUIPMENT FOR CLASSROOMS
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

Download device drivers for all source and projection devices

Add a device and set its IP address

Define the location of the new Media Link Controller device

Save the new Global Configurator file

Configure e-mail server

Configure e-mail messages

Configure contacts

Assign serial device drivers

Assign IR drivers

Configure the front panel (All buttons are required to have a function assigned: source or
control)

Configure associated control modules Create a shutdown schedule.

Create a lamp hour notification Create a disconnect notice.

Build the Global Configurator file

Upload the Global Configurator file

Launch GlobalViewer

Test the MLC’s setup for proper control and support of the classroom

Installation shall be done per the manufacturers guidelines.

3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful

environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by
the manufacturer.

B. Repair or replace damaged components before Substantial Completion of the project.

C. Remove temporary tags, coverings, and construction debris from interior and exterior
surfaces of the equipment. Remove construction debris from equipment area and dispose
of properly.

END OF SECTION 274116

INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS 274116-6

AND EQUIPMENT FOR CLASSROOMS
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS 274116-7

AND EQUIPMENT FOR CLASSROOMS
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 283111 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Work of this section includes specifications for the Fire Alarm System.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data and specification sheets for all equipment.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams/Drawings: Detail wiring for fire alarm control panel, remote annunciator
panel. Cabling requirements for each fire alarm device. Single line riser diagram showing
all equipment and type, number and size of all conductors.
2. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of equipment certifying that products
furnished comply with specified requirements.
3. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements, NFPA 72.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: The contractor for work under this section shall be licensed by the state of
the project for the installation and maintenance of fire alarm systems. The contractor shall be an
experienced installer who is an authorized representative of equipment manufacturer for both
installation and maintenance of equipment required for this Section. All equipment supplied and
installed under this Section shall be by the same installer.

B. Provide electrical components, devices, and accessories which are UL listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, Article 100.

C. The materials and methods used shall comply with the requirements of both NFPA 70 and 72.

D. Each individual system operation on a circuit by circuit basis shall be tested for its complete
operation. The procedure for testing the entire alarm system shall be as set forth by the code
enforcement official, the Engineer, and the manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following::

1. Siemens

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2.2 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - GENERAL

A. Coordinate features to form an integrated system. Match existing fire alarm system components and
interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions.

B. Each addressable loop shall be circuited such that device loading does not exceed 80% of loop
capacity. The loop shall have Class B operation.

C. Provide shutdown control relay(s), as required, for each HVAC fan system.

D. The system shall identify any abnormal condition and log each into the system database as an event.

1. The system shall automatically display the first event of the highest priority on the control
panel display. The priorities and types shall be alarm, supervisory, trouble, and monitor.

2. The system shall have a Aqueue@ operation, and shall not require event acknowledgment by
the system operator. The system shall have a labeled color coded indicator for each type of
event. When an unseen event exists for a given type, the indicator shall flash. When all
events for a given type have been displayed, the indicator shall change from flashing to
steady.

3. For each event, the display shall include the current time, the total number of events, the type
of event, the time event occurred and a custom description of the event.

4. The user shall be able to review each event by the use of scrolling keys.

5. New alarm, supervisory, or trouble events shall sound a silenceable audible signal at the
control panel.

E. Operation of any alarm initiating device shall automatically cause the following actions:

1. Update the control/display as described above.

2. Sound all alarm signals throughout the building at the evacuation rate.

3. Turn on an alarm zone LED at the fire alarm control panel.

4. Operate control relay contacts to return the elevator to the level directed by the local fire
department.

5. Operate control relay contacts to release all magnetic door locks throughout the building via
the access control system.

6. As required, operate control relay contacts to shutdown HVAC system fans.

7. Visually annunciate the location of the alarm on the remote annunciator panel. The visual
indication shall remain on until the alarm condition is reset to normal.

F. Operation of a sprinkler supervisory initiating device shall cause the following actions:

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1. Update the control panel display as described above.

2. Turn on a zone LED at the fire alarm control panel.

3. Visually annunciate the location of the alarm on the remote annunciator panel. The visual
indication shall remain on until the alarm condition is reset to normal.

G. The entire fire alarm system wiring shall be electrically supervised to automatically detect and report
trouble conditions to the fire alarm control panel. Any opens, grounds, or disarrangement of system
wiring and shorts across alarm horn/strobe wiring shall automatically cause the following actions:

1. Update the control panel display as described above.

2. Visually and audibly annunciate a general trouble condition, on the remote annunciator
panel. The visual indication shall remain on until the trouble condition is repaired.

2.3 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL

A. The existing fire alarm control panel is to remain and all new fire alarm devices shall be tied into the
existing panel.

2.4 ADDRESSABLE ANALOG DEVICES

A. General requirements --

1. Each remote device shall have a microprocessor with non-volatile memory to support its
functionality and serviceability. Each device shall store as required for its functionality the
following data: device serial number, device address, device type, personality code, date of
manufacture, hours in use, number of alarms and troubles, time and date of last alarm,
amount of environmental compensation left/used, last maintenance date, job/project number,
current detector sensitivity values, diagnostic information (trouble codes) and algorithms
required to process sensor data and perform communications with the loop controller.

2. Each device shall be capable of electronic addressing, either automatically or application

program assigned, to support physical/electrical mapping and supervision by location.
Setting a device=s address by physical means shall not be necessary.

B. Detectors - General

1. All detectors shall be capable of full digital communications using both broadcast and
polling protocol. Each detector shall be capable of performing independent fire detection
algorithms. The fire detection algorithm shall measure sensor signal dimensions, time
patterns and combine different fire parameters to increase reliability and distinguish real fire
conditions from nuisance alarms. Signal patterns that are not typical of fires shall be
eliminated by digital filters.

2. Each detector shall have an integral microprocessor capable of making alarm decisions based
on fire parameter information stored in the detector head. Distributed intelligence shall be
used for maximum response time by minimizing data flow between the detector and analog

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

loop controller. Detectors not capable of making independent alarm decisions are not
acceptable. Maximum total analog loop response time for detectors changing state shall be
0.5 seconds.

3. Each detector shall have a separate means of displaying communication and alarm status. A
green LED shall flash to confirm communication with the analog loop controller. A red
LED shall flash to display alarm status.

4. The detector shall be capable of storing diagnostic codes available for system maintenance.
The diagnostic code shall be stored at the detector.

5. Each smoke detector shall be capable of transmitting pre-alarm and alarm signals in addition
to the normal, trouble, and need cleaning information. At a minimum, each smoke detector
shall be individually programmed to operate at any one of five different sensitivity settings.

6. Each detector microprocessor shall contain an environmental compensation algorithm, which

identifies and sets ambient AEnvironmental Thresholds@ approximately six times an hour.
The microprocessor shall continually monitor the environmental impact of temperature,
humidity, other contaminates as well as detector aging. The process shall use digital
compensation to adapt the detector to both 24 hour long term and 4 hour short term
environmental changes. The microprocessor shall monitor the environmental compensation
value and alert the system operator when the detector approaches 80% and 100% of the
allowable environmental compensation value. Differential sensing algorithms shall maintain
a constant differential between selected detector sensitivity and the Alearned@ base line
sensitivity. The base line sensitivity information shall be updated and permanently stored at
the detector approximately once every hour.

C. Heat Detectors

1. Heat detectors shall have a low mass thermistor heat sensor and operate at a fixed
temperature. It shall continually monitor the temperature of the air surroundings to minimize
thermal lag to the time required to process an alarm. The integral microprocessor shall
determine if an alarm condition exists and initiate an alarm based on the analysis of the data.
Systems using central intelligence for alarm decisions are not acceptable. The heat detector
shall have a nominal alarm point rating of 135 deg. F.

D. Multi-Sensor Smoke Detectors

1. Multi-sensored analog smoke detectors shall use a light scattering type photoelectric smoke
sensor, a unipolar ionization smoke sensor and an ambient temperature sensor to sense
changes in air samples from its surroundings. The integral microprocessor shall employ time
based algorithms to dynamically examine values from the three sensors simultaneously and
initiate an alarm based on that data. The multi-sensor shall be capable of adapting to
environmental conditions. The temperature sensor shall self-adjust to the ambient
temperature of the surrounding air and input an alarm when there is a change of 65deg F. in
ambient temperature. Separately mounted photoelectric detectors, ionization detectors and
heat detectors in the same location are not acceptable.

2. The percent obscuration per foot alarm set point shall be field selectable to any of five
senstivity settings ranging from 1.0 to 3.5%.

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

a. The sensor shall be suitable for operation in the following environment:

1) Temperature: 32 to 100 deg F

2) Humidity: 0-93 % RH, non-condensing
3) Elevation: Up to 6000 ft

b. The detector base shall contain no electronics. Removal of the detector from the base
shall not affect communications with other detectors.
c. Terminal connections shall be made on the room side of the base.

E. Intelligent Modules - General

1. Intelligent modules shall be addressable without the use of DIP or rotary switches. The
personality of multifunction modules shall be programmable at the site to suit conditions and
may be changed at any time using a personality code downloaded from the Analog Loop
Controller. Modules requiring EPROM, PROM, ROM changes or DIP switch and/or jumper
changes are not acceptable. Each module shall have a minimum of two diagnostic LEDs
mounted behind a finished cover plate. A green LED shall flash to indicate communication
with the loop controller. A red LED shall flash to display alarm status. The module shall be
capable of storing diagnostic codes for use in troubleshooting.
a. Input and output circuit wiring shall be supervised for open and ground faults.
b. The module shall be suitable for operating in 32 to 120 deg F, and 0-93% RH, non-
condensing environments.
c. Single input modules shall provide one supervised Class B input circuit supporting at
least the following circuit types:
1) Normally-Open Alarm Latching (manual stations, heat detectors, etc.)
2) Normally-Open Alarm Delayed Latching (waterflow switches)
3) Normally-Open Active Non-Latching (monitor, fans, dampers, etc)
4) Normally-Open Active Latching (supervisory, tamper switches)

d. Dual input modules shall provide two supervised Class B input circuits supporting the
same circuit types described for the single input module.
e. Monitor modules shall support one supervised Class B, Normallly-Open Active Non-
Latching Monitor circuit.
f. Waterflow/Tamper modules shall support two supervised Class B input circuits. One
circuit shall support a Normally-Open Alarm Delayed Latching Waterflow Switch
circuit. The other circuit shall support a Normally-Open Active Latching Tamper
Switch.
g. Control relay modules shall provide at least one form AC@ dry relay contact rated 2
amps at 24 Vdc for interlocking with external equipment. The control relay shall be
rated for pilot duty and releasing systems. The position of the relay contact shallb e
confirmed by the system firmware.
h. Manual Pull Stations
1) Manual pull stations shall be addressable without the use of DIP or rotary
switches. Manual stations shall have a minimum of two diagnostic LEDS
mounted on their input module. A green LED shall flash to confirm
communication with the loop controller. A red LED shall flash to display
alarm status. The station shall be capable of storing diagnostic codes for use in
troubleshooting the system.

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2) Input circuit wiring shall be supervised for open and ground faults.
3) The pull station shall be suitable for operation in 32-120 deg F., 0-93% RH,
non-condensing, environmental conditions.
4) The pull station shall be double action single stage devices of lexan
construction with an internal toggle switch. Provide a key locked test feature.
5) The pull station shall be red with white APULL IN CASE OF FIRE@ lettering.

F. Notification Appliances

1. All notification appliances shall be UL listed for Fire Protective Service.

a. All strobe or combination appliances with strobes shall be capable of providing the
AEquivalent Facilitation@ allowed under the Americans with Disabilities Act
Accessabilities Guidelines and shall be UL 1971 and ULC S526 Listed.
b. All appliances shall be of the same manufacturer as the Fire Alarm Control Panel
specified to insure compatibility between the appliances and the control panels.
c. Self-synchronized strobes of the candela output shown shall be provided as indicated
on the plans. Each strobe shall have in-out screw terminals for wiring. Each strobe
shall have a red plastic housing. Strobes shall have synchronized flash outputs to
meet ADA requirements. The strobe shall have lens markings oriented for wall
mounting.
d. Temporal horns of the output shown shall be provided as indicated on the plans. Each
horn shall have in-out screw terminals for wiring. Each horn shall have a red plastic
housing. Horns shall be selectable for high or low dBA output. Selection of low or
high output shall be reversible. Horns shall be selectable for steady or temporal
output. Selection of steady or temporal output shall be reversible.
e. Combination strobe/horn devices shall be provided as indicated on the plans. Each
combination device shall meet the same specs as the individual devices described
above.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install wiring in raceway. Conceal cable and raceway except in unfinished spaces. Electrical
contractor to provide and install needed raceway with pullstring and backboxes. Coordinate
requirements between Fire Alarm System installer and electrical contractor. Fire Alarm System
installer to provide and install all cable and make all connections.

C. Install any exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members,
and follow surface contours. Secure and support cables by straps, staples, or similar fittings so
designed and installed to avoid damage to cables. Secure cable at intervals not exceeding 30
inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, or fittings.

D. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess.
Use lacing bars in cabinets.

E. End of line resistors shall be furnished and installed as required by the manufacturer.

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

F. Identification of Conductors and Cables: Color-code conductors and apply wire and cable
marking tape to designate wires and cables to identify media in coordination with system wiring
diagrams.

3.2 TRAINING

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain equipment.

B. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.

END OF SECTION 283111

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 310513 - SOILS FOR EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Subsoil materials.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 310516 - Aggregates for Earthwork: Coarse and fine aggregate materials.
2. Section 312213 - Rough Grading: Removal of topsoil, rough grading, and filling
associated with contouring of Site.
3. Section 312316 - Excavation: Excavating as required for building foundations and
utilities within building perimeter.
4. Section 312323 - Fill: Backfilling as required at building perimeter and Site structures to
subgrade elevations.
5. Section 312500 - Erosion and Sedimentation Controls: Slope protection and erosion
control.
6. Section 320513 - Soils for Exterior Improvements: Subsoil and topsoil materials.
7. Section 329219 - Seeding: Fertilizing, seeding, hydroseeding, mulching, and
maintenance.
8. Section 329223 - Sodding: Preparation of subsoil, placement of topsoil, fertilization, sod
installation, and maintenance.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials:

1. AASHTO T 180 - Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils

Using a 4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18-in.) Drop.

B. ASTM International:

1. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)).
2. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of
Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)).
3. ASTM D2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes
(Unified Soil Classification System).
4. ASTM D6938 - Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil
and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

SOILS FOR EARTHWORK 310513 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

B. Product Data: Submit name of imported materials source.

C. Samples: Submit, in airtight containers, 10-lb. sample of each type of fill to testing laboratory.

D. Supplier's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Furnish each subsoil and topsoil material from single source throughout Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Subsoil:

1. Type S1 Select Fill.

a. Select or local borrow.

b. Graded.
c. Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris.
d. Comply with ASTM D2487 Group Symbol CL or SC. Select fill shall have liquid
limit (LL) no greater than 38, PI between 8 and 18 and less than 60% passing the
No. 200 sieve.

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for testing, inspection, and analysis.

B. Testing and Analysis:

1. Subsoil Material: Comply with ASTM D698.

2. Topsoil Material: Comply with ASTM D698.
3. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Excavation:

1. Excavate subsoil and topsoil from designated areas.

SOILS FOR EARTHWORK 310513 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2. Strip topsoil to full depth of topsoil in designated areas.

3. Remove excess excavated subsoil , and topsoil not intended for reuse from Site.
4. Remove excavated materials not meeting requirements for subsoil and topsoil materials
from Site.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.

END OF SECTION 310513

SOILS FOR EARTHWORK 310513 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 310519.19 - GEOGRID BASE REINFORCEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Geogrid for use as reinforcement of base or subbase layers of flexible pavement

structures.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 310513.00 – Soils for Earthwork

B. Section 312213.00 – Rough Grading
C. Section 312323.00 - Fill
D. Section 321123.00 – Aggregate Base Course

1.3 REFERENCES

A. AASHTO Standards
1. T88 - Particle Size Analysis of Soils
2. T90 - Determining the Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils
3. T99 - The Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 5.5lb (2.5 kg)
Rammer and a 12in (305 mm) Drop.
4. AASHTO Guide for Design of Pavement Structures, 1993.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. D123 - Standard Terminology Relating to Textiles
2. D4354 - Practice for Sampling of Geogrids for Testing
3. D4355 - Test Method for Deterioration of Geogrids from Exposure to
Ultraviolet Light and Water (Xenon-Arc Type Apparatus)
4. D4439 – Standard Terminology for Geogrids
5. D4759 - Practice for Determining the Specification Conformance of Geogrids
6. D4873 - Guide for Identification, Storage, and Handling of Geogrid Rolls &
Samples
7. D6637 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Tensile Properties of
Geogrids by the Single Rib or Multi-Rib Tensile Method

C. Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) - Geogrid Design and Construction

Guidelines, Publication No. FHWA HI-95-038, May 1995.

D. Geogrid Accreditation Institute (GAI) - Laboratory Accreditation Program (LAP)

E. International Standards Organization (ISO) - 9001:2015

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Average Roll Value (MARV): Property value calculated as typical minus two
standard deviations. Statistically, it yields a 97.7 percent degree of confidence that
any sample taken during quality assurance testing will exceed value reported.

GEOGRID BASE REINFORCEMENT 310519.19 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following:

1. Certification: The contractor shall provide to the Engineer a certificate stating
the name of the manufacturer, product name, style number, and chemical
composition and other pertinent information to fully describe the geogrid.
The Certification shall state that the furnished geogrid meets
MARV requirements of the specification as evaluated under the
Manufacturer's quality control program. The Certification shall be attested to
by a person having legal authority to bind the Manufacturer.

2. Quality Standards: The contractor shall provide to the Engineer the

Manufacturer’s Quality Control Plan along with current GAI-LAP and ISO
9001:2015 certificates.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. The Manufacturer shall have the following credentials:

a. Geogrid Accreditation Institute (GAI) - Laboratory

Accreditation Program(LAP)
b. ISO 9001:2015 Quality Management System

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Geogrid labeling, shipment, and storage shall follow ASTM D4873. Product labels
shall clearly show the manufacturer or supplier name, style name, and roll number.

B. During storage, geogrid rolls shall be elevated off the ground and adequately covered
to protect them from the following: site construction damage, precipitation,
extended ultraviolet radiation including sunlight, chemicals that are strong acids
or strong bases, flames including welding sparks, excess temperatures, and any other
environmental conditions that may damage the physical property values of the
geogrid.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. TenCate Geogrids
Americas 365 South
Holland Drive
Pendergrass, GA, USA
30567 1-800-685-9990
1-706-693-2226
www.tencategeo.us

GEOGRID BASE REINFORCEMENT 310519.19 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

B. Tensar International Corporation

5883 Glenridge Drive, Suite 200
Atlanta, GA, USA 30328-5363
1-800-685-9990
1-706-693-2226
www.tensar-international.com

C. Tenax Corporation
4800 E. Monument Street
Baltimore, MD USA 21205
1-410-522-700
1-800-356-8495

D. Strata Global Solutions

380 Dahlonega Road, Suite 200
Cumming, GA, USA 30040
1-800-680-7750

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Reinforcement Geogrid:

1. Polymers used in the manufacture of geogrids shall consist of long-chain

synthetic polymers, composed of at least 95 percent by weight of polyolefins,
polyesters, or polyamides. They shall be formed into a stable network such
that the ribs, filaments or yarns retain their dimensioned stability relative to
each other, including selvages.

2. The geogrid shall meet the requirements of Table 1. All numeric values in Table
1 represent MARV in the specified direction.

TABLE 1 - FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT REINFORCEMENT GEOGRID

Property Test Method Units Required Value
Reinforcement Properties MD CD
Tensile Strength @ 2% Strain ASTM D6637 lbs/ft (kN/m) 411 (6.0) 617 (9.0)
Tensile Strength @ 5% Strain ASTM D6637 lbs/ft (kN/m) 809 (11.8) 1343 (19.6)
Survivability Index Values MD CD
Ultimate Tensile Strength ASTM D6637 lbs/ft (kN/m) 1316 (19.2) 1974 (28.8)
Ultraviolet Stability (after 500 hrs) ASTM D4355 % 100

a. Approved geogrids are as follows:

Mirafi® BXG120

2.3 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturing Quality Control: Testing shall be performed at an on-site

laboratory accredited by GAI-LAP for tests required for the geogrid, at frequency
meeting or exceeding ASTM D4354.

GEOGRID BASE REINFORCEMENT 310519.19 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

B. Ultraviolet Stability shall be verified by an independent laboratory on the geogrid or a

geogrid of similar construction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 See Manufacturer’s Installation guidelines provided in the submittal.

END OF SECTION 310519.19

GEOGRID BASE REINFORCEMENT 310519.19 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 312213 - ROUGH GRADING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Excavating topsoil.
2. Excavating subsoil.
3. Cutting, grading, filling, rough contouring, and compacting, site for site structures,
building pads, and paved areas.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 310513 - Soils for Earthwork: Soils for fill.

2. Section 312323 - Fill: General building area backfilling.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials:

1. AASHTO T180 - Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a

4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18-in.) Drop.

B. ASTM International:

1. ASTM C136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
2. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3).
3. ASTM D1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by
the Sand-Cone Method.
4. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of
Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3).
5. ASTM D2167 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by
the Rubber Balloon Method.
6. ASTM D2419 - Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine
Aggregate.
7. ASTM D2434 - Standard Test Method for Permeability of Granular Soils (Constant
Head).
8. ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by
Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
9. ASTM D3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by
Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

ROUGH GRADING 312213 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

B. Samples: Submit, in air-tight containers, 10 lb sample of each type of fill to testing laboratory.

C. Materials Source: Submit name of imported materials suppliers.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.

B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of utilities remaining by

horizontal dimensions, elevations or inverts, and slope gradients.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C136, ASTM D2419, and ASTM D2434.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Topsoil: Type S3 as specified in Section 310513.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before

starting work.

B. Verify survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated on Drawings.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Call Local Utility Line Information service at 81 not less than three working days before
performing Work.

1. Request underground utilities to be located and marked within and surrounding

construction areas.

B. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.

ROUGH GRADING 312213 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

C. Notify utility companies to remove and or relocate utilities as required.

D. Protect utilities indicated to remain from damage.

E. Protect plant life, lawns, and other features remaining as portion of final landscaping.

F. Protect bench marks, survey control point, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and
curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.

3.3 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION

A. Excavate topsoil from areas to be further excavated, relandscaped, or regraded without mixing
with foreign materials for use in finish grading.

B. Do not excavate wet topsoil.

C. Stockpile in area designated on site to depth not exceeding 8 feet and protect from erosion.
Stockpile material on impervious material and cover over with same material, until disposal.

D. Remove excess topsoil not intended for reuse, from site.

3.4 SUBSOIL EXCAVATION

A. Excavate subsoil from areas to be further excavated, relandscaped, or regraded.

B. Do not excavate wet subsoil or excavate and process wet material to obtain optimum moisture
content.

C. When excavating through roots, perform Work by hand and cut roots with sharp axe.

D. Remove excess subsoil not intended for reuse, from site.

E. Stockpile subsoil in area designated on site to depth not exceeding 8 feet and protect from
erosion.

F. Benching Slopes: Horizontally bench existing slopes greater than 1: 4 to key placed fill material
to slope to provide firm bearing.

G. Stability: Replace damaged or displaced subsoil as specified for fill.

3.5 FILLING

A. Fill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials.

B. Place fill material in continuous layers and compact in accordance with schedule at end of this
section.

C. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.

ROUGH GRADING 312213 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

D. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 percent slope for minimum distance of 10 ft, unless
noted otherwise.

E. Make grade changes gradual. Blend slope into level areas.

F. Repair or replace items indicated to remain damaged by excavation or filling.

3.6 TOLERANCES

A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.

B. Top Surface of Subgrade: Plus or minus 1/10 foot from required elevation.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field
inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Perform laboratory material tests in accordance with ASTM D698.

C. Perform in place compaction tests in accordance with the following:

1. Density Tests: ASTM D2922.

2. Moisture Tests: ASTM D3017.

D. When tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and
retest.

E. Frequency of Tests: One (1) per lift per 1000 SF.

END OF SECTION 312213

ROUGH GRADING 312213 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 312323 - FILL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Backfilling building perimeter to subgrade elevations.

2. Backfilling site structures to subgrade elevations.
3. Fill under slabs on grade.
4. Fill under paving.
5. Fill for over-excavation.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete materials.

2. Section 310513 - Soils for Earthwork: Soils for fill.
3. Section 310519.13 - Geotextiles for Earthwork: Geotextile fabric for placement over fill.
4. Section 312213 - Rough Grading: Site filling.
5. Section 312316 - Excavation: Backfilling of building foundations and utilities within
building perimeter.
6. Section 312316.13 - Trenching: Backfilling of utility trenches.
7. Section 329119 - Landscape Grading: Placing, leveling, and compacting topsoil materials
prior to final landscaping Work.
8. Section 331416 - Site Water Utility Distribution Piping: Pipe materials, fittings, valves,
meters, and backflow preventers.
9. Section 333100 - Sanitary Sewerage Piping: Pipe materials and accessories normally
encountered with gravity sanitary building piping.
10. Section 334200 - Stormwater Conveyance: Drainage facilities to collect and provide for
flow of stormwater.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials:

1. AASHTO T 180 - Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils

Using a 4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18-in.) Drop.

B. ASTM International:

1. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)).
2. ASTM D1556/D1556M - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in
Place by Sand-Cone Method.
3. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of
Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)).

FILL 312323 - 1
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

4. ASTM D2167 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by
the Rubber Balloon Method.
5. ASTM D6031/D6031M - Standard Test Method for Logging In Situ Moisture Content
and Density of Soil and Rock by the Nuclear Method in Horizontal, Slanted, and Vertical
Access Tubes.
6. ASTM D6938 - Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil
and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer information for geotextile fabric, indicating fabric and
construction.

C. Samples: Submit, in airtight containers, one 10-lb. sample of each type of fill to testing
laboratory.

D. Materials Source: Submit name of imported materials suppliers.

E. Field Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor-furnished tests and inspections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Subsoil Fill: Type S1, as specified in Section 310513 - Soils for Earthwork.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation

examination.

B. Verify that subdrainage, dampproofing, and waterproofing installations have been inspected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation

preparation.

B. Compact subgrade to specified density requirements for subsequent backfill materials.

C. Soft Subgrade:

FILL 312323 - 2
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place.

2. Backfill with structural select fill and compact to density equal to or greater than
specified requirements for subsequent fill material.

D. Scarify subgrade surface to depth of 6 inches.

3.3 BACKFILLING

A. Backfill areas to contours and elevations.

B. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement.

C. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen, or spongy subgrade surfaces, and do not backfill with
frozen materials.

D. Maximum Compacted Depths:

1. Place material in continuous layers to following depths:

a. Subsoil Fill: 8 inches.

E. Use placement method that does not disturb or damage foundation perimeter drainage, utilities
in trench , or adjacent structures.

F. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.

G. Make gradual grade changes and blend slope into level areas.

H. Remove surplus backfill materials from Site.

I. Leave fill material stockpile areas free of excess fill materials.

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for tolerances.

B. Top Surface of Backfilling within Building Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch from required
elevations.

C. Top Surface of Backfilling under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations.

D. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for inspecting and testing.

B. Inspecting: Request visual inspection of bearing surfaces by Architect/Engineer before

installing subsequent Work.

FILL 312323 - 3
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

C. Testing:

1. Laboratory Material Testing: Comply with ASTM D698.

2. In-Place Compaction Testing:

a. Density Tests: Comply with ASTM D6938.

b. Moisture Tests: Comply with ASTM D6031/D6031M.

3. If tests indicate that Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace,
compact, and retest.
4. Testing Frequency: 1 per lift per 1000 SF.
5. Proof-roll compacted fill surfaces under slabs on grade and paving.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished
Work.

B. Reshape and recompact fills subjected to vehicular traffic during construction.

3.7 ATTACHMENTS

A. Fill to Correct Over-Excavation:

1. Fill Type S1; flush to specified elevation; compacted uniformly to 95 percent of

maximum density.

END OF SECTION 312323

FILL 312323 - 4
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 312500 - EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Site Stabilization.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

2. Section 310513 - Soils for Earthwork.
3. Section 312316 - Excavation.
4. Section 312323 - Fill.
5. Section 329219 - Seeding.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials:

1. AASHTO T88 - Standard Specification for Particle Size Analysis of Soils.

2. AASHTO T180 - Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a
4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18-in.) Drop.

B. American Concrete Institute:

1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete.

C. ASTM International:

1. ASTM C127 - Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity),
and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate.
2. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3).
3. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of
Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3).
4. ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by
Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
5. ASTM D3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by
Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 312500 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.

1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.

B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this Section.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet
or frozen.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before

starting Work.

B. Verify compacted subgrade is acceptable and ready to support devices and imposed loads.

C. Verify gradients and elevations of base or foundation for other Work are correct.

3.2 SITE STABILIZATION

A. Incorporate erosion control devices indicated on the Drawings into the Project at the earliest
practicable time.

B. Construct, stabilize and activate erosion controls before site disturbance within tributary areas
of those controls.

C. Stockpile and waste pile heights shall not exceed 35 feet. Slope stockpile sides at 2:1 or flatter.

D. Stabilize any disturbed area of affected erosion control devices on which activity has ceased and
which will remain exposed for more than 20 days.

EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 312500 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1. During non-germinating periods, apply mulch at recommended rates.

2. Stabilize disturbed areas which are either at finished grade or will not be disturbed within
one year in accordance with Section 329113 and Section 329219 permanent seeding
specifications.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect erosion control devices on a weekly basis and after each runoff event. Make necessary
repairs to ensure erosion and sediment controls are in good working order.

B. Compaction Testing: As specified in Section 312323.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.

B. When sediment accumulation in sedimentation structures has reached a point one-third depth of
sediment structure or device, remove and dispose of sediment.

C. Do not damage structure or device during cleaning operations.

D. Do not permit sediment to erode into construction or site areas or natural waterways.

E. Clean channels when depth of sediment reaches approximately one half channel depth.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished
Work.

B. Immediately after placement, protect paving from premature drying, excessive hot or cold
temperatures, and mechanical injury.

C. Do not permit construction traffic over paving for until 75 percent design strength of concrete
has been achieved.

D. Protect paving from elements, flowing water, or other disturbance until curing is completed.

END OF SECTION 312500

EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 312500 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 321123 - AGGREGATE BASE COURSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Aggregate base course.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 312213 - Rough Grading: Preparation of site for base course.

2. Section 312323 - Fill: Compacted fill under base course.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials:

1. AASHTO M288 - Standard Specification for Geotextile Specification for Highway

Applications.

B. ASTM International:

1. ASTM D1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by
the Sand-Cone Method.
2. ASTM D2167 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by
the Rubber Balloon Method.
3. ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by
Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
4. ASTM D2940 - Standard Specification for Graded Aggregate Material For Bases or
Subbases for Highways or Airports.
5. ASTM D3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by
Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

B. Product Data:

1. Submit data for geotextile fabric and herbicide.

C. Samples: Submit, in air-tight containers, 10 lb sample of each type of aggregate fill to testing
laboratory.

D. Materials Source: Submit name of aggregate materials suppliers.

AGGREGATE BASE COURSES 321123 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Furnish each aggregate material from single source throughout the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATE MATERIALS

A. Base Aggregate: ASTM D2940; graded type.

1. Percent Passing per Sieve Size:

a. 2 Inches ((50 mm):)100.

b. 1-1/2 Inches ((37.5 mm):)95 to 100.
c. 3/4 Inch ((19 mm):)70 to 92.
d. 3/8 Inch ((9.5 mm):)50 to 70.
e. No. 4 ((4.75 mm):)35 to 55.
f. No. 30 ((0.600 mm):)12 to 25.
g. No. 200 ((0.075 mm):)Zero to 8.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Geotextile Fabric: AASHTO M288; non-woven, polypropylene.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before

starting work.

B. Verify compacted substrate is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads.

1. Proof roll substrate with 20 ton roller in minimum two perpendicular passes to identify
soft spots.
2. Remove soft substrate and replace with compacted fill as specified in Section 312323.

C. Verify substrate has been inspected, gradients and elevations are correct.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Correct irregularities in substrate gradient and elevation by scarifying, reshaping, and re-
compacting.

AGGREGATE BASE COURSES 321123 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

B. Do not place fill on soft, muddy, or frozen surfaces.

3.3 AGGREGATE PLACEMENT

A. Install geotextile fabric over subgrade according to manufacturer's instructions.

1. Lap ends and edges minimum 6 inches.

2. Anchor fabric to subgrade when required to prevent displacement until aggregate is
installed.

B. Spread aggregate over prepared substrate to total compacted thickness indicated on Drawings.

C. Roller compact aggregate to 95 density indicated on Drawings.

D. Level and contour surfaces to elevations, profiles, and gradients indicated.

E. Add small quantities of fine aggregate to coarse aggregate when required to assist compaction.

F. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain specified compaction density.

G. Use mechanical tamping equipment in areas inaccessible to compaction equipment.

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.

B. Maximum Variation From Flat Surface: 1/2 inch measured with 10 foot straight edge.

C. Maximum Variation From Thickness: 1/4 inch.

D. Maximum Variation From Elevation: 1/2 inch.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements and 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements:
Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Compaction testing will be performed according to ASTM D1557, ASTM D2922, and ASTM
D3017.

C. When tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and
retest.

D. Frequency of Tests: One test for every 1000 square yards of each layer compacted aggregate.

AGGREGATE BASE COURSES 321123 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3.6 COMPACTION

A. Compact materials to 98 percent of maximum density as determined from test strip, according
to ASTM D2940.

END OF SECTION 321123

AGGREGATE BASE COURSES 321123 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Aggregate base course.

2. Concrete paving for:

a. Concrete sidewalks.
b. Concrete stair steps.
c. Concrete integral curbs and gutters.
d. Concrete parking areas and roads.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 079000 - Joint Protection: Sealant for joints.

2. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating: Pavement markings.
3. Section 312213 - Rough Grading: Preparation of site for paving and base.
4. Section 312323 - Fill: Compacted subbase for paving.
5. Section 321123 - Aggregate Base Courses.
6. Section 321216 - Asphalt Paving: Asphalt wearing course.
7. Section 321713 - Parking Bumpers: Precast concrete parking bumpers.
8. Section 329119 - Landscape Grading: Preparation of subsoil at pavement perimeter.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials:

1. AASHTO M324 - Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied, for
Concrete and Asphalt Pavements.

B. American Concrete Institute:

1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete.

2. ACI 304 - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete.

C. ASTM International:

1. ASTM A184/A184M - Standard Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats
for Concrete Reinforcement.
2. ASTM A185/A185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for
Concrete Reinforcement.
3. ASTM A497/A497M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed,
for Concrete Reinforcement.

CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

4. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement.
5. ASTM A706/A706M - Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
6. ASTM A767/A767M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement.
7. ASTM A775/A775M - S Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing
Bars.
8. ASTM A884/A884M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded
Wire Reinforcement.
9. ASTM A934/A934M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Prefabricated Steel
Reinforcing Bars.
10. ASTM C31/C31M - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens
in the Field.
11. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
12. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical
Concrete Specimens.
13. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
14. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.
15. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
16. ASTM C172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
17. ASTM C173/C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete
by the Volumetric Method.
18. ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Pressure Method.
19. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
20. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for
Curing Concrete.
21. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
22. ASTM C595 - Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements.
23. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete.
24. ASTM C979 - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete.
25. ASTM C989 - Standard Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use
in Concrete and Mortars.
26. ASTM C1017/C1017M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in
Producing Flowing Concrete.
27. ASTM C1064/C1064M - Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed
Hydraulic-Cement Concrete.
28. ASTM C1116 - Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete and Shotcrete.
29. ASTM C1315 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds
Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete.
30. ASTM C1371[-2004a] - Standard Test Method for Determination of Emittance of
Materials Near Room Temperature Using Portable Emissometers.
31. ASTM C1549[-2004] - Standard Test Method for Determination of Solar Reflectance
Near Ambient Temperature Using a Portable Solar Reflectometer.
32. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete
Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).
33. ASTM D1752 - Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork
Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.

CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

34. ASTM D6690 - Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied, for
Concrete and Asphalt Pavements.
35. ASTM E408[-1971(1996)e1] - Standard Test Methods for Total Normal Emittance of
Surfaces Using Inspection-Meter Techniques.
36. ASTM E903[-1996] - Standard Test Method for Solar Absorptance, Reflectance, and
Transmittance of Materials Using Integrating Spheres.
37. ASTM E1918[-1997] - Standard Test Method for Measuring Solar Reflectance of
Horizontal and Low-Sloped Surfaces in the Field.
38. ASTM E1980[-2001] - Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of
Horizontal and Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces.

1.3 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.

B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

B. Product Data:

1. Submit data on concrete materials, joint filler, admixtures and curing compounds.

C. Design Data:

1. Submit concrete mix design for each concrete strength. Submit separate mix designs
when admixtures are required for the following:

a. Hot and cold weather concrete work.

2. Identify mix ingredients and proportions, including admixtures.

3. Identify chloride content of admixtures and whether or not chloride was added during
manufacture.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work according to ACI 301.

B. Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with

minimum three documented experience.

CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 5 years'
documented experience.

1.7 AMBIENT CONDITIONS

A. Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Ambient conditions control facilities for
product storage and installation.

B. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet
or frozen.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

A. Aggregate Base Course: As specified in Section 321123.

2.2 CONCRETE PAVING

A. Performance / Design Criteria:

1. Paving: Design for parking light duty commercial vehicles, movement of trucks up to
30,000 lbs, movement of trucks up to 60,000 lbs ._

B. Form Materials:

1. Form Materials: Conform to ACI 301.

2. Wood or Steel form material, profiled to suit conditions.
3. Joint Filler: ASTM D1751; Asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, 1/4 inch thick.

C. Reinforcement:
1. Deformed Reinforcing: Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, 60 ksi yield grade, deformed billet
bars, uncoated finish.
2. Welded Plain Wire Fabric: ASTM A185/A185M; in coiled rolls; unfinished.
3. Dowels: ASTM A615/A615M; 60 yield strength, plain steel bars; cut to length indicated
on Drawings, square ends with burrs removed; unfinished.
4. Tie Wire: Minimum 16ting Patching Material: Type as recommended by coating
manufacturer.

D. Concrete Materials:

1. Concrete Materials: As specified in Section 033000.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate reinforcing according to CRSI Manual of Practice.

CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2.4 MIXES

A. Concrete Mix - By Performance Criteria:

1. Mix and deliver concrete according to ASTM C94/C94M, Option A.

2. Provide concrete to the following criteria:
a. Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
b. Slump: 3 to 5 inches.
c. Air Entrainment: 4 percent.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 2, Class B.

B. Joint Sealers: Specified in Section 079000.

C. Joint Sealers: ASTM D6690, Type I; hot applied type.

2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Testing and Inspection Services:.

B. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete for review prior to commencement of
Work.

C. Tests on cement, aggregates, and mixes will be performed to ensure conformance with specified
requirements.

D. Test samples according to ASTM C94/C94M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation

examination.

B. Verify compacted subgrade is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads.

1. Proof roll subbase with 30 ton roller in minimum two perpendicular passes to identify
soft spots.
2. Remove soft subbase and replace with compacted fill as specified in Section 312323.

C. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.

CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation

preparation.

B. Moisten substrate to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete.

C. Coat surfaces of manhole and catch basin frames with oil to prevent bond with concrete paving.

D. Notify Architect/Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Base Course:

1. Aggregate Subbase: Install as specified in Section 321123.

B. Forms:

1. Place and secure forms and screeds to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient.
2. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete.

C. Reinforcement:

1. Place reinforcing as indicated on Drawings.

2. Interrupt reinforcing at expansion joints.
3. Place reinforcing to achieve paving and curb alignment as detailed.
4. Provide doweled joints at spacing as detailed on drawings

D. Placing Concrete:

1. Coordinate installation of snow melting components.

2. Place concrete as specified in Section 033000.
3. Ensure reinforcing, inserts, embedded parts, formed joints and dowel baskets are not
disturbed during concrete placement.
4. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined
construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.
5. Place concrete to joint pattern indicated.

E. Joints

1. Place expansion and contraction joints as indicated on plans. Align curb, gutter, and
sidewalk joints.
2. Place joint filler between paving components and building or other appurtenances. Recess
top of filler 1/4 inch for sealant installation.
3. Provide sawn joints as indicated on plan details.
4. Provide keyed joints as indicated.
5. Saw cut contraction joints 3/16 inch wide at an optimum time after finishing. Cut 1/3 into
depth of slab.
6. Seal joints as indicated on Drawings according to Section 079000.

CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

F. Exposed Aggregate:

1. Apply surface retarder where exposed aggregate finish is required.

2. Wash exposed aggregate surface with clean water and scrub with stiff bristle brush
exposing aggregate to match sample panel.

G. Finishing:

1. Paving: Light broom.

2. Sidewalk Paving: Light broom, radius to 1/8 inch radius, and trowel joint edges.
3. Median Barrier: Light broom, radius to 1/8 inch radius, and trowel joint edges.
4. Curbs and Gutters: Light broom.
5. Direction of Texturing: Transverse to paving direction.
6. Inclined Vehicular Ramps: Broomed perpendicular to slope.
7. Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing.

H. Curing and Protection

1. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or
cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
2. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for
period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.

B. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 ft.

C. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for inspecting, testing.

B. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for testing, adjusting,
and balancing.

C. Perform field inspection and testing according to ASTM C94/C94M.

D. Inspect reinforcing placement for size, spacing, location, support.

E. Testing firm will take cylinders and perform slump and air entrainment tests according to ACI
301.

F. Strength Test Samples:

1. Sampling Procedures: ASTM C172.

CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2. Cylinder Molding and Curing Procedures: ASTM C31/C31M, cylinder specimens,

standard cured.
3. Sample concrete and make one set of four cylinders for every 150 cu yds or less of each
class of concrete placed each day and for every 5,000 sf of surface area paving.
4. Make one additional cylinder during cold weather concreting, and field cure.

G. Field Testing:

1. Slump Test Method: ASTM C143/C143M.

2. Air Content Test Method: ASTM C231.
3. Temperature Test Method: ASTM C1064/C1064M.
4. Measure slump and temperature for each compressive strength concrete sample.
5. Measure air content in air entrained concrete for each compressive strength concrete
sample.

H. Cylinder Compressive Strength Testing:

1. Test Method: ASTM C39/C39M.

2. Test Acceptance: Average compressive strength of three consecutive test maximum 500
psi less than specified compressive strength.
3. Test one cylinder at 7 days.
4. Test two cylinders at 28 days.
5. Retain one cylinder for 56 days for testing when requested by Architect/Engineer.
6. Dispose remaining cylinders when testing is not required.

I. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air
temperature, and test samples taken.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished
Work.

B. Immediately after placement, protect paving from premature drying, excessive hot or cold
temperatures, and mechanical injury.

C. Do not permit vehicular] traffic over paving for 7 days minimum after finishing or until 75
percent design strength of concrete has been achieved.

3.7 ATTACHMENTS

A. Concrete Sidewalks and Median Barrier: 3,000 psi 28 day concrete.

B. Parking Area Paving: 4,000 psi 28 day concrete, thick, 6/6 - 6 x 6 inch mesh reinforcing, light
broom finish.

END OF SECTION 321313

CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 8

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 321623 - SIDEWALKS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Concrete paving for sidewalks.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 312213 - Rough Grading: Preparation of Site for paving.

2. Section 312323 - Fill: Compacted subgrade for paving.
3. Section 321123 - Aggregate Base Courses: base course.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials:

1. AASHTO M182 - Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and
Cotton Mats.

B. American Concrete Institute:

1. ACI 304 - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete.

C. ASTM International:

1. ASTM A184/A184M - Standard Specification for Welded Deformed Steel Bar Mats for
Concrete Reinforcement.
2. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement.
3. ASTM A706/A706M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Low-Alloy Steel
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
4. ASTM A767/A767M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement.
5. ASTM A775/A775M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars.
6. ASTM A884/A884M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded
Wire Reinforcement.
7. ASTM A934/A934M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Prefabricated Steel
Reinforcing Bars.
8. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded
Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete.
9. ASTM C31/C31M - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens
in the Field.
10. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
11. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical
Concrete Specimens.

SIDEWALKS 321623 - 1
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

12. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.

13. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete.
14. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
15. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
16. ASTM C172/C172M - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
17. ASTM C173/C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete
by the Volumetric Method.
18. ASTM C231/C231M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete
by the Pressure Method.
19. ASTM C260/C260M - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for
Concrete.
20. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for
Curing Concrete.
21. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
22. ASTM C595/C595M - Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements.
23. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use in Concrete.
24. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
25. ASTM C979/C979M - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored
Concrete.
26. ASTM C989/C989M - Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and
Mortars.
27. ASTM C1017/C1017M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in
Producing Flowing Concrete.
28. ASTM C1064/C1064M - Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed
Hydraulic-Cement Concrete.
29. ASTM C1116/C1116M - Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete.
30. ASTM C1315 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds
Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete.
31. ASTM C1371 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Emittance of Materials Near
Room Temperature Using Portable Emissometers.
32. ASTM C1549 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Solar Reflectance Near
Ambient Temperature Using a Portable Solar Reflectometer.
33. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete
Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).
34. ASTM D1752 - Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled
PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.
35. ASTM D5893/D5893M - Standard Specification for Cold Applied, Single Component,
Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements.
36. ASTM D6690 - Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied, for
Concrete and Asphalt Pavements.
37. ASTM E408 - Standard Test Methods for Total Normal Emittance of Surfaces Using
Inspection-Meter Techniques.
38. ASTM E903 - Standard Test Method for Solar Absorptance, Reflectance, and
Transmittance of Materials Using Integrating Spheres.
39. ASTM E1918 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Solar Reflectance of Horizontal and
Low-Sloped Surfaces in the Field.
40. ASTM E1980 - Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal
and Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces.

SIDEWALKS 321623 - 2
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

B. Product Data:

1. Submit required information regarding concrete materials, joint filler, admixtures, and
curing compounds.
2. Mix Design:

a. Submit concrete mix design for each concrete strength prior to commencement of
Work.
b. Submit separate mix designs if admixtures are required for hot- and cold-weather
concrete Work.
c. Identify mix ingredients and proportions, including admixtures.

3. Identify chloride content of admixtures and whether or not chloride was added during
manufacture.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with

minimum three years' documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum three years'
documented experience.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for
damage.

B. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions.

C. Protection:

1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from
construction operations areas.
2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions.

SIDEWALKS 321623 - 3
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1.7 AMBIENT CONDITIONS

A. Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Requirements for ambient condition
control facilities for product storage and installation.

B. Minimum Conditions: Do not place concrete if base surface temperature is less than 40 deg. F,
or if surface is wet or frozen.

C. Subsequent Conditions: Maintain minimum 50 deg. F, for not less than 72 hours after placing,
and at a temperature above freezing for remainder of curing period.

1.8 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements:

1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATE SUBGRADE

A. As specified in Section 321123 - Aggregate Base Courses.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Forms:

1. Height: Equal to full depth of finished sidewalk.

B. Forms:

1. Material:

a. Wood: Straight and free from warping, twisting, loose knots, splits, or other
defects.

2. Profile: To suit conditions.

3. Joint Filler:

a. Material: Asphalt-impregnated fiberboard or felt.

b. Comply with ASTM D1751.
c. Thickness: 1/4 inch.

C. Reinforcement:

1. Reinforcing Steel and Wire Fabric: As specified in Section 032000 - Concrete

Reinforcing.

SIDEWALKS 321623 - 4
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

2. Deformed Reinforcing:

a. Steel: Comply with ASTM A615/A615M.

b. Yield Grade: 60 ksi.
c. Billet Bars: Deformed.
d. Finish: Uncoated.

3. Welded Plain-Wire Fabric:

a. Comply with ASTM A1064/A1064M.

b. Configuration: Flat sheets.
c. Finish: Uncoated.

4. Dowels:

a. Description: Plain steel bars.

b. Comply with ASTM A615/A615M.
c. Yield Strength: 60 ksi.
d. Length: As indicated on Drawings.
e. Ends: Square, with burrs removed.
f. Finish: Uncoated.

5. Tie Wire:

a. Type: Annealed.
b. Minimum Size: 16 gage.
c. Finish: Uncoated.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Reinforcing:

1. Comply with CRSI Manual of Practice.

B. Hooks:

1. As indicated on Drawings.

2.4 MIXES

A. Concrete:

1. Comply with ASTM C94/C94M, Option A, C.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Curing Compound:

SIDEWALKS 321623 - 5
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1. Comply with ASTM C309.

2. Type: 2.
3. Class: B.

2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for testing, inspection, and analysis.

B. Testing: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation

examination.

B. Verify that compacted subgrade is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads.

C. Verify that gradients and elevations of subgrade are as indicated on Drawings.

D. Verify reinforcing placement for proper size, spacing, location, and support.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation

preparation.

B. Moisten substrate to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Subgrade:

1. As specified in Section 321123 - Aggregate Base Courses.

B. Forms:

1. Place and secure forms and screeds to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient.
2. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete.
3. Clean forms and coat with form oil each time before concrete is placed.
4. Wood Forms: Thoroughly wet with water before concrete is placed.

C. Reinforcement:

1. Place reinforcing at mid-height of paving.

2. Place reinforcing as indicated on Drawings.

SIDEWALKS 321623 - 6
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3. Interrupt reinforcing at expansion joints.

4. Place reinforcing to achieve indicated paving alignment.
5. Provide doweled joints at transverse joints, interruptions of concrete with one end of
dowel set in capped sleeve to allow longitudinal movement.

D. Placing Concrete:

1. Ensure that reinforcing, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed
during concrete placement.
2. Place concrete continuously over full width of panel and between predetermined
construction joints.
3. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.
4. Consolidate concrete by tamping and vibration.
5. Place concrete to pattern as indicated.

E. Finishing:

1. Light broom and trowel edges of joints.

2. Texture Direction: Transverse to paving direction.
3. Ramps: V-joint perpendicular to slope.
4. Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing.
5. Edges and Joints:

a. Edger Radius: 1/8 inch.

b. Spalled Corners and Edges: Clean and fill with mortar mixture and finish.

F. Curing:

1. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for
period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.

2. Membrane Curing:

a. Apply membrane-curing compound uniformly to exposed surface after free water

has disappeared from finished surface and before concrete has dried.
b. Apply compound in two coats, with second coat applied perpendicular to first coat.
c. If concrete has dried, moisten dried surface and apply curing compound as soon as
free water disappears.

G. Backfilling: After curing, backfill, grade, and compact adjacent disturbed area as indicated.

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for tolerances.

B. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

C. Maximum Variation from True Position: ¼ inch.

D. Line and Grade for Forms: 1/8 inch in any 10-foot- long section.

SIDEWALKS 321623 - 7
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for inspecting and testing.

B. Inspection and Testing:

1. Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.

2. Samples:

a. Sampling Procedures: Comply with ASTM C172/C172M.

b. Cylinder Molding and Curing Procedures: Comply with ASTM C31/C31M,
standard cured.
c. Sample concrete and make one set of four cylinders for every 150 cu. yd. or less of
each class of concrete placed each day, and for every 5,000 sq. ft. of surface area
paving.
d. Make one additional cylinder during cold-weather concreting, and field cure.

3. Cylinder Compressive Strength:

a. Comply with ASTM C39/C39M.

b. Acceptance:

1) Average Compressive Strength of Three Consecutive Tests: Maximum 500

psi less than specified compressive strength.
c. Test one cylinder at seven days, and two cylinders at 28 days.
d. Retain one cylinder for 56 days for testing when requested by Architect/Engineer.
e. Dispose of remaining cylinders if testing is not required.

4. Slump, Temperature, and Air Content:

a. Measure for each compressive-strength concrete sample.

b. Slump: Comply with ASTM C143/C143M.
c. Air Content: Comply with ASTM C173/C173M, C231/C231M.
d. Temperature: Comply with ASTM C1064/C1064M.

5. Records:

a. Maintain records of placed concrete items.

b. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature and number of test samples
taken.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished
Work.

B. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold
temperatures, rain and flowing water, and mechanical injury.

SIDEWALKS 321623 - 8
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

C. Do not permit traffic over paving for minimum 7 days after finishing or until 70 percent design
strength of concrete has been achieved.

D. Damaged Concrete:

1. Remove and reconstruct concrete that has been damaged for entire length between
scheduled joints.
2. Refinishing damaged portion is not acceptable.
3. Dispose of damaged portions.

3.7 ATTACHMENTS

A. Concrete Sidewalks: 3000-psi 28-day concrete, 4 inches thick.

END OF SECTION 321623

SIDEWALKS 321623 - 9
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 321723 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Traffic lines and markings.

2. Legends.
3. Paint.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials:

1. AASHTO M247 - Standard Specification for Glass Beads Used in Pavement Markings.

B. ASTM International:

1. ASTM D34 - Standard Guide for Chemical Analysis of White Pigments.

2. ASTM D126 - Standard Test Methods for Analysis of Yellow, Orange, and Green
Pigments Containing Lead Chromate and Chromium Oxide Green.
3. ASTM D562 - Standard Test Method for Consistency of Paints Measuring Krebs Unit
(KU) Viscosity Using a Stormer-Type Viscometer.
4. ASTM D711 - Standard Test Method for No-Pick-Up Time of Traffic Paint.
5. ASTM D713 - Standard Practice for Conducting Road Service Tests on Fluid Traffic
Marking Materials.
6. ASTM D1301 - Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of White Lead Pigments.
7. ASTM D1394 - Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of White Titanium
Pigments.
8. ASTM D1475 - Standard Test Method for Density of Liquid Coatings, Inks, and Related
Products.
9. ASTM D1640/D1640M - Standard Test Methods for Drying, Curing, or Film Formation
of Organic Coatings.
10. ASTM D2202 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Sealants.
11. ASTM D2371 - Standard Test Method for Pigment Content of Solvent-Reducible Paints.
12. ASTM D2621 - Standard Test Method for Infrared Identification of Vehicle Solids From
Solvent-Reducible Paints.
13. ASTM D2743 - Standard Practices for Uniformity of Traffic Paint Vehicle Solids by
Spectroscopy and Gas Chromatography.
14. ASTM D4280 - Standard Specification for Extended Life Type, Nonplowable, Raised
Retroreflective Pavement Markers.
15. ASTM D4505 - Standard Specification for Preformed Retroreflective Pavement Marking
Tape for Extended Service Life.

PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

B. Product Data: Submit paint formulation for each type of paint.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

D. Test and Evaluation Reports: Indicate source and acceptance test results according to AASHTO
M247.

E. Manufacturer Instructions:

1. Submit instructions for application temperatures, eradication requirements, application

rate, line thickness, and application rate.
2. Submit detailed instructions on installation requirements, including storage and handling
procedures.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for
damage.

B. Storage:

1. According to manufacturer instructions.

2. Paint:

a. Invert containers several days prior to use if paint has been stored more than two
months.
b. Minimize exposure to air when transferring paint.
c. Seal drums and tanks when not in use.

C. Protection:

1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from
construction operations areas.
2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions.

1.5 AMBIENT CONDITIONS

A. Do not apply materials if surface and ambient temperatures are outside temperature ranges
required by paint product manufacturer.

B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow if relative humidity is outside range required
by paint manufacturer, or if moisture content of surfaces exceeds that required by paint
manufacturer.

PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

C. Minimum Conditions: Do not apply paint if temperatures are expected to fall below 60 deg. F
within 24 hours after application.

D. Thermoplastic Compound: Do not apply unless pavement surface temperature is minimum 40

deg. F and rising.

E. Maximum VOCs: Do not exceed limit required by State or Environmental Protection Agency.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Furnish three-year manufacturer's warranty for pavement markings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS

A. Performance and Design Criteria:

1. Paint Adhesion: Adhere to road surface, forming smooth continuous film one minute
after application.
2. Paint Drying: Tack free by touch as not to transfer by vehicle tires within two minutes
after application.

B. Paint:

1. Description: Ready mixed, conventional, fast-dry, waterborne traffic paints.

2. Lead-free and nontoxic.
3. Durability Rating: 6 or more, after in place for nine months.
4. Properties:

a. Pigment Percent by Weight: 60, plus or minus 2.

b. Vehicle Percent by Weight: 40, plus or minus 2.
c. Nonvolatile Percent by Weight of Paint: 76.0.
d. Minimum Density: 13.0 lb./gal.
e. Viscosity: 80-95 Kreb Units at 77 deg. F.

5. Grind:

a. Method: Hegeman Gage.

b. Minimum Field-Tested, No-Tracking Time under Ambient Conditions: 20 to 90
seconds.

6. Maximum Dry-Through Time:

a. 125 minutes.
b. Wet Film Thickness: 15 mils at 90 percent relative humidity and 72 deg. F.
c. Comply with ASTM D1640/D1640M.

PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

7. Maximum VOC Content: 1 lb./gal.

2.2 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT

A. Paint Gun:

1. Description: Simultaneously apply parallel lines of indicated width in solid or broken

patterns or various combinations of those patterns.
2. Type: Dual nozzle.

B. Measuring Device: Automatically and continuously measure to nearest foot (tenth of meter)
length of each line placed.

C. Paint Heater: Capable of heating paint to 110 deg. F for fast-dry applications.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for testing, inspection, and analysis.

B. Test and analyze traffic paints according to ASTM D34.

C. Certificate of Compliance:

1. If manufacturer is approved by authorities having jurisdiction, submit certificate of

compliance indicating Work performed at manufacturer's facility conforms to Contract
Documents.
2. Specified shop tests are not required for Work performed by approved manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for application

preparation.

B. Do not apply paint to concrete surfaces until concrete has cured for 28 days.

C. Agitate paint for 1 to 15 minutes prior to application to ensure even distribution of pigment.

D. Maintenance and Protection of Traffic:

1. Provide short-term traffic control as specified in Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities

and Controls.
2. Prevent interference with marking operations and prevent traffic on newly applied
markings before dry.

PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723 - 4

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

E. Surface Preparation.

1. Clean and dry paved surfaces prior to painting.

2. Blow or sweep surface free of dirt, debris, oil, grease, or gasoline.
3. Spot location of final pavement markings, as specified and as indicated on Drawings, by
applying pavement spots 25 feet o.c.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Application Rate:

1. Reflective Markings:

a. Paint: 100 sq. ft./gal.

2. Nonreflective Markings:

a. Paint: 100 sq. ft./gal.

B. Painting:

1. Apply paint pneumatically, using guidelines and templates as necessary to control

application.
2. Manually paint numbers, letters, and symbols.
3. Prevent splattering and overspray when applying markings.
4. Paint Guns: Simultaneously apply paint binder at uniform specified rates.
5. Dispense at ambient temperature.
6. Wet-Film Thickness:

a. 15 mils.
b. Edge Markings: 12 mils.

C. Dimensions and Locations: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Crosswalks, Intersections, Stop Lines and Legends:

1. Use walk-behind stripers, hand spray, or stencil trucks.

2. Do not use hand brushes or rollers.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for tolerances.

B. Maximum Variation from Wet Film Thickness: 1 mil.

C. Maximum Variation from Wet Paint Line Width: Plus or minus 1/8 inch.

D. Paint Guns: Plus or minus 1 mil.

PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723 - 5

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for inspecting and testing.

B. Inspect for incorrect location, insufficient thickness, line width, coverage, retention, uncured or
discolored material, and insufficient bonding.

C. Acceptance:

1. Repair lines and markings which after application and curing do not meet following
criteria:

a. Incorrect location.
b. Insufficient thickness, width, coverage, or retention.
c. Uncured or discolored material.
d. Insufficient bonding.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.

B. Collect and legally dispose of residues from painting operations.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished
Work.

B. Protect painted pavement markings from vehicular and pedestrian traffic until paint is dry and
track free.

C. Unless material is track free at end of paint application convoy, use traffic cones to protect
markings from traffic until track free.

D. If vehicle crosses a marking and tracks it, or if splattering or overspray occurs, eradicate
affected marking and resultant tracking and apply new markings.

E. Follow manufacturer instructions or use minimum of 30 minutes of dry time.

F. Barrier cones are satisfactory protection for materials being dried.

PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723 - 6

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3.7 MAINTENANCE

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance service.

B. Provide service and maintenance of traffic paints for three years from date of Substantial
Completion.

END OF SECTION 321723

PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723 - 7

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 321726 - TACTILE WARNING SURFACING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Tactile warning surfacing and accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's information including characteristics, dimensions, domes,

and special shapes.

B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit detailed instructions on installation requirements, including

storage and handling procedures.

D. Source Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of factory tests and inspections.

E. Field Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor-furnished tests and inspections.

F. Manufacturer Reports:

1. Certify that equipment has been installed according to manufacturer's instructions.

2. Indicate activities on Site, adverse findings, and recommendations.

G. Qualifications Statements:

1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer and installer.

2. Submit manufacturer's approval of installer.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with

minimum three years' documented experience.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store and protect materials according to manufacturer's instructions.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Furnish five-year manufacturer's warranty for tactile warning surfacing.

TACTILE WARNING SURFACING 321726 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TACTILE WARNING SURFACING

A. Description:

1. ADA-compliant tactile warning surfaces for visually impaired pedestrians.

2. Suitable for installation on both asphalt and concrete.

B. Design and Performance Criteria:

1. Loading: Single-wheel HS20-44, according to AASHTO HB-17.

2. Resistant to impacts, wear, freeze-thaw, UV exposure, and stains.
3. Fire Spread: Less than 15 when tested according to ASTM E84.
4. Slip Resistance: 45, according to ASTM E303.
5. Durometer Hardness: A-1, according to ASTM D2240, Type A.
6. Water Absorption:

a. Comply with ASTM D570.

b. Maximum: 0.05 percent.

7. Minimum Strengths:

a. Compressive: 28,900 psi, according to ASTM D695.

b. Flexural: 29,300 psi, according to ASTM D790.
c. Tensile: 11,600 psi, according to ASTM D638.

8. Slip Resistance:

a. Dry: 1.18.
b. Wet: 1.05.
c. Comply with ASTM C1208 (C1208M).

9. Domes:

a. Spacing: 2.35 inches, o.c., measured horizontally and vertically.

b. Size: 0.9-inch base bottom diameter, 0.45-inch top diameter, .02 inches high.

C. Cast-in-Place-Type:

1. Glass-reinforced, thermoset composite.

2. Length and Width: 24 by 24 inches.
3. Depth: 0.7 inches.
4. Color: Yellow.

TACTILE WARNING SURFACING 321726 - 2

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate is level or to correct grade, is smooth, is capable of supporting tactile
warning surface units and imposed loads, and is otherwise ready to receive Work of this
Section.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Maintenance and Protection of Traffic:

1. Provide short-term traffic control as specified in Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities

and Controls.
2. Prevent interference with operations.

B. Surface Preparation:

1. Clean and dry paved surface prior to installing tactile warning surface modules.
2. Blow or sweep surface free of dirt, debris, oil, grease, or gasoline.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install tactile warning surfacing according to manufacturer's instructions.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect for correct location, extent of coverage, and final grade.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean tactile warning surfacing according to manufacturer's instructions.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect tactile warning surfacing from vehicular and pedestrian traffic on newly installed tactile
warning surface modules for period of time as instructed by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 321726

TACTILE WARNING SURFACING 321726 - 3

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 329219 – SEEDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Fertilizing.
2. Seeding.
3. Hydroseeding.
4. Mulching.
5. Maintenance.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Weeds: Vegetative species other than specified species to be established in given area.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Seed mix, fertilizer, mulch.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide seed mixture in containers showing percentage of seed mix, germination percentage,
inert matter percentage, weed percentage, year of production, net weight, date of packaging, and
location of packaging.

B. Perform Work according to Louisiana DOTD, 2016 Edition standards.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver grass seed mixture in sealed containers. Seed in damaged packaging is not acceptable.

B. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, and name of
manufacturer.

1.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintain seeded areas immediately after placement until grass is well established and exhibits
vigorous growing condition.

SEEDING 329219 - 1
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESSORIES

A. Mulching Material: Hemlock species wood cellulose fiber, form, free of growth or germination
inhibiting ingredients.

B. Fertilizer: Commercial grade; recommended for grass; of proportion necessary to eliminate

deficiencies of topsoil to following proportions: Nitrogen 8 percent; phosphoric acid 8 percent;
soluble potash 8 percent.

C. Water: Clean, fresh and free of substances or matter capable of inhibiting vigorous growth of
grass.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify prepared soil base is ready to receive Work of this Section.

3.2 FERTILIZING

A. Apply fertilizer at application rate of 1000 pounds per acre.

B. Apply after smooth raking of topsoil.

C. Do not apply fertilizer at same time or with same machine used to apply seed.

D. Mix fertilizer thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topsoil.

E. Lightly water soil to aid dissipation of fertilizer. Irrigate top level of soil uniformly.

3.3 SEEDING

A. Apply seed at rate Louisiana DOTD Standard, 2016 Edition, evenly in two intersecting
directions. Rake in lightly.

B. Do not seed areas in excess of that which can be mulched on same day.

C. Do not sow immediately following rain, when ground is too dry, or when winds are over 12
mph.

D. Apply water with fine spray immediately after each area has been mulched. Saturate to 4 inches
of soil.

SEEDING 329219 - 2
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3.4 HYDROSEEDING

A. Apply fertilizer, mulch and seeded slurry with hydraulic seeder at rate per LaDOTD Standard
evenly in one pass.

B. After application, apply water with fine spray immediately after each area has been
hydroseeded. Saturate to 4 inches of soil and maintain moisture levels 2 to 4 inches.

3.5 SEED PROTECTION

A. Cover seeded slopes where grade is 4 inches per foot or greater with erosion fabric. Roll fabric
onto slopes without stretching or pulling.

B. Lay fabric smoothly on surface, bury top end of each section in 6 inch deep excavated topsoil
trench. Overlap edges and ends of adjacent rolls minimum 12 inches. Backfill trench and rake
smooth, level with adjacent soil.

C. Secure outside edges and overlaps at 36 inch intervals with stakes.

D. Lightly dress slopes with topsoil to ensure close contact between fabric and soil.

E. At sides of ditches, lay fabric laps in direction of water flow. Lap ends and edges minimum 6
inches.

3.6 MAINTENANCE

A. Water to prevent grass and soil from drying out.

B. Immediately reseed areas showing bare spots.

C. Repair washouts or gullies.

D. Protect seeded areas with warning signs during maintenance period.

END OF SECTION 329219

SEEDING 329219 - 3
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 329223 - SODDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Preparation of subsoil.
2. Placement of topsoil.
3. Fertilization.
4. Sod installation.
5. Maintenance.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 312323 - Fill: Rough grading of Site.

2. Section 329219 - Seeding: Seeding and soil supplements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Weeds: Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard,
Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak,
Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble
Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM International:

1. ASTM C602 - Standard Specification for Agricultural Liming Materials.

B. Turfgrass Producers International:

1. TPI - Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.

B. Coordinate Work of this Section with installation of underground sprinkler system piping and
watering heads.

SODDING 329223 - 1
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

B. Product Data:

1. Submit sod producer's information for sod grass species.

2. Submit manufacturer information for fertilizer, mulch, and other accessories.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

D. Sod Producer's Certificate: Certify that sod grass meets or exceeds specified requirements.

E. Test and Evaluation Reports: Indicate topsoil nutrient and pH levels, with recommended soil
supplements and application rates.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Submit fertilizer types, application frequency, and recommended coverage.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Sod: Ensure root development capable of supporting its own weight without tearing when
suspended vertically by holding upper two corners.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Sod Producer: Company specializing in products as specified in this Section with minimum
three years' documented experience.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and
protecting products.

B. Delivery:

1. Deliver sod on pallets.

2. Do not deliver more sod than can be laid within 24 hours.

C. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for
damage.

D. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions.

SODDING 329223 - 2
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

E. Protection:

1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from
construction operations areas.
2. Protect exposed roots from dehydration.
3. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions.

1.10 AMBIENT CONDITIONS

A. Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Requirements for ambient condition
control facilities for product storage and installation.

B. Minimum Conditions: Do not place sod when temperature is lower than 32 deg. F.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOD

A. Description:

1. Cultivated grass sod with strong fibrous root system, free of stones and burned or bare
spots.
2. Grade: Nursery grown.
3. Type: As indicated in plant schedule on Drawings.
4. Weed Density: No more than five weeds per 1,000 sq. ft.
5. Percentage Grass Type:

a. St. Augustine: 100 percent.

B. Harvesting of Sod:

1. Machine-cut sod and load on pallets according to TPI.

2. Cut sod in area not exceeding 1 sq. yd., with minimum 1/2-inch and maximum 1-inch
topsoil base.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Topsoil:

1. As specified in Section 320513 - Soils for Exterior Improvements.

2. Type: S3.

B. Topsoil:

1. Description: Fertile, agricultural soil typical for locality, capable of sustaining vigorous
plant growth, and taken from drained Site.
2. Free of subsoil, clay, impurities, plants, weeds, and roots.

SODDING 329223 - 3
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

3. pH:

a. Minimum: 5.4.
b. Maximum: 7.0.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fertilizer:

1. Grade: Commercial.
2. Description: As recommended for grass, with 50 percent of elements derived from
organic sources.
3. Proportions: As necessary to eliminate deficiencies of topsoil.

B. Lime:

1. Description: Agricultural limestone containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium

carbonate equivalent.
2. Comply with ASTM C602.
3. Class: T, O.

C. Water: Clean, fresh, and free of substances or matter capable of inhibiting vigorous growth of
grass.

D. Wood Pegs: Softwood, sufficient size and length to anchor sod on slope.

E. Wire Mesh:

1. Description: Interwoven hexagonal plastic mesh.

2. Size: 2 inches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation

examination.

B. Verify that prepared soil base is ready to receive Work of this Section.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Subsoil Preparation:

1. Eliminate uneven areas and low spots.

2. Maintain indicated lines, levels, profiles, and contours.
3. Slopes:

SODDING 329223 - 4
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

a. Make gradual changes in grade.

b. Blend slopes into level areas.

4. Foreign Materials:

a. Remove foreign materials and undesirable plants and their roots.

b. Do not bury foreign materials beneath areas to be sodded.

5. Remove contaminated subsoil.

6. Scarify subsoil to depth of 4 inches where topsoil is to be placed.
7. Repeat cultivation in areas where equipment used for hauling and spreading topsoil has
compacted subsoil.

B. Placing of Topsoil:

1. Spread topsoil to minimum depth of 3 inches over area to be sodded.

2. Place topsoil during dry weather and on dry unfrozen subgrade.
3. Remove vegetable matter and foreign nonorganic material from topsoil while spreading.
4. Grade topsoil to eliminate rough, low, or soft areas, and to ensure positive drainage.
5. Install edging at periphery of sodded areas in straight lines to consistent depth.

C. Fertilizing:

1. Apply lime at application rate recommended by soil analysis.

2. Work lime into top 6 inches of soil.
3. Apply fertilizer at application rate recommended by soil analysis.
4. Apply fertilizer after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to installation of sod.
5. Apply fertilizer no more than 48 hours before laying sod.
6. Mix fertilizer thoroughly into upper 4 inches of topsoil.
7. Lightly water soil to aid dissipation of fertilizer.

D. Laying of Sod:

1. Moisten prepared surface immediately prior to laying sod.

2. Lay sod within 24 hours after harvesting to prevent deterioration.
3. Joints:

a. Lay sod tightly with no open joints visible and no overlapping.

b. Stagger end joints minimum 12 inches.
c. Do not stretch or overlap sod pieces.

4. Lay smooth and align with adjoining grass areas.

5. Place top elevation of sod 1/2 inch below adjoining edging, paving and curbs.
6. Slopes:

a. On slopes 6 in./ft. and steeper, lay sod perpendicular to slope and secure every row
with wooden pegs at maximum 2 feet o.c.
b. If using "big roll," lay sod parallel to slope.
c. Drive pegs flush with soil portion of sod.
d. Prior to placing sod on slopes exceeding 8 in./ft., place wire mesh over topsoil and
securely anchor wire mesh in place with wood pegs sunk firmly into ground.

SODDING 329223 - 5
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

7. Watering:

a. Water sodded areas immediately after installation.

b. Saturate sod to 4 inches of soil.

8. Rolling:

a. After sod and soil have dried, roll sodded areas to bond sod to soil and to remove
minor depressions and irregularities.
b. Roll sodded areas with roller not exceeding 200 lb.
c. Roll before first watering.

3.3 MAINTENANCE

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance service.

B. Maintain sodded areas immediately after placement until grass is well established and exhibits
vigorous growing condition.

C. Water to prevent grass and soil from drying out.

D. Roll surface to remove irregularities.

E. Weed Control:

1. Control growth of weeds by applying herbicides.

2. Remedy damage resulting from improper use of herbicides.

F. Immediately replace sod on areas showing deterioration or bare spots.

G. Protect sodded areas with warning signs during maintenance period.

END OF SECTION 329223

SODDING 329223 - 6
TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

SECTION 334200 - STORMWATER CONVEYANCE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Stormwater drainage piping.

2. Bedding and cover materials.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer information describing pipe.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with

three years' experience.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions.

B. Protection:

1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing them in clean, dry locations remote
from construction operations areas.
2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

A. Reinforced Concrete Arch Piping:

1. Arch Pipe:

a. Comply with ASTM C506A/ASHTO M206.

b. Reinforcement: Mesh.
c. End Connections: Bell and spigot.

2. Joints:

STORMWATER CONVEYANCE 334200 - 1

TBA Studio LDCC WINNSBORO CAMPUS EXPANSION March 2024

a. Comply with ASTM C443.

b. Gaskets: Rubber, compression.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that trench cut and excavation base is ready to receive Work of this Section.

B. Verify that excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Correct over-excavation with coarse aggregate.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Excavation and Bedding:

1. Excavate trench to 4 inches below pipe invert.

2. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of piping to indicated elevations.
3. Maintain optimum moisture content of bedding material to attain required compaction
density.
4. Level fill materials in continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches in depth, and compact to
95 percent maximum density.

B. Piping:
1. Establish elevations and pipe inverts for inlets and outlets as indicated on Drawings.

C. Maximum Variation from Indicated Pipe Slope: .25 inch in 10 feet.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect pipe and aggregate cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in
progress.

END OF SECTION 334200

STORMWATER CONVEYANCE 334200 - 2

 Facility Planning & Control
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ASSESSMENT

TO: FACILITY PLANNING & CONTROL FROM: ________________________________

P.O. Box 94095 ________________________________
Baton Rouge, LA 70804-9095 ________________________________
Design Firm Name and Address

DATE: __________________
PROJECT NAME: ____________________________________________________________________
PROJECT No: _______________________________________________ WBS No: ________________________
SITE CODE: ____________ STATE ID: _____________ CFMS / SRM #: ___________________________
CONTRACTOR: ______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________

ORIGINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT: $ ____________________________________

FINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT: $ ____________________________________

DATE OF ACCEPTANCE:______________________________________________________________
CONTRACT DATE OF COMPLETION:___________________________________________________

NUMBER OF DAYS OVERRUN (As of Acceptance Date) _____________________

LIQUIDATED DAMAGES PER DAY STIPULATED IN CONTRACT $____________________
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ASSESSMENT $____________________

Signed:__________________________________
DESIGNER

Signed:__________________________________
PROJECT MANAGER

c: User Agency

July 2021 LD-1